Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
S A N SKRIT GRAMMA R
FOR B EGIN N ERS ,
DEVANAOARi AND ROMAN LETTERS THROUGHOUT,
F . M A X‘
MULLER, M . A . ,
FO RE IGN MEMB ER O F THE FREN CH I N STITUTE ,
SECOND REV ISED ACCENTUATED .
L O N D O N
LO N GM A N S , GREEN,A N D 00 .
1 8 70.
QBx fo rh
T. C OM B E , M. A .,E . B . G A B D N E R
,~ A N D E . P I C K A R D H A LL
,
P R I NTE R S TO U N I V E R S I TY .
PREFA CE
T O TH E F I R S T E D I T I O N .
THE pr esent grammar , wh ich is chiefly intended fo r beginners , isbelieved to contain all the info rmation that a student o f Sanskr it
is l ikely t o want dur ing the fir st two o r thr ee year s o f his r ead ing .
Rules r efer r ing t o the language o f the V edas have been ent ir ely
ex cluded, fo r it is no t desirable that the difficult ies o f that ancient
dialect shou ld be appr oached by any one wh o has no t ful ly maste r ed
the gr ammar o f the or dinar y Sanskr it such as it was fix ed by Pan ini
and his successor s . A l l al lusions to cognate forms in Gr eek,Lat in,
o r Goth ic, have l ikewise been suppr essed, because, however inter
esting and usefu l t o the advanced student , they ar e apt t o depr ive
the beginner o f that clear and firm gr asp o f the gr ammat ical system
pecu l iar t o the language o f ancient India, which alone can form a
sol id foundat ion fo r the study both o f Sanskr it and o f Compar ative
Philology.
The two pr incipal objects wh ich I have kept in view wh il e com
posing this grammar,have been clearness and cor r ectness . With
r egard to clearness , my chief model has been the gr ammar o f B opp
with r egard t o cor r ectness, the gr ammar o f C olebr ooke . If I may
hope,without pr esumption, to have simpl ified a few o f the intr icacies
o f Sanskr it grammar wh ich wer e but par tially clear ed up by B opp ,
B enfey, Flecch ia, and other s,I can har dly flatter myself to have
r eached,with r egard t o cor r ectness , the hi gh standard o f Co lebr o oke
’
s
gr eat , though unfinished work . I can only say in self-defence, that it
is far mor e difficult to be cor r ect on every m inute point , if o ne endea
y our s to r e-ar range , as I have done , the mater ials collected by Pani ni ,and to adapt them t o the gr ammat ical sy stem cur r ent in Eur ope ,
than if one follows so closely as C olebr ooke , the system o f native
grammar ians, and adopts near ly the whole o f their techni cal te rmi
no l ogy. The grammatical system elabor ated by native gr ammar ians
i s,in itself
,most per fect ; and those who have tested Panini
’
s work,wil l r eadil y admit that ther e is no gr ammar in any languag e that
a 2
iv PREFA C E TO TH E
coul d vi e with the wonder ful mechanism o f h is eight books o f
grammat ical ru les . B ut unr ivalled as that system is,it is no t
sui ted t o the wants o f Engli sh student s,least o f al l t o the wants
o f beg inner s . Wh i le avail ing myse lf ther efor e o f the mater ials
collected in the gr ammar o f Panini and in later works, such as the
Prakr iya—Kaumudi , the S iddhanta-Kaumud
’
i,the Sarasvat
'
i Prakr iya,
and the Madhaviya-dhatu -vritti, I have abstained
,as much as po s
sible, fr om intr oducing any mor e o f the pecul iar system and o f
the terminology o f Indian grammar ians"<
than has al r eady fo und
admittance into o ur S anskri t gr ammar s ; nay,I have fr equently
r ej ected the gr ammatical observat ions suppl ied r eady t o hand
in the ir works,in order no t t o overwhelm the memor y o f the
student with to o many ru les and t o o many e x cept ions . Whether
I have always been successful in dr awing a line between what
is essent ial in Sanskr it grammar and what is no t, I mus t leavet o the judgment o f those wh o enj o y the go o d fo r tune o f beingengaged in the pr actical t eaching o f a language the student s
o f wh ich may be counted no longer by tens , but by hundr edsT.
I only wish it t o be under stood that wher e I have left o ut r ules
The few alter atio ns that I have made in th e usual term ino l o gy have been made
so lely with a view o f facil itating the wo rk o f the learner . Thus instead o f number ing
the ten classes o f verbs, I have cal led each by its fir st verb . This r el ieves the mem o ry
o f much unnecessary tr o uble, as the very name indicates the char acter o f each class
and th o ugh the names may at fir st so und somewhat uncou th,they ar e after al l the o nly
names r ecognized by native gr ammar ians. Knowing fr om my exper ience as an exam iner ,howdifficult it is to r emember th e me r ely numer ical distincti o n between the fir s t
,seco nd ,
o r thi rd pr eter i tes,o r the fir st and second futur es , I have kept as much as p o ssible to the
t er mino lo gywith which classical sch o lar s ar e famil iar,cal ling the tense co r r esponding to
the Gr eek Imper fect, Imper fect ;that co r r esp onding to the Perfect, Redupl icated Per fect;that co r r espo nding to the A o r ist
,A o r ist; and the m o o d co r r espo nding to the O ptative,
O ptat ive . The names o f Per iph r astic Per fect and Per iphr astic Futu r e tel l their own
sto ry; and if I have r etained th e mer ely numer ical distinct io n between the First and
S econd A o r ists,i t was because this distinctio n seemed to be m o r e intel l igible to a
classical sch o lar than th e six o r seven fo rms o f the so -cal led multifo rm Pr eter ite . I f it
wer e p o ssible to make a change in the establi shed grammatical nomenclatur e, I sho u ld
much pr efer to cal l the Fi r st the S eco nd, and the S econd the Fir st A o r ist; the fo rmer
being a seco ndary and compo und, the latter a pr imary and simple tense . B ut Fir s t
and S eco nd A o r ists have become almo st pr o per names, and wil l no t easily yield theirp lace to mer e argument .
”r In the Univer sity o f Leipzig al o ne
,as many as fifty pupils attend every year
the classes o f Pr o fesso r B r o ckhau s in o r der to acquir e a knowledge o f the elements o f
S anskr it,pr evi o us to the study o f C ompar ative Phi lo lo gy under Pr o fesso r Cur tius .
F IRS T ED ITI O N .
o r ex cept ions, contained in o ther gr ammar s , whether nat ive o r
Eur opean,I have do ne so after matur e cons iderat ion
, deliberate ly
pr efer r ing the less comple te t o the mor e complete , but , at the same
t ime,mo r e bewilder ing statement o f the anomal ies o f the Sansk r it
language. Thus,t o ment ion o ne o r two cases
,when giving the
r ules on the employment o f the suffix es ca t and ma t I haveleft o ut the r ule that bases ending in m , though the m be pr ecededby other vowels than a , a lways take va t instead o f ma t. I did so
par tly because ther e ar e very few bases ending in m ,par tly because
,
if a word like kim-vdn should occur,it would be easy to discover
the r eason why her e t o o 1) was pr efer r ed to m ,viz . in order to avoid
the clashing o f two m’
s . A gain ,when g iving the r ules o n the
formation o f denom inat ives I passed over , fo r ver y muchthe same r eason, the pr oh ib it ion given in Pan . I I I . I
,8, 3 , viz . that
bases ending in m ar e no t all owed t o fo rm denominat ives . I t is
t r ue,no doubt
,that the om ission o f such r u les o r ex cept ions may
be said t o involve an actual m isr epr esentation,and that a pupi l
might be m isled t o form such words as kim -mdn and [rim-
yam.
B ut this cannot be avoided in an elementar y gr ammar ; and
the student wh o i s l ikely t o come in contact wi th such r econdite forms
,will no doubt be sufficient ly advanced t o be able to
consul t fo r himself the rules o f Panini and the ex planat ions o f his
commentator s
My own fear is that, in wr it ing an elementar y gr ammar,I have
err ed r ather in giving t o o much than in giving t o o l ittle . I havether efor e in th e table o f contents marked with an ast er isk all
such r ules as may be safely left o ut in a fir st cour se o f S anskr it
gr ammar and I have in differ ent places informed the r eader
whether cer tain por t ions m ight be passed over quickly , o r shou ldbe car eful ly comm itted t o memor y . Her e and ther e
,as fo r instance
in 1 0 3 , a few ex t racts ar e int r oduced fr om Panin i,s imply in
order to give the student a for etaste o f what he may ex pect in
the elabor ate works o f native grammar ians,whil e l ists o f ver bs
l ike those contained in 3 3 2 o r 46 2 ar e given,as ever ybo dy
will see,fo r the sake o f r eference onl y . The somewhat elabo r ate
t r eatment o f the nom inal bases in i and 22,f rom 2 20 to 2 2 6 ,
In the seco nd editio n al l these par agr aphs ar e pr inted in smal ler type .
PREFA C E TO THE
became necessar y , par t ly because in no gr ammar had the di ffer ent
par adigms o f th is class been cor r ect ly given,par t ly because it
was imposs ible t o br ing o ut clear ly the pr inciple o n which the
pecu liar it ies and appar ent ir r egu lar it ies o f these nouns ar e basedwithout enter ing full y into the systemat ic ar r angement o f native
gr ammar ians . O f por tions like this I wi ll no t say indeed, pco /rfia e'
r a t'
7 19 pa'
ihh ou i)mafia-er ect
,but I feel that I may say, t a at}: a final?
aha-a rim ; and I know that those wh o will take th e t r ouble t oex am ine the same mass o f evidence which I have weighed and
ex amined,will be the most lenient in their judgment
,i f her eafter
they shou ld succeed better than I have done , in unr ave lling the
intr icate argumentations o f native scholar s
B ut wh i le acknowledging my obl igations t o the gr eat grammar ians o f India
,it wou ld be ungr ateful wer e I no t to
acknowledge as fully the assistance wh ich I have der ived fr om
the works o f Eur opean scholar s . My fir st acquaintance with the
elements o f Sanskr it was gained fr om B opp’
s gr ammar . Th ose
only wh o know the works o f his pr edecessor s, o f C o lebr ooke
,
Car ey , Wi lkins, and For ster,can appr eciate the advance made
by B opp in ex plaining the di fficul ties,and in light ing up,
i f I
may say so , the dar k lanes and alleys o f the Sanskr it lang uage .
I doubt whether S anskri t sch o lar ship would have flouri shed as
it has,if students had been obl iged t o learn their gr ammar fr om
For ster o r Colebr ooke, and I believe that t o B opp’
s little g r ammar
is due a gr eat por tion o f that success which has attended the study
o f S anskr it l iter atur e in Germany . C olebr ooke , Car ey , W ilkins,and For ster worked independently o f each other . Each der ivedh is informat ion fr om native teacher s and fr om nat ive gr ammar s .
A mong these four scholar s, Wi lkins seem s t o have been the fir st
to compose a Sanskr it grammar , fo r he informs u s that the fir st
pr inted sheet o f h is work was destr oyed by fir e in 1 795 . The
To tho se who have the same faith in the accur ate and never swerving ar gumen
tations o f S anskr it commentato r s, it may be a saving o f t ime to be info rmed that in
the new and very useful edit ion o f the S iddhanta-Kaumudi by S r i Taranatha-tarkava
chaspati ther e ar e two m ispr ints which h o pelessly disturb th e o r der o f the r ules o n the
pr o per declensio n o f no uns in z and 72. O n page 1 36 , l . 7, r ead HIE-
( instead o fm ;
this 1s co r r ected l n the C o r r igenda, and the r ight r eading 1s found 1n the o ld edition.
O n the same page, 1. 1 3 , inser t 7-1 after fa
'
T-IT, o r jo inW W .
F IR S T E D ITI O N . vi i
who le grammar , however , was no t publ ished t ill 1808 . In the
mean t ime For ster had finished h is gr ammar, and had ac tually
del iver ed hi s MS . t o the Council o f the Co l lege o f For t Wil liamin 1 804 . B ut it was no t published til l 1 8 1 0 . The fir st par t o f
C o lebr o oke’
s gr ammar was published in 1 80 5 , and therefore stands
fir st in point o f t ime o f publ icat ion . Unfor tunately it was no t
finished, because the grammar s o f For s ter and Car ey wer e then
in cour se o f publ icat ion, and would, as Colebr ooke imagined, supply
the deficient par t o f his own . Car ey’
s grammar was published in1 80 6 . Among these four publications, which as fir st at tempts at
making the ancient language o f India accessible to Eur opeanscholar s
,deser ve the highest credit
,Co lebr o oke
’
s gr ammar is
f aci le p r incep s . It is der ived at fir st hand fr om the best nat ive
gr ammar s, and evinces a fam iliar ity with the most int r ica te pr ohlems o f Hindu gr ammar ians such as few scholar s have acquir ed
after him . N0 o ne can under stand and appr eciate the mer its o f th is
gr ammar wh o has no t pr eviously acqu ir ed a knowledge o f the gram
mat ical system o f Panini , and it is a gr eat loss t o Sanskr it scholar
ship that so valuable a work shou ld have r emained unfinished.
I owe most , indeed, to Colebr ooke and B opp ,but I have der ived
many usefu l hints fr om other grammar s also . Ther e ar e some po r
t ions o f Wilson’
s grammar which show that he consulted native
grammar ians,and the fact that he possessed the r emaining por t ion
o f C o lebr o oke’
s MS ., gives t o h is li st o f ver bs, with the ex ception
o f the B hfi class , which was publ ished by Colebr ooke , a pecul iarinter est . Pr ofessor B enfey in his large grammar per formed a most
useful task in working up independently the m ater ials supplied by
Panini and B hattoj idikshita and hi s smaller gr ammar s to o , pub
l ished both in German and in Engl ish ,have r ender ed good service
to the cause o f sound scholar sh ip . Ther e ar e besides , the grammar s
o f B oller in German, o f O pper t in Fr ench , o fW estergaa rd in.
D anish,
o f Flecchia in Ital ian, each supplying someth ing that coul d no t be
found elsewher e, and containing suggestions, many o f wh ich have
pr oved useful t o the wr iter o f the pr esent grammar .
B ut wh i le thus r ender ing full ju stice t o the honest labours o f
my pr edecessor s , I am bound t o say, at the same t ime, that with
S ee W ilso n’
s S anscrit and Engl ish D icti o nary, fir st editio n, pr eface, p . x lv.
viii PREFA CE TO THE
r egar d to doubt fu l o r difficul t forms, o f which ther e ar e many inthe grammar o f the S anskr it language ,
no t one o f them can be
appealed to as an ult imate author ity . Ever y gr ammar contains ,as
‘
is wel l known,a number o f forms which occur bu t r ar ely
,if ever
,
in the li terar y language . It i s necessar y, however,fo r the sake o f
systematic completeness , t o give these forms and if they ar e t o be
given at all,they must be given o n competent author ity . N ow it
might be supposed that a mer e r efer ence t o any o f the numer ous
gr ammar s al r eady publ ished would be sufficient fo r this purpose ,and that the l ists o f ir r egular o r unusual forms m igh t safely be
copied fr om their pages . B ut th is is by no means the case . Even
with r egar d to r egular form s,whoever should t rust impl icitly in the
cor r ectness o f any o f the gr ammar s, hither to publ ished ,would never
be cer tain o f having the r ight form . I do no t say this l ightly , o rwithou t being ab le to pr oduce pr oofs . Wh en I began t o r evise mymanuscr ipt grammar whi ch I had compos ed fo r my own u se many
year s ago , and when on po ints o n which I fel t doubtful , I co n
su lted other gr ammar s,I soon discover ed either that , with a str ange
kind o f sequacity ,they all r epeated the same m istake , o r that they
var ied widely fr om each other,withou t ass igning any r eason o r
author ity . I need no t say that the gr ammar s which we possessdiffer ver y much in the degr ee o f thei r t rustwor thiness ; bu t with
the ex cept ion o f the fir st volume o f C olebrooke and o f Pr ofessor
B enfey’
s larger Sanskr it gr ammar,it woul d be impo ss ible t o appeal
t o any o f my pr edecessor s as an author ity on doubtful point s .
For ster and Car ey , who evidently depend almost ent ir e ly on
mater ials supplied t o them by nat ive assistants , give fr equently
the most difficult fo rms with per fect accur acy , while they go wi ldly
wr ong immediately after , without, i t wo u ld seem ,any power o f
co nt r ol ling their author i ties . The fr equent inaccur acies in the
gr ammar s o f Wilkins and Wil son have been po inted o ut by
other s ; and however usefu l these works may have been fo r
pr act ical purposes, they wer e never intended as author it ies on
contested points o f S anskr it gr ammar .
N othing r emained in fact , in or der t o ar r ive at any sat isfactor y
r esult , but t o co l late the whole o f my gr ammar, with r egar d no t
only t o the ir r egular but likewise to the r egu lar form s, with Panini
and other native gr ammar ians, and t o supply fo r each doubtful case ,
F IR S T E D ITIO N . ix
and fo r r ul es that might seem to differ fr om those o f any o f mypr edecessor s, a r efer ence to Panini o r to other native author ities .
This I have done , and in so doing I had to r e -wr ite near ly thewhole o f my grammar but though the t ime and t r ouble ex pendedon this work have been cons iderable , I believe that they have no t
been bestowed in vain . I only r egret that I did no t give these
author itative r efer ences thr oughout the whole o f my work*, because ,
even wher e ther e cannot be any differ ence o f opinion, some o f my
reader s might thus have been saved the time and tr ouble o f
looking thr ough Panini to find the Sutr as that bear on everyform o f the Sanskr it language .
B y this pr ocess wh ich I have adopted,I believe that on many
points a mor e sett led and author itat ive char acter has been impar tedto the gr ammar o f S anskr it than it possessed befor e ; but I do by
no means pr etend t o have ar r ived on al l points at a clear and
defini te view o f the meaning o f Panini and his su ccessor s . The
gr ammatical system o f Hindu gr ammar ians is so pecul iar , that rules
which we shou ld gr oup together , ar e scat te r ed about in di ffer ent
par ts o f their manual s . We may have the general rule in the last ,and the ex ceptions in the fir st book, and even then we ar e by no
means cer tain that ex ceptions to these ex cept ions may no t occur
somewher e else . I shal l give but one instance . Ther e is a r oo t
mi; j dgr i , wh ich form s its A or ist by adding 361 2197101771 , i; £1 i t.
Her e the simplest r ule would be that final sq 77: befo re {it i sham
becomes g r (Pan . V I . 1,
Th is,however , is pr evented by another
rul e wh ich r equi r es that final a {mi shou ld take Guna befor e i st
(Pan. V I I . 3 , This wou ld give us wm fifl aj dga r — isham. B ut
now comes anoth er general r ul e (Pan. V I I . 2,1) wh ich pr escr ibes
Vriddhi o f final vowels befor e {ii isham,i . e . wmmfni aj dgdfi sham .
Against this change , however , a new ru le is cited (Pan. V II . 3 ,
and this secur es fo r 31111j dgr i a special ex cept ion fr om Vriddhi , and‘
leaves its base again as mur j dgar . A s soon as the bas e has been
changed to smrgj dga r , it falls under a new r ule (Pap . V I I . 2,
and
is forced to take Vriddhi , until th is rule is again nu llified by P511. V II .
2, 4, which does no t al low Vriddhi in an A or ist that takes interme
diate Q i , likem mfni aj dgar isham . Ther e is an ex ception,however ,
They have been given in the seco nd edi tio n.
b
PREFA C E TO TH E
to,this r ul e also
,- fo r bases with shor t a a
,beginning and ending
.
with a consonant, may optionally take V riddhi (Pan . V II . 2,
This
Opt ion i s afterwards r estr icted, and r oots with short i s a , beginningwith a consonant and ending in g r , l ikem j dga
fr,have no option
left , but ar e r est r icted afr esh t o V riddhi (Pan . V I I . 2 , However ,even this is no t yet the final r esul t . O ur base “
51mgj dga r is after
all no t t o take V riddh i , and hence a new Special ru le (Pan . V II . 2, 5)
settles the po inti
by gr ant ing t o an;j dgr i a special ex cept ion fr om
V r iddhi, and ther eby estab l ish ing its Guna . No wonder that these
manifold changes and chances in the format ion o f the Fir st A or ist o f3'
a j dgr i should have inspi r ed a gr ammar ian, wh o celebr ates them
in the fol lowing couplet
gun i fsfi'
ufi 3k : trfirfiwfi Peasant
afi fififitfisafi 111151511: W ith war 11
Guna, Vri ddhi , Guna, V r iddhi,pr ohibition
,option
,again V riddhi
and then ex cept ion,these , with the change o f r i into a semivowel
in the fir st instance, ar e the n ine r esul ts .
”
A nother d ifficu lty cons ists in the want o f cr it ical accur acy inthe editions which we possess o f Panini , the S iddhanta-Kaumudi ,
the Laghu-Kaumudi,the Sar asvati , and V o padeva . Far be it fr om
me t o wish t o det ract fr om the m er it s o f native editor s,l ike
D haranidhar a,Kasinatha
,Taranatha
,stil l less from those o f
Pr ofessor B o eht l ingk,wh o publ ished his tex t and notes near ly
th ir ty year s ago , when few o f us wer e able t o r ead a single line o f
Panini . B ut dur ing those thir ty year s consider able pr ogr ess has
been made in unr avell ing the myster ies o f the grammatical l iteratur e
o f India. The commentar y o f Sayana to the Rig—veda has sh own us
h ow pr act ical ly to apply the rules o f Panini and the tr ans lat ion o f
the Laghu-Kaumudi by the late D r . B allantyne has enabled evenbeginner s t o find their way thr ough the labyr inth o f nat ive gr ammar .
The t ime has come,I believe
,fo r new and cr it ical editions o f Panini
and his commentator s . A few instances may suffice to show the
insecur ity o f o ur or dinar y editions . The commentar y to Pan . V II .
as well as the Sar asvat i 11 . 2 5 , 1 , gives the B enedict ive A tmanepada
Emi ts war tskt‘shta and W T? star ishishta ; yet a r efer ence t o Pan . V II .
2 , 39 and 40 ,shows that these forms ar e impossible . A gain,
i f
Panini (V 111 . is r ight- and h ow c ould the Infalli bl e be wr ong
F IRS T E D ITI O N . x i
in using m isfit agr agdmz’
ni with a dental n in the las t syllab le ,it is clear that he ex tends the pr ohibit ion given in VI I I . 4, 34,
with r egard t o Upasargas , t o other compounds . It is useless to
inquir e whether in do ing so°
he was r ight o r wr ong, fo r it is an ar ticle
o f faith with ever y Hindu grammar ian that whatever word is usedby Panini in his Sutras , is co ip so cor r ect . Otherwise
, the ru les
affecting compounds with Upasargas ar e by no means identica l with
those that affect ord inar y compounds ; and though it may be ri ght to
argue a f o r ti om'
fr om W p r agdm ini t o W agr agdmini , it
would no t be r igh t t o argue fr om mama agr aydna to 1111171 197 aydna ,
this being necessar i ly mump r aydna . B ut assum ing wmfirfa agr a
gdmini t o be cor r ect, it is quite clear that the compounds m msvar gakdminau, qw fnufi vr zshagcimiaau, zfim rfinha f
r ikdmdni,and
{fa-rimha r i/qdmez
za, given in the commentar y to VI I I . 4, 1 3 , ar e al l
wr ong,though most o f them occur no t only in the pr inted ed it ions
o f Panini and the S iddhanta-Kaumudi , but may be t r aced back t o
the MSS . o f the Pr akr iya-Kaumudi , the sour ce, though by no means
the model , o f the S iddhanta-Kaumudi . I was glad t o learn fr om
my fr iend Pr ofessor Go lds tiicker , who is pr epar ing an edi tion o f the
Kasika-V ritt i , and whom I consul ted on these forms,that the MS S .
o fvamana wh ich he possesses, car efull y avoid these fau lty ex amples
to Pan . V I I I . 4, 1 3 .
A fter these ex p lanations I need hardl y add that I am no t so san
guine as t o suppose that I coul d have escaped scot fr eewher e so many
men o f super ior knowledge and talent have fail ed t o do so . A l l I can
say is , that I shal l be tr ul y thankful t o any scholar wh o will take
the tr oub le t o point o ut any m istakes int o which I may have fallen ;and I hope that I shal l never so far forget the r egard due t o t ruth
as to attempt t o r epr esent simple cor r ections, touch ing the declension
o f nouns o r the conjugat ion o f ver bs, as mat ter s o f opini on, o r so far
lower the char acter o f t rue scholar shi p as t o appeal , o n such mat ter s,
fr om the ver dict o f the few to the opinion o f the many .
Hear ing fr om my fr iend Pr ofessor B uhler that he had finished
a Sanskr it Syntax ,based on the works o f Panini and other native
gr ammar ians, whi ch wi ll soon be published, I gladly omi tted that
por tion o f my grammar . The rules on the der ivat ion o f nouns, bymeans o f Krit , Unadi , and Taddhita suffix es , do no t pr oper ly belongt o the spher e o f an elementar y gr ammar . If t ime and heal th perm it ,
b 2
x i i PREFA CE TO THE FIRST ED ITIO N .
I hope to publ ish her eafter , as a separ ate tr eat ise, the chapter o f
the Pr akri ya-Kaumudi bear ing o n this subj ect .
In the lis t o f ver bs which I have given as an A ppendix ,
pp. 244— 285, I have ch iefly fo llowed the Pr akr iya
-Kaumudi and
the Sarasvati . These grammar s do no t conjugate ever y ver b that
occur s in the D hatupatha, but those only that ser ve t o il lustr ate
cer tain gr ammat ical r ul es . N o r do they adopt , l ike th e Siddhanta
Kaumudi, the order o f the ver bs as given in Panini
’
s D hatupAtha,
but they gr oup the ver bs o f each class according t o their voices ,t r eating together those that take the terminat ions o f the Parasmai
pada, those that take the terminat ions o f the A tmanepada, and,
lastly, those that admit o f both voices . In each o f these subdi -e
visions,again,
the single ver bs ar e so ar r anged as best t o i l lust r ate
cer tain gr ammat ical r ules . In making a new selection amongthe ver bs selected by Ramachandra and A nubhfitisvar fipacharya,
I have given a pr efer ence to those wh ich occur mor e fr equent lyin Sanskr it liter atur e
,and t o those wh ich illustr ate some points
o f gr ammar o f pecu l iar inter est to the student. In thi s manner
I hope that the A ppendix will serve two pu rposes : it wil l no t
only help the student, when doubtful as to the ex act forms
o f certain ver bs, but it wil l likewise serve as a usefu l pr act ical
ex er cise '
to those who , taking each ver b in turn, will t ry to
account fo r the ex act form s o f its per sons, moods, and tenses by a
r efer ence t o the rules o f this gr ammar . In some cases r efer ences
have been added t o guide the student , inl
o ther s he has to find byhimself the pr oper war r anty fo r each par t icul ar form .
My kind fr iends Pr ofessor C owel l and Pr ofessor Kielhorn haver evised some o f the pr oof—sheets o f my grammar , fo r wh ich I beg to
ex pr ess t o them my sincer e thanks .
F . MA X MULLER .
PA RI S,
5th A pr i l, 1 866 .
PREFA CE
T O TH E S E C O N D E D I T I O N .
THE pr incipal al terat ions in the new edition o fmy S anskr it gr ammarconsist in a number o f addi tional r efer ences t o Panini , in al l cas es
wher e an appeal t o h is author ity seemed l ikely t o be useful , and in
the intr oduct ion o f the marks o f the accent. I have also been able
to r emove a number o f m istakes and mispr ints wh ich , in spite o f al l
the car e I had taken, had been over looked in the fir st edit ion. Most
o f these I had cor r ected in the German trans lat ion o f my gr ammar,
publ ished at Leipzig in 1 868 some mor e have now been cor r ected.
I fee l most gr ateful t o sever al o f my r eviewer s fo r having pointedout these over sight s, and most o f all to Pandi t Rajaramaéast r i ,whose l ist o f notes and quer ies t o my gr ammar has been o f the
gr eatest value t o me . It seems almost hopeless fo r a Eur opean
scholar t o acquir e that fam il iar ity with the int r icate system of
Panini whi ch the Pandits o f the o ld school in India stil l possess ;and although some o f their r efinements in the inter pr etation o f
Panini’
s r ules may seem t o o subtle, yet ther e can be no doubt that
these living guides ar e invaluable to us in ex plor ing the gigant ic
labyr inth o f ancient Sanskr it gr ammar .
Ther e is,however , one di fficu lty which we have t o contend with ,
and which does no t ex ist fo r them . They keep true thr oughout toone system , the system o f Panini we have to t ransfer the facts o f
that system int o o ur own system o f gr ammar . W hat accidents ar e
likely t o happen dur ing th is pr ocess I shall t ry to il lustrate by
one instance . Rajaramaéastr i objects t o the form gagpunsu as the
locat ive plural o f W pumdn. Fr om his point o f view, he is per fectly
r ight in hi s object ion,fo r accor ding t o Panini the locative plural has
An u svar a, gigpamsu . B ut in o ur own S anskr it grammar s we fir st
have a general r ule that q s is changed to it sh after any vowel
ex cept a and an cf, in spite o f interveni ng A nusvar a (see
and it has even been maintained that ther e is some kind o f
physio logical r eason fo r such a change . If then,after having laid
PREFA CE TO THE SECON D ED ITIO N .
down this r ul e, we yet wr ite 13g pamsu, we simply comm it a gr am
matical blunder ; and I bel ieve ther e is no S anskr it gr ammar , ex cept
Co lebr o oke’
s, in wh ich that b lunder has no t been committed. In
order to avoid it,I wr ote 311;punsu, thus , by the r etent ion o f the
dental 72,making it gr ammaticall y and physically possible fo r
the as t o r emain unchanged. It may be obj ected that on the same
gr ound I ought to have wr itten Instr . gm punsd, Gen. gm: punsalt,&c. ; but in these cases the as is r adi cal , and wou ld ther efor e no t be
l iab le to be changed into it sh after a vowel and Anusvara (Pfin . V II I .
3 , Pr ofessor W eber had evident ly over looked these simple
rul es , o r he would have been less forward in blaming D r . Kel ler
fo r having followed my ex ample in wr it ing punsu, instead o f
pmhsu . In Panini’
s gr ammar (as may be seen fr om my note
appended t o 3)1 0 0)the rule on the change o f as into 11sh is so car e
fully worded that i t just ex cludes the case o f Hgpamsu, although the
g su o f the l o o . plur . is pr eceded by an A nu svar a . I have now, by
making in my second edit ion the same r eservat ion in the gener al
rul e , been able to conform to Panini’s author ity, and have wr it ten
figpamsu, instead o f gagpunsu , though even thus the fact r emains
that if the do t i s r eal ly meant fo r A nusvfima, and if the g su is the
t erminat ion o f the locative p lur al , the a 3 woul d be sounded as
tr sh, according to the general tendency o f the ancient S anskri t
pr onunciat ion.
I have ment ioned this one instance in or der t o show the pecul iardifficu lt ies which the wr iter o f a Sanskr it gr ammar has t o contendwith in t rying t o combine the technical r ul es o f Panini with the
mor e r ational pr inciples o f Eur opean gr ammar and I hope it may
convince my r eader s , and perhaps even Pr ofessor Weber , that wher e
I have deviated fr om the ordinar y r ules o f o ur Eur opean gr ammar s ,
o r wher e I seem t o have placed mysel f at var iance with some o f the
nat ive author it ies, I have no t done so without having car efu l lyweighed the advantages o f the one against those o f the othersystem .
F . MA X MULLER.
PA RK S EN D, O XFORD ,
A ugust, 1 870
TA B LE O F C O N TE N TS .
PA GECHA PTER I .
— TH E A LPHA B ET.
The D evanagar i letter s
1 . The D evanagar i alphabet2 . D ir ection o f S anskr it alphabet3 . How t o wr ite the letter s
4 . S ounds r epr esented by the D evanéigar i alphabet 4
5 . N umber o f letter s 5
6 . The letter if 5
7. Jihvfimfiliya and Upadhmfiniya 5
8. S igns o f nasals and their substi
tute
9. The thr ee nasal sem ivowels
C onso nants witho ut co r r espond
ing nasals
1 1 . A nu'
svar a befo r e 55, 371, s, h
N ames o f letter s
1 3 . Vowel signs, initial, medial , andfinal 7
Consonants fo ll owed by vowels 7
1 52 Virama 7
1 6 . C ombinati on o f consonants 7
The sign fo r r 8
1 8. The Virama used as a sto p-gap 8
1 9: The signs fo r a pause 8
20 . The A vagr aha. List o f com
p ound co nsonants
2 1;Numer ical figur es
Rules o f pr onunciation
CHAPTER II .— RULES O F S A N DH I
O bject and u se o f Sandhi
24. D istinctio n between Externaland Internal Sandhi
25 . C lassificatio n o f vowels, l o ng,
sh o rt , pr o tr acted
PA GE§ 2 6 . Mo no phtho ngs and diphtho ngs 12
27. N asal ized vowels 12
28. Light and heavy vowels 13
29. A cute, gr ave, and cir cumflex ed
vowels
Guna and Vriddh i3 1 . Guna o f d , d
3 2 . C ombination o f vowels at the
end and beginning o f wo rds .
N o hiatus 1 3
3 3 . Vowels meeting the same vowels 13
Vowels a and (2,fo l lowed by
d iffer ent vowels
35 . Vowels d and 6,fo llowed by
diph th ongs;
36 . V owels z,u,r z
,fo ll owed by dis
simi lar vowels
37. Vowels e and 0,fo llowed by any
vowel except a38. Vowels mi and am
,fo l l owed by
any vowels 16
39 . Tr eatment o f final y and v 16
40 . The h iatus o ccasio ned by S andhi 1 7
4 1 . Vowels e and 0 befo r e d 1 7
42 . Unchangeable o r Pr agrihya
vowels
43 . Ir r egular S andhi ; pr epo si tio nsending m d o r 6
,fo l lowed by
e o r 0
44. Pr epo sitio ns ending in d o r (2,
fo l lowed by r i 18
y, 45 . The 0 o f o shtha lz and o tuli 18
a» 46 . Ir r egular compo unds 19
3k 47. The final 0 o f indecl inable wo rds 19
at 48. Mo no syl labic indecl inable wo r ds 19
as 49. S andhi o f the par ticle d 19
x vi TA B LE O F CO N TENTS .
Par t icles unaffected by S andh i
Pr o tr acted vowels unaffected by
S andhi
Table sh owing the combination
o f final with initial vowels
C ombinatio n o f final and initial
co nso nants
The eleven final consonants
N o wo r d ends in two co nsonants
C lassificatio n o f consonants,ao
co r ding to their placeC lassificati on o f consonants, ac
co rding t o their qual ity, i . e .
contact, appr o ach , o peningS ur d and sonant consonants
A sp i r ated and unaspirated co nso nants
Changes o f place, and changes
o f quality
Changes o f place afl'
ect D entals,
A nusvar a, and VisargaFinal t befo r e Palatals ch, chh,
j , j h, 72, r
Final 77. befo r e j , jh, 77 , s’
F inal t befo r e 1, 1h, 4, db, 77.
(no t sh)F inal 77 befo r e (1, db, 77. (no t sh)Changes o f qual ity
Final k, ,t,t, p befo r e nasals
Final 10, 7, t, 19 befo r e maya. o r
matr a
Initial h.
after final k, ,t,t, 1)
F inal 15 befo r e l
F inal 77. befo r e 1
Final 77,
77. after a sh o r t vowel
Final 77. befo r e the fir sts and
seconds
F inal 77 and 77 befo r e é, sh, 8
Final 77. befo r e s’
o r s (no t sh)Final
,t befo r e 3
A nusvfira and final m
M i n pau sa, and befo r e conso
nants
Final m befo r e km,by, kl , l w
S am befo r e kr i , safizskri
S am befo r e My,samr djVisarga and final 3 o r r
PA GE19
21
21
22
24
25
25
26
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
29
29
30
30
30
3 1
3 1
83 .
1 0 2 .
at» 1 0 3 .
a 1 04.
4, 1 1 1 .
PA GEThe o nlyfinal sibilant inpausd,
Visarga,and itsmo difications
Visarga befo r e a sonant letter
changed to and exceptionsFinal r adical 7'
Final 7' befo r e initial 7'
Pr onouns sah and eshah, syah
B hohExceptions incomp o undwo r dsN o uns ending in r adical 7'
Initial chh and medial chh
Initial s’
changeable to chh
F inal h, 9h, dh, dh, bh, th r ow
ing their asp ir atio n back on
initial 9, d, d, 6.
Table sh owing the combina
tio n o f final with init ial con
sonants
N et ti , o r change o f 77. into 77,
and 8 into sh
Change o f 77. into 73.
Tr ipno ti and kshubhnd ti
Table
Change o f 77. into 77. in a com
po und
O ptio nal changes o f 77. into 77. inthe pr epo sitio n 7775
Change o f 8 into sh
Change o f 3 into sh in the r e
dupl icative syl lable
Changeo f 3 into sh after pr e
p o sitionsExtracts fr om Panini o n cer
tain changes o f 8 into sh
Change o f s into sh in com
po undsChange o f dh into dh
RULE S o r IN TERN A L S A N DH IFinal vowel s . N o hiatus
Final d and (2, fo llowed by
vowels
Verbal bases in dFinal i , f, u , 72, r i changed to
y : ”7r ; final a
)u , 727 ”3fl
changed to iy, i r
Final 773, befo r e consonants,
changed to 717“o r 727'
3 1
32
3 3
34
34
34
3 4
3 6
36
3 7
50
5 0
5 1
5 1
xvi ii TA B LE O F CO N TEN TS .
B ases in s B . bases ending in
r adical s ; p indagm s,3 771773 ,
su tus
P ipazhi s
1f67'
s,saj a s ; l ist o f bases in s
t as, was
B ases ending in 5, sh, chh,hsh,h
1 . D OS, dr is’
,317775
2 . N as’
3 . V i s’
4 . D hr’ish
5 . D vi sh
6 . Pvdchh
7 Tahsh
8. Lik, guh
9. D uh,ushnih
1 0 . D r uh,muh
,snih, snah
1 1 . N ah
d sdh
Uhthasfds
P r as’
am
I . 2 . N ouns wi th changeable
bases ; A . nouns with two
bases,adat
Prach
B . N o uns with thr ee bases,
pva tyach
B ases in a t and aunt; ada t
The nasal in the nom . and acc.
dual o f neuter s,and in the
feminine base
at 1 84. The nasal in par ticiples o f r e
duplicated verbsB r iha t
, pri sha t
Maha t
B ases in ma t and va t
B hava t,Your H ono ur
A r vat and a7'
van
B ases in cm,man
,van; 7 dj an,
nama/n
B r ahman, d ivan ye 2 26 . C ompo unds ending in mono
Feminines o f bases O f nouns in syl labic femini ne bases in 73
an,-va77, man and s7ct
PA GEO ptio nal feminine compo unds 88
>k 1 95 . Pa thin, r ibhuhshin ,
ma thin 89
A ha/77. 89
as 1 97. A han at the end o f compo unds 90
1 98. A han at the end o f compounds 90
1 99. 90
at 20 0 . Maghavan 90
at 2 0 1 . Pd shan,aryaman 90
se 20 2 . H em 91
20 3 . B ases in in,dhanin 91
204 . Par t iciples in vas 92
2 0 5 . Par t iciples in ivas 92
2 0 6 . B ases in tyas, ga/rfiyas 93
at 20 7. Miscel laneo us nouns with
changeable bases, pad
at 208. t
20 9. 76t
at 2 1 0 . A naduh
2 1 1 . Ap
a, 2 1 2 .
ae 2 1 3 . D iv,dyu
ae 2 1 4. A sa/n and o ther Metaplas ta
2 1 5 . I I . B ases ending in vowel s,
subdivided
2 1 6 , I I . 1 B ases ending in any vowel
ex cept 677
2 1 7. B ases in a7. and
2 1 8. B ases in o
at 2 1 9. D yo
as 2 20 . B ases in 2 and 72
1 . Monosyl labic bases in 2 and
72,being bo th masc. and fem.
A . B y themselves ; dht‘
,272 98
at 2 2 1 . B . A t the end of comp o unds 98
at 2 2 2 . 2 . Po lysyllabic bases in 2and 72,
being bo th masc. and fem . 100
as 2 23 . The five ful ler feminine term i
nat ions
2 24 . 1 . Mono syl labic bases in f. and.
72, being feminine o nly, dhi ,
bh72
2 2 5 . 2 . Po lysyllabic bases in and
72,being feminine o nly, nad
‘i,
TA B LE O F CO NTEN TS . x ix:
PA GE PA GEC ompounds ending in p o lysyllabic feminine bases in 7
‘
and 72,bahus‘r eyasi
2 28. 7327 2
2 29. 4 75877 7
2 30 . B ases in 7°
and 77,masc. fem . neut .
23 1 . Ka ti
2 3 2 . S akhi
2 33 . Pa ti
2 34. A kshi,asthi
,dadhi
,sahthv
'
2 3 5 . B ases in masc. fem . neut . ,
nap ir i, 17737773
2 36 . Kvo shtu
2 37.
2 38. I I . 2 . B ases ending in a and d,
kantah, td, tam
2 39 . B ases in 77, masc. and fem
vi s'
va47d
240 . H dhd
CHA PTER IV .
—A D JE0T1V E S .
§ 24 1 . D eclensio n O f adjectives 1 1 6
242 . Fo rmatio n o f fem inine base 1 1 7
2 43 . 1077777777, fem . pr iya 1 1 7
at 2 44. P dchahah, pachiha 1 1 7
2 45 . Feminines fo rmed by 7‘
1 1 7
at 246 . Except io nal feminines in 2 1 1 7
at 247 . I r r egular fem inines 1 1 7
at 248. Fo rmation o f feminine sub
stant ives 1 18
249 . D egr ees o f compar ison 1 18
2 50 . Tar a and ta/ma,how added 1 18
25 1 . i yas and i shtha , h ow added 1 18
25 2 . Exceptional compar atives andsuper latives
CHA PTER V .— N UMERA LS .
§ 2 53 . Car dinals and declensio n o f
car dinals,aha
2 54 . D v7'
2 55 . Tr i,ti sg
'i
2 56 . Oha tur , cha tasri
2 57. Panchan,shash
,ashtan
at 2 58. C o nstructio n o f car dinals
2 59 . O r dinals
2 60 . Numer ical adverbs and o ther
der ivatives
CHA PTER V I .—PRO N OUN S .
§ 26 1 . Per so nal pr o no uns 127
2 6 2 . S ah, 8d , tat 128
2 6 3 . S yah, syd, tyat 128
2 64 . Po ssess ive pr o no uns 128
2 65 . Reflex ive pr o no uns, svayam 129
2 6 6 . Arman 129
2 6 7. S vab, sva, sva/m 129
2 68. D emo nstr at ivepr ono uns,eshah,
eshd,eta t 129
2 69. A yam, 7'
yam,7da/m. 129
2 70 . Enam,endm
,enat 130
2 7 1 . A sau,asaxu
,
’
adah 1 30
2 72 . Yah, yd , ya t 13 1
2 73. Kah, hdflcim 1 3 1
2 74. Pr o no uns mo dified by ah: 1 3 1
2 75 . C ompo und 132
2 76 . Tdva t &c 1 32
2 77. 1 32
2 78. Pr o nominal adjectives, sa rva ,
vis'
va,&c. 1 3 3
2 79. Anyah, anyd, wnyat 1 34
280 . Ubhan,77t
,ahhs 1 34
28 1 . Ubhayah, yi , yam 1 34
282 . P 727va and its o pti onal fo rm s 1 34
283 . P r a thama and its o pt ionalnominative plural 1 34
284. D vi tiya and i ts o ptio nal fo rms 1 3 5
285 . A dverbial declension 135
CHAPTER V II .— C O N JUGA TI O N .
286 . A ctive and passive 1 3 7
2 87 . Parasmaipada and Atmanepada 1 3 7
288. Par asmaipada and Atmanepada
in der ivat ive verbs 1 38
289. Passive 1 38
290 . The th ir teen tenses and mo o ds 138
29 1 . S ignificatio n o f tenses and
m o o ds
292 . N umbers and per sons
CHAPTER V III .— T11E TEN CLA S S ES .
§ 293 . S pecial and gener al tenses, inthe ten classes
2 94. S pecial o r m o dified, gener al o r
unmo d ified tenses
2 95 . D ivisio n o f verbal bases
0 2
x x TA B LE O F CO N TEN TS .
PA GE§ 296 . I . Fir st division ; B hfi, Tud,
D iv, Chur classes
297. II . S eco nd division, and sub
divisions
2 98. H a . Su, Tan,Kr i classes 143
299. 11 6 . A d, Hu,Rudh classes 143
CHA PTER IX.— A UGMEN T, REDUPL1 OA
TIO N,A N D TERMIN A TIO N S .
§ 3o o . A ugment and r edupl ication 145
30 1 . A ugment a 145
30 2 . Redupl icat ion in the per fect,and in the E u verbs 145
30 3 . Gener al rules o f r edupl icat i on «146
304 . A spir ated initials 146
305. Guttural initials 146
30 6 . D ouble ini tials 146
30 7. Initial sibilant fo ll owed by a
tenuis
308. The vowel o f the r edupl icativesyllable is sh o r t
309. Medial e and a i ar e r edupl i
cated by i , 0 and an by 77. 146
3 1 0 . Final 3 , a i , 0 ar e r edupl icatedby a
3 1 1 . I r r egular r edupl icat ion by
S ampr asfir ana
3 1 2 . S ho r t initial a
3 1 3 . Initial a fo l l owed by two con
sonants 148
3 1 4. Initial 77°
148
3 1 5 . Sh o r t initial i and 77 1 48
3 1 6 . S pecial r ules o f r edupl ication . 148
1k 3 1 7. 148
at 3 1 8. Md,hd 1 48
at 3 1 9 . Han,hi
, 37, chi 148
3 20 . Terminations 149
3 2 1 . Term inat ions O f fir st and se
cond divisio ns
3 2 2 . Regular co njugation
CHA PTER X.— GEN ERA L TEN SE S .
§ 3 2 3 . Gener al o r unmo dified tenses 15 9
3 24. Redupl icated per fect 159
3 25 . Verbs which may fo rm the r e
dupl icated per fect3 26 . The per iphr astic per fect
PA GE3 2 7. S tr ong and weak termina
t io ns
3 28. Weakening o f base
3 29 . B ases ending in d and diph
thongs, h ow changed
3 30 . B ases end ing i ii 73, 73, 77,72, 72
h ow changed
CHA PTER XI .- IN TERMED 1A TE
§ 33 1 . When it mus t be omitted,
when it may be omitted,
when it mus t be inser ted
as 33 2 . List o f verbs inwhich the inter
mediate i must be om itted 1 63
333 . Verbs in which the interme
diate i must be om itted in
cer tain tenses
334. S pecial rules fo r the r edupl i
cated per fect3 35 . S pecial ru les fo r the 2nd per s .
sing. Par . o f the r ed . per f. 1 6 7
336 . Table sh owing when interme
diate i mus t be omitted
337. O pti o nal inser t io n o f i
338. N ecessary inser t io n o f 73
339. The intermediate 7never l iable
to Guna 1 7 1
340 . Inser t io n O f l ong 2 1 7 1 .
3 4 1 . O pti o nal insert ion o f l ong 2 1 7 1
342 . Per iphr astic per fect 1 72
3 43 . Per iphr astic per fect o f inten
S ives and desider atives
Paradigms o f the r edupli cated
per fect
CHAPTER XII .
— STREN GTH EN IN G A N D
WEA KEN IN G.
344 . Two classes o f term inati o ns,
str engthening o r weakening
a verbal base
>k 345 . S pecial fo rms o f str engtheningand weakening cer tain bases 1 7 7
CHAPTER XIII .— A O RI ST.
§ 346 . F ir st and seco nd ao r ist 1 79
347. F o ur fo rms o f the fir st ao r ist 1 79
348. Rules fo r the fir st fo r m 180
TA B LE O F CO N TENTS .
PA GE>k§349. Rules fo r desideratives, inten
sives,Arc.
3 50 . Rules fo r the second fo rm
35 1 . Term inatio ns beginning with
st o r sth 1 81
3 5 2 . Ro o ts 111 d and diphtho rigs 181
at 3 53 . M2,m i
,181
31 354. H am. 181
a 355 . 077m 181
at 356 . Yam 181
357. Rules fo r the third fo rm 1 82
—‘k 3 58. M2, mi , Z2 182
at 3 59. Yam,
7i am 182
3 60 . Rules fo r the four th fo rm 182
182
as 36 2 . D uh,dih
,lih
, guh 182
Par adigms 182
3 6 3 . S eco nd ao r ist 186
364. Ro o ts ending in 77, e, i , 772; dr is
’
187
3 6 5 . Ro o ts with penultimate nasal . 187
36 6 . Ir r egular fo rms 187
at 3 67. V erbs which take the secondao r i st
at 368. V erbs which take the seco ndao r ist in the Par . only 188
37 369. The Tan verbs 188
3 70 . Redupl icated second ao r i st 188
at 37 1 . S72, dvu ,87 72
,ham; s
‘vi,dhe 189
372 . Sho r tening o f bases ending in
ay 189
373. B ases that canno t be sh o r tened 189
3 74 . Compensation between base
and r edupl icative syl lable 189
3 75 . Vowels o f r edupl icative syl lable 190
as 376 . Verbs beginning and ending
with do uble conso nants 190
at 377. Verbs with penultimate 72 190
3 78. Verbs beginning with vowels 19 1
as 379. Ir r egular r edupl icated ao r ist 19 1
Par adigm 191
When the differ ent fo rms o f
the ao r ists ar e used 191
CHA PTER XIV .—FUTURE, CO N DITIO N AL ,
PERIPHRA STm FUTURE,A N D B EN ED ICTIvE .
§ 38 1 . Futur e 1 92
382 . Changes o f the base 192
§ 383 . C o nditio nal
384. Per iph ras tic futur e385 . B ened ictive
386 . B ases ending in my
387. Weakening in benedict ive Pa
r asmaipada, str engthening in
bened ictive Atmanepada 195
388. Intermediate i 195
as 389. Weakening o f base befo r e y 196
as 390 . Verbs ending in i , 77, 72 196
41 39 1 . Verbs ending in n 196
at 392 . Verbs ending in 77 . 196
at 393 . Verbs wh ich take S amprasé
r ana
at 394 . O ther verbs wh ich take Sam
pr asé‘
tr ana
at 395 . S728 changed to fish
396 . B enedict ive Atmanepada
CHAPTER XV .— PA ssrvn
397 Atmanepada terminati ons
398. S pecial tenses o f passive399 Causative, denominative, in
tensive bases 198
400 . Weakening o f base . Par adigm 1 99
40 1 . Gener al tenses o f passive 199
40 2 . The ao r i st passive 200
40 3 . The 3rdper s . sing. ao r i stpassive 200
as 404. A o r i st o f verbs ending in (2 200
at 40 5 . A o ri st o f verbs ending in ay 200
as 40 6 . A o r i st o f intensive and desi
der ative bases
3k
40 8. Verbs ending in am
40 9. Par adigm
4 1 0 . Futur e, condi ti onal , and bene
di ctive passive4 1 1 . Their O pti o nal fo rm s
4 1 2 . A o r i st passive o f intransitive
verbs
at 4 1 3 . O pti onal fo rms
CHA PTER XV I .— PA RTIC IPLES ,GERUN DS ,
A N D IN FIN ITIVE .
§ 4 1 4 . Par ticiple pr esent Par asmai
pada 203
4 1 5 . Par ticiple futur ePar asmaipada 204
TAB LE O F CO N TEN TS .
PA GEPar ticiple o f r eduplicated perfect Par asmaipada
Par ticiple o f r eduplicated perfect with i .
Par ticiple o f r edup licated perfect AtmanepadaPar ticip le pr esent Atmanepada
Par ticiple futur e Atmanepada
Par ticip le pr esent and futur e
passivePast par ticiple passive and
ger und
Gerund in tva
I . The term inati ons tah and
tvd, with intermediate 2
4. 42 5 . Penultimate 77 with o ptionalGuna
42 6 . 1 77777 with intermedi ate 2 and
Guna
as 42 7. Tva with intermediate 2 and
witho ut Guna
428. N asal l o st befo r e 7577,ph;vaiich,
at 429. I I . The terminati ons tah and
tva, with o ut intermediate 2
st 430 . Final nasal dr o pt befo r e tah
and tva
at 43 1 . Final n dr opt andvowel length
ened final chh,v,r chh
,and 7 77
as 43 2 . Ro o ts changing v to 72
43 3 . Final a i changed t o d o r 2
at 434 . D O,so
,777 72
,dha
, change
thei r final into i
at 435 . SO and chho take 2 o r d .
zk 43 6 . Exceptional fo rm s
as 437. Verbs which take Sampr asé:r ana
at 438. Verbs wh ich lo se penu ltimate
nasal
Causal verbs
440 . D esider ative verbs
44 1 . Intensive verbs
442 . Par t iciples in nahat 443 . A dject ival par t iciples444 . Va t added to part iciples445 . Gerund in ya
446 . Gerund in tga
Gerund o f causatives
at 448. Ghu verbs,7na
,sthd
, 972, pd,
ha, so , take final a
at 449 . Verbs ending in nasals
4: 450 . Ver bs ending in 72a 45 1
as 45 2 . M2, m i , d2, Z2
CHAPTER XVI I .— VERB A L A DJECTIVES .
§ 453 . Verbal adjectives, Kgr itya 21 1
454 . A djectives in tavya 212
455 . A djectives in an2ya 212
456 . A djectives in ya 212
at 457. Excepti o nal verbal adjectivesin ya and tga
as 458. Verbs changing final ch and 3
into 77 and g
459 . Infinit ive in tum
460 . Verbal adverbs in am
CHA PTER x vr11 .
— 0A usm vs V ERB S .
§ 46 1 . Causal bases, h ow fo rmed 215
at 46 2 . Guna o r Vriddhi 215
46 3 . Exceptio nal causative bases,I .
at II .
464. C o njugati on o f causative verbs 219
465 . Passive o f cau sative verbs 219
46 6 . Gener al tenses o f the passive 219
CHA PTER XIX.—D E S IDERA TIVE VERB S .
46 7. D esider at ive bases,h owfo rmed 220
468. D esider ative bases,h ow con
jugated469. D esider ative bases, with o r
wi tho ut intermediate 2
as 470 . S tr engthening o f base
47 47 1 . Excepti o nal str engthening o r
weakening
at 472 . D esider ative bases, tr eated as
B hfi verbs
473 . Redupl ication o f desider ative
bases 222
at 474. B ases in av and av 222
4, 475 . SW ,37 77 , dva , 197 77, plu ,
chyu 222
476 . Internal r edupl icat io n 222
at 477. Exceptio nal fo rms 222
TA B LE O F CO N TENTS . m ii
PA GECHA PTER XX.
— IN TEN S IVE V EB B S .
§ 478. Meaning o f intens ive o r fr s
quentative verbs
479. Verbs wh ich may fo rm inten
S ive bases
480 . TWO kind s o f intens ive bases
Atmanepada
Intens ive bases in ya, how
fo rmed and co njugated482 . Par asmaipada bases ,howfo rm
ed and co njugated483 . C onjugati on o f Parasmaipada
bases 224
484 . Reduplicatio n o f intens ivebases 224
as 485 . Verbs which inser t 772 225
as 486 . Verbs ending in nasals 225
as 487. 77047, j abh, dah, bhanj ,
pas 225
as 488. Char , pha l 225
as 489. Verbs with penul timMe r i 225
as 490 . Ver bs ending m 72 226
as 491 . Exceptio nal intensive bases 226
492 . S econdary and ter t iary bases 226
CHA PTER XXL— D EN OMIN A TIVE VERB S .
§ 493 . Char acter o f denom inative
verbs
494, 495 . D enominat ives in ya ,Pa
r asmaipada
as 496 . Changes o f base
497. D enom inatives in ya , Atmane
pada . 228
as 498. The Kandvé‘
rdi verbs 228
as 499. D enominatives in sya 229
as 500 . D enominatives in hamya 229
50 1 . C onjugat io n o f denom inatives 229
as 50 2 . D enominatives in aya 229
as 50 3 . D enominatives without afli x es 230
CHAPTER XXII .— PREPO S ITI O N S A N D
PA RTc ES .
§ 50 4. Pr epo sitio ns, Upasa/rga .
50 5 . Pr epo siti o ns, Ga ti .
50 6 . Pr epo sitions,Ka rmapr avacha
n2ya
50 7. A dverbs 241
§ 50 8 . C o njunctio ns
50 9. Interject io ns
CHAPTER XXIII .— C O MPO UN D Wo ans .
5 1 0 . Manner o f compo und ing nominal bases 23 3
as 5 1 1 . Treatment o f feminine bases 234
5 1 2 . S ix classes o f compo unds 234
I . Tatpurusha, dete rminativecompounds
I b. Karmadhfir aya, appo sit io nal determ inativecom
po undsI o . D vigu, numer al deter
minative compo unds 234
II . D vandva, co l lect ive comp. 23 5
I II . B ahuvr ihi,po ssess ive com
po undsIV . A vyayibhfiva,adverbial com
po unds 23 5
5 1 3. I . D etermi native compo unds 235
as 5 1 4 . Exceptio nal determinativecompo unds
as 5 1 5 . Inver t ed determinat ive com
po undsas 5 1 6 . D eterminative compounds end
ing in verbal bases
5 1 7. I b. A pp o sitio nal determinativecompo unds
as 5 1 8. Inver ted determinative com
po unds5 19. I of N umer al determinative
comp o undsas 5 20 . Mo dificat io ns o f thefinal letter s
o f determ inat ive compo unds 2385 2 1 . I I . C o l lective compo unds, I ta
r etar a and Samfihfir a
as 5 2 2 . Pr ecedence o f wo rds
as 5 2 3 . N o uns ending in r i
as 5 24 . Names o f deit ies 650.
as 5 2 5 . Mo difications o f the final letter s
o f co l lective compounds inthe s ingular
as 5 2 6 . Idiomatic expr essio ns5 2 7. I II . Po ssessive compo unds
as 5 28. Mo dificatio ns o f thefinal letters
o f po ssessive compo unds
TA B LE O F CO N TEN TS .
§ 5 29. IV . A dverbial compoundsas 530 . Exceptional compoundsas 53 1 . Mo dificatio ns o f thefinal letter s
o f adverbial compo unds 243
A PPEN D IX I .
LI ST o r V ERB SB hfi C lass (B hva
’
idi, I C lass)I . Par asmaipada VerbsI I . Atmanepada VerbsIII . Par asmaipada and Atmanepada
VerbsTud Class (Tudfidi, V I C lass)
I . Par asmaipada and Atmanepada
VerbsII . Par asmaipada VerbsIII . Atmanepada VerbsD iv C lass (D ivfidi, IV C lass)
I . Par asmaipada V erbs
I I . Atmanepada VerbsIII . Parasmaipada and Atmanepada
VerbsChur C lass (Churfidi, X C lass).
Par asmaipada Verbs o nlySu Class (Svfidi, V C lass)
I . Par asmaipada and Atmanepada
VerbsI I . Par asmaipada VerbsI II . Atmanepada V erbs
Tan Class (Tanvfidi, VIII Class)Par asmaipada and Atmanepada
VerbsKr i C lass (Kryz
’
idi, IX Class)
I . Par asmaipada andAtmanepada
VerbsI I . Par asmaipada VerbsI II . Atmanepada VerbsA d C lass (A déidi, I I C lass)
I . Parasmaipada VerbsII . Atmanepada VerbsIII . Par asmaipada and Atmanepada
VerbsE u C lass (Juh o tyfidi, III C lass)I . Par asmaipada VerbsII . Atmanepada VerbsI II . Parasmaipada and Atmanepad
Rudh C lass (Rudhadi, V II C lass)I . Par asmaipada and Atmanepada
VerbsII . Par asmaipada VerbsIII . Atmanepada V erbs
A PPEN D IX II .
O N THE A CCEN T IN SaN sx RIT
270
27 1
27 1 IN DEX o r V ERB S
I N D Ex o r N OUN s
THE DEVA N AGA RI LETTERS .
V o wE L s . C O N S O N A N T S .
Initial . Med ial . Initial . Medial . Equivalent .
m (o r m)
1 S ometimes r epresented in theVeda bya , 5 , l (o r Z).
2 S ometimes represented in theVeda by 5 g, R ,lb (o r
C H A PTE R I .
THE A LPHA B ET.
1 . S A N S KRIT is pr oper ly wr itten with the D evanfigar i alph abet ; but theB engali , Gr antha, Telugu, and o ther mo dern Indian alphabets ar e commo nlyemployed fo r wr iting S anskri t in their r espective pr ovinces .
No te — D evandgar i means then ar i o f the go ds, o r , po ssibly, o f the B rfihmans . A mo re
cur r ent style o f wr iting , used byHindus in all common transact io ns wh er e H indi is the lan
guage empl oyed, is call ed simplyn ar i . W hy the alphabet sh o uld have been cal ledn ar t,
is unknown. If derived fr om nagar a, city, it m igh t mean th e art o f wr it ing as fir st pract isedin cities . (P211 . 1v. 2
,N o auth o r ity has yet been adduced fr om any ancient autho r fo r
th e empl o yment o f th ewo rd D evamigar z‘
. In the Lali ta-vistar a (a l ife o f B uddha, tr anslated
fr om S anskr it into Chinese 76 where a l ist o f alphabets is given,the D evandgar i
'
is
no t mentio ned, unless it be intended by the D eva al phabet . (S ee Histo ry o f A ncient
S anskr it Literatur e, p . A lbiruni, in the 1 1 th century, speaks o f the N agar a alphabet
as cur r ent in Malva. (Reinaud, Me’
mo ir e sur l’Inde
,p .
B eghram (bhagdrdma, abo de o f the go ds) is th e nat ive name o f one o r mo r e o f th e m o st
impo rtant cities fo unded by the Gr eeks, such as A l exandr ia ad Caucasum o r Nicaea. (S ee
Maso n’
s Memo ir s in Pr insep’
s A ntiquities,ed . Th omas
,vo l . 1 . pp . C oul d
D evanagar'
i have been meant as an equivalent o f B egh ram i ?
N o inscr iptio ns have been met with in India anter io r},
to th e r ise 9f B uddhi sm . The
ear l iest auth ent ic specimens o f wr iting ar e the inscr iptio ns o f king Pr iyadar s‘i o r A s’
oka,abo ut
250 B . c . These ar e wr itten in two d iffer ent alphabets . The alphabet wh ich is found in theinscr iptio n o f Kapur digir i , and wh ich in the main is the same as that o f the A r ianian co ins
,
is wr itten fr om r ight to left . It is clear ly o f S emitic o r igin, and mo st clo sely co nnggied withth e A r amaic branch o f th e o ld S emit ic o r Ph enician al phabet . The A ramaic letter s, h ow
ever , wh ich we know fr om Egyptian and Palmyr enian inscr iptions , have exper ienced fur therchanges since th ey served as th e mo del fo r the alphabet o f Kapur digiri , and we must have
r eco ur se t o the mo r e pr imit ive types o f th e ancient Hebr ew co ins and o f the Phenician
inscr iptio ns in o r der to explain some o f the letter s o f the Kapur digiri alphabet .B ut wh ile the transit ion o f the S em itic types into th is ancient Indian alphabet can be
pr oved with scientific pr ecisio n,th e second Indian alphabet
,that wh ich is fo und in the
inscr iption o f Girnar , and wh ich is th e r eal so ur ce o f all o th er Indian alphabets, as well as o f
th o se o f Tibet and B urmah,has no t as yet been traced back in a sat isfacto rymanner to any
S emitic pr o to type . (Pr insep’
s Indian A nt iquities by Th omas,vo l . 1 1 . p . To admit,
h owever,the independent invent ion o f a nat ive Indian alphabet is impo ssible . A lphabetswer e
never invented, in th e usual sense o f that wo r d . They wer e fo rmed gradually, and pur elyphm fi m fiTf fi rh er , syl labic o r ideo gr aph ic, stages . Ther e ar e no
such tr aces o f th e gr owth o f an alph abet o n Indian so il ; and it is to he ho ped that newdiscover ies may stil l br ing to l igh t th e intermed iate l inks by wh ich th e al ph abet o f Girnar ,and th r o ugh it th e mo dern D evanagar i , may be co nnected with o ne o f the leading Semitic
alphabets .
4 THE A LPHA B ET. 2
2 . S anskr it is wr itten fr om left to r igh t .
No te— S an'
zskr i ta (W )meanswhat is r ender ed fit o r perfect . B ut S anskr i t is no t call ed
so because th e B rahmans, o r stil l l ess,because the fir st Eur o peans wh o became acquainted
with it,co nsider ed it the mo st per fect o f al l languages . S afizskg
'i ta meant what is r ender ed
fit fo r sacr ed purpo ses ; h ence pur ified, sacr ed . A vessel that is pur ified, a sacr ificial vict im
that is pr o per ly dr essed, a man wh o has passed th r o ugh al l th e initiato ry rites o r smizslcdr as ;
al l these ar e call ed safizskr i ta . Hence the language wh ich al o ne was fit fo r sacr ed act s,th e
ancient idiom o f th eVedas,was cal led S afizskg‘ i ta, o r the sacr ed language . The l o cal spokendialects r eceived the gener al name o f p rdko
r ita . Th is did no t mean o r iginal ly vulgar , but
der ived, seco ndary, seco nd-rate
,l iter al ly
‘
what has a so ur ce o r type, ’th is
“
so ur ce o r type(p rakriti)being th e S arhskrita o r sacr ed language . (S ee V araruch i
’
s Prfikr ita -Pr akasa, ed .
C owel l,p . x vu .)
The fo rmer explanatio n o f p rdkm’
ta in the sense o f th e natural , o r iginal continuations o f
the o ld language is untenable, because it interpo l ates the idea o f co ntinuatio n.
If p r dkri ta had t o be taken in th e sense o f o r iginal and natur al ,’a language so called wo ul d
mean , as has been wel l sh own by D’
A lwis (A n Intr o ductio n to Hach chayana’
s Grammar ,
p . lxxxix), the o r iginal language, and sarhskfl ta wo uld th en have to be taken in the sense o f
r efined fo r l iterary purpo ses .
’
This view, h owever , o f the meaning o f these two names , is
o ppo sed to th e view o f th o se wh o framed th e names, and is r ender ed impo ssible by thecharacter o f the Vedic langw ‘
o
3 . In wr iting th e D evanéigar i alph abet, the di stinctive po rt ion o f each
letter is wr itten fir st , then th e perpendicular , and lastly th e h o r izontal line.
Ex . an,ch , 35 16; (a , (4 , Er ich ; 51 , fl y ; a
, a, fi ght ; at , 3 9'
s,&c .
B eginner s wil l find it u seful to trace the letter s o n transpar ent paper , till
th ey know th em well,and can wr ite th em fluently and co r r ectly.
4 . Th e fo ll owing ar e th e so unds wh ich ar e r epr esented in th e D evamigari
S 1b11ants .
Vowels .
I .Guttur al s, Eli“
la ETkit 719“E: 9h 3 ? a (x)
2 . Palatal s,‘
i l ch 3 chh Ff j W 71 31 s
3 . Lingual s, z ! 3 all m7} Q 3 71 Egr i she
4. D entals,
“
a t v1 th ad 71 n I! s
5 .Labial s , up a b H m x4
(95) E u 3 5 22
Unm o dified N asal o r A nu svfi ra, 751 o r
Unm o dified S ibilant o r V isarga, It .
1 In the Veda ‘
3‘
d and a db, if between two vowels, ar e in cer tain sch o o ls wr itten
5 l and BEE lb.
2 E h is no t pr o per ly a l iquid, but a so ft breath ing .
3 a v is sometimes cal led D ento -labial .
4 The s igns fo r the guttural and labial sibi lants have become obso lete, and ar e r eplacedby the two do ts 2é.
THE A LPHA B ET. 5
S tudents sh o u ld be cautio ned against u sing the Roman lette r s instead o f
the D evanz’
igar i when beginning to learn S anskr it . The par adigms sh o uld
be impressed o n the memo ry in th eir r eal and native fo rm,o therwise their
fir st impr essio ns wil l become unsettled and indistinct . A fter some pr o gress
has been made in mastering the gr ammar and in r eading S anskr it, the Roman
alph abet may be u sed safely and with advantage .
5 . Th er e are fifty letter s in the D evanégar i alphabet , thi r ty-sevenconsonants and th ir teen vowel s
,r epr esenting every so und o f the Sanskr it
language .
6 . O ne letter , the l ong 72 If, is mer ely a gr ammatical inventio n ;
never o ccur s in the spo ken language .
7. Two so unds , the guttural and labial sibilants,ar e now witho ut
distinctive r epr esentatives in th e D evanagar i alphabet . They ar e called
Jihvcimzi lé'
ya, th e to ngue-r o o t sibilant , fo rmed near the base o f the to ngue ;
and Upadbmdnfya , i . e . afil andus, the labial sibilant . Th ey ar e said to have
been r epr esented by the signs X (call ed Vaj r ci /cr iti , having th e shape o f the
thunderbo lt) and (called Gaj a/cumbhdkri ti , having the shape o f an
elephant’s two fr ontal bo nes). [S ee V 0padeva
’s S anskr it Grammar
, 1 . 1 8
H isto ry o f A ncient S anskr it Liter atur e, p. S ometimes th e sign
called A r dha -vz'
sarga, hal f-V isarga, is u sed fo r bo th . B ut in commo n
wr iting these two signs ar e now r eplaced by th e two do ts, the D vivindu
(dvi, two , vindu,do t,) pro perly the sign o f the unmo dified V isar ga. Th e
o ld sign o f the V isarga is descr ibed in th e Kéitantr a as like the figu re 8 4 ;
in the Tantr éibhi dhana as like two 8 th’s . (S ee Pr insep,
Indian A ntiquities ,vo l . 1 . p.
8. Th er e ar e five di stinct letter s fo r the five nasals,“
43 71,v
i i i, m\ n, 3 n,
( m,as th er e wer e o r iginal ly five di stinct s igns fo r th e five sibilants . W hen
,
in th e m iddl e o f wo r ds, th ese nasal s are fo ll o wed by conso nants o f th eir o wn
class , (77. by k, kit , 9 , 9h i i by ck, chh, j , j h qt by {h , d, db , n by t, M,
d,dh ; m by p , pk, b, bh,) th ey ar e o ften
,fo r the sake o f m o r e expeditio u s
wr iting, r eplaced by the do t , wh ich is pr oper ly the sign o f the unmo dified
nasal o r A nusvar a. Thus we find
instead o fW ankitd.
instead o fm aficki td.9
instead o f 5 1313711 kunditci .
fifam instead o f Hfzmnandi tci .
W h
instead o f 3h‘m kampz
'
td.
Th e pro nunciatio n r emains unaffected by th is style o f writing . fifii fl
mu st be pr o no unced as if it wer e wr itten mfg-
«n ankitd, 810 .
The same applies to final a m at the end o f a sentence . This to o ,
6 THE A LPHA B ET. 9
th o ugh fr equently wr itten and pr inted with the do t above the line, is to
be pr o no unced as It772. 1,is to be pr ono uncedm aham . (S ee Pr eface
to Hitopades’
a,in M . M .
’s Handbo oks fo r the S tudy o f S anskr it, p . viii .)
No te —A cco r ding t o the Kaumar as final 31m inpausc’
i may be pr o no unced as A nusvara
cf . S ar asvat i-Prakr iya, ed . B ombay, 1829 pp . 1 2 and I 3 .M SWW I
2 13111191 an 1 21311113 1155118 1138 11) Rafa as. 1 as? 1Esau Th e Kaumar as ar e th e
fo ll ower s o f Kumér a, th e r eputed auth o r o f th e KAtantr a o r Kalapa grammar . (S ee
C o lebr o oke, S anskr it Grammar , Preface ; and page 3 1 5 , no te .) S'
arvavarman is quo ted bym istake as the auth o r o f th is grammar , and a distinctio n is sometimes made between the
Kaumfiras and the fo l l ower s o f the Kalapa grammar .
9. B esides the five nasal letter s,expr essing the nasal so und as mo dified
by gu ttur al , palatal , lingual , dental , and labial pr o nunciatio n, th er e ar e still
th r ee nasal ized letter s, th e ii, 725, i o r ft, fig,it, if, 7, ii, wh ich ar e u sed to
r epr esent a final Rm,if fo l l owed by an initial g y, a l
,
“
c
l v, and mo dified
by th e pr o nunciatio n o f th ese th r ee semivowel s . (Pai n . V I I I . 4 ,
Thu s instead o f 11e mmydti we may wr ite ai'
mfit ydti ;
instead o f Ti B ifi tamlablzate we may wr ite né afi ta;labhateinstead o f it
"6:1n mmvahati we may wr ite f ézfir taii vahati .
O r in compo sitio n,
Hunt samydnam o r Hfifi"
saijyc‘
inam;
Ea stwamlabdham o r fi x ;saflabdham;W fif safiwahati o r H§ gfir saiivahati .
B ut never if th e "xm stands in th e bo dy o f a wo rd, such as m c myab
no r if th e sem ivowel r epr esents an o r iginal vowel , e . g. Rig-veda x . 1 32, 3 .
mi 3‘ m i 3 am u dr am, changed to Hart-Imm 11671 172.
5) 10 . The o nly co nso nants wh ich have no co r r esponding nasal s ar e
m\s, i t sh, 11 s, g h . A final If m, ther efo r e, befo r e any o f these letter s at
th e beginning o f wo rds, can o nly he r epr esented by the neutr al o r unm o di
fied nasal, th e A nusvar a.
Ti mfi? tamr akshati . O r in compo sition, fimfi safizmkshati .
7i 31m tamég’ ino ti . W samwzwti .H
’
m t tamska/cc'
imm . m samshgh i'
vq ti .
Ti Ht fir tamsar ati . fintfir san’
zsar ati .
Ti gtfii tan’
z har ati . xi'
gtfir safizhar ati .
I I . In th e bo dy o f a wo r d the o nly letter s whi ch can be pr eceded by
Th is edit io n, wh ich has lately been r epr inted, co ntains the text— ascr ibed either to Vanih er sel f, i .e . S arasvat i , th e go ddess o f speech (MS . B o dl . o r to A nubhfiti-svarfipa
—acharya,
wh o ever that maybe— and a commentary. Th e commentary pr inted in th e B ombay editions is
cal led NW T, o r in MS . B o dl . 382 . BEN T, i . s . NW . In MS . B o di . 382 .Mah i dhara o r
Mah idfisabhatta is said to havewr itten the S ér asvata in o r der that his ch ildren might r ead it,
and to pl ease Isa, the Lo rd . The date given is 1 634, th e place B enares, (S'
ivarAjadhani)
1 6 . THE A LPHA B ET. 7
A nusvar a ar eas, ( all ,as ,git . Thus zist: afizéab, sirwdhaml rhshi
, unit’s yaédfiwi ,
fi g: s imkab. B efo r e the semivowel s 11y, Q r , l , th e 81m,
in the bo dyo f a wo rd, is never ch anged into A nusvfir a. Thus 71W } gamyate,we : namr alz,l ira: amlalz. In W : éafizyo lz (RV . I . 43 , 4, the fit stands but
no t in mafia sdmyati . (S ee
1 2 . W i th the exceptio n o f Jihvdmdl iya x x (to ngue-r o o t letter), Upadlu
mdni'
ya x (f) (to be br eathed upo n), A nusvcir a 7h (after -so und), V isarga la
(emissio n, see Taitt . 1 1 1 . p . 23 a), and Repka r (bur r ing), all lette r s
ar e named in S anskr it by adding kdr a (making) to their so und s . Thus
an a is cal led W : akdrall ; Hi Ica, W : &c .
1 3 . The vowel s, if initial , ar e wr itten,
W , WI, {3 i : W, fl , a , (Q ), 3 , 3 , 2 , 3 ,‘fi , fi '
a, a‘
,i , i
'
, ri , z’é
’
,a,21,
e,ai
,o ,
if they fo l low a co nso nant , they ar e wr itten with the fo ll owing signs
1 , f , i ,i,
Q, (
g), o , a ,
3
,
a,d, i , i
, ri , (If), u, d,e, ai , 0
,an.
Ther e is o ne exceptio n. If the vowel sq _r i fo l lows the conso nant ( r , it
r etains its initial fo rm , and the r i s wr itten o ver it . E x . Fafifir nir g‘ i ti lz.
In certain wo rds wh ich t o ler ate an h iatus in th e bo dy o f the wo rd , the
second vowel is wr itten in its init ial fo rm . E x . film g o ag r a , adj . preceded
by cows , instead o f tfisa 90{am o r I rena gavdgm ; rfi'
ssm'
go aévam, cows and
h o r ses ;mmpr aijga, yoke fan'
s ti taii, sieve .
14 . Every co nsonant, if wr itten by itsel f, is suppo sed to be fo ll owed bya sh o r t a . Th us a;is no t pr o no unced k, but Ica 11 no t y, but ya. B u t Hi k
o r any o th er conso nant , if fo llowed by any vowel except a,is pr o no unced
with o ut th e inher ent a . Thu s
an led, fa: In, as In”
, 3.h i , 1 m, g [di , (3kgz), 3 1m, E M , i f 163 , a kai,
‘
cfi Ico , a? law.
Th e o nly pecul iar ity is th at sh o r t f i is appar ently wr itten befo r e th e con
so nant after which it is so unded . This ar o se fr om th e fact that in th e
ear liest fo rms o f th e Indian alphabet th e long and sh o r t i’s wer e bo th
wr itten over the co nso nant , the sh o rt i inclining t o th e left,th e l ong i
incl ining to th e r ight . A fterwards th ese top-marks wer e, fo r th e sake o f
dis tinctness,dr awn acr o ss the top
-line , s o as t o become fai and d i , insteado f 9: and (S ee Pr insep
’s Indian A ntiquities, ed . Thomas , vo l . I I . p.
1 5 . If a co nsonant is to be pr o no unced with o ut any vowel after it,th e
co nso nant is said to be fo llowed by Virama, i . e . stoppage, wh ich is marked
by Thu s~
ale must be wr itten “T; Icar ,“
erg ; i t ; ( i .
1 6 . If a co nso nant is fo l lowed immediately by ano th er co nso nant , the
two o r th r ee o r fo ur o r five o r mo r e co nso nants are wr itten in o ne gr o up
8 THE A LPHA B ET. l 7
(samyoga). Thus atka is wr itten Elma; alpa is wr itten watt ; c r tsnya is
wr itten Hindi. Th ese gr o ups o r compo und co nso nants mu st be learnt by
pr actice . It is easy, h owever , to discover some general laws in their fo rma
t io n . Thu s the perpendicul ar and h o r izo ntal lines ar e gener al ly dr o pt ino ne o f th e letter s : Q+ a
= fi tva ; q +w— 1H s ic/ m; i + t r=w chya ;w+w=wp ta ; w+ a=w lcta; q +w+ s =a ktva ; ktya .
1 7. Th e t\r fo ll owing a conso nant is wr itten by a sh o r t tr ansver se
str o ke at the fo o t o f the letter ; as § + t=m o r anlf r a ; 3
1+ t=a gr a ;
E+ t = a o r a 1m ; dr a ; s+z+ t= r shim .
The g r pr eceding a co nso nant is wr itten by placed at th e . top o f the
co nso nant befo r e which it is to be so unded . Thu s wa+ a : wasar ka a nd.
E+ n=fi var shma . This sign fo r t\r is placed to the r igh t o f any o th er
marks at the t0p o f the same letter . E x . 3 13 arkam ; wfim arkena ; fi gar kendfl.
35 1c fo l lowed by i t ah is wr i tten a o r a ksha.
V j fo l lowed by 31 ii is wr itten“
it j fia .
is sometimes wr itten igj h.
t\r fo ll owed by "
3 1: and a 22 is wr itten ‘
5 m , $ 722.
a\d fo llowed by 3 ’
u and as 22 is wr itten g da , Edd .
sl\é, par ticu lar ly in combination with o th er letter s, is fr equentlywr itten “
IE x .
vi sa ;
v1 .62; wér a .
1 8. The sign o f Virama (stoppage), wh ich if placed at the fo o t o f a
co nsonant,sh ows that its inh er ent sh o r t a is stopped, is sometimes
,when it
is difficult to wr ite (o r to pr int)two o r thr ee co nso nants in o ne gr o up, placed
after o ne o f th e co nso nants th us fi at instead o f 33;gun/rte.
1 9. The pr oper use o f th e V irama,h owever
,is at the end o f a sentence,
o r po r t ion o f a sentence,the last wo r d o f wh ich ends in a co nso nant.
A t the end o f a sentence, o r o f a hal f-ver se,the sign I is u sed ; at the
end o f a ver se,o r o f a l o nger sentence, th e sign ll .
20 . The sign 3 (A vag r aha o r A r ddlu’
ikdr a) is u sed in m o st editi o ns to
mark the elision o f an initial 33 a,after a final 0 o r E 8 . E x . $1q 3 0
’
p i
fo r tfi “
a ft! s o ap i , i . e. W wfizsas api ; Es ta te’
pi fo r It Wfit te ap i .
Lis t of Compound Cons onants .
“
a Ic-lca,“
all ? k—kha, EH k- cha, a; k—ta, $57 k
—t—ya , a;k-t-r a, k- t- r —
ya,
i i k—t—va, a;k
-na, ank-n-
ya, Tfi l‘ k-ma, an k
-
ya,‘
E 0 1‘
Hi 7M ”a, E? 01’
3 51 k- r -ya,
‘
g.’ Ic-la,
"
a Ic—va, gi t k-v—
ya, 21 k-sha , rs? Ic
-sh—ma, 231 k
—ah-ya, rs lc-ah-va
ET [ck-ya, q lch-r a ;— w g-
ya, a g-r a
, W g-r -ya
— n gh-na
, g : gh-n-ya,
w gh-ma, m gh
-ya, a gh
-r a ; —‘
gt n-ta
, gt n-k—ta, a n-k-t—ya, a Ta lc-ya,
10 THE A LPHA B ET. 22
Thus cI stands fo r 1! e o f can ekah, o ne .
A
it stands fo r 3 dv o f ETduau, two .
3 stands fo r H tr o f tr agah, th r ee .
8 stands fo r 3 ch o f m chatvdr ah, fo ur .
-I stands fo r‘
q p o f W paficha, five .
The similar ity becomes mo r e evident by compar ing th e letter s and numeral s as u sed in
ancient inscr iptio ns . S ee W o epcke, Mém o ir e sur la Pr o pagat io n des Chifi’r es Indiens,
’
in Jo urnal A siatique, v1 se’
r ie, tom e 1 ; Pr insep’s Indian A ntiquit ies by Thomas , vo l . I I .
P 70 5 Ch ips fr om a German W o rksh o p, vo l . 1 1 . p . 289.
P r onunciation.
22 . Th e S anskr it letter s sh o u ld be pr o no unced in acco r dance with‘
the
tr anscr iption given page 4 . Th e fo l l owing rul es, h owever , ar e to be
o bserved
I . Th e vowel s sh o uld be pr o no unced like th e vowel s in Ital ian . Th e sh o r t a a,
h owever,h as r ather th e so und o f th e Engl ish a in Amer ica.
’
2 . Th e aspir atio n o f th e co nso nant s sh o uld be h ear d distinctly. Thu s I? kh
is said,by English sch o lar s wh o have learnt S anskr it in India, to so und
almo st l ike [ch in inkh o rn In i h like ih in po th o use‘
ui ph l ike ph
in toph eavy t r gh like gh in l o gh o u se i t dh l ike dh in
‘ madh o use bl bh like hh in Ho bh o u se .
’ Thi s, no do ubt, is a
somewhat exagger ated descr iptio n,but it is well in learning S anskr it
to distingu ish fr om th e fir st the aspir ated fr om th e unaspirated letter s
by pr ono uncing the fo rmer with an unmistakable emphasis.
3 . Th e guttural 3 ? n has the so und o f no in king .
’
4 . The pal atal letter s a ch and‘
a j have th e so und o f ch in chur ch’and
o f j in‘ j o in .
’
5 . The lingual letter s ar e said to be pr o no unced by br inging the l ower
sur face o f th e to ngue against th e r o o f o f the pal ate . A s a matter o f
fact the o rdinary pr o nunciatio n o f t,d,n in Engli sh is what H indu s
wo u l d call l ingual , and it is essential to di stingui sh th e S anskr it dental s
by br inging th e t ip o f the to ngue against the Very edge o f th e upper
fr o nt-teeth . In transcr ibing Engli sh wo r ds the natives natur al lyr epr esent the Engli sh dental s by their lingual s , no t by th eir own
dental s e . g . ffiaizg Dir ektar , ”fi neGavarnmenl , &c.
*
6 . The V isarga, Jihvdmzi lz‘
ya and Upadhmdniya ar e no t now ar ticulated
7. Th e dental R s so unds like 3 in sin,
’the lingual El sh l ike sh in shun
,
’
th e palatal 51 97 like 3 3 in sessio n .
’
B uhler , Madras Liter aryJo urnal , February, 1 864 . Rajendralal Mitra, O n th e O rigin
o f the H indvi Language,’Journal o f the A siatic S o ciety, B engal , 1864, p . 509 .
24 , RULES O F S ANDH I. 1 1
The r eal A husvz’
ir a is so unded as a very sligh t nasal , like n in Fr ench bo n.
’
If the do t is u sed as a gr aph ic s ign in place o f the o ther five nasals it
must,o f co ur se , be pr o no unced like the nasal which it r epr esents
C H A P T E R II.
RULES O F S AND HI O R THE COMB INA TION O F LETTEB s.
23 . In S anskr it every sentence is co nsider ed as o ne unbr o ken chain
o f syllables . Except wher e th er e is a stop, which we sh o uld mark by
interpunctio n,the final letter s o f each wo rd ar e made to co al esce with the
initial letter s o f th e fo ll owing wo r d . Thi s co al escence o f final and initial
letter s, (o f vowel s with vowel s , o f co nso nants with co nso nants , and o f
co nso nants with vowel s ,) is cal led S andhi .
A s cer tain letter s in S anskr it ar e incompatible with each o ther , i. e .
canno t be pr o no unced o ne imm ediately after th e o th er,th ey have to be
m o dified o r assimilated in o r der to facil itate th eir pr o nunciatio n . Th e r ules,
acco rding to which either o ne o r bo th letter s ar e thu s m o dified, are called
the r ules of S andhi .
A s acco rding to a gener al rule the wo r ds in a sentence mu st thus be glued
togeth er , th e mer e absence o f S andh i is in many cases sufficient to mark th e
stops which in o ther languages have to be marked by stops . E x .m33 17“ um astvagnimc
‘
ihci tmyam,indr as tu deveinc
’
im mahattamah, Let
ther e be'
the gr eatness o f A gni ; never theless Indra is the gr eatest o f the
go ds .
D is tincti on between E x ter nal and Internal S andhi .
24. It is essential,in o r der to avo id co nfusio n, to distingui sh between
the rules o f S andh i wh ich determine the changes o f final and initial letter s
o f wo r ds (pada), and between th o se o ther ru les o f S andhi wh ich apply toth e final letter s o f verbal r o o ts (dhc
'
i tu)and nominal bases (pr dtipadika)whenfo ll owed by certain terminations o r suffixes . Th o ugh bo th ar e based o n the
same ph onetic pr inciples and ar e somet imes identical , their applicatio n is
differ ent . Fo r sh o r tness’sake it will be best to apply the name o f E x ternal
A cco r ding to S anskr it gr ammar ians th e r eal A nusvéira is pr o nounced in the no se o nly,
th e five nasal s by th eir r espect ive o rgans and the no se . S iddh .-Kaum . to Pain. 1 . 1 , 9 .
W m HTFREF E (w i mw mm i é M W )11m "
Th e r eal Anusvz’
i ra is th er efo r e na‘
s ikya, nasal ; the five nasal s are anuna‘
s ika, nasali zed ,
i . e . pr o nounced by their own o rgan o f speech , and uttered thr o ugh the no se .
C Z
12 RULES OF EXTERNA L SANDH I . 25
S andhi o r Pada S andhi to th e changes which take place at the meeting o f
final and initial letter s o f wo r ds, and that o f Inter nal S andhi to th e ch anges
pr o duced by th e meeting o f r adi cal and fo rmative elements .
Th e rules wh ich apply to final and initial letter s o f wo rds (pada)apply,withfew exceptions, to the final and initial letter s o f the compo nent part s o f com
po unds, and likewise to th e final letter s o f nominal bases (pr dtipadi lca)when fo l
lowed by the so -cal led Pada-term inatio ns (Rfi bhyc‘
im, fit : bhih,w: hhyah,
"
g su),o r by secondary (taddhita)suffixes beginning with any conso nants except try.
Th e ch anges pr o duced by th e contact o f incompatible letter s in the bo dyo f a wo r d sh o uld pr oper ly be tr eated under the heads o f declension,
conjugation, and der ivatio n . In many cases it is far easier to r emember
th e wo r ds r eady-made fr om the dictio nary,o r th e gr ammatical paradigm s
fr om the gr ammar , than to acqu ir e th e compl icated r ules with th eir
numero us exceptions whi ch ar e general ly detailed in S anskr it grammar s
under the head o f S andh i . It is eas ier to learn th at the participle passive
o f faglih
,to lick
,is m l idhah, than to r emember th e rules acco rding to
1 h + i ar e changed
{ cl is dropt and the vowel length ened : wh ile inW TI: par ivz'ih tah,
the vowel , under the same cir cumstances, r emains sh o r t ;par ivrih tah
par ivr idh tah, par ivrid dhah=par ivrid dhah=pafr ivridhah. In Gr eek
and Latin no rules are given with r egard to changes o f this kind. If theyar e to be given at al l in S anskr it gr ammar s , they sh ould, to avo id co nfu sion
,
be kept perfectly dis tinct from the ru les affecting the final and initial letter s
o f wo rds as br o ught to gether in one and the same sentence.
Classification of Vowels .
25 . V owel s ar e divided into sh o r t (hr asva), lo ng (dirgha), and pr o tr acted
(p luta)vowels . Sh o r t vowels h ave o ne measur e (mdtr ci), l ong vowels two,
pr o tr acted vowel s th r ee . (Pan. 1 . 2, A consonant is said to last half
the time o f a sh o r t vowel .
I . Sh o r t vowel s : ‘H a, g i , 3
‘
u, a pi ,
“
Q ii .
2 . Lo ng vowel s : m d, i;i, as 12, fl y
”
,I! c, Q ai
,o, a? an.
3 . Pr o tr acted vowel s are indicated by the figur e 3 3 a 3, W 3 d 3 , it3 i 3 ,
i s i 3, R Q 8 3 , SIB 3 an 3 . S ometimes we find w 3 g,a 3 i , instead o f
o r w 3 3‘
,d 3 u, instead o f fi a, d a 3 .
26 . V owel s ar e likewise divided into
I . Mo noph th o ngs (samdndkshar a): w a, E Td, {i , i i, 3 u, Hi 12,
“55 pi,
“
a i l, TE 15
2 . D iphth ongs (sandhyalcshar a): E c, Q ai,as} o
,i fi d a .
5)27. A ll vowel s are liable to be nasal ized, o r to become anunc‘
is ika
33, RULES o r EXTERNA L S AND HI. 1 3
28. V owels ar e again divided into ligh t (lagku) and heavy (gur u). Th is
divisio n is impo r tant fo r metr ical purpo ses o nly .
1 . Ligh t vo wel s ar eW a, rigs: !i , if no t fo l lowed by a do uble co nso nant .
2 . Heavy vowel s ar e m d, i t, 3 5 12, a rt, 2 e, aai, v? o
,13 an
,and any
sh o r t vowel,if fo llowed by mo r e th an o ne co nso nant .
29. V owel s ar e,lastly, divided acco rding to accent
,into acute (udatta),
gr ave (anudatta), and cir cumfiea’
ed (svar ita). The acute vowels ar e pr o no unced
with a raised to ne , the gr ave vowel s with a l ow,the cir cumflex ed with an even
to ne. (Pan . I . 2, 29 A ccents ar e marked in V edic l iteratur e o nly.
Guna and Vria'
dhi .
30 . Guna is the str ength ening o f i , i i, 3 ii , a 12, a pi, i r t, a: ti, by
means o f a pr eceding“
a a,wh ich r aises {i and i i to ( e
, 3 u and 3 5 12to 1 h 0,
a y'i and a rt to a t
\ar
, z5 li to 3573 a l . (Pan. I . I,
B y a r epetition o f the same pr o cess the V riddhi (incr ease) vowels ar e
fo rmed,viz . Q ai instead o f 2 e
, a? an instead o f Eh 0,mar ins tead o f mg o r ,and ”are;dl instead o f flat-5 a l . (Pan . I . I , I .)V owel s ar e thus divided again into
I . S imple vowels : Eta,“ma, i i , i t, a n
,3 12
, a ri , a r t, a li .
2 . Guna vowel s ze (a i), afio (a a), wear , 3 3 a].
3 . V riddh i vowel s : and i di fi du m ai r,m ail .
3 1 . at a and m a“
do no t take Guna,o r
,as o ther grammar ians say,
r emain unchanged after taking Guna. Thus in th e fir st per so n sing . o f th e
r eduplicated perfect , wh ich r equir es Guna o r V riddhi , a? !ban fo rms wi th
Guna m j aghana, o r with V riddh i w ra j aghdna, I have kil led .
Combina tion of Vowels at the end and beg inning of wo rds .
32 . A s a general rul e,S anskr it al lows o f no hi atu s (vivg
'itti) in a
sentence . If a wo r d ends in a vowel,and th e next wo rd begin s with a
vowel , cer tain mo dificatio ns take place in o rder to r emo ve this hiatu s .
33 . Fo r the purpo se o f explaining th e combinatio n o f vowel s,they
may be divided into two classes
I . Th o se which ar e l iable to be changed into semivowels, g i , i t,“
a u, 3 ii,
"a ii , i f ? al so th e diph tho ngs, E e
, i ai, v) o , Efi au.
2 . Th o se which ar e no t,i t a
,WI d .
Calling the fo rmer liquid th e latter har d vowel s,we may say : If the
The Pratis'
akhya cal l s th em nd’
min, fo r a different reaso n ; see Rig-veda-prat is
'
akhya,
ed. M. M. ,p . xxiii.
1 4 RULES o r EXTERNA L SANDH I . 34
same vowel (lo ng o r sh o r t) o ccur s at th e end and beginning o f wo rds, ther esult is the l o ng vowel . (Pan . v1 . 1 , Thu s
A
a o r arr o r m ==sn fi + fi= a .
Q o r o r i z i’
.
3 o r o r ii + ii= a.
as o r raw : o r n=a r f+ r5=m
E x . W W m m fir uktvd apagachekhati uktvdpagackchhati‘
,
having spoken h e go es away .
ai l W z flfi gsfi nadi i'
a'r isfi nad ia
’r iéi, such a r iver .
as? 3 133 : ko r tri r ims ar tr ifju, do ing (neuter) r ight .
fi g air fa z fi iafa
‘ kinta na’eti kintzideti
,bu t he r i ses .
Or in.
compo unds, i s? m mah i iéa li mahiéalz, l o r d o f the ear th .
5)34 . If har d vowel s (lo ng o r sh o r t) o ccur at th e end o f a wo rd , and th e
next begins with a liqu id vowel (except diphth o ngs), the r esult is Guna o f
the l iqu id vowel . (Pan . V I . 1 , Thu s
a o r m -g- g o r fiz z d + i z e (ii i).‘H o r o r 5 4- 5 2 0 (an).
m o r Err -{J ag o r i z'
flgii + r i= an (Pan. 1 .
E x . 713 13 : $33 : l ava indr alz tavendr alz, thine is Indr a.
mm : that set akiva soktvd,sh e having spo ken.
1”atW : fl fi : set riddhi lz sar da
'hi lz, th is weal th .
Warw t : warm tava Zikdr ali tavaZ/cc‘
ir alz, thy letter l i .
O r in compo unds , mm W wrai th : c mya ishti lz kdmyeshti lz, an
o ffer ing fo r a cer tain bo on.
fgfi 3 1 3511 : m : h i ta upadeéa lz hi topadeéalz, go o d advice .
5)35 . If har d vowel s (long o r sh o r t) o ccu r at th e end o f a wo r d,and the
next begins with a diphth o ng, th e r esult is V riddh i . (Pan . v1 . 1,
Thu s
‘3 o r 3 11 4- 1221 ?
w o r m + i = i M a z da
i t o r m + =sh=afi
is o r an+=3fi= ssfi 3+ du= aw
E x . Her Ea : fi a tava eva : tavaiva , o f th ee o nly .
{It QM"
? W set aikshishta saikshishta, she saw.
The l etter E i i is l eft o ut , because it is o f no pr actical util ity. It is tr eated l ikeWri , o nly
substitut ing Q l fo r“
gr in Guna and Vr iddh i . Thus 172+ 3 13 3‘
s : li -i— anubandhalz becomes
3 3“ lanubandhalz, i . e . having ii as indicato ry l etter .
1‘ S ome grammar ians co nsider the S andh i o f ii with r i o ptio nal
,but th ey r equ ir e the
sh o rtening o f th e l o ng of. Ex . W +¥Efilt br ahmar shili o r an
i f“: br akma r ishili , B rahma, a B ishi .
37, RULES o r EXTERNA L S AND H I . 1 5
as W fi g : l ava o shthalz tavauskthalz, thy lip.
“
RTW W sci autsukyavati sautsukyavat i, she des ir o u s .
O r in compo unds , r dma + azsvaryam z r dmaiévaryam,
the lo rdsh ip o f Rama.
lfim fi '
q'
rq W aitd aupamyam s itaupamyam,sim ilar ity with
S ita, the wi fe o f Rama.
36 . If a simple l iqu id vowel (lo ng o r sh o r t) o ccur s at the end o f a
wo r d , and the next begins with any vowel o r diphtho ng , the r esult is
change o f the l iquid vowel into a semivowel . (Pan. v i . I, Thus
w o r m z n o r m ci z zyc‘
i
wo r fl = q o r q r i z yrz.
C C’
3 o r $ = g o r 1 u z yu.
Iz o r Q=fi o r § e,ai z ye, yaz
1isfi o r flfi= 1fi 0r fl o,au= yo , yau
3! o r m = t o r
Q o r o r 6
wo r st a o r ai z‘
s o r'
s
E o r Q= lt o r
”
?$31} o r fi z fi o r i?
W o r m z a o r m
3 0r 3 5
t o r e : 3 m ?
fl o r m = ifi o r m
Ex . {fix“
era aura dadhi atr a dadhyatr a, milk her e .
3 73Era avg-d kar tr i uta kar truta
,do ing m o r eo ver .
Hg fi =flffi lfl mad/m iva madhviva,like h o ney.
mg? k g : 1 3 381 nad i aidasya z nadyaidasya, the r iver o f A ida.
In compo unds , 3 3? $6 7 5 5 nad i ar t/2am nadyar tham,fo r the sake
o f a r iver .
No te — S ome native gr ammar ians al low, except in compo unds , th e omissio n o f this
S andh i, but they r equir e in that case that a l o ng final vowel be sh o rtened . Ex . fl Ea“
chakr i atr a may be W E ckakryatr a o r ah WE chakr ’i atr a .
37. If a Guna-vowel o ccur s at the end o f a wo rd
,and the next begins
wi th any vowel o r diph th o ng (except a), th e last element o f the Guna-vo wel
is changed into a sem ivowel . If a fo l lows,ii is elided
,and no ch ange takes
place in the diphth o ng see 5)4 1 . (Pan. V I . 1,
Thus
1 6 RuLEs o r EXTERNA L SANDHI .
EX.
”
Ham m sakhe cigachchha sakhaydgachchha, Friend, come !
‘
HQ 33 : m s sakhe iha sakhhyiha, Friend, her e
wit ( it =mfi fz pr abho ehi =p r abhaveh i , Lo r d , com e near
M W imam! pr abho aushadham=p r abhavaushadkam,Lo rd
,
medi cine.
In compo unds, Tfi+ isr r sm : yo iso laz gaviéalz. Th er e ar e var io us
exceptio ns in compo unds wher e Tfi g o is tr eated as as gava .
38. If a V r iddhi-vowel o ccur s at th e end o f a wo r d,and the next
begins with any vowel o r diph th o ng, the last element is changed into a
sem ivowel . (Pan. V I . 1,
Thus
3 (ai) any vowel : m (dy).“
a? (an) any vowel : 1111 (do).
E x . fa? W = fzrmtfaz ér iyai ar thalz ér iydyar thala.
fin? fi = faq fi ér iyai ri te= §r iydyri ta
( a? m =mfi fi fifi r avau as tami te r avdvas tami te, after sunset .
fi flit : mf'
q'fit tau i ti z tdviti .
In compo sition, =fi+fi =m fi now ar t/2am= ndvar tham,fo r the sake o f
ships .
39. These two r ules, h owever , are l iable to cer tain mo dificatio ns
1 . Th e final {y and To o fmay, “El an, wh ich stand acco r ding to r ule fo r
E 8, fi t 0, may be dr opt befo r e al l vowel s (except ii, 4 1 ) no t
,h owever
,
in compo sitio n. Thus m o st MS S . and pr inted editio ns ch ange
Hfi‘ m sakhe dgachchha, no t into M sakhaydgachchha, but into
111? W sakha dyachchha.
F f? {a s akhe iha,no t into W firg sakhayiha, but into as {g sakka iha .
mfi ( fg pr abho ehi,no t into m p r abhavehi , but into m1 Ef
'
gpr abha ehi .
wit fi at? p r abho aushadham, no t into Imam! pr abhavaushadham,but into
IN pr abhu aushadham.
2 . Th e final { y o fw ay, wh ich stands fo r 3 en,may be dr opt befo r e all
vowel s,and it is u sual t o dr op it in o ur editions . Thus
18513 fl : ér iyai ar thalz is mo r e u sual ly written f‘
mn i t‘ll : sr iga ar tho lz instead
o f W fi: ér iyciyar thalz.
3 . Th e final 1 v o f “ do,fo r 13 (in, may be dr opt befo r e all vowel s, but is
mo r e u sual ly r etained in o u r editions . Thus
Tfi {fir tau i ti is mo r e usually wri tten inferf'
d taniti , and no t i t“
( fit id i ti .
No te— B efo r e the par ticl e 3 “
a the dr o pping o f the final Ry and i v is o bl igato ry.
It is with o ut any r easo n that th e final ( 3; o f Guna and Vriddhi and the final i n o f
Guna ar e gener al ly dr o pt ,wh ile th e final i n o f Vr iddh i is general ly r etained. It would be
mo r e consistent eith er always t o r etain th e final semivowel s o r always to dr o p them . S ee
Rig-veda-pratis
'
akhya, ed . M .M Sutras 1 29, 132 , 1 35 : P51}. v1 . I , 78; V I I I . 3, 19.
Row s o r EXTERNA L SANDH I . 43
I r r egular S andhi .
43. Th e fo ll owing ar e a few cases o f ir r egu lar S andh i wh ich r equ ir e tobe stated. W hen a pr epo sit io n ending in
gs o r am ii is fo l lowed by a verbbeginning with ( e o r fi o
,th e r esult o f the co al escence o f th e vowel s is
l! e o r =§T0, no t i} a i o r $7 an. (Pan. V I . I,
Ex . It ( a?! W pm ej ate z p r ej a te.
W ( H?! Hai r} upa eslzate upeskate.
n ( unfit : fiflnffip r a eshayati =pr eshayati
WU Elfin m par d elfhal i =par eklzati .
i 'fifl ffl W K upa o shati up o s/ mti .
W 4. W 133 qfl‘
gfit p ara o hati z par o hati
Th is is no t the case befo r e th e two verbswedh, t o gr ow, and i i , t o go , if raised byGuna
to E e. (Pan . V I . I,
Ex . 3 5! W ? M upa+edkate : upaid/za te.
are afar fi ts ava+ eti= avai ti .
In Verbs der ived fr om no uns,and beg inning wi th 1! o r fi e o r 0, the el ision o f th e final
W o r i ngo f th e pr ep o sitio n is o ptio nal .
44. If a r o o t beginning with a ri is preceded by a pr epo sitio n ending
in 33 a o r 3311 d, the two vowel s co alesce into an ci r instead o f anan (Pan.
V I . I,
Ex . an: W W t?! apa~l ri chckhati apdr chch/zati .
m m m ava rindti avdrnciti .
I! W “fir?!p r a rifate=p r drj ate.
tm‘ W unfit? para r ishati z par dr shati .
In verbs der ived fr om nouns and beginning with th is lengthening o f the E a o f
th e pr epo sition is o pt io nal . (Pan. V I . 1 ,
In certain compo undsm r inam,debt , and $71
“r i talz, affected, take Vr iddhi instead o f
Guna if pr eceded by hH a; I! W : m pr a+ r inam_p rdrnam, pr incipal debt ;W : W r ina+r inam=
—r indrnam
,debt co ntracted to l iqu idate ano th er debt ;m
Wm= §fi7fl fi2 affected by so rr ow. Likewise ag ain, th e substitute
fo r‘
errgva'
k, car rying, fo rms Vr iddhi with a pr eceding W a in a compo und . Thus few3 532vis
°va+ukal u th e ace . plur . o fmm viso ao ah, ism o iso auhafi. (Pan . V I .
vart .)
45. If the initial ssh o in sits : o skthalz, l ip, and fi g2 o tun, cat, is pr eceded In a com
po und by“
m? o r fi a, th e two vowel s may co alesce into fi an o r fi o . (Pan . v1 . I , 94,
vart .)
Ex . W aha: mafia: o r“ml-Eta: adhar a+o skthab adhar aushthalz o r adhar o shthalz,
the l ower l ip.
FE? fi g“
: W o rW 2 sthii la+ o tulzz sthil lautulz o r s ta lo tuZz, a big cat .
In no uns der ived fr om a? p r esb, the rule is o ptio nal . Ex . a“! o r i n p r eskya o r
p raishya, a messenger . IN pr esha, a gleaner , Is der ived fr om I!pm and i i ish .
5 1 . Rows o r EXTERNA L SAND E I . 1 9
If fi ? o shlha and fi g o tu are prece ded by ”Q o r m g in the middle o f a sentence
,
they fo ll ow the general rul e .
Ex . W aha: fi n: mama+ o shthalz=mamaushthalz, my lip.
46 . A s ir regular compo unds the fo ll owing ar e ment io ned by native grammar ians
a'
t svair am, wi lfulness, and afa svair in, self-wil led , fr om a i t so c
13W akskauhini,a complete army, fr om W m aksha+flhin£
£ 3 2pr audhali , fr om R 3 53 2p r a+fldkalz, full -gr own .
$13 2pr aukalz, investigat io n, fr om n 3 76 p r a+dhalz.
in: pr aiskalz, a certain prayer , fr om I! 23 2pr a+eshal¢ . (S ee
i n: p r aishyalz, a messenger .
47. The final fi 0 o f indecl inablewo rds is no t liable to the rules o f S andhi . (Pan . I . I , I
Ex .33 3} “all? ako apehi, Hal l o o
, go away
48. Indeclinables co nsist ing o f a s ingle vowel , with the exceptio n o f W (i are
no t liable t o th e r ules o f S andhi . (Pan. 1 . I,I 4 .)
Ex . 3 i; i indr a, O h Indr a !“
a 3 35: u umes‘a, O h lo r d o f Uma!
“STEé d evam,Is it so indeed ?
49. If fi ll (wh ich is wr itten by Indian g rammar iansM (i ii) is us ed as a. prepo s iti o nbefo re verbs , o r befo r e no uns in th e sense o f
‘
so far as’
( inclus ively o r exclus ively) o r a
l ittle,’it is l iable to the rules o f S andh i .
Ex . W W : mw aadhyayandt : ddhyayana'
t, until th e r eading begins .
W W : Efia'ml d ekades
’
dt : aikades’
a'
t, to a. certain place.
W m (i a‘
lo clzi tamz dlo chi tam, r egarded a li ttle .
3511 m m a‘
ashnam ashnam, a little warm .
‘3 1 i f? I f? aiki ehi,come h er e.
If 35” d is used as an interjectio n, it is no t l iabl e to S andhi, acco r ding to 48.
Ex . WTE'
é fans T it d, evam ki la tat, A h ,- now I r eco ll ect ,
— it is just so .
50 . C ertain par ticles r emain unaffected by S andh i .
Ex . $3: he indr a, O h Indra.
5 1 . A pr o tracted vowel r emains unaffected by S andh i, because it is always suppo sedto stand at the end o f a sentence . (Pan . V I . I , 1 9 5 ; V I I I . 2,
Ex .Essa“
!Q I ( I? deo adattci 3 ehi, D evadatta, come her e !
20 EXTERNA L SA N D H I
54 , EXTERNA L S AND H I. 21
Combination of F inal and Ini tia l Co ns onants .
53 . Here, as in the case o f vowel s,the rules which apply to the final
co nso nants o f wo rds fo ll owing each o ther in a sentence ar e equally applicable
to the final co nso nants o f wo rds fo ll owing each o ther in a compo und . The
final co nso nants o f nom inal bases to o,befo r e the so -called P ra ia-term inati o ns
(mi bkydm, fit: bhi lz, “I: bkyalz, g en) and befo r e seco ndary (taddh ita) suffix esbeginning with any co nso nant but try, ar e tr eated acco rding to the same
rul es . B ut the der ivatives fo rmed by means o f these and o ther suffixesare best learnt from th e dictio nary in their r eady-made state wh ile
the changes o f nominal and verbal bases ending in co nso nants , befo rethe terminatio ns o f declensio n and co njugation and o ther suffixes
,ar e
r egulated by differ ent laws , and ar e best acquir ed in lear ning by hear t the
pr incipal par adigms o f no uns and verbs .
54. In o rder to simpl ify the rules co ncerning the change s o f final
co nso nants, it is impo rtant to state at th e o utset that eleven o nl y o ut o f the
thirty-five co nso nants can ever stand in S anskr it at th e end o f a wo r d ;viz .
Er ic. i n U, are, u s e , an am,
“
as1, zlz, m
1 . Th er e ar e five classes o f conso nants, consisting o f five letter s each ;
thu s giving twenty-five . In every o ne o f these five classes th e aspir ates,
if final, ar e r eplaced by their co r r esponding unaspirated letter s : fi lth
by ”
q k; i tgh by 11g
‘
3\o le/z
,however
,no t by “
it ch , but by z\ t, &c .
Ex . W ehi tr alikh, painter ; vo c . fa'
a‘fa q chi tr a lik. This reduces
the twenty—five letter s to fifteen.
2 . In every class th e sonant 58) letter s, if final,ar e r eplaced by their co r
r espo nding sur d letter s ; 1 9 by 35k ; gd\
by 1!t, &c . E x . hrid,
h eart ; nom . fi br i l . This r educes the fifteen to ten
3 . N o palatal 1 6h can ever be final ; h ence th e o nly r emaining palatal ,
th e Et ch, is r eplaced by th e co r r espo nding guttu ral 35 E x . mfl vdch ,
speech ; vo c . W ed/c. Final as do es no t o ccur . Th is r educes th e
ten to eigh t . In a few r o o ts the final aj is r eplaced by a lingual
instead o f a guttur al .
4 . O f the semivowel s, (It y, t\ r , Q l, 1 1 4)a l is the o nly o ne that is fo und at
the end o f wo r ds . Th is r ai ses th e eight t o nine letter s .
5 . gh canno t be final,but is changed into ( i sometimes into a k o r
“
it t .
S ome grammar ians all ow the so ft o r so nant letter s as final , but th e MS S . and editio ns
general ly change th em into the co r r esponding hard letter s .
l'
The o nly except io ns ar e technical terms such as 53? ach, a vowel ;“mm: aj anta lz,
ending in a vowel, instead o f Wi ld : agantalz.
22 EXTERNA L SANDH I .
6 . O f th e sibilants,the o nly o ne that is fo und at th e end o f wo r ds is V isarga.
Fo r,r adical fi sh canno t be final
,but is r eplaced by gt. Thu s fq vish
becomes fg‘
z;dvit. In a few wo r ds final ( sh is changed into‘
éfik.
Radical st s’
canno t be final,bu t is r eplaced by a: t. Thu s fastvis
’
becomes
fag vit. In s ome wo rds final as i s changed into ask.
Final r adi cal ( ( s is tr eated as V isarga.
Th e V isarga, ther efo r e, r aises the nine to ten and the A nu svar a,t o eleven
letter s,th e o nly o nes that can ever stand at th e end o f r eal wo rds .
Hence th e ru les o f S andh i affecting final co ns o nants are r eal ly r educed to
eleven heads .
5)55 . It is impo r tant to o bse rve th at no wo rd in S anskr it ever ends in
m o r e than o ne co ns o nant, th e o nly exceptio n being wh en an t\
r pr ecedes a
final r adical tenu is GEIc, Q t, a;t, t i p . Th u s
“
arm -l“
at: m abib/zar t : abibhar
, 3 . p. sing . impf . o f t!bhri , to car ry.
W q :‘Erfmrgabibhar 3 abibkar , 2 . p. s ing . impf. o f 11bhr i , to carry .
W R: W suvalg s suval
,nom . sing . wel l jumping .
B ut fl z’
lr /c, str ength ,nom . sing. o f fi drj .
m fl—cfir avar ivar t, 3 . p
'
. sing . impf. intens . o f $71vri t‘
o r fi vr idh .
i sm? amar t, fr om mm. (Pan. V I I I . 2 ,
Th e nom . sing . o f fi f ti ehikir sh is faafi: chi/f ill , because h er e the r is
no t fo ll owed by a tenuis .
Classificati on of Consonants .
5 6 . B efo r e we can exam ine th e ch anges o f final and initial conso nants ,
acco r ding to the rules o f ex ternal S andh i, we have to explain what is meant
by th e place and the quali ty o f consonants .
I . Th e th r o at, th e palate, the r o o f o f th e palate, th e teeth , th e lips, and the
no se ar e cal led the places o r o rgans o f the letter s . (S ee
2 . B y co ntact between th e tongu e and th e fo ur places ,— th r o at , palate, r o o f,
teeth,
— th e gu ttur al , palatal , l ingual , and dental consonant s ar e fo rmed.
Labial co nso nants ar e fo rm ed by co ntact between the lips .
3 . In fo rming th e nasal s o f th e five classes th e veil which separ ates the
no se fr om th e pharynx is withdrawn .Hence th ese letter s ar e called
A nunds ika, i . e . co -nasal o r nasal ized .
4 . The r eal A nu svar a is fo rmed in the no se o nly,and is cal led N dsi lcya, i . e .
nasal .
5 . The V isarga is said to be pr o no unced in th e chest (ur asya) the th r ee o r
five sibilants in th eir r espective places .
Lectur es o n th e S cience o f Language, S eco nd S er ies, p . 1 45 .
59,EXTERNA L SANDH I . 23
6 . The semivowels , to o , ar e r efer r ed to these five places , and th ree o f them,
‘
q y, E l, a v, can be nasal ized, and are then called A nunds i/ca . (f ,“3 ,
7x3)
5 ,o r
”
Ii , y, l v.) t r canno t be nasal ized In S anskr it .
57. A cco r ding to th eir qual ity (pr ayatna*,effo r t)letter s ar e divided into ,
1 . Letter s fo rmed by complete co ntact (spr ishta) o f the o rgans : ask, R kh ,
11 g , ugh, a n; ar ch , n ah/z, Hj ,"
ej h , a n; a t, 3 1h , a d, a ct/z, Inn ;“
a t, 1 1 th , e d, v dh,“
a n ; 11 17,"mph, a b, ti bia, Hm. These are called
Spar sa in S anskr it , and,if th ey did no t compr ehend the nasals
,wo uld
co r r espo nd to th e classical mul es .
2 . Letter s fo rmed by sl ight contact (isltat sprishta):“
fl y, t r , 8 l, a v (no t 3 h).These ar e called A ntabsthd i . e . intermediate between Spar s
'
as and
O shmans,wh ich has been fr eely tr anslated by semivowel o r l iquid .
3 . Letter s fo rmed by sl ight opening x x , fi sh ,”
a s,
g g h . Th ese ar e cal led fishman (flatu s) in S anskr it , wh ich may be
r ender ed by s ibi lant o r flatus .
4 . V owel s ar e said to be fo rmed by complete Opening (vivri ta)1L.
58. A seco nd divisio n,acco r ding to quality, is ,
I . Sur d letter s : a ll , lat /ch, welt, a chh, z t, 8 th, F l ,
”
fil th, up , mph , 3 X:
5: s, fi sh , a s, X and V isarga zlz. In th eir fo rmat io n th e glo ttis is
Open . Th ey ar e called A gnes/ta, no n-so nant .
2 . S o nant letter s : 31g , ugh, i f , 15171, e dit, ad, vdh, a b, wbh, 37 7i ,
am, a n, nm ; 3 it, fl y, ( r , B l,
"
av, th e A nusvar a m, and al l vowels .
In th eir fo rmat ion the glo tt is is cl o sed . They are cal led Gko shavat.
59. Lastly, co nso nants ar e divided , acco r ding to qual ity, into ,1 . A spir ated (mahcip r dna): E M ,
“ugh, a chh , t , 3 1h, e dit , 1 1 th, a die,
‘
qiph , wbh ; X x , ms, fi sh,“
a s, g qb;
“
g h ,th e V isarga z lz and
A nu svz’
ir a m.
2 . Unaspir ated (a lpapr dna): al l the r est .
It will be seen,ther efo r e
,th at th e change o f j ob into
“
5 k is a change o f
place, and that th e change o f 1 0k into“
atj is a change o f quali ty while in th e
S anskr it gr ammar ians cal l th ism ma : abkyantar alzpr aya tnalt ,mo de o f ar ticu
latio n pr eparato ry to th e utterance O f th e sound,and distingu ish it fr om W “ a : vdhyalz
pr ayatnali , mo de o f articulation at th e clo se Of the utterance o f the sound, wh ich pr o ducesth e qual it ies o f sur d, so nant, aspirated, and unaspir ated, as explained In 58, 59.
‘
I‘ S ome grammar ians differ in th eir descr iption o f the degr ees o f cl o s ing o r o pening O f
th e o rgans . S ome ascr ibe to the semivowel s dulzsprishta, imper fect contact , o r ishadaspr ishta,sl ight no n-contact , o r iskadvivn
'
ta, sl igh t o pening ; t o th e sibilants nemaSpg-ishtu, half -co ntact ,i . e . gr eater O pening than is r equir ed fo r th e sem ivowels , o r vivri ta, complete O pening whi le
th ey
'
r equ ir e fo r the vowel s eith er vivri ta, complete O pening, o r asprishta, no n-co ntact . S iddh .
Kaum . vo l . I . p . I O . Rig-veda-
pratisi . X I I I . 3 . In the A tharva-veda-pratis'
akhya I . 33 . we
ongbt to r ead E35 3 3 ? eke’sprishtam instead o f F ifi eke Sprishtam .
24 EXTERNA L SANDHI . 60
trans itio n O f 1 ch into 119 , o r o f “f into 7pn, we sho uld have a change bo tho f place and o f quality.
60 . Th e changes wh ich take place by the combinatio n o f th e eleven final
l etter s with initial vowel s o r consonants may be di vided th er efo r e into two
classes .
Final letter s ar e ch anged, I . with r egar d to their places o f o rgans , 2 . with
r egar d to their qual ity.
I . Changes of P lace .
6 1 . Th e o nly final co nso nant s wh ich ar e liable to change o f place ar e
th e D ental s,th e A nusvar a
,and V isarga. Th e D ental s
,being incompatible
with Palatal s and Lingual s , become pal atal and l ingual befo r e th ese letter s .
A nu svar a and V isarga adapt them selves as much as po ssible to th e place o f
the letter by wh ich th ey ar e fo l l owed . A ll o th er ch anges O f final cons onants
ar e mer ely changes O f quali ty ; th ese in th e case o f D ental s, A nu svar a, and
V isarga, being super added to th e ch anges o f place .
62 . Final 1 t befo r e pal atal s (3 ch, Q chit , j , 13j h , as , St é)is changed
into a pal atal . (Pan. VI I I . 4,
Ex . 7172+ a : m tat cha tacltcha,and thi s .
711 +M FR : Hfa afa tat chhinatti tachchkinatti,he cu ts thi s .
771 + again W W tat srino ti tachs’
rino ti , he h ear s th is
Wit+W fi=m fi tat +j ciyate= tafidyate, this IS bo rn . The final
i t is changed into i 671. and then into 71: j acco r ding to 66 .
In compo sition,Ema; j agat +j etd=j agaj jetd, conquer o r O f
the wo r ld .
The same change wo uld take place befo r e an initial“
5 171; and befo r e an
initial w ii, i t migh t become eith er { j o r 3t it .
63 . Final 31 77. befo r e aj , 15j lt , i n, and yrs i s changed to pal atal i ii .
Ex . m +“ fa : manfif tain+j ayati tc‘
tftj ayati, he co nquer s themI
. (Pan.
V I I I . 4,
No te— Rules o n th e changes o f final i n befo r e i ch, Ei chk, and wil l be g iven
h er eafter . S ee 73 , 74 .
64. Final ( t befo r e g t, aM, g d, a: (lit, at n (no t q sh,Pan . V I I I . 4, 43)
is ch anged into a l ingual . (Pan . V I I I . 4,
E x . 7 11+ ssh -1 7131 1? tat + dayate= taddayate . Th e final ( t is changed
into 2\t and then into
“
a: (1 acco r ding to 66 .
In COmPO S itiO Il , 711 +fi m=mfi 1 tat tikd tattilca'
,a gl o ss on this .
( 7711+ t : W : etat tkaklcur ali etatthaklcur alz, th e ido l o f h im .
Q! .s‘,acco r ding to 92 , is general ly changed to
“
a chh W EN”
? tachchhg'ino ti .
EXTERNA L SANDHI .
3 . ti p befo re so nants,changed into { 6
3 73511 wa W kaknp atr a hahubatr a, a r eg ion th er e , (inflectio nal ?
base W hakubh .)“1 +W . m ap ghatah_ abghatah, a water
-jar .
m W N W ap +j ayah abj ayah, Obtaining Water .
“1 + 3=W 3 ap mayah ammayah, watery .
3 371 + fir: 3 5 5 1: kakap bhih kakubbhih, instr um . plur .
4 . i t befo r e sonants,ch anged into g d , except befo re so nant pal atal s and
lingual s, wh en (acco r ding to 6 2) it is ch anged into i f and {cl
t q+maz l ifcqa sar i t atr a sar idatr a
,th e r iver ther e .
3 711 +fir m j agat isah=j agad isah, l o r d o f the wo r ld .
rig-
4+ v3; mahat dhanah mahaddhanuh, a large bow.
m -l fir Rafi”
. mahat bhih mahadbhih, inst rum . plur .
11 t befo r e so nant palatal s , changed into q j . see 6 2
W +WF§ =“fra t? sar it +j a lam= sar izj a lam, water O f th e r iver .
“
(at befo r e sonant lingual s , changed into g d: see 6 2
m m 271W etat ddmar ah etaddamar ah, th e upr o ar O f them .
No te — JTher e are exceptio ns to th is r ule, but th ey ar e co nfined t o Taddhita der ivatives
wh ich ar e fo und in dictio nar ies . Thus final i t befo r e the po ssess ive suffixes “ mat;
El'
rt vat, ffl vin, HE vala is no t changed. Ex . fig ?!+ 3 7!= fHi dyut+ vat=
vidyntvat, po ssessed o f l igh tning . Final Q 3 t o o , wh ich r epr esents Visar ga, r emains
unchanged befo r e th e same Taddh itas . Thusm -l m: m al tej as+vin= tej asvin,instead O f ovin; see 84 . 3 . W an : M yo tis
-l-matz jyo tishmat,instead o f o ti rmat; § 84 . (Pan .
67. A dditio nal ch anges take place if th e final sur ds“
as If , g t, i t, {p ar e
fo llowed by initial nasal s,ch iefly an and 11m. The nasal s being so nant
,
they r equi re the change O f ak, g t, ( t, and nip into11 g , g d, g d, and i b;
but these final sonan ts may be fu r th er infected by th e nasal character o f th e
initial nasal s,and may be wr itten a: n, q n, 1 n
,81m.
‘(P321. V I I I 4 :
Ex . fzsp 71171: faw n: o r fagmr dik h eiyah digncigah o r dinnagalt .
a wo r ld-elephant .
W fi fi =M O r wgfaméfa madhuli t nar dati madhu
lidnar a'
ati o r madhulinnar dati, th e bee hum s .
3 111 + aw: ==mm z o r 3mm j agat nathah=j agadnathah o r j agan~
na'
thah, l o r d o f the Wo r ld .
b
3311 + 7 rd? z w'
ge? o r was? up nadi abnadi o r amnad i , water-r iver .
M 31s: W o r 111311? p rakmukhah=pragmukhah o r p ranmu
Ichah, facing the east .
«m +mi o r flaunt bhavat matam bhavadmatam o r bha
vanmalam,yo ur o pinion.
72 , EXTERNA L SAND HI . 27
No te— If a wo rd sho uld beg in with a guttural , palatal , o r l ingual n (Q 12,Rh, o r
then a final“
( t wo uld change its place o r o rgan at the same t ime that it became a nasal . It
wo uld become Q h, i n, o r Ill a . There ar e, h owever , no wo rds in commo n use beginning
with 3 : it, a s, o r Ill a.
68. B efo re the suffix R1 I maya and befo re “TH malm the change into the nasal is no t
o ptio nal , but Obl igato ry. (Pan. V I I I . 4 , 45 , Val't .)Ex . W EE mi W vdk+mayam= vdhmayam,
co nsist ing o f speech .
wgfese mat mgfmwratmadhul it+mdtr am madhul inmdtr am, mer ely a bee .
31 Rté‘ m tat+mdtr am tanmd tr am,element .
N o te— Ninety-six is always sm fir shannavati , never m afia shaqlgtavati .
69 . The initial g h, if br o ught int o immediate co ntact with a final fi le (Kg),{t
i t (Q d), ‘( p (i h), is commo nly, no t necessar ily, changed into the so nant aspir ate o f the
class o f the final letter , viz . into“8 9h, e dh , ‘l dh, “bh . (Pan . V I I I . 4 ,
W a fer-
stem: o r fem-Fern: dhik+hastinah=dhighastinah o r dhigghas
tinah, Fie o n th e elephantsum + 5 1: v o rW : par ivr cit+hatah=par ivr ddhatah o r par i
vrdddhatah, the mendicant is kill ed'
.
31 + g?! W o r Hg? tat+hutam= tadhy tam o r taddhutam, this is sacr ificed .
EFL-l m m o r m ap+har anam= abhar anam o r abbhar anam, water
fetching .
70 . i t befo r e“
ai l is no t changed into 1 (1, but into 3 1° (Pan. V I I I . 4,
Ex . H1 + 3 251 wai t tat laba
'ham tal labdham, this is taken.
331 +W W ]? br ihat laldtam hr ihallaldtam,a large fo r e
h ead.
7 1 . Final i n befo re a l is changed into a l but th is a ] is pr o no unced
thr o ugh th e no se, and is wr itten with the A nu svar a do t Over it . It is usual
in th is case to unite the A nu svara as a half—mo o n,cal led A r dha-chandr a .
A
EX . 173 1 +W : Rafi” : mahan la'
bhah maha l labkah, large gain.
72. Final 35 n,‘m\n, and 1 n
, pr eceded by a sh o r t vowel and fo ll owed
y vowel,ar e doubl ed . (Pan. VI I I . 3 ,
Ex . min-1+ 3 11m : m m : dhcivan aévah dhavannaévah, a running h o rse .
113 135 31113 m i ni? p r atyan dste p r atyanndste, he sits tu rned
towar d th e west .
guard sm'
ilr : gm sagan (is l e sugannaste, h e s its co unting wel l
If Q n, urn, and Ft n ar e pr eceded by a lo ng vowel and fo ll owed by any
vowel,no change takes place.
EX . m +w e kavin dhvayasva, cal l th e po ets .
Technical terms l ikem anddi , a l ist O f suffixes beg inning with an, o r firé'
il'nm ta.
wo rds ending in tin, ar e exempt fr om this rule . S ee al so W ilkins, S anskr its Grammar ,
E 2
23 EXTERNA L SANDHI . 73
73 . Final i n befo r e initial ink,‘
q kh, and t : p ,
‘
rfiph, r emains unchanged.
Final s n befo r e g emss\
chh, r equir es th e inter cessio n O f 51 3 .
Final i n befo r e zvt, s th, r equ ir es the inter cessio n o f g sh.
Final a n befo r e“
Q t, r equ ires th e inter cessio n o f g s . (Pan.
V I I I . 3,
B efo r e these inserted sibilants th e o r iginal i n i s ch anged to Anu svar a.
Ex . m +w =gfigm hasan chalcdr a = hasa7nschakdr a, h e did it
laugh ing .
m + 3 1m: “refs-3 111. dha
'
van chhagah dhavamschhagah, a run
ning go at .
m fzfgn’
s a’
Fefpr : chalan ti tti bhah chala i izshtittibhah, a
m oving tittibha—b ird .
wag-1 zgn qgiggr : mahan thalclcur ah mahaihshthakkur ah, a gr eat
ido l .
mtg m mint : patan tar uh=pata7nstar uh, a fall ing tr ee .
N o te— m pr as‘a'
m,qu iet , fo rms the nom .m irr as
’
a’n but th is final i n, being the
r epr esentat ion O f an o r iginal 31m,is no t al l owed befo r e Rah, fi ehk, t, QM,
“
i t, { th to
take a sibilant . Ex . nsng-f ffi fil =m pr asan
-t—chino ti=pr a§dfichino ti ; no t
mi li tant: pr as‘dfizs’
chino ti . (Pas . V I I I . 3 ,
74 . Final s: n and may be fo ll owed by initial sss, q sh
, g s with o ut
causing any change ; but it is Optio nal to add a It after the g n and a
{ t after the q n. Thus gs: nsa becomesgs:
nks’
a (o r gs nkchha ,
g t: nsha becomesgt : nlcsha ; g r: nsa becomes gs nksa ; as: nsa becomes
ass: ntéa (o r ugs ntehha); m1 neha becomes net : ntsha; as nsa becomes
ntsa . (Pan. V I I I . 3 ,EX. ms Q? z: mgslfi o r mgfi
'fi (o r lugs-71) p r an sete=pr dnsete o r
pranlcéete (o r p rankchhete).
m 4 “ fir :“
gum o r W K sagan sar ati sagansar ati o r
sagantsar ati .
75 . Th e same r ule applies to final g n befo r e s s s and g s,but no t
befo r e g sh, wher e it r emains unch anged. B efo r e srs it is fir st changed
into palatal 3 7W and mi ls may again be ch anged to a s h ehé,
a iichchh 72, o r ssj i chh . B efo r e g s, g n may r emain unchanged,
o r“
cans may be changed into a nts . (Pan. V I I I . 3 ,
EX . tan shat : tanshat, th o se s ix .
o r w arm o r m am o r “ s i g ntdn+ sdr dzi la
'
n z tdnsdr da'
ldn o r tci fichs’
cir dzl lan o r tci fiehchhar dzl lan
o r tci iichhdr a’il lan, th o se tiger s . (Pan . V 1 1 1 . 3 ,
To al low i n to r emain unchanged befo r e Sl s’
was a mer e mispr int in B enfey’s large
grammar , and has l o ng been co rr ected by that sch o lar .
77, EXTERNA L SAN DH I. 29
ing-t ufi z wmsfi o r m ?! tan + sahate = tdnsahate o r tantsahate,
he hear s th em .
fg‘
g (Fgg) n’
gflj o r fs‘
fig hin (hints) an= hinsn o r hinten,amo ng
enem ies . (The base Fi g hiv’
zs , befo re the g sa o f the lo o . plur .,is
tr eated as a Pads .) S ee 53 , 55 .
76 . A final {t befo re g s must r emain unchanged , and gt may be inser ted .
Ex , a? afar; m o rm : shat sar i tah shatsar i tah o r shatlau
r i tah, six r iver s . (Pan. V I I I . 4, 42 ; 3,
A nusvar a and F inal gm .
77. gm at the end o f wo r ds r emains unchanged if fo llowed by any
initial vowel .
EX . f i g-l as him aim Fame: kimatr a, W hat is ther e
B efo r e co nso nants it may, with o u t exceptio n, be changed to A nusvar a. (Pan .
V I I I . 3,
Th is is the gener al rule . Th e except io ns ar e s imply Optio nal (Pan . V I I I .
4. viz .
B efo r e 35 h, iskh,my, g gh, s it,th e final ( m o r A nusvar a may be
changed into g n.
B efo r e g eh, s
\
chh, g j , lsj h ,ss ri , to i n.
B efo r e 2;t, s th, s t], g dh, m\n, to aw.
B efo r e a t, g th, ad, g dh, g n, to i n.
B efo r e up, tfiph,“
a b, g bh, 8sm,to ( m.
B efo r e Ry, asl,“
M ,to Qty, é l, i v. S ee § 56 . 6 .
Hence it fo llows that final { 111 may be changed into A nusvar a befo r e all
co nsonants, and mus t be so changed o nly befo r e 3 : s, 1 sh, g s , gh, and gr ,
i . e . the five co nsonants wh ich h ave no co r r espo nding nasal class-letter .
It wo uld be mo st desir able if sch o lar s wo uld never avail themselves o f the o ptio nalchange O f final A nusvar a into $73
, aa, Ill a , i n, firm. W e sh o uld then be spared a number
o f compound letter s wh ich ar e tr o ublesome bo th in wr it ing and pr inting ; and we sho uld
avo id the ambiguity as to the o r ig inal natur e o f these class-nasal s when fo ll owed by initial
sonant palatals,l ingual s, and dentals . Thus if Fl surfs tamj ayati, he co nquer s her , is ’
wr itten manta tdfi j ayati , it may be taken fo r m m tdn j ayati , h e co nquers them,
wh ich , acco r ding to 63 , must be changed into mas ts tdfi j ayati . In the same manner
m tan damayati may be either“
r"? m tan damayati , he tames them, o r mm tam damayati , he tames her . A l l th is uncertainty Is at o nce r emo ved if final {m 13
always changed into A nusvar a, whatever be the init ial co nso nant O f the fo ll owing wo rd .
E x . fans-l Efl ffl=fi i Hfflffl (o r fi gflffi) him har ashi = him kar o shi (o r
kin kar o shi), W hat do est th o u
m afg af‘
g (o rm fg)éatrum +j ahi sat rmnj ahi (o r satrufi
j ahi), kil l th e enemy.
30 EXTERNA L SANDHI . 78
s ighs+ Hrfa=s cfi 7:e (o r wa rt? ) nad im + tar ati nad imt ar ati (o rnad in tar ati), he cr o sses th e r iver .
gsg + swfa=g°
s $1w (o r W ) gnr um namati z gur um namati
(o r gurun nama l i), h e salu tes th e teacher .
fars+tfisi = ai 1IW? (o r W ) him +pha lam = himpha lam (o r him
phalam), What is the u se 7
m +W = sma°
th is ? (o r W ) sdstr am +mimamsate
sdstr ammimamsate (o r sastr am mimamsate), h e studi es the bo o k .
B efo re g y, is l, i t v
tnfir (o r Hmfinfi-I) satvar am + yciti = satvar amydti
(o r satvar ay'
ya'
ti), he walks qu ickly.
famn+m = fagi W (o r W ) vidyam + labhate= vidyam la
hhate (o r vidya l labhate), h e acqu ir es wisdom .
ms+ § s= 7: as (o r fig s) tam + veda tam veda (o r tail veda), I
know h im .
“
B efo r e g r , a s, fis h, g s, g h
W + flflsfir acts f ifsfi: har unam r o diti harunamr o diti,he cr ies
piteo usly .
W WU‘ fi z m srfi sayyaydm sete= sayyayamsete, h e l ies o n
the co uch .
“ 11+ 31371
: firs 51317: mohsham seveta mo hsham seveta, let a man
cultivate spir itual fr eedom .
W + {F f-
d $133“
gaf f: madhar am hasati madhar am hasati, h e
laugh s sweetly .
78. ( m at the end O f a wo rd in paasd, i . e . at the end O f a sentence,
is pr o no unced as m,no t as A nu svar a. It may be wr itten ,
however,fo r th e
sake O f br evity,with th e simple do t 8
,no te), and it is so wr itten th r o ugh
o ut in th is gr ammar . EX . (“
é evam,thu s
, (o r m evam.
79. Final g m befo r e s h , if s h be immediately fo ll owed by g n, ( in,
fl y, a l, g v,may be tr eated as if it wer e immediately fo llowed by these
letter s (Pan . V I I I . 3 , 26 , S ee, h owever , 5) 77.
EX . fam+ §w= fafiga o r fang s h
im hnnte : himhnute o r hin hnute,W hat
do es h e h ide 7
fs s+ s r= fa°
fi a : o r fi gs: him + hyah= himhyah o r at;hyah, W hat
abo ut yester day 7
fiFfl-l 31m fi ’ R afi: o r W W him hma layati himhma layati
o r himhma layati , W hat do es h e m o ve 7
80 . If 7 h i is pr eceded by th e pr epo s ition mssam, an g s is inser ted,
and gm changed to A nu svar a. (Pan. V I . I , 1 37; V I I I . 3 , 2
EX .
”
81 + q fig s : mm hr i tah samshri tah, h al lowed .
33 ,EXTERNA L S ANDHI. 3 1
81 . In a“ gammy ,nom . m samr dt, king , ( m is never changed .
(Pan. V I I I . 3 ,
V isarga and Fina l {i s and ”
g r .
82 . The ph o netic changes o f final s ibilants,which are co nsider ed the
mo st difficul t , may be r educed to a few very s imple ru les . It sh o u ld o nly
be bo rne in mind
1 . That th ere ar e r eal ly five sibilants , and no t th r ee ; that the signs fo r the
guttur al and labial sibilants became o bso lete , and wer e r eplaced byth e two do ts (z)which pr oper ly bel o ng to th e V isarga o nly, i . e . to the
unmo dified sibilant .2 . That al l sibilants and V isarga ar e surd, and that their pr oper co r r espo nding
so nant is the g r .
83 . The o nly sibil ant which can be final in paved is the V isarga . If
V isarga is fo l lowed by a sur d letter , it is changed into the sibilant o f that
class to wh ich th e fo ll owing sur d letter belo ngs , pr o vided there is a sibilant .
It sh o ul d be o bserved,h owever
,that th e guttur al and labial s ibilants ar e
now wr itten by h, and that the same sign m ay al so be u sed instead o f any
s ibilant, if fo ll owed by a sibilant .
EX . 7m m m : (o r iginal ly H?!U arm)tatah hdmah tatah hcimah
(o r iginal ly tatax hdmah), h ence love .
316 3+ fi z w : p ii rnah chandr ah : pum aé chandr ah, the full
m o on .
Ta: m m tar oh chhdyd tar o s'
chhdyd, th e shade o f
the tr ee .
sfim m fir mm fir bhi l ah galatz’
bhitashtalati , th e fr igh tened
man is distu rbed .
W : zgt . m gr bhagnah ihahhur ah bhagnashthahhur ah, the
br o ken ido l .m fil
’t m nadydh tir am nadyds timm, the bo rder o f th e
r iver .
wan: mi : "
arm: m’
t (o r iginally mm3mi ) nadydh+pdr am nadyci lz
pdr am (o r iginal ly nadyc’
i (ppdr am), th e o ppo site sh o r e o f a r iver .
V isarga befo r e s ibi lants (Pan. V I I I . 3 ,
W +W t=m z o r gm fi rst? sup tah+ §i éuh= suptaé éiéulz o r
sup tah éiéuh, th e ch ild sleeps .
m + 1fimz=m ufim o r m 6 3 31: bhdgah+ 3hodaéah= blzdga3h
shodaéah o r bhdgah shodaéah, a sixteenth par t .
mm: +wfiz=m mfiz o r m : mi : p rhthamalz+ sargalz=P mMam
sar gah o r pr athamah sargah, th e fir st sectio n .
32 . EXTERNA L SANDHI . 84
No te I — If Visarga is fo ll owed by an init ial fi ts,it is no t changed into dental
“
Q 3 ,but r emains Visarga, as if fo l l owed byEs . (Pan . V I I I . 3 ,
E x . m fir m: mt fir saghah—I- i sar ati s’
aghah tsar ati , a wicked man ch eats .
352 N R: 752WE: hah+tsaruh= hah tsar uh,Wh ich is the h andle o f th e swo r d ?
No te 2— If, o n th e co ntr ary, Visarga is fo l l owed by a s ibilant with a surd letter , the
Visarga is frequently dr o pt in MS S . (Pan . V I I I . 3 , 36 , vart .)
EX . a'
q’
l t m $13 12“I o r E devcih+stha= devcih s tbd o r devci stha, yo u ar e go ds;
(al so3
em deva'
s stha .)
{fit w = €FC w o r {ftw har ih+sphur ati= har ih Sphur ati o r har i
sphur ati , Har i appear s ; (al soW har is sphur ati .)
No te 3— If no uns ending in {q is o r “ as,like havih o r dhanah, ar e fo l l owed
by wo r ds beginning with h, t ,
1!p ,mph, and ar e go verned by th ese wo r ds , § sh may
be substituted fo r final Visarga. “fi fafi fil‘ o r FEE: fifi fi!‘ sarpi shpibati o r sarpih pibati ,
he dr inks gh ee ; but filfiasfii : fin W tishghatu sarp ih, piba tvam adaham,let the gh ee
stand, dr ink th o u water . (Pan. V I I I . 3 ,
84 . If final V isarga is fo ll owed by a so nant letter , co nso nant o r vowel ,
the gener a l rul e is that it be changed into g r . (S ee, h owever , Th is rule
admits, h owever , o f th e fo l lo wing exceptio nsI . If th e V isarga is pr eceded by m d
,and fo l lowed by a so nant letter
(vowel o r co nso nant), the V isarga is dro’
pt .
2 . If the V isarga is preceded by 3 1 a, and fo ll owed by any vowel except 15m,
the V isarga is dr opt.
3 . If the V isarga is pr eceded by at a, and fo ll owed by a so nant co nsonant,
the V isarga is dr opt , and the“
a a ch anged to a} 0 .
4 . If th e V isarga is pr eceded by ma,and fo l lo wed by E a
,the V isarga is
dr opt,“
a a ch anged into a}: 0, after wh ich , acco rding to 4 1 , the initial
“is a must be el ided. The sign o f th e el is io n is 8
,called A vagr aha .
E xamples o f the general r ule :
art‘s: havih ayam havir ayam,
th is po et .
( fa: afifii fi es-
Ea r avih adeti r avir adeti , the sun r ises .
TE: m fir film gaah gachchhati _ gaur gachchhati , the o x walks .
fawn “ fit : ffl'
flg’fiqfil vishnuh +j ayati = vishnur j ayati , V ishnu is victo
r io us .
ssh: TN : “Shift“: paso h bandhah=pa§ o r bandhah, th e binding o f the
cattle .
fig: 33 : gm: mahah muhah muhurmuhuh, gradual ly .
an : EITFH 31m vayuh vdti vdyur va'
ti, th e wind blows.
fimg: a fi =f1mzwfir aa h hasati am hasati , the ch ild laugh s .
fa: W z fi'
ufl : nih dhanah : nir dhanah, with o ut wealth .
g: + 7fifi'
1: =znflfi z duh nitih : durnitih, o f bad manner s .
2113131: fir = bhih=j yo tir bhih, instrum . plur .
3 4 EXTERNA L SA N DH I . 86
fo l l ows all th e rules affect ing th e V isarga except th e exceptio nal rules 84 .
z, 3 , 4 ; i . e . if pr eceded by =5r a, and fo l l owed by any so nant letter,vowel
o r co nsonant,the
“
gr is r etained .
E x . 33 :safu m punah ap i =punar api , even again.
um; ( a : fi a p r dtah eva pr dtar eva, very ear ly .
gm;+24? bhr dtah deh i bhr dtar dehz'
,B r o th er
, give
86 . N o g r can ever be fo l l owed by ano ther‘
5 r (Pan . V I I I . 3 , I 4). Hence
fi nal V isarga, wh eth er etym o l o gical ly 11 3 o r g r , if fo ll owed by initial“
gr ,
and ther efo r e by 84 changed to“
gr , is dr opt, and its pr eceding vowel
l ength ened . (Pan. V I . 3 , I I I .)
E x . fag: rm? M IG ?!vi dhuh r dj ate vidhd myate, th e mo o n sh ines .
ma: m am “
( a bhr dtah r ahsha bhr ci fc’
i r aksha,B r o th er
, pr o tect !
gm inf} gmfiffipunah r og i'
z punci r og i, ill again .
These ar e th e gener al ru les o n th e S andh i o f final Visarga, RS and ”
gr .
Th e fo llo wing rules r efer to a few exceptio nal cases .
5587. Th e two pr o no uns It : sah and El i : eshah, th is , become“
a 8a and
mi eshu befo r e conso nants and vowels,except befo r e sh o rt er a and at the
end o f a sentence . (Pan . V I . 1 ,
EX . 3 : W ffi I!gaf f? sah daddti 3a daddti,h e gives .
a : gi n-z i t 33 : sah indr ah z sa indr ah, th is Indr a . The two vowel s
ar e no t l iable t o S andh i .
But 11: W : a‘
l sm sah abhavat=so’bhavat
,h e was .
31K: 112mri tah sah, h e is dead .
S ometimes S andhi takes place, par t icul ar ly fo r th e sake o f th e metr e .
Thu s 1! El i sa, eshu becomes o ccasio nally fifl saisha,be
,this per so n .
“
G ig :
3 a indr ah appear s as 33 : sendr ah. (Pan . V I . 1,
The pr o no un m: syah, h e, fo l lows th e same r ul e o pt io nal ly in po etry. (Pan .
V I . 1,I 3
88. fi t bhoh, an ir r egular vo cative o fm bhavat,th o u
,dr ops its V isarga
befo r e al l vowel s and al l sonant co nso nants . (Pan . V I I I . 3 ,
E x . tfi: ima z xfi im bho h+ i'
sdud : bho is’
cina,
.
O h lo r d !
fit: +33 12=¥fiEm: bhoh devdh bho devdh, O h go ds
The same applies to th e interj ections tfl fi: bhagO ll and W512 r eal lyir r egu lar vo catives o f nm bhagavat, Go d, and W aghavat, sinner .
89. N umer o u s exceptio ns , wh ich ar e best learnt fr om th e dictio nary,o ccur in compo und and derivative wo r ds . A few o f th e m o r e impo r tant
may h er e be mentioned .
89. EXTERNA L S ANDH I. 35
I . N o uns in“ as ,« is , “ us,f o rming thefir st par t of a Compound .
I . B efo re der ivat ives o f 7 kr i , to do (e . g . W ham ,am h im), befo re der ivat ives o f“ ham
to desire (e . g . aimkdnta, W kdma), befo re we kamsa , go blet, é“ kumbha, jar ,
ma pdtr a, vessel ,W kasa,co unter , ear , the final Visarga o f bases
in “ as is changed to It s . (Pan . V I I I . 3 ,
Ex . i n: Hit : m 2 making happy.
“ 2 3 11 2 m 3 ahah+kar ah ahaskar ali , sun .
m 2 z: W u: ayah+kumbhalz ayaskumbhah, ir o n-po t .
There ar e several wo rds o f the same k ind— wh ich ar e best lear nt from the dict io nary— ia
wh ich the Visarga is chang ed into dental s ibilant . (Pan. V I I I . 3 ,
Ex . W W m adhah+padam= adhaspadam, below the fo o t .
m WEN? W 2divah+patih= divaspatih, l o rd o f heaven.
aw : ufir: = snwwfirzvdchah+patih=vdchaspatih, lo rd o f Speech .
m: “
am : W 2bhah+kar ah= bhdskar alz, ssun,&c .
2 . No uns in« is andwas, such as havih, “3 2dhanuh, &c .
,befo re wo rds beginning
with Q h,R ich, flip, and”
(Eph, always take t ( sh . (Pan. V I I I . 3 ,
Ex . afi : “N i 11W ghee-dr inking .
g31132 am : W 2dyuh+kdmah= dyushkdmah, fo nd o f life .
No te — B YW 2bhrdtushputr ah, neph ew, is used instead o f 8 13235 2bhr dtuhputr alz, theson o f th e br o ther .
II . Wo r ds in “ as, “ is, “ us,tr eated as Pr epo si tio ns .
I . The wo rds W512 namah, 93 2pur ah, fil’
C tir ah, if compo unded pr epo sitionally with 5 kri,change Visarga into
"
its . (Pan . VI I I . 3,
Ex . an: EEK . mam : namah+kdr ah= namaskdr ah, ado ration (but “ 2Wnamah kri tvci , having per fo rmed ado ratio n .)
SC $70 W pur ah-i- Icri tya=pur askr i tya, having pr efer r ed.
fiTC“
em“? m ti r alz-i—kdrz’
: ti r aska'
r i,despis ing . In fi‘I
'
C t i rah the change
is co nsider ed o ptio nal . (Pan . V I I I . 3 ,
2 . Thewo rds fa: nih,$2duh, vahih,m 2civih, “132pradah,W cha tulz, if compo undedwith wo r ds beg inning with 35k, l i lo/i , flip o r fljph, take fish instead o f final Visarga .
(Pan . VI I I . 3 ,
Ex . fa : W 2 fam e: nih+ icdmah= nishkcimah, l o veless .
fir: "73 2= fim 2nih+phalah= nishphalah, fruitless .
“If? Ti m dvih+k7~itam=avishkr i tam, made mani fest .
$2 W : fi fl‘
duh+kr i tam= dushkr i tam, badly do ne, criminal .
W'
g" m : w chatuh+konam= chatushkoaam, square .
III . N ouns in“ as, fl is, “ us , bef o r e cer tain Taddhita S ufi z es .
I . B efo r e th e Taddhita suffixes fl mat,EI
'
K'vat,W e in, and W vala, the final {3 appears
as o r fi sh
EX . W fEFT W tej ah -Jf-vin : tej asvin, with splendo ur .
W : i o tih -f-mat=jyo tishma t, with l igh t .
W W : m r aj ah+vala= r aj asvala, a buffal o .
F 2
36 EXTERNA L SANDHI . 90
2 . B efo re Taddh ita suffixes beginning with Hi t, the”
i s, pr eceded by {i o r 3 14,is changed
into t ( sh, after wh ich th e TUbecomes 2\ t.
Ex . Wfi ‘
: a? fi g.
ar chih+ tvam ar chishtvam, br ightness .
fi g“. i i W chatuh+ tayam= chatushtayam,
th e aggr egate o f four .
3 . B efo r e th e Taddh ita suffixes W pds’
a,75 3 1 kalpa,
“
68 ha, and in compo sitio n with the
verb M kdmyati , no uns inw as r etain their final Rs,while no uns in« is and
“ as ch ange it intot ( sh I o o ). (Pan. VI I I . 3,
Ex . W 2 W 11118 17750
!payah+pci§ am=payaspai§am, bad milk .
W 2 3 73 3 W payah+kalpam=payaskalpam,a l ittle m ilk .
W 352 m gl o rio us .
W m W ya§ah+kdmyati yas‘askdmyati , he is ambitio us .
fl fih W m bad ghee .
$ 2 353 ! m sarpih+kalpam= sarpishkalpam,a l ittle ghee .
“32 W dhanuh+kah= dhanushkah, bel o nging to th e bow.
“32 m W dhanuh+kcfmyati=dhanushkdmyati, he desir es a bow.
90 . N ouns ending in r adical “
gr 85) r etain the ( r befo r e the g sa o f
the lo o . plur .,and in compo sitio n befo r e no uns even th o ugh beginning with
surds .
Ex . Eng g mfivar su vdr shu,in the water s .
fag q fa“ Tfl’fifing ir +patih g irpatih, l o rd o f speech .
In compo unds, h owever , like Tfifif‘
fl: g irpatih, the Optio nal u se o f V isarga is sanc
tio ned (Pan. V I I I . 2, 70 , wi lt ), and we meet with rfizqfing ihpatih, igwfir: dhah
patih, and fi fm dhn'
rpatih; m afia: svahpatih and m svarpatih, l o rd o f
heaven ;mzqfin ahahpatih and wafifir: aharpatih, l o rd o f th e day.
3313 ahar , the Pada base o fM ahan, day, is furth er irr egular , because its final is
treated l ike It s befo re the Pada-terminatio ns, and in compo sitio n befo r e wo rds beg inningwith Q r : hence$1 2 $12 W W2ahah+bhih=ahobhih g m g ahah+su
ahahsu 1132 UH“ m ahah+ r dtr ah= ahora
'
tr ah, day and nigh t . (Pan . V I I I . 2 ,
68, vart .)
91 . a chh at th e beginning o f a wo rd,after a final sh o r t vowel , and
af ter th e par t icles and and mmd, is changed to a chchh.
E x .
"
H? ET!"“
if? m tava chhciyci l ava chchhdyd, thy shade .
HT W C“ : RTW md chhidat end chohh idat, let h im no t cut .
i n m i? m d chhda’ayati dchchhddayati, h e co ver s .
A fter any o th er l o ng vowel s , th is change is optio nal .
m o r W badar ichhdyei o r badar ichchhdyd, sh ade o f B adar is .
In the bo dy o f a wo r d,th e change o f a chh into a chchh is necess ary
bo th after l o ng and sh o r t vowel s .
E x . {a t}! ichchhati , h e wish es . fia t mlechchhah, a barbar ian. (Pan. V I .
1,
93 , EXTERNA L SANDHI. 37
92 . Initial ms, no t fo ll owed by a har d co nso nant, may be changed
into “
a chh, if the final letter o f the pr eceding wo rd is a hard co nso nant o r
{ it (fo r i n). (Pan. V I I I . 4,
E x .Elm m =m o r W vdk+ §atam= vdkéatam o r vdkchhatam
, a
hundred Speeches .
m i . i f} m fig} o r W par ivr cit éete=par ivr dt fete
o r par ivra'
t chhete, the‘ beggar lies down .
“1 +W m o r m mahat sakatam makuch sakatam
o r mahach chhahatam,a gr eat car .
3 1 +“Elfin a
'
g‘
fira tat élo lcena tachchh lo lcena, by that verse .
m +W m m: o r w dhdvan éaéah dhdvafi sasala o r
dhdvaii chhasah, a r unning har e.
331 + smz=m rz z o r m : up + éabdah= ap sabdah o r apchhabdah,
the so und o f water .
93 . If git, 1 9h, gdh,trdh, o r It bh stand at the end o f a syllable wh ich
begins with 7I\9 , ad, a: d, o r { I}, and l o se th eir aspiratio n as final o r
o therwise,the initial co nsonants 119, ( d, at d, o r
“
i b ar e changed into
agh , g dh, udh, 116/z.
E x . 53 duh,a m ilker
,becomes 35 dhuk.
fW QILvisvagudh, al l attracting, becomes i évaghut.
fi budh,wise, becomes gai bhut.
EXTERNAL SANDHI .
O
EXTERNA L S ANDH I. 3 9
40 EXTERN A L S A N D HI .
CHANGE o r q u'
i N To “U“
The i n o f g nu, the sign o f th e Su co njugatio n,and the an o f
sinnd, the sign o f th e Kr i co njugatio n, ar e no t changed into IIIn in th e two
Verbs qq trip and w hshubh (Pan. VI I I . 4, Hence
Hgfifi tripnoti , he pleases g ulf? Icshubhnc'
i ti,h e sh akes .
'
B ut W éz‘ino ti , h e h ear s . gmrfit pushndti , h e no ur ish es .
W kshubhcina, imper . sh ake .
Table showing the Changes of i n into urn.
in spite o f intervening ch ange if th er e fo ll o w
V owel s, V owels
,o r
(including i h and A nu svar a),Labial s
(including i v),
98. Th e changes her e explained o f =I\
n in the m iddl e o f simple wo rds ,
(wh ether it bel o ngs to a suffix o r a term inatio n,) ar e th e mo st impo rtant to
r emember . B ut i n is l ikewise liable to be ch anged into urn wh en it
o ccur s in the seco nd par t o f a compo und th e fi r st part o f wh ich co ntains
o ne o f th e letter s"
ag ri ,”
gr , o r ( sh , and par t icul ar ly after cer tain
pr epo sitio ns . Her e,h owever
,th e r ules ar e much m o r e uncer tain
,and we
must depend o n th e dictio nary r ather than o n th e gr ammar fo r the r igh t
employment o f the dental o r l ingual nasal s. Th e fo l lowing rules ar e the
mo st impo r tant
I .
‘
Th e change o f i n into ul n do es no t take place unless th e two member so f th e compo und ar e
‘
combined so as to e xpr ess a single co nceptio n .
Hence‘
Emfl’bdr dhr i
,a leath ern th o ng, + 3 8 nasa
,no se
, gives mbdr a
’
hr inasah, if it is th e name o f a cer tain animal ; acco rding to W il so n,
o f a go at‘
with lOng ear s ; acco r ding to o th er s,o f a rhino cer o s
,o r a bir d .
(Unadi —Sutr as,ed . A ufr ech t
,s . v. Pan . V I I I . 4 , B ut 3 51 charman
,
leath er, + 7ITF
‘
G'
EETndsikd, no se, givesm : charmandsihah, if it means
h aving a leathern no se. A n impo r tant exceptio n ism sarvandman,
a technical term fo r pr o no uns , (air sarva being th e fir st in th eir l ist,)
wh ich Panini h imself empl oys with th e dental i n o nly . (Pan. I . I
O th er pr oper names no t fo ll owing th e gener al ru le , ar e few tr inaganahI,
45 In theVeda we findmfg tripnuhi , Rv. I I . 1 6, 6 75m tripnavah, Rv. I I I . 42 , 2 .
‘
l‘
The 'Sarasvati Says l i ifl lfi that th e n is o ptio nally changed when Tr inayanah is
a name. Hence fam tr inaganah o r fawn tr inayanah.
‘1 °I§ ~ RQ‘
98. CHA NGE o r ”i n mm “Ul 43
thr ee-eyed,name o f S
'
iva ; tau-
{m r aghunandanah, name o f Rama ;
3 513 : svarbhdnuh, name o f Rahu,&c .
W o rds to be r emember edennui : agr anih, fir st
, pr incipal , fr om W agr a ,fr o nt
,and Vfini
,to lead .
w i th: grdmanih, head bo r o ugh ,fr om um grama , multitude
,and 70 ui
,
to lead .
W vr i tr aghnah, Indr a, kill er o f V r itra ; but Tan i vr i tr ahanam,ace . o f
e i tr ahan. (Pan . V I I I . 4, I 2 ;
W 3.
par dhnam,afterno o n
,fr om 1m par d, o ver , and W uhan
,day ; but
am : sarvdhnah, the wh o le day, fr om 115 sarva,all
,and m ahan
,
day ;and the samewhenever th e fir st wo rd ends in a? a . (PfinN I I I . 4,
Ther e ar e m inute distinctio ns,acco rding to wh ich
,fo r instance
, W m
Icsh ir apanam if it means the dr inking o f mil k,o r a vessel fo r dr inking
milk,in : afit qm: Icaznsah hsh irapdnah, may be pr o no unced with dental
o r l ingual n (an o r urn); but if it is the name o f a tr ibe wh o live o n milk,
it mu st be pr o no uncedm : hsh ir apcinah, m ilk-dr inking . (Pan. V I I I .
4, 9 and In the same manner gm dar bhavcihanam,a hay
car t,is spelt with lingual urn, wh ile in o rdinary compo unds , such as
W indr avdhanam,a veh icle belo nging to Indr a
,the dental i n
r emains unchanged . (Pan . VI I I . 4,
2 . In a compo und co nsisting o f m o r e than two wo rds the i n o f any o ne
wo r d can o nly be affected by the wo r d immediately pr eceding . Hence
mm mdsha-vdpena , by sowing beans but W W mdsha-kumbha
vdpena , by sowing fr om a bean-jar . (Pan . V I I I . 4 ,
3 . In a compo und the change o f i n into IIIndo es no t take place if the fir st
wo r d ends in 119.
E x .$535 WWI W ri le aganam rigayanam.
S ome gr ammar ians r estr ict this to pr oper names . (Pan. V I I I . 4 , 3 ,
O r if it ends in ( sh,and the next is fo rm ed by a pr imary suffix with 1 ”
E x . fa: ‘Tlfi‘ fi uflfi nih+pdnam nishpdnam.
113 : m'
fi i W a’
yaj uh+pdvanam yaj ushpdvanam. (Pan. V I I I .
4, 35
4. In compo unds the i n o f no uns ending in i n, and the=I\n o f case- termina
tio ns,if fo ll owed by a vowel
,ar e always l iable to change .
Efifzarffi vr ihivdpin, r ice- sowing , may fo rm the genitive aifgarfiun: t r i
h ivdp inah but al so W ih ivdp inah.
film o r W mffi vr ihivtipdni o r vr z‘
hivdpdni , nom . plur . neu t.
al fgmfimo r ai fzafimvr ihivdpena o r vr ihivdpena , instrum . s ing .
G 2
44 CHANGE O F an INTO atn 5598.
Likewise feminines such as“
al fz'mfilt lfi o r
‘
afifi‘
érIfiF-fl vr ihivdp ini o r vr ihivdp ini .
(Kas.-V ritti V I I I . 4, I I .)No te— The i n o f secondary suffixes, attached to the ‘
end o f compo unds, is, under thegeneral co nditions, always changed to E n. Thus m khar apah (i . e . do nkey
-keeper )becomesm fl nkhar apa
'
yanah, the descendant o f Kharapa . m 2mdtr ibhoginah,
fit to be po ssessed by a m o th er , fr om W mdtr i,m o th er , and i i i?“bhogah, enjoyment, with
th e adjective] suffix fi zna (samdsanta), is always Spelt with “n. (S ee al so 98. A gain,
wh ilew gargabhagini , th e sister o f Garga, always r etains its dental“
f i n, being an
o r dinary compo und,W W ? gargabhag ini wo uld have th e l ingual fi n, if it was der ived
fr om "M 2gargabhagah, the shar e O f Garga, with th e adjectival sufii x fem .W ini ,
enjoying the shar e O f Garga. W o r ds wh ich after they have been comp o unded take a new
suffix ar e tr eated in fact like single wo r ds and th er efo r e fo ll ow the general
rul e o f 96 . (Pan. VI I I . Kas.-V r itti VI I I . 4 , I I , vart .)
5 . If th e seco nd par t O f the compo und is mo no syllabic,then the ch ange O f
a final Ti n fo ll owed by a terminatio nal vowel,o r O f a terminatio nal an
,
is O bl igato ry . (Pan. VI I I . 4,
E x .
"653 31 vr i tr ahan, V r itr a-kil ler ; gen. gags]: vr i tr ahanah but
d irghdhni . (Pan. V I I I . 4 ,
gum sur dpah, dr inking sura; 1l om . plu r . neu t .‘
gtW Ifmsur dpdni .
m Icsh ir apah, dr inking m ilk ; instrum . sing . aft-( 6mhsh ir apena .
6 . If the seco nd part O f a compo und co ntains a guttur al , th e change is o bligato ry
,even th o ugh the seco nd par t be no t mo no syllabic . (Pan . V I I I . 4 , I
E x .
“
gm : har ihdmah, l oving Har i ; instrum . sing . {Rm har i /ca'
mena;
but W NW agr agdmini . (Pan. V I I I . 3 ,
gm éushkagomayena , lu strum . s ing . o f 33W sushkagomaya ;
(spa sush/ca , dry, Tfitmgomaga, dung .)
7. Likewise after pr epo sitio ns wh ich co ntain an”
g r , the =I\ n O f pr imaryaffixes, such as 33 3 mm,
‘SIfi-I ani, W u aniya, {FLin, a nd (if pr eceded
by a vowel), and m mdna,is ch anged to q n, but under cer tain r estr ic
t ions . (Pan . V I I I . 4,Ex . m i l pr avapanam Emmi pr amdnam ; m pr dpyamdnam.
W hile in th ese cases th e change is pr o no unced O bl igato ry, it is said to be
Optional after cau sative verbs (Pan . V I I I . 4, and after verbs begin
ning and ending in co nso nants with any vowel but is a (Pan . VI I I .
4, h ence mum}and pr aydpanam and pr ayapanam ; naimui o r 0 7?
p r akopanam o r p r akopanam. A gain,after verbs beginning in a vowel
(no t 33 a) and str ength ening th eir bases by nasal izatio n,t h e change
is necessary it is fo rbidden in o th er verbs,no t beginning with vowels
th o ugh they r equ ir e nasalizatio n hence n m Z W pr a inganam
p r enganam but 11 fwd n‘
émfi pm A» hampanam pr akampanam.
§ 98. CHANGE o r a n 45
Las tly,ther e ar e several r o o ts which de fy al l these r ules
,viz .mbhd , x5bhfl,
Ii p 12,“m
i/cam, mi 9am,
untimely, fi ve}; hence mini pr abhdnam &c .
,
never mmflp r abhdham ; Ifivfip r avepanam, never flawpr avepanam.
8. A fter pr epo sitio ns co ntaining an r,such as m antar , fagnir , m para,
trfi par i , and Itpm , and afte r fi dur , th e ch ange o f i n into m\n takes
place
I . In mo st r o o ts beginning with 1 73 41339 . V I I I . 4 , I 4.)
I! “ If?! m afif p r a namati =pr anamati , he bows .
W W W par d nudati par dnuda ti, he pushes away.
vim atrfir M antah nayati antamayati , he leads in.
u m m : pm ndyakah=pr andyakah, a leader .
The r o o ts which are liable to thi s ch ange o f th eir initial 1 n ar e ente r ed in
the D hatupatha, th e li st o f r o o ts o f native gr ammar ians , as beginningwith HUI . Thu s we sho uld find the r o o t mnam enter ed asmnam,
simply in o r der thus to indicate its li abil ity to change .
2. In a few r o o ts thi s change is optio nal if th ey ar e fo ll owed by Krit affixes ,V iz . (Pan . V I I I . 4 ,
1’q M3
,to kiss ; nfuifimai o r nfa
’
finmip r anin’
zsi tavyam o r pr am’
fizsi tavyam.
fmq nz'
ksh,to kiss ;M o r ufiim'mp r anikshanam o rmanikshanam.
fq m'
d,to blame ;mm o r xii
i-13 71pr anindanam o r p r am’
ndanam.
3 . In a few r o o ts th e init ial 3 n r esists all change, and th ese r o o ts ar e entered
in the D hatupétha as beginning with i n, V iz . (Pan. V I . I , 65 , var t .)
31 nrz'
t, to dance . W ndt, to fall down, (Chur
fie: nand, to r ej o ice . awl with, to ask.
i t? h ard, to h owl . m nddh,to beg.
Hg nakk, to destr o y . 71nr
i,to lead .
Q 0 o o 0 0
E x . W parmar tanam W parmandanam.
4. Th e r o o tmud é, to destr o y, ch anges a;n into nut o nly when its 316 is
no t ch anged to ( sh. It F ifi M i ri a m naéyate=p r anaéyate ; but
I! W : m zp r a nashtah=p ranashtah,destr oyed . Pfit}. V I I I . 4 ,
‘
5 . In th e r o o t 5311 6172,to breath e, the i n is changed to nut. if th e ( r is no t
separ ated fr om th e i n by mo r e than o ne letter . Thu s I! wfi fif
urFmfiI pm ani l i z p r dni ti, h e br eath es ; but vfi +wfi fi =fi fafi
par i ani ti = paryaniti (Patanjali). Th e r edupli cated ao r is t fo rm s
W p r dninat ; the desider ative with m par d is W m p ar dni
(Pan. V I I I . 4, 1 9,
It is no t 7Waning, to dance, but Ri na;o f the Chur class, and hence wr itten with a
l o ng 6 . S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . I I . p . 4 1 , no te.
46 CHANGE O F “I” INTO atn.
6 . In the r o o t “ h im,to kill , th e i n is changed except wh ere g h has to
be changed to 1 9h . (Pan. V I I I . 4 , Thus II I-W : m p r a
hanyate p r ahanyate, h e is str uck down W antar hanyate
(Pan. V I I I . 4, bu t u+ frfi1 =mifif pm ghnanti =pr aghnanti , theykil l . A l so agar-i
“
p r ahananam, kill ing .
The change is o ptio nal again wh er e i n is fo l lowed by ( on o r i v. (Pan .
V I I I . 4, Thus ugh o r ugf'
tmp r ahanmi o r pr ahanmi ; am : o r
W : p r ahanvah o r pr ahanvah.
7. The T-[n o f 23nu o f th e Su and o f mmi o f the Kr i co njugatio n is changed
to my]. in th e Ver bs fg h i , to send,and If!mi, to destr o y. (PanN I I I . 4,
E x . uf’
guéfirpr ahizwcmti Wfi‘
fllfif p r aminanti .
8. The II” o f th e terminatio nmfirdni in the imperative is changeable. (Pan.
V I I I . 4 ,Thu s It Ra fa : m finpr a bhavani z pr abhavdh i .
9. Th e It n o f th e pr epo sitio n fi-‘
l ni , if pr eceded by 11pm ,l i ft par i , &c .
,
is ch anged into Inn befo r e th e verbs (Pan . V I I I . 4, 1 7) 11ggad, to Speak,
agnad, to sh o ut , “pat, to fal l , “pad, to go , the verbs cal led 3 ghu,
my? mci
,to m easu r e,
Eq me, to change, tfi s o
,to destr o y, fi han
,to
kill,
“
Inyet, to go , at wt, to blo w,
‘
gTdr ei , to flee o r to sleep, m psd, to
eat ,‘
érq vap ,to sow o r to weave, Hgvah , to bear , “ sam
,to be tranqu il
(div), fa chi , to co l lect, fai dih, to ano int .
The same change takes place even when th e augment intervenes .
(Pan . V I I I . 4, I 7, V fir t .)
um manyanadat.
99. In all o ther verbs except th o se wh ich fo l low r iggad, the change o f
f?! ui after upr a, tnet par i , &c .
, is Optio nal .
Hffl fl'
fl ffl‘
o r M p r anipachati o r p r anipachati .
E xcept again in verbs beginning with Hi [ca o r {it kha , o r ending in fi sh
(Pan. VI I I . 4 , in wh ich th e i n o f fa ui r emains unchanged .
m pr ani /car o ti ;m p ranihhddati ; W manipinashli .
W her e it seemed l ikely to be u seful , the S anskr it r o o ts have been given with their
diacr it ical letter s (anubandhas), but o nly in their D evanagar i fo rm . Panini in enumerating
the r o o t s wh ich change‘EFI‘ ni after Hpr u, fift par i , &c .
,into fma i, mentio ns W ind, but th is,
acco r ding t o the commentar ies, includes two r o o ts,the r o o t wh ich fo rms fiafitfi
mimi te,h e measur es , and the r o o t which fo rms “fi mayate, be changes . Wh er e
in th is gr ammar th e tr anscr ibed fo rm o f a r o o t differ s fr om its D evanagar i o r iginal , the
addit io nal l etter s may always be l o oked upo n as diacr itical marks empl oyed by . nat ive
grammar ians . S ometimes the class to wh ich certain verbs bel o ng has been indicated by
adding the fir st verb o f that class in brackets . Thus s’
am (div) means s’
dmyati, o r s’
am
co njugated l ike div, and no t s’
dmayate.
l o o , CHANGE o r a s INTO ( sh . 47
Change of’
q s into ( sh .
1 00 . A dental ( a (ch iefly o f suffi xes and if preceded
by any vo wel except a , m ii,o r by Q It ,
“
g r , 3 1, is always changed
into th e l ingual fi sh , pr o vided it be fo l lo wed by a vo wel, o r by ( t, ( M,
i n, ( m, ( y, o r i v; l ikewise by cer tain Taddhita suffixes, a ka , m kalpa ,
W pdéa, &c .
If an inserted A nusvar a '
r o r the V isarga o r fish intervenes between the
vowel and th e ( 3,the change into { 8h takes place never theless .
E x . afi q sarpis, infl ectio nal base ; affi: sarp ih, nom . s ing . neut . clar ified
butter ; instrum . {153m sarp ishd nom . plur . Him? sarp iriwhi (herethe A nu svar a intervenes) lo c . plur . fi g sarp ihshu (here the
V isarga intervenes), o r wfig sarp ishshu (her e the ( sh intervenes).
mg vdkshu, lo c . plur . o fm adch, speech .
“33 1 + g 8 5mg sar vaéa lr an sarvaéalrshu,omnipo tent .
mm (EE) g M g chi tr alikh (k) m chi tr alikshu, painte r .
rfi'
fig ir shu, lo c . plur . o f flu: g ir , speech .
“ 3 g HEIRS kama l su kama lshu, naming the go ddess Lakshmi .
firm dhr okshyati, fu t . o f g druh,t o hate ; (h er e gh is changed to
Q h, and th e aspi ratio n th r own‘
011 th e initial 1 d .)lfiarfil pokshyati , fut. o f ERpush , to no ur ish (h er e R
\8h is changed
into‘
éfik.)
fi t m : sarp ih [rah sarp ishkah adj . fo rmed by Eli ka,
having clar ified butter .
Effi: i t : Ffih ‘
t : sarp ih tar ah sarpi shtar ah (her e th e I“ o f
fit : tar ah i s ch anged into ( 1, as in 89, III . If the penul timate
vowel be lo ng , no change takes place ; rfim g istar d. (Pan. V I I I .
3 ,
fi : H1: M sarpih mat sarp ishmat, having clarified but ter .
TheRs must no t be a radical i s; h enceW supisau, because the {s belo ngs to
the r o o t Il l inois . (Pan . V I I I . 3 , Yet “I“ (is‘ishah, fr om r o o t “ 563 . The rules
do no t apply to final Rs ; h enceM a aym'
s tatr a . (Pan. V I I I . 3 ,
1' The A nusvara must be what S anskr it gr ammar ians cal l 7 mm, it must no t represent
a radical nasal ; hence, even if we wr ite g'
gpufizsu, lo c . plur . o f N pufiw,man
,Pada
base a pam,it do es no t become “pumshu. (Pan . V I I I . 3 , A cco rding to B o pp and
o ther Eur o pean grammar ians, wh o do no t l imit th e A nusvara t o the inserted A nusvara ,
we sh o uld have to wr ite eith er Egpumshu, o r , if we wish t o preserve the ( s, T? punsu .
A cco rding to Panini, h owever , 3g pamsu is the right fo rm. The Sarasvat i prescr ibes
Eq nkshu.
48 CHA NGE OF a s INTO “Uh 1 0
Table showing the Changes of a s into fi sh .
A ny V owel s except 11 , an ii
,change if th er e fo ll ow
( in Spite o f V owel s, o r
inserted A nusvara,Visarga, o r sibilant intervening ,) i t, With ,
al so Eqk, gr , a t i n, ( m,
if immediately pr eceding , fi sh Ry, El v.
1 0 1 . Th e same ru le pr o duces th e ch ange o f ( 8 into g sh in r o o ts
beginning with ES 3 if r edupl icated, pr o vided th e vowel o f the r edupl icated
syllable is no t a,3 11 i
i
: E x . a q svap ,to sleep Redupl . Per f .W sushvcipa,
I have slept . fint s idh , D es . fsfirmf‘a sishitsati . Thi s rule is l iable to
e x ceptio ns .
1 0 2 . A gain,many r o o ts beginning wi th q s ch ange it into ( sh after
pr epo s itio ns r equi ring such a change, V iz . Wfi‘l‘
ati , over , $13 ana, after
,
‘
wslfq api , upon,135! abhi
,towar ds , fa ni
,in, far nir
,o ut
, wft par i , r o und,
nfa‘
pr ati , towards , fa vi , away : E x . W +fi fw=wfitfiffl abhi + stauti =
abhishtaati , he praises . The same change takes place even after the augment
has been added,in wh ich case the q s is r eal ly pr eceded by an i t a
E x . swimabhyashtaat, h e pr aised. S ome verbs,after th ese pr epo sitions ,
keep th e fi sh in the r eduplicated perfect : E x . fa“
? si ch, to spr inkle ;
W abhishi iichati,he spr inkles ; W abhishishecha
,he has
Sprinkled. In the intensive fitfl s ich do es no t fo ll ow th is r ule ; h ence
m aabhisesichyate (Pan . VI I I . 3 , 1 1 2) but in the desider ative q s is
changed, M afia abhishishi lcshati . Many o ther cases must be learnt
fr om th e dictio nary o r fr om Panini .
103 . In o r der to give an idea o f the minuteness o f the r ules as co llected by native
gr ammar ians, and o f th e compl icated manner in which these rules are laid down,the fo l
l owing extr acts fr om Panini h ave been subjo ined, th o ugh th ey by no means exhaust thesubject acco r ding to the views o f nat ive grammar ians . It need har dly be added that
beginner s sh ould no t attempt t o bur den th eir memo ry with th ese r ules, th o ugh a glance
at th em may be u seful by giving them an idea o f the intr icacies o f S anskr it gr ammar .
Native grammar ians enumerate al l mo no syllabic verbs beginning with E s,and fo ll owed
by a vowel o r by a dental conso nant, ( likewise W smi, to smile, ffi i svid, to sweat,
fi g svad, t o taste, fi svah
’
j , t o embr ace, “ wap, to sleep,) as if beginning with fi sh .
Thus they wr iteM shidh, In shtha‘
,far shmi . (Pan . v1 . I ,
This is no t do ne with fifl srip , t o go ,W srij , to let o ff , Ffi stri , to co ver , l if t stgi , to
cover , fi styai , to so und,El i sek, to go , 12sri , to go , in o r der to sh ow that their initial
Es is no t liable to be ch anged into fish under any cir cumstances .
They th en give th e gener al r ul e that this initial E{sh i s to be changed into fl s, in al l
th ese verbs , except fi shthiv, t o spit, and “ shvashk, t o g o , (and acco rding to som e
in Q shtyai, sam,) unless wh er e“
( sh is enjo ined a seco nd t ime
50 CHA NGE o r fi s INTO fi sh . 1 04
5 . A fter the pr epo sitio nsW3 anu, fi vi, l ift par i , 55 5! abhi, fani, Riga/and may takefish,
except wh en appl ied to l iving beings . (VI I I . 3 ,
6 . A fter the prep . fa vi, F limskand may take fish, th o ugh no t in the past participle inH ta (VI I I . 3 , but after th e pr ep .
1il'l'lt par i , thr o ugh o ut, even in th e past par ticiple
(VI I I 3 , fi rm : o r W : par ishkannah o r par iskannah.
7. A fter the pr ep .Wnir,fi'Tni, fi vi, the verbs Fgfisgahur and
‘
Efififisphul may take fish .
(VI I I . 3 ,
8. A fter the pr ep . fi vi, fi fiskambh must always take fish . (VI I I . 3 ,
9. The verb Wfi as, after dr o pping its initial vowel , takes fi sh after pr epo sitio ns wh ichcause such a change, and afterW pr adur , if the fish i s fo ll owed by fig o r a vowel
( V I I I . 3, W abhishydt . “lg!W p r aduhshyat . W'
gi‘
fifflpr dduhshanti .
1 0 . The verb E fisvap,when changed to fifisup , takes fish,after g su, fi vi ,W nir
, fi dur
(VI I I . 3 , fig“: sushnp tah. gig“: duhshnp tah.
Exceptional cases, wher e fi s is u sed, and no t fi sh
1 1 . The verb fil’fi sich, fo l l owed by the intensive affix (VI I I . 3 , m abhisesi
chgate.
1 2 . The verb fflfisidh, signifying to go (VI I I . 3 , W par isedhati .
13 . The verb fig sah, if changed toW sodh (VI I I . 3 , m par iso dhum.
14 . Th e verbs Elfi stambh, filfi siv, Hi sak, in the r edupl icated ao rist (VI I I . 3 ,
lIfilfi'
figfipargasi’
shahat .
I 5 . The verb"
g sa, fo ll owed by th e affixes o f the 1 st future, the co nditio nal, o r the desidera
tive (VI I I . 3 , W abhiso shyati . W abhisusflh.
1 6 . Th e verbs Hg sad, é fi svafij , in the r edupl icated perfect (VI I I . 3 , mabhishasa
‘
da . W abhishasvaj e.
1 7. The verb n ad, O ptio nal ly, if preceded by th e augment (VI I I . 3 , m o r
W nyashidat o r nyas’
idat .
1 04 . Ther e ar e many compo unds inwh ich the initial fis o f the seco ndwo r d is changed
to fish, if the fir st wo rd ends in a vowel (except ii). Ex .W yndhishghi r a , fr om'
gfil yudhi ,in battle
,andW sthir a
,firm ;
”
5g sushiha,well ; ggdushghu, ill ;W sushama, beautiful ,
fem : nishamah, difficult, fr omm : samah, even ; fagfi tr i shtubh, a metr e ;W agni
shoman, A gni and S oma ;W mdtg'ishvasri , mo ther
’
s sister ;W pi tfi shvasfl,father
’
s
sister ; W go shyhah, cow-stable ;m : agnishgomah, a sacr ifice‘
i fiffl'm jyo ti
shgomah, a sacr ifice, (here the final fi s o f Ffif‘
flfi jyo tis is dr o pt .) InW tura’
sah,a
name o f Indra, and similar compo unds, fis is changed to fi sh whenever g h becomes {.t
nom .M amba; acc. gr im-
é turasa'
ham. (Pan . vm . 3 ,
Change of D ental fidh into Ling ua l fi dh .
105 . The fidh o f the seco nd per s . plur . Atm . is changed to q dh in the r eduplicatedperfect, the ao rist, and in f lai l shidhvam o f the benedict ive
,pr ovided the fidh, o r the fil shi‘
o f filial shidhvam, fo l lows immediately an inflect ive r o o t ending in any vowel but an3.
(Pan. V I I I .
Ex .a;1m, Perf . WT? chakridhve.
35 chyu; A o r .W T? achyodhvam.
gplu B ened. “ p lo shidhvam.
m 7, RULES o r INTERNA L S AND HI . 5 1
B ut Fairies/zip , A o r . «wa s alcshibdhvam.
fifigaj ; B ened .W yakshtdhvam.
If the same terminatio ns are preceded by the intermediate i i , and the {i be preceded byfi y,
”
g r ,“
Q I, fi t), g h, the change is o pt io nal .
Ex . Q la ; Perf . “ W luluvidhve o rm luluvidhve.
“
Q la ; A o r .W alavidhvam o rW alavidhvam.
Q lu; B ened . M lavishldhvam o rm lavishidhvam.
B ut"
gfi budh A o r .W abo dhidhvam.
Rules of Inter na l S andhi .
1 06 . Th e ph onetic r ul es co ntained in th e pr eceding paragraphs 32-
94)apply, as has been stated, to th e final and initial letter s o f wo rds (padas),wh en br o ugh t into immedi ate co ntact with each o ther in a sentence, to the
final and initial letter s o f wo rds fo rmed into compo unds , and to the final
letter s o f nominal bases befo r e the Pada-terminat io ns , and befo re certain
seco ndary o r Taddh ita'
suffix es, beginning with any co nso nant except fig .
Ther e is ano ther class o f ph o netic rul es appl icable to the final letter s o f
nom inal and ver bal bases (dhdtu) befo r e the o ther terminatio ns
o f declensio n and co njugatio n , befo r e pr imary o r Krit suffixes, and befo reseco ndary o r Taddh ita suffixes , beginning with a vowel o r fi g. S ome o f
these r ules ar e gener al , and deserve to be r emember ed. B ut in many cases
they eith er agr ee with th e rules o f E xternal S andh i,o r are th emselves liable
to such numer o us exceptio ns that it is far easier to learn th e wo rds o r
gr ammatical fo rms th em selves , as we do in Gr eek and Latin,than to try to
master the r ules acco rding to wh ich th ey ar e fo rmed o r suppo sed to be
fo rmed .
Th e fo llowing ar e a few o f the ph onetic ru les o f what may be called
Inter na l S andhi . Th e student will find it u seful to glance at them,with o ut
endeavo ur ing , h owever , to impr ess th em o n hi s memo ry. A fter he has
learnt that fair dvish , to hate , fo rms E’fiwdveshmi , I hate, i'fwdvekshi , th o u
hatest, § f9 do eshli , h e h ates, fi gadvei , h e h ated, f
'
g i‘
gdviddhi,Hate ! fg
‘
gdvit,
a hater, fan: a
’vishah, o f a h ater ,m dvitsu, amo ng hater s ,
— h e will r efer
back with advantage to the rules , mo r e o r less general , which r egul ate the
change o f final.
fi sh into a ir, ZJ, gel , &c . ; but he wil l never learn hi s
declensio ns and Sgnjugatio ns pr oper ly, if, instead o f acquir ing fir st the
par adigms as they ar e, he endeavo ur s to co nstr uct each fo rm by itsel f,
acco r ding to th e ph onetic r ules laid down in th e fo llowing paragraph s .
1 Final V owels .
1 07. N o h iatus is to lerated in th e m iddle o f S anskr it wo rds . W o rds such as
e r anga, fo re-yoke, firm ti tau, sieve, ar e iso lated excepti o ns . The h iatus in com
po unds, such asm pur a go ing in fr o nt,m nama-uktih, saying o f praise, which
H 2
5 2’
RULES o r INTERNA L SANDHI. 1 08
is pr o duced by th e el ision o f a final fis befo r e certain vowel s, has been tr eated bf under the
h ead o f External S andh i . 84 .
1 08. Final W a and WTa’
co alesce with fo l l owing vowel s acco rding to th e gener al
rules o f S andhi .
33 Wfi‘l tuda+ami= §fi1fi tuolan’ii,I beat .
33"
hula -H z ? tude, I beat , A tm .
m ddna+ i= §fi dane,in th e gift .
m china =fifi chine, the two gifts .
If we adm it the’
same set o f terminatio ns after bases ending in co nso nants and in sho rt
W a, it becomes necessary t o lay down some ru les r equ ir ing final W a to be dr o pt befo r ecertain vowel s . Thus if WT? am is put down as th e general terminatio n o f the acc. sing .
,as
inm vach am,it Is necessary t o enjo in the omissio n o f final W a o f fifi sio a befo r e the
W am o f th e ace. sing . in o r der t o ar r ive at ffilfi sivom. In the sam e manner , if W am is
put down as th e terminatio n o f th e 1 . p. sing . impf . Pan , and E e as that o f the I . p . s ing .
pr es . Atm .,we can fo rm r egular ly Wé
’fi advesh-um and fa} dvi she; but we have to laydown a new ru le, acco r ding to wh ich th e final W a o f 33 tuda is dr o pt , in o r der to ar r ive at
th e co r r ect fo rms W3? atud(a)-am and fi tud(a)e. B y fo l lowing the system ado pted in th is
grammar o f giving two sets o f term inat io ns, and thus enabl ing the student to ar r ive at th e
actual fo rms o f declens io n and co njugat io n by a mer ely mechanical combinatio n o f base
and terminatio n, it is po ss ible to d ispense with a number o f these ph o netic rules .
A gain, in the declens io n o f bases ending in radical WTa,certain ph o netic ru l es had to
be laid down, acco r ding t o wh ich the final WTa had to be el ided befo re cer tain terminatio ns
beginning with vowel s . Thus the dative NW T-t” ? sahkhadhma+e was said to fo rm
m sankhadhme, (to the sh ell -bl ower ,) by dr o pping th e final WTa , and no t W '
san
khadhmai . Her e, t o o , the same r esult is o btained by admitting two bases fo r th is as fo r
many o th er no uns , and assigning the weak base, in which the WTd is dr o pt, t o all the
so -called B ha cases , th e cases wh ich B o pp call s the weakest cases (Pan. V I . 4 , Each
o f these systems has its advantages and defect s, and th e m o st pract ical plan is, no do ubt ,t o learn the paradigm s by h eart with o ut asking any questio ns as t o th e manner in wh ich
the base and th e terminat io ns wer e o r iginally combined o r g lued t o geth er .
1 09. W ith r egar d to verbal bases ending in l o ng WTa’
,many special rules h ave t o be
o bserved,acco r ding to wh ich final WTd is either el ided
, o r changed to i f o r to F e.
These rules will be given in the chapter o n C o njugatio n. Thus
1 1 0 . Final i i ,“
i f, 3 a,3 21
,W ri , if fo l l owed by vowel s o r diphth o ngs, ar e generallychanged to fig, fie ,
”
gr .
Ex . Hfil Q W3 mati+ai matyai , t o th e mind .
fflfi l’ 3 7 T3 7 52j igi+uh= j igguh, th ey have co nquer ed .
m3 ‘Sfii “Ti-Eh: bhdnu+ oh= bhdnvoh, o f th e two splendo ur s .
firg“
an=ft |a r pitg i+d=p i tm§ by th e father .
W Wfil‘ M bibhi+ati= bibhyati , they fear .
” 3, M ILES o r INTERN A L SAND HI . 5 3
In some cases {i and {f are changed to fl iy ; 3 a and 3 11 to Ufiuv; q r;to fi n}
to a ir and, after labials , to HQar .
E x .m H3 : m siér i+athuh= siéri yathuh, yo u (two ) have go ne .
sfi r : W bht+ i=bhiyi , in fear .
3 WFH‘ W yu+anti= yuvanti , they jo in.
they have jo ined .
have br o ught fo rth .
1 + 3 gfir bha+i=bhavi , o n ear th .
3! W% fefi mr i+ate=mr iyate, he dies .
"31 W
'Ffl' fiTtfil’ gfl +ati= g ir ati, he swal lows .
"I g ugf’t papri
—f- i z papur i , l iberal .
When either the o ne o r the o ther takes place must be learnt fr om paradigms and fr om
special rules given under the h eads o f D eclensio n and C o njugatio n . S eeM bibhyati
fr om xfi‘bhi
'
, but f innfaj ikr ig/aa fr om g?m .
I I 1 . Final $1 6, if fo ll owed by terminational co nso nants, is changed to ififr ; and after
labial s to fl an
figfl, to sh o ut ; Passive Tfififi'
g ir-yate; Part .
Tfi'
fi: yimah.
11mi , to fill ; Pass ive {ahpdr -yate; Part El li
“
: p ii rnah.
B efo re th e fi g o f th e Passive, Intensive, and B enedict ive, final {i and 3 u are lengthened,
final W{i changed t o fi r i, final fi n”
to fig i’
r o r fl an (S ee
1 1 2 . T! e, 3 ai,35h 0,WTan, befo r e vowels and diphtho ngs, ar e general ly changed into
Wfiay, WTfidy, Wfiav, WTfidv.
a W'h : Q
'fi'
tTde+ate= dagal e, he pr o tects .
E ( a r ai+e= rage, to wealth .
Th 2 : "ETg o+ e=gave, t o th e cow.
7a W : W : nau+ah= ndvah, the sh ips .
Ro o ts term inated by a r adical diphth o ng (except avg/e in redupl . perf ., Pan . v1 . 1 , 46)
change it into WTd befo r e any affix except th o se o f th e so -cal led special tenses . (Pan . V I . 1,
a RT am de+ td= data, he will pr o tect .
a 11111 m de+siga= ddsiya, May I pr o tectFT m mlai+ td=mlcitd, he will with er .
Sh HT: fiTTHT he will pare .
B ut in the Pr esent Wfil‘ rawfir g lai+ati=g ldyati , he is weary.
2 . Fi na l Consonants .
1 1 3 . Th e ru les acco r ding to which the co nsonants which can o ccur at
the end o f a wo r d ar e r estr icted to“
sqk, a, g t, urn, ( t, fi n, fip , fim, a;l,
211, i ii,mu st likewise be o bser ved wher e th e last letter o f a no m inal o r
verbal base becomes final,i . e . wh er e i t is no t fo llowed by any der ivative
letter o r syl lable .
Thus th e nominal base ‘
gfi yudh , battle , wo uld in the vo cative singular be
5 4 INTERNA L SANDHI. 1 14
gtryudh . Here,h owever
,th e g dh must be changed into g d, because no
aspir ate is to ler ated as a final 54 . 1) and gd is ch anged into ( t, becauseno wo r d can end in a so ft co nso nant 54 . “ mick
,Speech ,
in th e vo c .
sing . wo ul d ch ange its { ch into fi le,because palatal s can never be final
(5554 3)InW adhok, instead o fW adoh , th e aspir atio n o f the final is thr own
back o n the init ial ai dTh e final § h o r g gh , after l o sing its
aspir atio n,beco mes 119, which is fu r t
her ch anged t o“
ask.
1 1 4. N ominal o r ver bal bases ending in co nso nants and fo llowed byterminat io ns co nsi sting o f a single co nso nant
,dr op th e terminat io n al to geth er ,
two co nso nants no t being to ler ated at th e end o f a wo rd Th e final
c onso nants o f the base ar e th en tr eated like o ther final co nso nants .
3 13 +”
at : m mic/z s o d/c, speech nom . sing .
Irifl + q=mzi pr dfich eastern ; nom . sing . masc . Her e Wpr dnk, wh ich r emains after the dr opping o f as
,is, acco r ding to the
same rul e,r educed again to pr c
’
ifz, the final nasal r emaining guttural ,
becau se it wo ul d h ave been guttural i f the final q“
k h ad r emained.
W 4 q=W a rm ly s suva l, well jumping . Her e, after th e dr opping
o f as , ther e wo uld r emain W suva l/c but as no wo r d can end in
two c o nso nants , th is is r educed to w suva l . B efo r e th e Pada
term inatio ns W mva lg assumes its Pada fo rm W suval 53)
h ence instrum . plur . W suva lbh i lz.
113 1 + It m ahan s ahan, tho u killedst ; 2 . p. sing . impf. Par .
“23 + advesh t adveg, h e hated ; 3 . p. s ing . impf. Par .
swi g 11: m adoh t adl wlc,he mi lked 3 . p. sing . impf. Par .
E xceptions will be seen under the h eads o f D eclensio n and C o njugatio n .
1 1 5 . W ith r egar d to the changes o f the final co nso nants o f nominal
and verbal bases,befo r e termi nations
,the gener al rul e is ,
1 . Terminations beginning with sonant letter s,r equir e a so nant letter at th e
end o f th e nom inal o r verbal base .
2 . Term inat io ns beginning with sur d letter s,r equir e a su rd letter at th e end
o f the nominal o r verbal base .
3 . In this gener al r ule th e term inatio ns beginning with vowels , semivowels ,
o r nasa ls ar e excluded,i . e . they pr o duce no ch ange in the final co n
sonant o f th e base.
I .
“
6 1 + f t! HF“! vach dhi vagdhi , Speak 2. p. sing . imp. Par .
111 + 23 11795: pr ick di we=prigdhve, “yo u m ix 2 . p . plur . pr es . A tm .
2 . arg+ fH=WfiF ad 82
°
atsi,2 . p. s ing . pr es . th ou eatest .
mg fir wfa ad i i atti, 3 . p. s ing . pr es . h e eats .
1 1 8. INTERNA L S A N D H I. 5 5
3 .m 4 1 : “FF? mar ut i z mar uti, lo c . sing . in th e wind .
“
61 + fit “
2‘w vac/z mi vackmi , I speak .
awr+i t} aw} gr ath yate g r a thyate, it is arr anged .
E xcept io ns such as fag H‘ firm bhid nalz bhinnalz, divided, “1 + 3 :
mm bhaj + nal¢ = bhagnalz, br o ken, must be learnt by practice rather than
by rul e .
1 1 6 . A spir ates , if fo llowed by term inatio ns beginning with any letter
(except vowels and semivowels and nasals), lo se their aspirat io n. 54 .
E x .m -l Fa z wwfa mdmwth ti =mdmatti , 3 . p . s ing . pr es . Par . o f the
intens ivem mdmath, h e shakes much .
t i t $3 “
5? r audh dl we r unddhve, 2 . p. plur . pr es . Atm . o f
w m dh, you impede .
'mr
-i fi z a tfi labh sye lapsye, I shall take.
B ut R {z’
gfir gadh i yudhi , l o c . sing . in battle .
Phi-I u: W : labia yab lobhyalt, to be desir ed .
“ 4“m m kshublz udl i kshubhndti,h e agi tates .
It is a gener al rul e that two aspirates can never meet in o rdinary S anskr it .
1 1 7. If final 1 9h, Q db, ‘l dh, Q bb ar e fo ll owed by"
( t o r 11th, they ar e chang ed to the
co rr esponding so ft letter s, 719 , {a}, gal ,‘
i b, but the i t and fl th ar e l ikewise so ftened, and
the Qd r eceives the aspiratio n . S ee al so 1 28.
Ex .m fir m r unadh-i-ti= ruaaddhi , he obstructs .
m i " 3 3 342 labk-i- tali labdkalz, taken.
“4 W:0
8 3 2rundk+ thalz= runddhalz (also spelt t s“. r andkula), yo u two o bstr uct .
“4' H: $3 2rundk+ tall = r unddkafi, they two o bstruct .
m ‘ l H.‘
2 m i? abdndh+ tam= abdnddham, 2 . p . dual ao r . 1 . Par . yo u two bo und .
m WT: W I: abandh+ thdlz=abanddkdlz, 2 . p . sing . ao r . 1 . Atm . th o u
bo undest .”
In “ I? abdnddham,2 . p . dual ao r . 1 . Par ., the aspir atio n o f final ”
( db is not thr own back
upo n the init ial Rb, because it is suppo sed to be abso rbed by the“
ti tam o f the terminati o n,
changed into fidkam. The same applies t o W T: abanddhdlz, th o ugh here the terminat io n
WT: thrill. was aspirated in itself .
1 18. If lELM, Q db, ‘i dh, RM;“
5: k, at the end o f a syl lable, l o se their aspirat io n either
as final o r as being fo ll owed by ai d/w(no t by fl!dhi), l i bh, Rs , they thr ow their aspiratio nback upo n the initial letter s, pr o vided these letter s be no o ther than fl y, {a}, li d, 1 6 .
S ee 93 .
Ex . Infiective base fi budb, to know; nom . sing . {li b/mt, knowing .
Instrum . plur . fiffit bhudbhilz.
Lo c. plur . gagbhutsu.
S eco nd per s . plur . ao r . Atm.
“
fi g—
gabkuddhvam.
S econd per s . sing . pres . Intens .m fit m bobo dh+si=bobho tsi .
5 6 INTERNA L SANDH I .
D esiderative o f REddbb,Wafer dbz'
psati, h e wishes to hurt .
Fir st per s . sing . fut . o f fl +wlfi =fim fi1 bandb+ sydmi= bbantsydmi , I shal l
bind .
Kgdab, t o burn W dbak,nom . sing . a burner .
fl dub, to m ilk ;W W adbugdbvam, 2 . p . p1ur . impf . Atm . : but 2 . p . s ing . imp. Par .
gfi‘l dugdbi .
No te— wdadb, the r edupl icated base o f d é ,W dadba’
mi,I plabe
,th r ows the l o st
a spir atio n o f th e final ‘J\db back o n th e initial no t o nly befo r e fi dbv, Ks
,but l ikewise
befo r e”
EUand 3 th, wh er e we m ight have expected th e appl icat io n o f 1 1 7. Q i t W
dadh -l-tab: dbattab; Q W: W : dadb+ tbab= dbattbab Q a2 “TB dadb+se=
dbatse; W as} ugfdadb+dbvam dhaddbvam.
1 19. If fl cb, i j , {2j b ar e final , o r fo l lowed by a terminatio n beginning with any letter ,
except vowel s, semivowel s, o r nasal s, they ar e changed to k o r 7T\g .
E x . Nom inal base mfl vdcb; vo c .W vd’
k, speech .
Verbal base afl vacb; 3 . p . sing . pr es . a”
? f'
fl'
:"Eff? vacb+ ti= cubt i .
‘
g‘
q + ft: gfiu yufij +dbi= yuizgdbi , 2 . p . sing . imp. Jo in !
B ut l o c . sing .m r art‘s mick-H vdchi .
m 11 W vdcb+ya vdcbya, t o be spoken.
fi—l H! m vacb-i-mab: vacbmab, we speak .
3 1 + 3’ m : vacb+vab= vacbvab, we two speak . (S ee al so
1 20 .
"
fish at th e end o f nom inal and verbal bases, if it becomes the final o f a wo rd, is
changed into 2;t.
Ex . Nominal base “ dash; nom . s ing .a dmit, a hater .
Verbal base fi flflvisb; 3 . p . sing . impf . Par . fi g adveg, he hated .
1 2 1 . B efo r e verbal terminatio ns beginning with ( 8,it is tr eated l ike
“
65k.
afl-t fil ‘ : dvesb+s i= dveksbi
,th o u h atest ; ao r .W adviksbat, h e hated .
M poksbyati h e wil l no urish .
1 22 . B efo re i t o r With it r emains unchanged itself, but chang es i t and { tb into ( 1and ( m.
Ex . tr+ H: F3 92dvisb+ tab= dvisbgab, they (two )hate.
“fi f ti H’fi m sarpisb+ tamam= sarpisb§amam,
th e best clar ified butter .
This rule admits o f a mo r e general appl icati o n, namely, that every dental i t, ( tit , E: d,ili db,
i n,and Rs, is changed into the co rr espo nding l ingual , if pr eceded by Z\,
t, Q M, i d,Kalb,
Ilka, and fi sh . (Pan. VI I I . 4 ,
Ex . +dbi= dviddbz, hate th o u .
113;i i We, he praises .
W? HI sari shag-f-b d'
m sbazmdm,o f six .
mr+ W ET: m ath: sbag+navatib= sbanb avatib, ninety-six . (Pan. VI I I . 4 , 42 ,
vart .)
1 23 . B efo r e o ther co nso nantal terminations t ( ab is treated l ike
fgfl'i W dvisb+dbvam= dviddbvam,
2 . p . plur . imp. Atm . Hate ye
fgfi g m dvisb+su= dviysu, l o c. plur . among hater s .
5 8 INTERNA L SANDH I . 1 29
Ex . ( I )a”
? club nom . fi dbuk instrum . plur dbugbbib l o c. plur . “ dbuksbu
part . pass . dugdbah.
R 2 w: dr ib+ tab= dr idbab, fast, i s an exceptio n.
Ex . (2) fag lib nom . instrum . plur . fa fg: l idbbih l o c. plur . W 3 liysu
(Eng crib, vdlsu).
fag a: al e : lib -H uh : lidbab.
“
G?"
(T3 E : rub-Huh midhab.
111 site : l idbab and ass : r ddbah, e+ 11 db+ t ar e changed t o e+ q db+db, o r , mo re
co rr ectly, to g db th en the fir st Q d is dr o pt and the vowel lengthened .
The o nly vowel wh ich is no t length ened is“
i ri e . g .R 1? a? c r ib -H a : vridha .
The vowel o f i t? sab and“
i t? cab is changed into331} 0 (Pan . V I . 3 , unl ess
S amprasarana is r equ ired, as in the par t . 3 3 1 ddbab. (Pan . v1 . 1,I 5 .)
1 29 . The final gb o f certain r o o ts (3 dr ab, a? muh, lag snub, fag snib) is tr eated
eith er as flgb o r {db Fr om 3? dr ub, to h ate, we h ave in compo unds th e nom . sing .
3535dhr ak and g? dbru;(Pan.v1 1 1 . 2,
past part l clpl e27112dr ugdbab o r {at drudbab.
1 30 . The final gh o f fig nab, to bind, is tr eated as “db.
Ex . W i g updnab, sl ipper ; nom . sing . W updnat ; instrum. plur . W npd
nadbbib.
Past part . pass . 3 ? if:“
33 2nab+ tab=naddhab, bo und .
A s to W anadub, o x , &c., see D eclension .
1 3 1 . The Rs o f the nominal bases M dbvas , fall ing , and “ was, tear ing , if final
o r fo l lowed by Pada-terminatio ns, and the i s o f “ cars , th e termination o f th e part .
per f. Par .,befo re Pada-terminatio ns o nly, is changed to ( t (Pan. VI I I . 2, S ee, h ow
ever,
1 73 , 204 .
Ex . 83Kdhvas , to fall ; nom. sing .mdbvat,nom. plur . 838 3 dbvasab, instrum . plu r .
-wfa: dbvadbhib.
1 32 . Verbal bases ending inRs, change it to i t, befo re terminations o f the general
tenses beginning with Es . (Pan. v1 1 . 4,
Ex . fl eas, to dwel l ; fut .W FTTfi'
I w fir vas+sydmi vatsydmi .
B efo r e o ther terminat io ns beginning with Rs, final as r emains unchanged .
N a HQ vas+se vassc, th ou dwel lest .
HR fa FEEB sas+si=,
sassi, th ou sleepest .filfl a fi@'
nims+se= nin‘
zsse, th ou kissest .
hi s fit bi tes pepes+si=pcpesbsbi, th ou hur test .
In cer tain verbs final Rs is dr o pt befo r e FE dhi o f th e imperative .
m fir mfi: s’
ds+dbi= (Pan . v1 . 4,
m fir w e: cbabcis+dbi cbakcidbi .
In the same verbs final as,if immediately fo ll owed by th e terminatio n o f the seco nd perso n,
Ks , may be changed t o i t o r r emainRs .
WW + li =WmTt o r mm: asds+s us’
ei t o r as‘cib.
B efo re the i t o f the th ird per so n,it always becomes i t .
m + 1 W asds -H z as’
dt . (Pan . VI I I . 2 , 73, 74
1 37, INTERNA L SANDH I. 5 9
Final iv,3;d, fldh befo r e theRs o f the 2nd pers . sing . Imperf . Par . may be regular ly rept e
sented by ( t o r byi s ; fl ame!o r “a!aveb, th o u knewest W em zzat o rW aruzlab,
th o u pr eventedst . (Pan. V I I I . 2 ,
1 33 . i n and ‘(m at the end o f a nominal o r verbal base , befo re sibilants (but no t
befo re the fl aw o f the l o o . ar e changed to A nusvar a.
Ex . “ Effl j igbdmsati , he wishes to kil l , fr om fi ban.
fi tflakr afizsyate, he wil l step , fr om 1i ili br am.
B ut gfg‘
eg subi'
nsa, among go o d str iker s, fr omm in, Pada base o fm wbifiw.
If Rn were changed to A nusvara, we sh o uld have t o wr item imsbu.
1 34 . i n r emains unchanged befo r e semivowel s .
Ex . {a } banyate, he is killed, fr om fi ban. W tanvan, extending , fr om“
(F tW p r envanam pr o pell ing , fr om Q1 35 . Km r emains unchanged befo re th e semivowels Ry, kr , a 1.
Ex . m 2bdm-yab, to be l o ved, fr om 353i ham.
“
11TH.
tcimr am, co pper , fr om Hi tam and suffix I r a .
W 2amlab, so ur , fr om“
1171am and suffix 8 la .
1 36 . Km at the end o f a nom inal o r verbal base, if no suffix fo ll ows, o r if fo ll owed bya Pada-term inat io n, o r by per sonal term inatio ns beginning withKm o r i s , is changed into
i n. (Pan . V I I I . 2 ,
Ex . M pr as'
dn, n om . sing ., andW pr as
‘dnbbib, instrum . plur .,m pr asansu,
l o c . plur .,fr om W 131pr as
’
dm,qu ieting . (Pan. V I I I . 2
,
mm aganma, we went , and 53 3173 ayanca, we two went, fr omTIT gam+ma,
"E2? gam+va .
B ut nom . plur .m 2p r asd’
mab.
1 37. W ith r egar d to nasal s,th e gener al rule is that in the bo dy o f a
wo rd th e fir sts,th e seco nds, th e thi r ds
,and the fo ur th s o f each class can
o nly be pr eceded by th eir own fifth s,th o ugh in wr iting the do t may be
u sed as a gener al substitute .
E x . W T} o rm dsabbate o r dsan'
zbatc,h e fear s .
W o r mTfFl’TfH dlibgati o r dlifizgal i , he embr aces .
“
arm o r aim vafichayati o r vafi whayati , he ch eats .
Em a} o r am ? utkantbate o r utban’
zlbal e, h e l ongs .
773: o r t ill gantum o r gan’
ztum,to go .
w it o r a’
nfi kampal e o r kan’
zpate, h e tr embles .
In compo unds, such as H§ +m t sam + ka lpab, it is optional to change
final li m,standing at th e end o f a Pada
,into th e fifth o r into r eal Anu svar a
h ence m : o r Egan: safizka lpah o r sabbalpah. (S ee
If th e i n befo r e i s wer e tr eated as A nusvar a, th e seco nd i n wo uld have to be
changed into a l ingual Pan . V I I I . 4, 2 , vart .
1 2
60 INTERNA L SA N DHI. 1 38
1 38. In the bo dy o f a wo r d,A nusvar a is the o nly nasal that can stand
befo re the sibilantsm, g sb, g s,and g h .
E x . gm damsanam,biting . 11: q yaj dfizsbi , th e pr ayer s .
gi l t hamsah, go o se . fig?! r amha l e, h e go es .
1 39. i n fo ll owing immediately after fl cb o r aj is changed t o31
Ex .1113 ? ydchfid, prayer . ( El
li r dj fié’
, queen. Fifij aj ii e, h e was bo rn .
140 . g obb in the m iddle o f a wo rd between vowel s o r diph tho ngs
must be changed to a chcbb. (S ee
E x .
“Egg r ichh , to go ; ri chcbhati , he go es .
fia t mlcchcbbab, a barbar ian .
1 4 1 . c b befo r e a suffix beginning with i n o r Km is changed to 31Ex . 11? W W : pr acbb+na=p r a§nab, questio n .
m fl? WIVES“pdpr achh+mi=pdpr a§mi , I ask fr equently.
B efo r e"
1 c this change is o ptio nal .
1 42 . Ro o ts ending in fl y and i v thr ow o ff their final l etter s befo r e terminatio ns
beginning with co nso nants,except 11y.
Ex . R H: Eff: pfiy+ tabz pdtab, decaying .
git a : gal : turv+nab= tdrzzab, kil led .
fgfgg m fififi'
fi ‘didiv+vdn didivdn, having played .
1 43 . Ro o ts ending in {v and ( r , if pr eceded by{i o r 3 11,l ength en th eir i i and 3 a
,
if i v o r'
{r is fo llowed immediately by a term inatio nal co nso nant . (Pan . V I I I . 2,
S ee
N o . 92 , rag tear .
Ex . fa? die , t o play,M di'
vyati, he plays . B ened .W i l ding/6mm.
“gar , t o exert ,mi l : gdrnab.
gm(1. e . fag s ), to gr ow o ld , afi faj i rye ti .
firfi gi r , vo ice ; lustrum . plur .
Tfi’ffi t g i rbbib, l o c . plur .Ifiég ir sbu .
Ther e ar e except io ns . (Pan. V I I I . 2 ,
“ bur , t o so und . B ened .
“
gi rd burydsam.
O n a sim ilar pr incipl e “
3 u is length ened in Ki d- W 15TH! turv+dvab= tdrvdvah
(Pan . VI I I .
1 44 . Nominal and verbal bases ending in {y r and R m lengthen {i and 3 a , wh en
¥r becomes final after th e l o ss o f ano th er final co nso nant . (Pan . VI I I . 2 ,
Ex . fi ll: R: mo r Tfitgz
’
r -i— s : gi'
r o r gilt , nom . smg . vo ice .
1 45 . Nominal bases ending in {GUS o r “ as (th e “ is o r “ as being radical)l ength en {of and 3 u wh en final , and befo re terminatio ns beginning with Ebb o r
”
its .
Lo o . plur . supis+ su supfizsbu nom . sing . masc . and neut .
N om . sing . masc. Wi t-l Fag saj us+s= saj z
’
lb; nom . sing . neut . “i ssaj dh.
143 , INTERNA L S AND H I . 6 1
D o ubling of Consonants .
1 46 . A cco rding to some gr ammar ians any co nso nant except “
gr and ( h, fo ll owed byano ther co nso nant and pr eceded by a vowel , may be do ubled l ikewise any co nso nant
pr eceded by"
g r o r i b, these letter s being themselves preceded by a vowel . A s no pract icalo bject is o btained by th is pract ice, it is best , with S
'
akalya, to disco nt inue it thr o ugho ut .
In o ur edit io ns do ubl ing takes place mo st fr equently wher e any co nso nant , except thesibilants and gb, is preceded by
”
( r o r i b, these being again preceded by a vowel . Thus
fl arka, sun, is frequently wr ittenfl ar k/ca .
W br abman may be wr ittenW br abmman.
If an aspirated co nso nant has t o be do ubled, the fir st lo ses its aspir ati o n . Thus i f]? o r
m var dbana o r var ddbana, incr ease .
147. A s ibilant after fir must no t be do ubled , unless it is fo ll owed by a co ns o nant .
T hus it is always , var sbcib, r ainy seaso n ;m 2ddar s’
ab (Prat . mir r o r . B ut we
may write either “a o r fi dar s’
yate o r darss‘yate, it is sh own .
E xp lanation of some Gr ammatica l Terms used by N a tive Gr ammar ians .
1 48. S ome o f the technical term s u sed by native grammar ians have pr o ved
so u seful th at th ey have fo und r eady admittance into o u r own gr ammat ical
term ino l o gy . Guna and Vr iddhi ar e term s ado pted by compar ative gr amma
r ians in th e absence o f any class ical wo r ds to mar k the exact changes o f
vowel s compr eh ended under th ese wo r ds by Panini and o th er s . Mo st
S anskr it grammar s h ave besides sanctio ned the u se o f such term s as
Par asmaipada, Z tmanepada , Tatpur usha, B ahuvr ihi , Karmadha'
r aya, Kr i t,Taddhi ta
, Unddi , and many mo r e . N o th ing can be m o r e per fect than the
gr ammat ical termino l o gy o f Pfinini ; but as it was co ntr ived fo r hi s o wn
pecul iar system o f gr ammar,it is di fficul t to adopt par t o f it with o ut at th e
same tim e adopting th e wh o le o f his system . A few r emar ks,h owever
,o n
some o f Panini’s gr ammat ical term s may be u seful .
A ll wo r ds with o ut exceptio n,o r acco rding to so me grammar ians with
very few exceptio ns , ar e der ived fr om r o o ts'
o r dhdtas . Th ese r o o ts
have been co l lected in what ar e called t tupdtbas , r o o t-r ecitals , the m o st
impo r tant o f wh ich is ascr ibed by tr aditio n toFr om these dhdtas o r r o o ts ar e de r ived by means o f pr atyayas o r suffixes,
no t o nly al l kinds o f verbs , but al l substant ives and adjectives , and acco r ding
t o some, even al l pr o no uns and part icles . Thu s fi om th e r o o t fig man, to
think,we have no t o nly man-u— te, h e th inks
,but likewise Frag man
-as,
m ind , m ma'
nas- a , mental,&c . W o rds thu s fo rm ed , but with o ut as yet
any case-term inatio ns attach ed to them , ar e cal l ed P ra'
tipadika ,nominal
bases . Thu s fr om the r o o t aq j an, to beget , we have th e pr a'
tipadika o r
S iddhanta -Kaumudi , ed . Taranatha. vo l . I I . p . I .
62 GRAMMA TICA L TERMS . 148.
nominal base Ra j an-a, man, and th is by th e addition o f the s ign o f th e
nom . sing . becomes Wazj an-a-b, a man .
Suffixes fo r th e fo rmatio n o f no uns ar e o f two kinds
1 . Th o se by wh ich no uns ar e der ived dir ect fr om r o o ts Pr imary Suffixes .
2 . Tho se bywhich no uns ar e der ived fr om o th er no uns S eco ndary S uffi xes .
Th e fo rmer ar e cal led Kr i t, the lat ter Taddhi ta . Thu s ag j ana, man,is
der ived fr om th e r o o t ag j an by th e Kr it suffix w a; but fi g j anina ,
appr opriate fo r man ,is derived fr om smj ana by the Taddhi ta suffix g?! ina.
The nam e pr a’
tipadika wo uld apply bo th to smj ana and fi g j anina, as
nom inal bases , r eady to r eceive th e term inat ions o f declensio n .
The Kr it suffixes ar e subdivided into th r ee classes
1 . Kr i t, pr o per ly so cal led,i . e . suffixes by wh ich no uns can be r egular ly
fo rmed fr om r o o ts with cer tain m o r e o r l ess defini te meanings . Thus
by means o f th e suffix 113 atha,S anskr it gr ammar ians fo rm
emf;vepa tbu, t rembl ing, fi om h aep , to tr emble .
m g évagathu, swelling, fi om fig svi, to swel l .
m g bsbaval ba , sneezing, from Ej ksba , to sneeze .
gag davatba , vexatio n,from 3
! da,to vex
,to burn.
2 . Kri tya, certain suffix es, such as an! tacya, Emi t! aniya, 1!ya, ( fat! elima,wh ich may be tr eated as decl inable verbal term inatio ns . Thu s fr o m
Hg bar , to do , is fo rmed fi g ! kar tavga, m in kar aniga, afi lcdrga,
what is to be do ne, f aciendum.
3 . Unddi , suffixes u sed in th e fo rmation o f no uns which to native gramma
r ians seemed mo r e o r less ir r egu lar , eith er in fo rm o r m eaning . Thu s
fi om ag b as, to dwel l , bo th 3 1gvas ta,a thing, and gngvds tu, a h o u se .
The Taddhi ta suffixes ar e no fur th er subdivided,bu t the feminine suffixes
(str ipr atgaya) ar e sometimes tr eated as a separ ate class .
A r o o t,fo l l owed by a suffix (pr a lgaga), wh ether Kz
‘ i t o r Taddhi ta, is
r aised to th e di gnity o f a base (pr dl ipadika), and final ly becomes a r eal
wo r d (pada)wh en it is finished by r eceiving a case—terminatio n (vibha/cti)Every base, with r egard to th e suffix wh ich is attached to it
,is cal led
A nga , bo dy. Fo r technical purpo ses , h owever , new di stinctio ns h ave beenintr o duced by S anskr it gr ammar ians , acco r ding to wh ich , in certain deelen
sio ns,a base is o nly cal led A nga befo r e th e terminat io ns o f th e nom . and
ace . sing ., nom . and acc . dual , and nom . plur . o f masc . and fem . no uns ;
besides the nom . and acc . plu r . o f neuter s . Th e vo cat ive gener ally fo ll owsthe nominative . Th ese A nga cases to geth er ar e call ed th e S arvana
'
mas tba'
na .
B opp calls th em the S tr ong Cases .
B efo r e term inatio ns beginning with co nso nants (l ikewise befo r e Taddhitas
148. GRAMMATICA L TERMS . 6 3
beginning wi th any conso nant except try) the base is called Pada,the
same term wh ich,as we saw befo r e , was used to signify a no un, with a case
terminatio n attach ed to it . The rules o f S andh i befo re these terminatio ns
ar e in th e main th e same as at the end o f wo rds .
B efo re the r emaining term inatio ns which begin with vowels (li kewise
befo r e Taddhitas beginning with vowels and try) the base is cal led B ha .
B opp calls the Pada and B ha cases to gether the Weak Cases ; and when it
is necessary to di stinguish , he calls the Pada th e Midd le and the B ha the
Weakest Cas es .
N o uns,wheth er substantives
,adjectives
,o r pr ono uns , ar e decl ined th r o ugh
thr ee number s with seven o r,if we include th e vo cative , eigh t cases . A case
term inatio n is call ed “ sup o r fgwfgnvibhakti , lit . divisio n .
V erbs ar e conjugated thr o ugh the active and passive vo ices,and some
thr o ugh a m iddl e vo ice al so , in ten m o o ds and tenses , with thr ee per so ns and
th r ee number s . A per so nal terminatio n is called fag tin o r M vibbakti .
A declined no un as well as a co njugated verb,ending in a vi bhakti
,is
call ed Pada .
Par ticles ar e compr ehended under the name o f N ipdta, li terally what fal l sinto a sentence
,what takes its place befo r e o r after o th er wo r ds .
A ll par ticles ar e indeclinable (avgaga).
Part icles ar e,
1 . Th o se beginning with ‘E! cha, and,i . e . a list o f wo rds co nsisting o f
co njunctions, adverbs, interjectio ns, co llected by native grammar ians .
2 . Th o se beg inning with npr a, befo r e , i . e . a l ist o f pr epo siti ons co l lected
in the same manner by native gr ammar ians .
Wh en th e pr epo sitio ns beginning with I!pr a go vern a substantive, theyar e call ed Karmapr avacbaniga . W h en they ar e j o ined to a r o o t
,they are
call ed Upasarga o r Gati . The name o f Gati is al so given to a clas s o f
adverbs which enter into cl o se combinatio n with verbs . E x . a t ? dr i‘
in
3 37 31 dr ikr i tga , assenting ; m Ichdt in m m Icha'
t‘ itga, having made
Icha'
t, i . e. the sound pr o duced by clear ing the thr o at .
6 4 D ECLENS ION . 35 149
C H A P T E R III .
D ECLENS ION.
149. S anskr it no uns have th r ee gender s , Masculine,Feminine
,and
N euter ; thr ee number s , S ingular , D ual , and Plur al ; and eigh t cases,
N ominative, A ccu sative, Instr umental , D ative,A blative, Geni tive , Lo cative,
and V o cative .
No te— Ther e ar e a few nouns wh ich ar e Indecl inable in S anskr it : “ scar , heaven ;
m aga'
s, fir e “ samba , year , ( o f V ikramfiditya’
s era); 13 1i snag/am, self ; “If“sdmi,
hal f ; { Qbbii r , atmo sph er e ; "
fiffisudi, th e ligh t fo rtnigh t, and El ? badi, the dark fo rtnight ,th e usual abbr eviatio ns fo rm : s
’
ulclapaksbah and Tm brisbnapaksbab, o r W !
babulapakshab, (W ar r en,Kalasankal ita, p . A cco r ding to Radhakanta, fifesadi is used
in theW est o nly.
S ome no uns ar e plur alia tantum,u sed in the plur al o nly ;an: da
‘
rdb, plur . masc. wife ;
W dpab, plur . fem . water ;‘
El’fi'
l t var shdb, plur . fem . the rainy seaso n,1 . e. th e rains ;
fem sibalah, plur . fem . sand ;W babuldb, the Pleiades .
I 50 . S anskr it no uns may be divided into two classes
1 . Tho se that have bases ending in conso nants .
2 . Th o se that have bases ending in vowel s .
1 . B ases ending in Cons onants .
1 5 1 . N ominal bases may end in al l co nso nants except g n, i n, fly .
Th e final letter s o f th e inflective bases o f no uns,being either final o r br o ugh t
in co ntact with the initial letter s o f th e term inatio ns,ar e subject to some
o f the ph o netic rules ex plained abo ve .
1 5 2 . B ases ending in conso nants r eceive th e fo l lowing terminatio ns
Terminations f o r Masculines and Feminines .
S I NG U LA R. D UA L . PLURA L .
N om . g s (which is always dr opt) aA cc . S i am
Instr . an d fit: M i ll
D at . a e mi bhydmbb b
A bl . a nabW W ‘
Gen. is : ab‘
fl i dm
Li ‘fi: o h
00 . g i g eu
V o c . l ike N om ., except bases in g n and g s sfi an ab
N euter s h ave no terminatio n in th e N om .,A cc .
,and V o c . singular (Pada
cases).
They take i t in the N om . ,A cc .
,and V o c . dual (B ha cases).
Th ey take g i in th e N om .
,A cc .
,and V o c . plur al , and inser t a nasal
befo r e the final conso nant o f th e inflective base (Anga cases). Th is nasal is
6 6 D ECLENS ION .1 55
1 55 . B ases ending in guttural s, g k, g kb, g g , g gb .
These bases requ ir e no special r ules .
B ase 3 5mg sar uasdk, omnipo tent , masc . fem. neut . (fr om né sarva,all
,
and r o o t 51g sale, to be able.)
S I N GU LA R .
MA S C . FEM .
E sarcas
alc
afimfi sarvas‘dkau
aim-1 sarcas‘a’
kd“
Ham : sarcasdgbhib
W sama§dke m saruasdgbbydm a sarvasdgbbyab
m sarcas’
dlcab
m sar'vas
‘dkobm sar casdlcdm
fi rrfa m o ose/ a new sarvasdlcsbu
N E UTE R .
S INGULA R. DUA L . PLURA L .N . A .V .m sar casdk law sarcas
‘dki’ fi fif i sarcasdbki
A l l r egular no uns ending in g k, g Ich, g g, g gh, g t, g th, g d, g db,
g t, g th , gd, g dh, g p,15pk, g b, g bh, may he declined after th e model
o f film sarvaédk.
1 56 . B ase ending in g kh . ffl afa'
g chi tr a libh, painter , (fr om fag chi tr a,
pictur e, and r o o t Pag likh, to paint .)
S I N GU LA R .
MA S C . FEM .
N .V . (slates? chitr a lik'
l'
fg afa lfir chi tr alibbauA . fg afsm cbi tr al ikbam
I . fi g h t? ! cbi tr a likba‘
D . fg afafi chi tr al ikbe c i tr al igbbgdm
Gffia faw: cbi tr a likbab
Pag fmfit: cbi tr a l ikbobL . faat
’
afs cbi tr alikbi
N E UTE R .
S INGULA R . DUA L . PLURA L .
N . A .V . fg af‘
ssaqcbi tr al i lc‘
l‘ h at
-am? chitr alikbi
' Fag fs’
rfa cbi tr almlcbi
No te— In theparadigms o f r egular nouns with unch angeable conso nantal bases it will
sufficient t o r emember th e Nom . S ing .,N om . Plur ., Instr . Plur . ,
Lo c. Plur ., and Nom .
O n the change o f g su after 35k, see 1 00 .
1 Q k instead o f 1§\kb, see § 1 1 3 ; 54 . 1 .
fi lm cbi tr alibbab
fi afafim cbi tr aligbbib
fva‘ fa
'
rw: chi tr aligbbgab
fg a'Fz-mi chitr ali lchdm
fg afag cbi tr alibsbu*
1 58. D ECLEN sION . 6 7
Plur . Neut . The A cc. Instr . D at . A bl . Gen . Lo c . S ing ., N om . A cc . V o c. Gen. Lo c . D ual ,
A cc . Gen. Plur ., fo ll ow the Nom . Plur . The Instr . D at . A bl . D ual , D at . A bl . Plur ., fo llow
the Instr . Plur . The Vo cative is the same as th e Nominat ive.
157. Regu lar no uns to he decl ined l ikeW sarvasak.
BA S E . N OM . 8 . N OM . PL . 14 . F . INS TR. PL . LO O . PL . N O“ . PL .NEUT .
EFl-
( barb , gr een I“ m m m t fifi!
bar i t bar itab har i dbhib kar i tsa bar inti
W agnimatb,fire~ kindl ing m m M m m
agnimat*agnimatbab agnimadbbib
'
l'
agnimatsa I agnimantbi
sew ed, fr iendly m we W 3 m assuby
'i t subridab subr idbbih subri tsa subrind i
“ budb, knowing a 3m gfat m flfflbbzit bi idhab bbudbbib bbatsii ba
'
ndhi
al l gap , guar dian331 gm: gfw: m {ifil
W kakubk. r egi o n 3531 any : fi fa!‘ m °ar§fir
f . kakap kakubbah kakubbbih kakupsa-kakambbi
1 58. B ases ending in palatals , g ob, g chh, g j ,‘
gj h .
B ases ending in g ch change g ob into 33k,o r gg , ex cept
when fo llowed
by a termination beginning with a vowel .
B ase g aggj alamucb, masc. clo ud (water -dr opping).
S IN GUL A R .
MA S C . F EM .
N .V . FIFE“?'
alamah
.
J“ fi j alamacbau W yalamucbab
A . W j alamucbam
I . W WI j alamucba 3 8W j alamugbbth
D . 3 3 313 j alamucbe W yalamagbbgam
0 j alamugbbyab
A b .
W . j alamacbab .
j alamucbdm2j alamacbob
a
L . W j alamucbi
S INGULA R .pLUE A L .
N . A .V . W j alamak W j alamucbi W j alamancbi
D ecline like w j a lamuchr —mg ua'
cb, fem . speech ; Hg tvacb, fem .
skin ; g‘
g rucb,fem . l igh t ; fig sr uch
,fem. ladle .
Wi th final changed into i t . S ee 1 1 3 ; 54 . 1 . Final as dr o pt , 55 .
1' S ee 66 . I S ee 54 . 1 .
S ee 1 18.
K 2
6 8 D ECLENS ION. 1 59
1 59. S pecial bases in
BA S E . NO M . S . m srm pn. LO C . PL . N O M . PL .
éfl kr ufich moving cr o okedly, a? W w“
333 2(A ccent, Pan. v1 . 1 , 182)
a cur lew krdiz kr zi izbhz’
lz kr zZizkshu krdfickalz
“I? pr dfi’
ch,if it meanswo r sh ip W W W uh : (A ccent, Pan.v1 . 1
,182)
p ing puff: pr ffibkib p rd'
izkshu p r d'
fichalz (A cc . th e same)
fl o ris’
ch j‘
,cutting a? W W (A ccent , Pan . v1 . 1
,1 68)
waft}: vr idbhz’
lz o rigszi vr z’
échulz
1 60 . B ases ending in fi ehk change Q chk into 3134, wh ich becomes Q y,when final , and
befo r e c o nsonants . (S ee 1 25 ; 1 74 . 6 : Pan . v1 . 4,
BA S E . N OM . S ING . N OM . PL. INS TR . PL . LO C . PL . N OM . PL . NEUT .
mprdchh, an asker mpm’
; umzprd’
éaz.m pr ddbhmm pr dgszz u’
rf‘nprdms'
i
1 6 1 . B ases ending in 51 j , if r egular , fo ll ow the example o f no uns in fl ch, except thatthey pr eserve i j befo r e vowel s .
BA S E . N OM . S ING . N O M . PL . IN S TB . PL . L O C . PL . N OM . PL . N EUT .
W r aj , disease W mi le W r‘
zij alz Eff": rugbkz’
la ( a;mkshzi FF?! rdfij i
as? drj , strength $ 554224. mi : dij alz af‘
n‘
t: flrgbhilz fl drksku s fii u/ rj i
O ther regular nouns in aj ,— m vanzj , m . mer chant t ishaj , m . physician;
W fltvfi, m . priest ;“ mo i , f . gar land ;W a ry, n . bl o o d . (O n the o pt ional fo rmso f W asn
'
j , see W W W, N om . S ing . fl male, diving .
1 62 . B ases ending in i j changeable to g 4.
S ome bases ending inaj change”a;j into {t o r Q a!when final
,and befo re terminations
beginning with co nsonants .
D er ived fr om the r o o t fi km fich. The N om . S ing . wo uld have beeny r wik
+3 ; Rs and aik ar e dr o pt , see 1 1 4 .
1‘ D er ived fr om th e r o o t N o r afch
, (in the D hatupatha,W ), to cut . A ccording
t o S anskr it gr ammar ians, the penul timate as o r Sl s‘ is dr o pt, and fl ch befo r e consonants
o r if final changed into it. (S ee
I The fo rm K o r i;(no t fl o r a?) is confirmed by S iddhanta-Kaumudi vo l . 1 .
p . 1 82 .
O n the two final consonants, see 55 . Th e N om . Plur . Neut . woul d be fi drj i
or dfizrj z. A t the end o f compounds the O ptional fo rms ar e fi drj z’
o r fi drfij i .
The latter fo rm is confirmed by C o lebr o oke, th e S iddhanta-Kaumudi, vo l . 1 . p . 194,
and the Prakr iya-Kaumudi . The Pr akr iya
-Kaumudi‘
(p . 44 a) says : fi l sfi‘
fiafi“
af ar““
agffim am I agffi am t“
? l sizing? M E? I fly? !
72 , vart . )
1 63. D ECLENS ION . 6 9
B ase'
M samr dj , masc. sovere ign.
S ING U LA R . D UA L .ma sc . FEM . ma sc . r am.
N .V . dW‘
samrsamrdj au mam: samrdj alz
A . “ I? samr dj am
I . m samr dj d"
Gm samr cigibhilz
D . m samrdj e m ud samr ddbkydm
W 2samrdglbhyalt
mam‘
d'
dGmam) : samrdj o lz
samr J m
L . “ If ? samr dn m g samr dgsu o rm samrfl tw
The wo rds wh ich fo ll ow th is declension ar e mo stly no uns der ived, witho ut any suffix ,fr om the r o o tsW bhr dj (m , no tW ), to sh ine ; “m ay, to clean ;W yaj (except
m fl tvij ), to sacr ifice ; “ r dj , to sh ine, to rule ; fl an}, to dismiss, to create ,
(Hi sr aj , wr eath ,and W asp}, bl o o d, ar e no t derived from fi bhr ajj , to
r o ast (W ). A l soM pafivr dj , a mendicant .
BA S E . N O M S ING . N O M PLUR. INS TR PLUR LO C . PLUR .
m vibhr dj , r esplen
dent
fi fl devej I, wo r sh ippero f the go ds devedbhilz
m o is’
vasm, cr eato r
o f the univer se msvasridbhilz
ITitt afi tpaw
'
z'
vr cfj , a men
par ivrdy par ivr d'
gsu
univer sal mo nar ch viévcir d‘
;
Q'
s—atbhg
‘
zj i, r o asting
1 63 . Irr egular bases in aj .
BA S E . N O M . S ING . N OM . PLUR . IN STB . PLUR . LO C . PLUB .
é i khdfij fir, lame «( khan lain: khdfij alz E FT-H: khanbhz’
Zz Eng khanszi
C f. 76 .
‘
l‘ Fr om ano th er l ‘ o o t ,m vibhr dk, f
’amfiw: vibkrdgbhilz&c.may be fo rmed . (S iddh .
Kaum . vo l . 1 . p .
I Fr oma? deva, go d, andW yaj , to sacr ifice, co ntracted into fi if .
HThe lengthening o f the gH a inm msva takes place whenever i j is changed into
a lingual . (Pan. v1 . 3 ,
l l S ee S iddh .-Kaum . ed . Taranath a, vo l . I . p . 1 65 .
70 D ECLENS ION. 164
2 . W avaydj , name o f aVedic pr iest , has two bases . The N om . S ing . ism :
and all the cases beginning with co nsonants (Pada cases) ar e fo rmed fr om the same
base, film avayas . Th e V o c. S ing .,t o o , is irr egular , being , against the rule o f
these bases, identical with the N om . S ing . S ome grammar i ans , h owever , al low
W 2he ucayale.
B aseW avayas andmS IN GU LA R .
MA s c . FEM .
N ‘I avaya ,
W'
fi'fi avayaj au
A . W avaydj am
I0
D . m avaydj e W Tavayobhyd’
m
A b .
GW : avayafialz
L . W avaydj i
V. m : avaydfi o r m avayalz
1 64. B ases ending in“
Q r .
B ases ending in‘
gr are r egu lar , o nly { i and 3 u, pr eceding the“
gr , ar e
lengthened, i f th e‘
gr is final o r fo ll owed by a co nsonant In the
Lo c. Plur . the final g r r emains unchanged tho ugh fo ll owed by fish .
B ase fimg ir , fem . vo ice .
S I NG U LA R .
M A S C . FE B I .N .V .
Til : g ill;
fil ia
l z’
r au
A . fi'
lt gfr amg
I . frm g ird
D . fili gi r e’
A b.
Gfirt : gir a
’
Iz
S INGULA R . PLURA L .
N . A .V .en: mi]; an? «
aim vd'
r i
1 mmmm’3 13 1 vdrbhyd
'm ems: vdrbkzflh, &c.
BA SE N OM . S ING . N OM . PLUR . I N S TB . PLUR . LO C . PLUB .
39 9W, f town 1ppsi. gt
:
pzir all. qfi: pflr bhfl. 133pai r-3METQdvd
'
r,f . do o r 31 2dad
/[t ETC dva
'
i'alz ETfi'
I: dvdrbhzb 3 13 dvdr shziferr ies , m . f . n . scatter ing aft:M1. fan : Icz’r ak f lfi : mam. afifikrr smzf
A cco r ding t o Pan . v1 . 1, 1 68, m
’
ir t'
would have th e accent o n the fir st,wh ile Midi ,
acco r ding to Pan . v1 . 1 , 1 71 , wo uld have it o n the second syllable, because the N om . and
A 00. D ual in the neuter ar e no t Tr itiyadi, but ar e A sarvanfimasthfina.
T S iddh .-Kaurn. vo l . 1 . p . 1 25 .
m a : avaydj alt
M avayobhifi
W avayobhyalz
1 65 . D ECLENS ION . 7 1
1 65 . B ases in g s .
(A .) B ases fo rmed by the suffixes “ as, “ is , “ as .
B ases ending in ( 13 change the ( 8 acco rding to the general euph onic
rul es explained abo ve . Thus
“ as,if final, becomes a t all . 83
W as fo l lowed by terminatio ns beginning with vowel s r emains unchanged .
{q andmis and us fo llowed by terminatio ns beginning with vowels ar e
changed to 33 and a t i sh and ask. (S ee
“ as befo r e l i b/z becomes vi a 84. “ is and m us befo re {bkbecome {fi r and a
gar . (6
was befo re g sa becomes W as o r a : a lz {q is and as us befo re 3 su
become {wish o r 1 : i ll ,“
3 11ask o r 3 : ulz.
B esides these gener al ru les, the fo l l owing Special rules sh o uld be o bserved1 . N o uns fo rmed by the suffix w as lengthen their 3 ! a in the N om . S ing .
masc . and fem .,but no t in th e V o cative . Thus N om . S ing . m . f.
W : samandlz, wel l-minded (ed/semis) V o c . gum: sumanalz.
2 . N o uns fo rmed by the suffi xes {q o r”
sq is o r us do no t lengthen their
vowel in the N om . S ing . masc . and fem . Hence.
N om . S ing. m . f.
m : suj yo ti lz, having go o d ligh t , fr om g su, go o d, and afifir: jyo ti lz,
11 . l ight ; m : sucha/cshulz, having go o d eyes , fr om g su, go o d, and
fi g : chakshuft, n . e
'
ye . (Parr . v. 4, 1 33, com.)
3 . N euter no uns in w as, “ is
, “ us,lengthen their vowel and nasal ize
it in th e N om . A cc . V o c . Plur . Fr om In : maud lt , Haifamandfizsi fr om
Rfifi tj yo ti lt,m fg/016mm fr om “
avg: chakshulz, vqfachalcshdfizs hi .
B ase W sumcinas,wel l -minded
,masc . fem . neut . (fr om g su and
W mdnas,neut. mind.)
S I N G U LA R .
MA S C . FEM .
N . W suma’
ndhgW } sumdnasau 1 sumanasalz
A . W'
sumdnasam
I . W suma’
nasd suma'
nobhilz
D . W sumanase sumanobhydmsuma
'
no bhyalzA b.
G W : sumanasa/z
L W sumcinasz
V . W ! szimanalz szimanasau
S INGULA R . PLURA L .
N . A .V . firm: suma'
naz. gwaifiz sumdmi rhs i
The rest l ike th e‘
masc .
gwaiwi
m suma’
naso Zz
72.
D ECLENS ION.
B ase m suj yo tis , wel l-l ighted, masc . fem . neut . (fr om g su and
wh j yo tis, neut . l ight .)
gafifa: 87 6t'
lz”y z.
i yo’
tishau suj yo’
tiskafigafifi t r sujyo
’
tisham
was suj yotishe gafifim r sujydtir bhydm
NE UTERS INGULA R . DUA L . PLURA L .
N . A .V . ga i t-"a: sujyotile gafffim
’t sujyo
’
tishi gafifi fit sujydtifizshi
The r est l ike the masc. and fem .
D ecline after the m o del o f W sumanas and gahm saj yo tis the
fo llowing bases
3m s ea’bas
,N om . sing . 3m: vedhdh, m . wise . WW chandr amas ,
‘
N s .
fiat“: chandr amci lc, m . m o on . m pr acketas , N . s . mm : machetdh, m .,
N om . pr 0p. o f a lawgiver . fag: divaukas,N . s . fg
'
efiam divaulcdlz, m .
a deity . i hdyas , N . s . fazm : vi hdydb, m . bird . W apsar as, N . s .
m aps’
ar dlz, f . a nymph . wawq mahaaj as , N . 8 . mahaaj dlz,
m . f. 11 . very migh ty. m payas, N . s . in : pay/a lt , n . m ilk . m ayas ,
N . s . W : ayalz, 11 . ir o n. m yasus , N . s . W gasa li , n. pr aise . M kavk,
N . s . {Felt havi lz, n. o blat ion. fi g ar chis, N . s . wfé : ar ch i lz, n . Splendo u r .
117311 dyus, N . s . mg: dyab, 11 . l ife, age. m vapus‘
. N . S“
5731 vapull ,
n . bo dy
1 66 . “ j am,o ld age,may he decl ined th r oughout r egular ly as a feminine. (S ee
Ther e is,h owever , ano ther basem j ar as , equally feminine
'
l'
,and equal ly r egular , ex cept
that it is defective in al l cases th e terminations o f wh ich begin with co nso nants .
A ny o f th ese neuter no uns may assume masc. and fem . terminatio ns at th e end o f a
compo und ;m nashgakavilz, N om . sing . masc. o ne wh o se oblatio n is destr oyed .
‘
l‘ B o eh tl ingk (D ecl inat ion im S anskr it, p . 1 25) gave sl
'
fl i j ar as. r igh tly as fem inine; in
th e dictio nary, th o ugh o xyto ne , it is by m istake put down as neuter .
W :
W sujyai r bha
gafifwvi : sujyotir bki/alz
gafifmri sujydtiskdm
m 5 sujyotifisha
74 D ECLENS ION. 1 68
D UA L .Q
0 0 O 0
N . A .V . fwd mrj ar au o r m rj ar asau
I .D .Ab. film ni rj ar dbhydm
G. L . m nirj ar ayo lz o r
PLURA L .
N .V . F3 51“ : nirj ar d’
lz o r
A . m nirj ara'
n o r
I . f’
qfi : ni rj ar ailz nirj ar asailz, masc.)D . A b. w : ni rj ar ebhyalz
G. W Ia irj ardzzdm o r
L . fi g nirj ar eshu
Fem. fai n nirj ard, l ike affil kdntd. Neut . S ing . deest (Fi fi mrj ar asam); D ual
Neut . l ike E lli c ntam. fai r s? ni7j ar asi ; Plur .W nirj ar dfizsi .
1 68. N amanelzas, 111. time,W purudmhsas , 111 . name o f Indra, fo rm the N om .
S ing .
f0 W pum dams
’
d, with out final Visarga. The o ther cases are regular ,
l ikeW sumanas,m. V o c. wag : he anehalz.
1 69. “ W asanas, m . pr o per name,fo rms the N om . S ing.W as
’
cmd and the V 00.
S ing .W us‘anaa o r 3ETH: us
’
anab o r M ariana . (Sar . 1 . 9,
1 70 . (B .) B ases ending in radical Rs .
1 . Fr om fil'zpizzda, a lump, and=llamas,to swal low
,a compo und is fo rmed,W pinda
g r as, a lump-eater .
Fr om its pis, to walk, and g 311,well, a compound is fo rmed
, W sapis, well
walking .
Fr om m tus, to sound, and g sa, wel l, a compound is fo rmed, M a t ias , well
sounding .
2 . In fo rming the N om . S ing . m . f . (and neuter), the rules laid down befo r e with r egard
t o nouns in wh ich ‘H'
Q as, “ is, “ as , bel ong to a suffix , ar e simply inverted. No uns
in {50'
s and 3Kas lengthen the vowel , no uns in “ as l eave it sh o rt .
Ex . N om . S ing. m . f . n . fiisa: piadagr afi, gif t: supa,13753sum.
3 . In the N om . A cc. V o c. Plur . o f neuter s, nouns in “ as, “ is,was
, nasal ize their
vowel s, but do no t length en th em.
Ex . Nom . A cc.V o c. Plur . neut .m piadag r afizs i,m 3241277235,m sutwizsi .
4 . Nouns in {Ric and Titus lengthen their vowels befo re al l terminations beginning withconso nants.
Ex . Instr . Plur . gn’tfii zsupir bhilz, 5 355 2 sutzi rbkilz,W 3 sutzilzshu.
5 . The radical“
i s o f nouns ending in {Ra'
s andW as, th ough fo l l owed byvowels, is no t
l iable to be changed into R371. (S ee 100 , no te.)
D UA L .
deest
m 2nirj ar aso lz
PLURA L .
fast-cs : nirj ar asalz
fafit fl : nirj ar asalz
deest
deest
w i ll nirj ar asa‘
m
deest
m piaglagr as,
S ING ULA R .
MA S C . FEM .
N .V. m . p indagr ah
S INGULA R.
N . A .V . fiisa: pindagr ah
D ECLEN sIO N . 7 5
eating a mouthful,masc. fem. neut.
D UA l l .
MA S C . FEM .
fii smfip iadagr asau
NE UTER.
DUA L PLURA LW tfipmdagr asf m p iadag r amsz
B ase 3“ sutus, wel l-sounding , masc. fem. neut .
S IN G U LA R .
M A sc . FEM .
N V. W sutdh
A W sutusam
I gm satusci
D fig?! sutuse
gigs : sutusah
L . m sutasi
S INGULA R .
N .A .V . w sutzih
D UA L .MA S C . F EM .
sutusau
Im'
iii sutzi rbhydm
gal l} : sutasch
figlfi sutusi W1 71 . Nouns der ived fr om desiderative verbs change ( 3 into fish when necessary.
B aseW pipaghis, wish ing to r ead, masc. fem . neut .
S ING ULA R.
MA S C . FEM .
final : pipaghih
fwfin‘
rpipayhisham
fwfim p ipathishd
fwfifi pipayhishe
fwfim pipayhishah
L . fanfafs pipaghishi
rm»
?
.U
S INGULA R.
N . A .V . farm: pipagha
D UA L .
M A sc. FEM .
q fnii pipaghishau
fwfi s’
i rpipathi rbhyd'
m
film : p ipaghishoh
NE UTER.
S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 . p . 187. 83 .
L 2
353 2sutusah
sutdr bhih
fil l-fit sutiir bhyah
W sutusdm
gi g ssutdlzshu o rm sutdshshu“
l l] 11l?“I: pipathishalz
q’tfii : pipaghrrbm
W : p ipaghir bhyali
q fifl i pipaghishdm
fvwzi tsp ipaflvflzshu
76 D ECLEN S ION. 1 72 A
1 72 . The no uns “WEIRa'
s’
is,fern. blessing, and Hfifl saj ush, masc. a companion, ar e
decl ined l ike f h’fip ipaghis, except in th e Nom . A ce. and V o c. Plur ., if they sh ould be
used as neuter s at th e end o f compo unds *.
List of dif er ent B ases inKs.
B A S E . N O M . S I N G . N O M . PL . IN S TR . PL . Lo c . PL .
M A S C . F EM . NEUT . M A S C .F EM . NEUT .
W sumanas,
13117 11 : gm : gwwifil 13m : m o r wzgkind, m . f . n . sumandhl -nah sumanasah sumandn
’
zsi sumano bhih sumanassu o r -nahsu
gm sujyo tis, gafifir: id . gunfire : gmi fi f‘
s gszfif‘
afi : W m O f?
wel l suj yo tih suj yo tishah suj yo tizizshi sujyo tir bhih
fil’
s’
flfl p izzdagr as, ft lw2 id . fiTs'UF 2 filgfiffl fi szfifn: filmlump p iadagr ah p iadagr asahp iadagr afizsi piadag r obhihpipdagr a
W ehahds,splen 3 3“ id . W S taff? aémfm
did, m . f . u . chakah chakdsah chaka'
fizsi chakdbhih chaha'
ssu
Ffl’
qdo s 33 id . i ts i lfil §W 2
(A ccent, doh dashah do’
fizshi do’
r bhih
gq supis, wel l gift: id .
3gfim: gfiifit gvifii
go ing, m . f . u . supisah4
supi iizs i sup i rbhih
m sutus, wel l id . 13311 {fits 1511133:
sounding, m . f.n . sa tusah sutmhs i sutzi rbhih
fqvfimpipaghisnes ir final : id .
3 fqvfzs : funfzf‘
q fnufi ffi:
pipayhi'
h p ipaghishah p ipayhishi3p ipaghi r bhih pipaghishsh
tasi fi chihi r s, desir fmfi : id . W : f'
vm’fifi famifii
o us o f act ing,m . f .n . chikih chi lci r shah chiki r shi 5 chiki rbhih chikir shu
swarms,blessing, mamas]. id . snfm : msfi
‘
fir w as
f . (V o c. id .) ds’
ishah ds’
i'
fizshi ds’
ir bhih a'
sfz'
shshu o r
aw saj as, compa F3} safah id . W 2
nion, m . (V o c . id .) saj ushah sajfizii shi saj zi rbhih sajfishshu
fiféfl suhifizsp newh o gfgq id . gfgm
str ikes wel l , m . f . n . sahin suhin’
zsah suhifizsi suhinbhih
A l l
S ome gr ammar ians do no t al l ow th e length ening o f th e vowel s 1nmzlffl‘
as imshi andF i l
l ? saj umsh i . (mirth 1151 ”11° i1 8
‘l O-lm umW W Wm m m 2ll m y : Elma? W W II) Th is may be r igh t acco r ding
t o th e str ict interpretatio n o f Panini, but the Pr atisakhya (XML 7)gives the rul e m a mo r e
gener al fo rm , stating th at every neuter ending m an Ushman has a l o ng vowel befo r e the
A nusvara, th e A nusvara being fo ll owed by s i o r shi .
1 The Vo cative is § W 2 sama'
h ah. In th e o th er par adigms it ,is,the same as the
Nominative.
2 “ do s may he decl ined r egular ly thr o ugh out as a masculine . B ut it is l ikewise
decl ined as a neuter . O n its ir r egular o r o ptio nal fo rms, see 2 14 .
3 S i ddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 . p . 197.
4Rs no t changed into fish; see 1 00
,no te .
5 S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 . .p. 194 .
6 S ee 75 .
78 D ECLENS ION . 1 75
8. Mo st bases ending in i h change i h into QBA S E . N OM . S ING. N OM . PL . N OM . PL . NEUT. INS TR . PL . LO C . PL .
fagas, m . f . u . l icking far 15; Pass : lz’
hah taifs lanai fasfir: l idbhz’
h fin tan;
5gguh, m .f .u . cover ing grg ins as : gazing. {its gu’mki gsfs : ghudbhz
’
h m ghagszi
O n the change o f initial 779 into figh, see 93 .
9. B ases der ived fr om r o o ts ending in g h, and beginning with 11d, change i h into fi k.
Likewisem ushaih, a metr e.
BA S E . N OM . S ING . N OM . PL . N OM . PL .NEUT. INSTR. PL. LO C . PL.
gy m, m .f .u .milking gagdhdlc gs : du’
hah g’
fs damn gFm: dhugbhz’
h 3g dhukshzi
1 0 . B ases der ived fr om th e r o o ts 3? dr uh, t o hate,Kmuh, t o confo und, fagsnih, to l ove,i i i snuh, t o Spue
,may change the final i h into Z\ ,
t o r i k.
BA S E . N OM . S ING. N 0M .FL . N .FL .N EUr . I N STB . PL . LO C . PL .
15;druh, m .f .n. g;o r 33 :‘
gf'
s’ W 3o rW m ” SW-3.
hating dhru’
t o r dhrzik dr zihah dr ziiizhi dhrudbhz’
ho r dhrugbhih dhrugsri o r dhr ukshzi
1 1 . B ases derived fr om“
vii nah, to bind, change g 71 into fit .
BA S E . N O M . S ING . N OM . PL . INSTR . PL . LO C . PL .
W upa‘
nahf a sho eW updnatm 2updnahahW updnadbhihW upa'
natsu
D ecl ine i paii , f . the B eyah r iver in the Punjab . ffifivish, f . o r dur e. S fi r ush,
f . anger . figfivipr ash, f . dr op o f water . m aviks‘h , wishing to enter . FE? snih, l o ving .
Tagggmluh, cow-m ilker . W madhal ih
, bee. ffi fitvish, f . splendo ur . W bahutvish,
m . f . 11 . very Splendid.
‘
( figfi r atnamush, a steal er o f gems . m anic,m . f . n . such .
amas s,m . f. 11 . Wh ich ? giving pain.
1 75 .m turasa’
h,m . name o f Indra
,changes fi s into fishwhenever ( h is changed
into 3 d o r Q t.
N om . S ing .W tur cishag. N om . D ual W 818 tur c‘
isa'
hau. Instr . Plur .Wturdshcidbhih.
1 76 . fim pur odds’
, m . an o ffer ing , o r a priest , is ir r egul ar . The N om. S ing . is
SEERpar oddh, and all th e cases beginning with consonants (Pada cases)ar e fo rmed fr om a
base 3m pur o glas . The V o c. S ingular , to o , is irregul ar , being identical with the Nom. S ing .
th o ugh some grammar ians al l ow$5EEG-2 hepur oqlah.
S I NGU LA R . D UA L .
8133 12par odaih W WI}par oda'
s'
au
W WIpar odds’
am M pur odfis‘
au
5513 15"par odcis’
d gri simi pur cglobhydm
36 3757 191” 04553 W Ipar odo bhydm
FO STERpur odd’
s’
ah {GM par odo bhydm
WW : PW 04755011 m 2par odds’
oh
PLURA L .
56 3 7512pur odas’
ah
gfl f t pur odobhyah
gfi‘
fl ifipur odcis‘am
gfizzg pa r odahsu
m 2pur odds’
ah
179.D ECLENS ION . 7 9
1 77. Ano ther wo rd,W ukthas‘ds,a reciter o f hymns, is decl ined likem
pur odds‘.
N om . m 2ukthas’
dh. A cc. S ing .m ukthas’
dsam. Instr . Plur .mukthas‘obhih. V o c. S ing .m 2o rm ukthaédh o r ukthas
‘ah.
1 78. B ases in 1m.
B ases ending in ( m retain ”(m befo re all terminat io ns beginning with vowels . B efo re
all o ther terminatio ns and when final , the ( m is changed into i n.
B aseM pras’
dm,m ild .
N om.V o c. M pr as‘dn W flfipr as‘dmau W W pr as
’
dmah
A cc. m pr as’
dmam pr as’
dmau m pr as’
dmah
Instr . W Tpr as’
dmd nsmwi p ra nbhydm amt-w: pr as‘dnbhih
Lo c. W fi? pr as’
dmi m pr as’
dmoh
2 . N O UN S W ITH C H A N GEA B LE B A S E S .
A . N ouns wi th two B ases .
1 79. Many no uns in Sanskrit have mo r e than one base,o r rather they
mo di fy th eir base acco rding to rule befo r e cer tain term inatio ns .
N o uns with two bases,have o ne base fo r the
N om . V o c . and A cc . S ing.
N om . V o c . and A cc . D ual o f masc. nouns
N om . V o c (no t A cc .)Plur al
N om. V o c. and A cc . Plur al o f neuter no uns ;
and a second base fo r all o ther cases .
The fo rmer base will be cal led the A nya base . B opp call s it the str ong
base,and the term inations th e weak term inations.
The second base wil l be called the Pada and B ha base . B Opp cal ls it
the weak base, and th e terminations the str ong terminatio ns .
The general r ule is that th e simple base, whi ch appear s in the Pada and
B ha cases,is str engthened in th e Anga cases . Thu s the Pada and B ha
base “ pr cich beco mes in the Anga cases"
ali pr dfich . Th e Pada base o f
the pr esent par t iciple $131 adat,eating , becomes m adant in th e Anga
Mo st no uns with changeable bases fo rm their feminines in i f. A few,h owever , such
asW dciman,ar e said to be feminine with out taking the i f, and some o f them o ccur as
feminine at the end o f compounds .
80 D ECLENS ION. 1 80
cases . This gives us the fo l lowing system o f terminatio ns fo r wo rds with
two bases
“If bhydm fli t bhz’
h
mi bhydm “I: bhyah
“If bhydm WI: bhyah
33 ? dm"
5 su
S INGULA R . PLURA L .
N om . A cc .
1 80 . C er tain wo rds der ived fr om fi afich, to m o ve,have two
,o thers
th r ee bases .
Err-a: p r ach, fo rward, eastern,h as two bases
,Elli pr dii ch fo r its
ma pm'
ch fo r its Pada and B ha base, and 1s declined acco r dingly iL
S ING U LA R . D UA L . PL URA L .
MA S C. MA S C . MA S C .
Fifi prd’
iichau whenp rdffi
’
chah
“WWI rd bh Kimp g y m : prd'
gbhyaz.
I2prdchoh
Anga base, o r , acco rding to B o pp, str ong base with weak terminat ions . The termina
t ions ar e cal led in S anskr it th e S arvandmasthdna terminatio ns .
T C ompo unds ending in“
55? ach r etain th e accent o n th e pr epo sition, except after
pr epo sitions ending 111 {i o r“
i n. Th is rul e do es no t apply t o fil m’
and fi ddhi (Pan.
V I 2 , 52 Hence nna pa’
r ach, Waffla'
vach, “Ti l p r ach, fi ddach; al so Wa ng/aah,
d hyach ; M sadhryach, feta ? m’
sho ach : but rm? p r atya'
ch,m samya
’
ek,
mast anvafch .
I W prdy’
z stands for 11g pr d'
hk; th is fo r $113 pr dfich+¥taHIn the decl ensio n o fwo r ds ending in“ aah, the rule is that if h as theUdatta,
as inW pr atya’
ch, M samydch, W i anva’
ch 180 , no te), all terminat ions, exceptthe S arvanamasthanas
, take th eUdatta (Pan. v1 . 1 , 1 69 The rule Pan . v1 . 1 , 182 , r efers
t o fi afich, no t to fi ach . The rul e Pan. v1 . 1 , 222 , is r estricted in theVeda by V I . 1 , 1 70 .
“ pm/ch is tr eated as if the accent wer e o n the prepo sitio n.
82 DECLENS ION .
”Fifi pratydfichau
W p r att’
chcfm
S INGULA R. PLURA L .
Im pr até’
chi
FEM .
S INGULA R .
N . M pr an‘
cht‘.
The fo llowing wo rds, der ived fr om afich,to move
,have th r ee bases
A i ms. o n STRO NG B A S E , PA DA O RMI D D LE B A S E . B E A O RWEA K B A S E .
anti pr atycifich, behind (Pan. v1 . 2 , 52) m pr atyach tnfifl pr atich
artist samycin'
ch, r ight (v1 . 2, 5 2) m samyaek m samich
nyc’
inch,low (v1 . 2, 53) fl nyach T-fifl nt
lch
W sadhryd'
fich, accompanying (V I . 3, 95) m sadhryach W sadhr ilch
W anvciiich, fo llowing (v1 . 2, 5 2) m ananeh 1551 1 amich
W i t vishvafich , all-
pervading fa“ vishvach figfi vishzich
fl wdafich,upwar d (v1 . 2, 5 2) 3 3 1 tidach W tidiek
fir'
fifl ti rya’
nch, to r tuou s fifij tir yach m tir aéch
B ases in “ a t and iii-( ant .
1 . Par ticip les Pr esent .
1 82. Par tici les o f the r esent have two bases,th e Pada and B ha baseP P
at,th e An a base in ant. A ccent
,Pan. V I . I , I 733111 g “1 3
S IN GU LA R. D’UA L . PLURA L .
MA S C . MA S C . MA S C .
m adatah
1 84 . D ECLEN S ION . 83
S INGULA R. FLO RA L .
N . A . m addt waft adat(
FEM .
S INGULA R .
N . M ada”,&c ., like fi nadi .
183 . Th ere is a very difficult rule acco rding to which certain participles keep the i nin the N om . and A cc. D ual o f neuter s, and befo re the i t o f the feminine . Th is rule can
o nly be fully under sto o d by th o se who ar e acquainted with the ten classes o f co njugations .
It is th is,
I . Participles o f verbs fo llowing the B hu, D iv, and Chur classes must preserve the i n.
II . Part iciples o f verbs fo ll owing the Tud class may o r may no t preserve the i n. The
same applies to al l participles o f the futur e inM eg/at, and to the participles o f
verbs o f the A d class in “1 6 .
III . Participles o f all o ther verbs must r eject the i n.
I . t dvat. N om. and A 00. D ual Neut .m bhdvantt.
M di’vyat .
m cho rdyat . w cho r a’
yantz‘
.
M bhavishydt w bhavishydnti o rm bhavishyatf.
“ 3169. w fl ydntt'
o rm ydtf.
III . W addt . N om. and A cc. D ual Neut . ‘Hfi fi adat i .
The feminine base is thr ough out identical in fo rm with th e N om. D ual Neut . Hence
m bhci'vanti, being, fem . W tudcinti o rW tudatffistr iking, fem.; fl ail adati’, eatin
'
g ,
fem . The feminine base is declined regular ly as a base in i t.184 . Ano ther rule, wh ich o ught no t to be mixed up with the preceding rule, pr oh ibits
th e str engthening o f th e Anga base thr ough out in the par ticiples present o f reduplicatedverbs, except in the N om . A cc. V o c. Plur . Neut .
,wh ere th e inser tion o f i n is o ptional .
W ith th is exception, these participles are therefo r e real ly declined l ike nouns in“
( t with
unchangeable bases .
B asem adam, giving, from indd, to give, ( an?! ddddmi, 1 give .
S IN GU LA R . D UA L PLURA LMA S C . N B U
'
I‘. MA S C . MA S C .
N .V . d dat «( dadatA . wda
’
datamfi dddatflai ldddata Efliildddatt «a: ddda
1 . eats : dddadbhilz
D . w dddadbhydm
Ab .
G333 2dddatah
W 2da’
datoh
84 DECLENS ION. 1 85
The same rule appl ies to the participles W j akshat, eating ; W i dgm t. waking ;
Em dar i dr at, being po o r ;m sdsat,commanding ; W chakasat, sh ining . B ut
m j cigat, neut . th e wo r ld, fo rms N om. Plur . “ fil j ciganti , o nly.
1 85 .m bg‘ iha
’
t, great, a
’
shat, m . a deer , n. a dr o p o f water , ar e decl ined l ike
participles o f verbs o f the A d class .
S 1N GULA R .
MA S C .
S INGULA R . PLURA L .
N. A . m ar ina gen”? brihatz
‘
FEM .
S INGULA R.
gembvikatt
m mahat, gr eat, likewise o r iginal ly a par ticiple
.
o f th e
Anga o r str o ng base inW ant.
S I N GULA R . D UA L .
MA S C . M A sc .
I H3 ?"mahatd
D . 113} mahate’
W maha'
dbhydm
was : mahata’
h
F i fi? makat i’
V. m mdhan
F‘
F’
S INGULA R . PLURA L .
N . A .V .zil
'
g'
iLmahcit “fl mahatif
Th e r est like the mascul ine .
FEM .
S INGULA R .
FER? mahatif
B ases ending in the Snfiiwes “(mat and aqvat, f o rming their A nya B ases
in fli mant and shtvant .
1 87. The po ssessive suffixes “ mat and anvat fo rm th eir Anga o r
str ong base in lift mant and fil l vant. They lengthen their vowel in the
N om . S ing . Masc . These suffixes ar e o f very fr equent o ccurr ence .
86 D ECLENSION.
M bhavat, being , part . present .
S I N G ULA R .
MA S C .N . t avan
A .‘EITI bhavantam
V . m bhavan
S INGULA R.
N . A .V . t avat
FEM .
S INGULA R .
N . WEI?“bhavanti
1 89. 3 1311m o at, masc. h o r se, is declined regular ly like nouns in fl o at, except in theN om. S ing . ,
where it has $51 amid. W awan inW anaman, with out
'
a fo e,is a
to tally different wo rd, and declined like a noun in “ an N om . S ing .m anarud
N om . D ual W E S anarvdnau ; A cc. S ing . swim} anarva'nam ; Instr . S ing . “ at!"
anarvana Instr . Plur .m fifin anarvabhih. The feminine o fmamat ism awafl .
190 . W hig/at, How much ? W ig/at, so much , are declined like bases in “(man
Their femmmes are fawn? kiyati ,M iyati .
D UA L . PL URA L .
MA S C . MA S C .fan
’
nfiMyantan fai n: kiyantah
fatal N yantaw farm hiyatah
B ases in fl an (1 151 an, “ man, Haven.)
1 91 . W o rds in fl an have thr ee bases : their Anga o r str ong base 1s
m (in th eir B ha o r weakest base i n ; and their Pada o r middle base i t a .
Mark besides,
1 . That the N om. S ing. masc. has and, no t m ad e).
2 . That the N om . S ing . neut . has W a,no t M an.
3 . That the V o c. S ing . neut . may be either ident ical with the N ominative,
o r take i n.
4 . That wo rds ending in 111 man and s imian keep Hi man and aq van as
their B ha bases , with out dr opping th e wa, when th er e is a consonant
immediately befo r e the trq man and anvan. Thi s is to avo id th e
concur rence o f th r ee consonants,such as vi pa
'rvn fr om W311parvan,
192. D ECLENS ION. 87
o r'
m dtmn fr om m diman. This r ule appl ies o nly to wo rds
ending in W man and“
W van, no t to wo rds ending in simme«a an. Thus m talcshan fo rms was: takshnd 181 miir dhan,
a? !mdr dhnd, &c .
5 . That in all o ther wo rds the lo ss o f the wa is optio nal in the Lo c . S ing
and in the N om . A cc . V o c . D ual o f neuter s . The feminine, h owever ,drops the wa ; thus ( Ta? r djni .
M edian, m . king . Anga,m r dj dn Pada, W r dj a ; B ha, q r dj ii .
MA S C ULIN E .
S INGULA R . DUA L . FLO RA L .
v.
1 mmratedD . ( T? rdjne
A b . ( Tit: rdgnah
G ( 15 2rdfyhah
W h itman, 11. name. Anga,m ndmdn Pada, amnama ; B ha,m ndmn.
NE UTE R.
S IN GULA B . D UA L . PLURA L .
w 11d o rm mimant‘
V . “T“ndma o rm miman
I . W ndl
mnd W WIndmabhydm
D . mi mim e mm? ntmabhydm
A b. W mimnah W WI nd’
mabhydm
G. W mfmnah m mfmnoh
L . m nd'
mni o rm fi? ad'
mani m ndmnoh
1 92 . N o uns in wh ich the suffi xes Ire-( man and “ can ar e preceded bya conso nant
, such as m br ahman, m . n. th e creato r, m yaj van, m .
11 . j o int, fo rm their B ha base in “( man and “ can.
an br ahman, m . creato r . Anga, m br ahmtin ; Pada, al l br ahmci
B ha,m br ahmcin.
88 D ECLENSION. 1 93
MA S CUL I N E .
S INGULA R . DUA L . PLURA L.
W WII br ahmdnau
V. m brdhman
I . m br ahmdna'
D . m br ahmdne
A b . m : br ahmdnah
G. 3mm: br ahma’nah
L . m br ahma’
ni await : br ahmdnoh
NE UTE Re GULA a . DUA L . PLURA L .
N . A . TN Tbra’
hma w aft brahmani
V. are br dhma o rm br dhman
D ecline m gaj van, sacr ificer m dtman, self ; W sudharman;
vir tuo u s .
uf‘af
'
aa'
q pr atidivan, o ne wh o spo rt s , fr om {hi m div d ivyati , lengthens
the f‘
q' di to f t di , wh enever the av is immediately fo llowed by i n. N om .
S ing. ufiifqm pr atidivd ; N om. Plur . ufwfq'
arm: p r atidivdnah ; A cc . Plur .
t r atidivnah
193 . W o rds in “ an,l ikeW raj un, king , fo rm their feminine in i t, dr o pping th e
‘3 a befo r e the T-[n w raj hi , queen.
W o rds in EI'
itvan, l ikeW dhi’
van, fisherman, fo rm their feminine in afl var i mdhivar i , wife o f a fisherman. (S ee, h owever , Pan . Iv. 1 , 7,vert .)
W o rds in ii i-( man, if feminine, are decl ined like mascul ines . d man,
1 fem . r o pe ;N om. S ing .M ddma
‘
, A cc. d mdnam but ther e is an o ptional base am damé , A cc.
S ing . and ddmdm. (Pan. 1v. 1 , 1 1 ;
194 . No uns in M an, “ man
, fl van, at the end o f adject ival compo unds , may
either use their masculine fo rms as feminines, o r fo rm feminines in ET (1. Th o se in a. an,
if in th e B ha base they can dr o p the ‘
fl a befo r e th e i n, may al so take i t (Pan . Iv. 1 ,
Thus, Nom . S ing . masc. and fern. gfl'fil sucharmd, having go o d leath er
, Nom . D ual
S im sucharma‘
nau 3 1151 suparvd, W suparva‘
nan : o r,N om . S ing . fem . 33 51
sucharmd, N om . D ualw sucharme, Plur .W 2sucharmdh ; fifi l suparva'
, afi suparve,
gain: suparvdh. O fW bahurdj an, having many kings, the feminine may be,
1 .W bahura‘
j d, D ualW fi fibahur dj dnau.
2 . agtmwahursj s, D ualW bahur dj e.
3 . agt rsi bahur djnt, D ualw bahur dj fiyau.
w dvida‘
mni (Pan. Iv. 1, having two r o pes
,is an exception .
A djectives in “ van, wh ich fo rm th eir fem . in fi var
’i,
~tfi'
fl'
7-[ dhi’
vam a fish erman,
tfi'
afllpivan, ain’tpivar i , fat, may do the same at the end o f compounds, o r
90 D ECLENS ION. 1 97
197. A t the end o f a compound, to o ,W uhan is irregular . Thusm a rghdhan,
having l ong days, is decl ined :
S I N GULA R. D UA L . PLUnA L .
N . aim-gr: di rghd'kdl fi N .A .V W dirghdhd'
pau dims/am}.
Feminine,$5131 dirgkdhni (Pan. VI I I . 4,198. In der ivative compounds with numeral s, and with ffl‘
vi and m seiyu, WE akna
is substituted fo r W uhan . but in th e Lo c. S ing . bo th fo rms are admitted ; e. g . a} !
dvyal malz,pr o duced in two days; Lo c. S ing . fi dvyahne o r fl ff dvyakni o r d yahani .
(Pan. V I . 3, n o .)
1 99. W évan,m . deg, W yuvan, In. yo ung, take m éun
,1mydn
as th eir B ha bases. Fo r the r est, they are declined r egular ly, l ike mbr ahman
,m . (A ccent , Pan. V I . 1 ,
S IN GULA R . D UA L . PLURA L .
N . “12v N . A .V . fi s‘vfnau N. m s
‘vtfnala
A . W s‘vd
'
nam
V. w as . I . m ama.
The feminine o f m évan is w éuni ; o f m ydvan, gafir: yuvatilz
acco rding to some grammar ians, W ydni’
.
zo o . W maghavan, the Mighty, a name o f Indra, takes n hon as its B ha
base.
S I N GULA R. D UA L . PLURA L .
N. m magkdvd N .A .V .w maghcivdnau N . W : maghdvdnalc
A . “W W-i maghdvdnam A . m maghtfnalz
V. W mdghavan I . W maghdvabhilzf
The same wo r d may likewise be declined l ike a mascul ine with the suffix Efitm t o r “( mat
(seeW aynimat.)S IN GULA R . D UA L . PLURA L .
N .A .V . M amaghdo antau N .zI
‘
Efli'
fl'
t magkcivantalz
A . W i maghdvantam A . W maghdvatalz
V. am mghavan I . m fg : maghdvadbkiz.
The feminine is acco rdingly either W‘i fifimaghdnt o r um ? maghao atf.
20 1 . W pdshdn and i ‘lfi'
HT-[ aryamcfm two names o f Vedic deities, do no t lengthen
th eir vowel except in th e N om . S ing . and the N om . A cc. V o c. Plur . neut . ; (in this th eyfo ll ow the bases in fi in; Fo r th e r est , they ar e decl ined like nouns in $71;an
Pan. VI I I . 2 , 69, var t. I ; S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . I . p . 194 ; but C o lebr o oke, p . 83 , has
( fi rst dffghdhd as N om . S ing .
1~ C o lebro oke, S anskr it Grammar , p.81 .
203 . DECLENS ION..91
BA S E . N O M . S ING. N OM . PL . A 00 . PL . INSTR . PL . N O H . PL . “ UT .
m : T D N W W 3 W 3 “fi r.
pashanmflshamashn paw pflshdzzaz» W hndlt pashcfbhizz paws
aryaman, aryama, o rg/amt aryamd aryamdzzalz aryamzta’
lz aryamdbhilz aryamdzu'
Lo c. S ing .{fi l l pflshzu’
o rm pdsha’
zzi ; o r , acco rding to some, I f? pflshi . (Sfir . I . 9,
202 . The r o o t E la m, to kill, if used as a no un,fo ll ows the same rule ; o nly that
when the vowel betweengh and i n is dr o pt, i h becomes ‘ gh.
BA S E . N OM . S ING . N OM . PL . A C C . PL . INSTR . PL .K han
.E ha, Ryl m I I M F f: hanala I : yhnal: {fin habhilz {its Mai
W .a, 11 mm m m: m w est: m rfin
br ahmahan, ha, ghn br ahmahd br ahmahdzzalz brahmaghndlz br ahmahdbhilz br ahmahd’
ai
Lo c. S ing .m br ahmag l mf o rm br ahmaha’
zu'
.
B ases in « in.
203 . W o rds in « in ar e almo st r egular ; it is to be o bserved that
L Th ey dr op the i n at the end o f the Pada base.
2 . They fo rm the N om . S ing . masc. in i f; the N om . A cc. S ing. neut. in
g z; and the N om. A cc. Plur . neut . in {fir ini .
MA S C ULI NE .
S INGULA R. DUA L . PLURA L.N . W dhani
'Vfififidham’
ndu
A . uf-‘
ta’
dham’
nam EfflT'adham’
nan
D . W dham'
ne vfwwi dhanfi kydm m dham’
bhyak
A b. ufamdham’
nall. vfimi dham’
bhyafm vF-m : dkam’
bhyalz.
G. . vfim: dhanz'nalz xrfinfi: dkanz’no li wh at dham’
nd'
m
V. W dhcim'
n w dhcim'
nau
S INGULA R . DUA L.N .A . vF-wdham’
stare? dhanfni
V. “fadha’
ni o rm dha’
m’
u
FEM .
S INGULA R .
D ecline W medhdvin,wise ; “ PET-li yaéasvin, glo r ious ;W edgmin,
No te— These nouns in fl irt , (etymo lo gically a sh o rtened fo rm o f W an) fol lowthe anal o gy o f nouns in 1ri lfll an (l ike W r dj an, in the N om . S ing .
masc. and neut ., and In the V o c. S ing . and in the N om . A cc. Plur . neut . Th ey might be
ranged, in fact , with the nouns having unchangeable bases ; fo r the lengthening o f the
vowel in th e N om . and A cc. Plur . neut . is but a compensation fo r the absence o f the nasal
wh ich is inserted in these cases in all bases except th o se ending in nasals'
and semivowels.
N 2
DECLEN siO N .
Par tz'
cz'
ples in"
fig vas .
204. Participles o f the reduplicated per fect in “ w e have th r ee bases ;
“ 1;d as the Anga, fl ush as the B ha,and “ ( w e as the Pada base .
A cco rding to S anskr it grammar ians , they change the i ts o f “ w e into i t, if
the t( e is final, o r if it is fo l lowed by term inatio ns beginning with 31611 and ( a
(see 1 73, B ut the fact is, that the Pada base is r eal ly “ vat,no t
vq m s .
Anga,W mm dvdfiw Pada,w r urudvas ; B ha, W mm dush .
MA S C U L INE .
S INGULA R. DUA L . PLURA L .
Kw rurudzishab
W rumdu'
ski
S IN GULA R. PLURA L .
FEM .
S INGULA R.Cw r uruduski
205 . Par t iciples in “(m s wh ich inser t an g z’ between th e r edupl icated
r o o t and th e term ination,dr op th e § i wh enever th e termination “ w e is
changed into m ush . Thus
M tasmivdn, fr om m artini , to stand,fo rm s th e fem . wi ll tas thuski
’
.
Ufa-ampechivdn, fr om W pach, to co ok, fo rms th e fem . 11315}pechush i
A very common wo rd fo llowing thi s declension IS W o idvan,wise
, (fo r
fafi'
gfl vividvdn) fem . Page“?vidzish i
‘
.
If the r o o t ends in gz’
o r i i'
,th is r adical vowel is never dr opt befo r e fl ush
,
the co ntracted fo rm o f N ews. Hence fr om a‘i ui, W ainfvdn Instr .
fang“ ninyushci ; fem . fag s? ninyush i .
94 ~DECLENSION.
The feminine is eitherW supa‘
d o r W supadi'
(Pan. IV . I,
but a metre consist ingo f two feet is cal ledW Tdvipadd.
208. W o rds ending in HQ va‘
h,car rying, retainW adi» as Anga and Pada base, but
sh o rten it to Q 12h as B ha base . The fem . is 3 ? flhi .
Final Eh is inter changeable with t , § d, Qt. (S ee 1 28 1 14,
Th e Hi t? o f 3Kiih fo rms Vriddh i with a pr eceding"
G a o r “3 1 d Thus firmvis‘vavah, uph o lder o f the univer se. (A ccent, Pan. V I . 1 ,
S I N GU LA R . D UA L . PLURA L .
I .m viévavddbhz’
h
209.m svetavd’h is fur ther irr egular , fo rming its Pada base in E“was, and retain
ing it in the N om . and V o c. S ing . ;e. g . N om .V o c.am svetavtih; A cc.w avetavd'
ham
Instr .w svetaahd; Instr .Plunm Lo c. Plur . svetavalzszi .
S ome grammar ians all owm svetavdh, instead o f svetaah,
'
in all the B ha cases
(S tir . I . 9, and likewi seW 2s‘ve’
tavah in V o c. S ing .
2 1 0 . A mo re impo rtant compo und withmvcih isW anaduh, an o x, (i . s . a cart
drawer .) It has thr ee bases I . The Anga base W M anadvcih; 2 . The Pada baseWanaqlud; 3 . Th e B ha base W Kanaduh.
It is ir regular besides in the N om . and V o c. S ing.
S IN GULA R . D UA L . PLURA L .
N . W anado dn N . A .V . w e anadvdhau N .m anadvcihah
V . W anadvan I . D .A b.W anadudbhydm A . W anaduhah
A .W anad’vdham G.L. W t anaduhoh 1 . ways : anadudbhihI . W anaduhd L.
=31713373 anaglutsu
If used as a neuter , at the end o f a compound, it fo rmsS INGU LA R . D UA L . PL URA L .
N . A .V .W anadud W 337 anaduhi “ gift anaqlvd'
fizhi
The r est like th e mascul ine .
The feminine isM anaduhi'
o rW anadvdhi (Pan. V I I . I , 98,
2 1 1 .
qanl ap ,water
,is invar iably plur al , and makes its “
15! a long intheAnga base, and substitutes i t fo r up befo r e an affix beginning with w\M .
Plur al : N om . m : dp ah, A ce . em: ap cih, Instr . mfg : adbhih, Lo c .m apszi .
(A ccent, Pan. V I . I,
In compo sition m ap is said to fo rm m svdp ,N om . S ing. masc . and
fem ., having go o d water ; A cc . m i l svdpam Instr . am svapd, &c . N om .
Plur . E N : svdpah ; A cc. a n: svapah; Instr . a fa: svadbhih, &‘
c . Th e
neuter fo rm s th e N om . S ing . m svap ; N om . Plur . affix svamp i o r a ffix
sva'
mp i , acco rding to differ ent interpr etatio ns o f Panini . (C o lebr o o ke, p. 1 0 1 ,
n o te .) The Sarasvati ( 1 . 9, 62)gives a ffix n m fa svampi taddgdni, tanks
with go o d water .
2 14, D ECLENS ION. 95
2 1 2 . “pH/1518, man, has thr ee bases : 1 . The Ange. basem pumdrhs ; 2 . The Pads
base“pain , 3 . The B ha base“punts . (A ccent, Pan. V I . 1,
S INGU LA R. D UA L . PLUa A L .
N .W pamtfn M pumdl
i izsau N .W pumtfihsah
V s iman wpumbhyfm A EU: pmhscih
The Lo c. Plur . is wr ittenfig pufhszi, no t agpuihshzi o r 315punszi 100 , no te). The Sar asvati
gives u puhkshzi Panini (VI I I . 3 , 58) says that 3 7 mm o nly, no t A nusvara in
general , do es no t pr event th e change o fUs into fish ; and therefo re that change do es no t
take place inM m hinsu and Hgpmizsu. In the fir st, i n is radi cal,no t inser ted ; in the
second, the Anusvara r epr esents an o r iginal flm. C f . S iddh .-
.Kaum vo l . I . p . 186 :mW mm m m fi m u
In compo sitio n it is declined In the same manner if used In the masc. o r fem. gender .
A s a neuter it is, N om . S ing .M supum, N om . D ual‘
g‘
g‘
ifi supmhs i’
,Nom . Plur .W
2 13 . “ die o r g dyu, f . sky, is declined as fo l lows, (A ccent, Pan. V I . 1 , 1 71 ;
B ase“ div, g dyu. (S ee
S IN GU LA R . D UA L . PLURA L .
a : dyazih N . A .V . div’
au
A . fai l da’
vam I . D . A b. ga l l dyzibhydm A . fifi’
: divala
G. L . fain: divdh I . zgfir: dyaw.
D . D .Ab . gm: dyzibhyah
A b.G. few: divakL . fetadiez
’
L . gV . mi : dya
'
iih
A no ther base dyo is decl ined as a base ending in a vowel, and fo l lows the paradigmo f Tfig o , 2 19. (S ee S iddh .
-Kaum . vo l . I .
C ompounds like gfafl sudiv,having a go o d sky, are decl ined in the masc. and fem . like
firi div. Hence gal : sudyaah,W sudivam, &c.
In the neuter they fo rm N om . A cc. V o c. S ing . sudyu, having a go o d sky ; D ual
gf‘
ea‘
i sudivi ; Plur . gfifir sadia'
i .
§ 2 I 4 . A number o f wo rds in S anskr it ar e what Greek grammar ians would cal l
Metap lasta, i . e. they exist under two fo rms, each fo ll owing a different declension, but one
being deficient in the S arvanamasthana cases, i . e . N om .V o c. A cc . S ing . and D ual,N om .
V o c. Plur .,and Nom . V o c. A cc. Plur . o f neuter s . (Pan. V I . 1 , Thus
D EFE CTIVE B A S E B A SE DE CLINE D THRO UGH O UT*I . WET-( awn, n. bl o o d
*2 . m dsan, n. face
*3 . m adam 11 .water
4 . “ dat, m . t o o th ; A cc. Pl . 377: data'
k
N o accent on V ibhakt i . (Pan. V I . I ,
96 . DECLENS ION.
m do shan, (m .)n . arm ;
W uas,f . no se ; A cc. Pl . WEI: nasdh
tannin, f . nigh t ; A cc . Pl . fan: nisa’
h
figpad, In . fo o t ; A cc. Pl . “2padah;
“g r i t, f . army Lo c . Pl .W pr i tsu’
fl ifl ma'
fizs, n. meat i ;
“ mas,m . mo nth ll;m : ma
'
sa’
h
zIEIiT‘
U/ akan, n . liver fil
W ydshan, m . pea-so up
W s’
akan, n . o r dur e ;
g snu, n. r idge
Hg hri d, n . Gen. S ing . 33: hrida’
h
Hence in
N o . I . N .V .A . S ing . ism asg'ik o nly Plur .
N .V .A . D ual ismfifiam]! o nly; I . S ing .my"asma'
o r w asnd.
N .V . Plur . ism asfl fij i o nly ; o rm asabhydn
N o . 4 . N .A .V . S ing . am,a, o nly; A . Plur .m dantdn o rW datoh.
N .V . A . D ual is if ? dantan o nly; but I . S ing . dantena o rm data.
N .V . Plur . is em: dah tah o nly 1. D ual safari dantdbhydmo randadbhyan
N o . 1 1 . N .A .V . S ing . ism , A . Plur .W mdsa'
n o r are : mdsah.
N .V . A . D ual is andmeisau only I . S ing .mire meisena o r m mdsé .
N .V . Plur . ismm: mdsdh o nly I .D uulmmwimsssbhyam o rmwimabhyo'
N o . 1 3 . N .A .V . S ing . is o nly; A . Plur .m yi’
ishdn o r {Wit ydshaah.
N .A .V . D ual is {aydshau o nly ; I . S ing .{Fmyfishezza o r {amydshzzd.
N .V . Plur . is 135mydshdh o nly ; I . D u .W ydshdbhg/afmo 1°swi s ho bhya
L . S ing .{B yflshe o roflfiH-shani o r
°flm-sh1_z
Grammar ians differ on th e exact meaning o f Panini
’s rul e and fo rms such as M
do sham'
, N om . D ual Neut . , wo uld seem to sh ow that in the N om . A cc . V o c. D ual the base
M do shan may be u sed. (S ee S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 . pp. 1 07, 1 3 1 , 1 4 1 , B y some the
rule is r estricted to th e Veda.
2 . B ases ending in Vowels .
2 1 5 . B ases ending in vowel s may be subdivided into two clas ses
1 . B ases ending in any vowels,except der ivative
‘
ws a and E Td .
2 . B ases ending in der ivative i s a and “
and.
N o accent o n V ibhakt i . T S iddt aum . vo l 1 . p. I 3 I .
I S iddh .-Kaum .vo l . 1 . p . 14 1 . The sarasvati gives all cases o fM inds (1 . 6,
1TPan. V I . 1 , 63 .
98 D ECLENS ION . 2 1 9
If bases in i ai,
“SB 0,qilfiau ar e to be decl ined as neuter s at the end o f compo unds
, they
sh o rten B ai to 3 i , and f l o and fl an to 3 a , and ar e then decl ined l ike neuters in {i and
3 a . The mascul ine fo rms, h owever , ar e equal ly all owed ( if the base is masculine) in all
cases except th e N om . A cc. V o c. S ing . D ual and Plural . Hence Instr . S ing . neut .Wsur ind o r W Tswag/a; but onlyW sununa
'
.
2 19. Zfidyo , fem . heaven, is decl ined l ike Til g o . It co incides in the N om . and V o c.
S ing . with fai div, sky, but differ s fr om it in al l o ther cases .
S I NGU LA R. D UA L . PLURA L.
N . a}:dyauh W 5? dgtfvau
A . Q T( lg/{m
I . W Tdgcivd
D . andydve slim dydbhydm
fi t dycfvoh
Fo rms o f dyu which o ccur in the Rig-veda
S ing . N . dyaiis A . divam,dytfm I . divd(di
’
vd,by day); D . dive
’
; G. divak, rig/6h; L . divi’
,
dydvi ; V . dyaus (Rv. v1 . 51 , Plur . N . dya’o un; A . 1. dyiibhih. D ual N . dydo s .
B eing used at the end o f a compo und f i dyo fo rms its neuter base as g dyu; e .g .
Hg p r adyu, eminently celestial , D ual “W pr adyuni , Plur . “If ? pr adyflni (S iddh .-Kaum .
vo l . 1 . pp . 1 44, wh ile fr om faj div the neuter adject ive was , as we saw,
“
fig sudgu,
having a go o d sky, D ual sudivi, Plur .W sudivi (C o lebr . pp . 67, fig pr adgu,as a neuter , canno t take th e O pti o nal mascul ine cases (S iddh .
-Kaum . vo l . 1 . p .
No te— Ther e are no r eal no uns ending in‘
Q e,th ough grammar ians imagine such wo rds
as E: eh, the sun, udyadeh, the rising sun N0m. D ualm 1? udyadayau, N om. Plur .
3m : udyadayah.
B ases in i i and “
at d .
1 . Monosyl labic B asesin i t and am, being bo th Masculine and Feminine .
(A .) B y themselves
2 20 . Mo no syllabic bases, der ived fr om verbs with out any suffix, l ike thinking ,
3 3 kr i , buying, cutt ing, take th e same terminatio ns as co nso nantal bases . Th ey
r emain unch anged befo r e terminatio ns beginning with co nsonants, but change final i t and3 12 into {ii i-7 and 3 7pm, befo re vowel s . (Pan. V I . 4, 82 , Their Vo cative is th e same
as th eir Nominative .
(B .) A t the end o f compo unds .
2 2 1 . These mono syl labic bases rar ely o ccur except at the end o f compounds . Here
M ikav1 . 1 , 93 .
22 1 . D ECLENS ION. 99
they may either change i t and 3 511 into and fl‘
uv, o r into l l y and i v. They
change it
1 . Into fl iy and F i nn
a . If the fir st member o f the compo und fo rms the pr edicate o f the seco nd, and the
seco nd maintains its nominal character . Thusm par amani‘
lz, the best leader ,
A cc. S ing .M par amaniyam. Here all: nib is tr eated as a no un, and seems
to have l o st its verbal char acter . W 2s‘uddhadhilz, a pur e thinker , a man o f puretho ught, A cc. S ing .was éuddhadhiyam; gut : kudha, a man o f bad th o ught ,
A cc. S ing .W kudhiyam.
b. If i t and”
5 12are pr eceded by two radical initial co nsonants . wasn’t: j alakr ilz, a buyer
o f water , makes A cc . S ing .W j alakr iyam. W M r iZz,well far ing, A cc. S ing .
W sus’
r iyam. (S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 . p . This is a merely ph onetic change,
intended to facilitate pr onunciat ion . (Pan. v1 . 4,
2 . Into ‘( y and i n, under all o ther circumstances, i . e. wher ever the mono syllabic bases
retain th eir verbal character . W grdmani li , leader o f a.village, A cc . S ing .mg r dmanyam; her eW gra
‘
ma is no t th e pr edicate o f 3 72nib, but is governed by if }: nill ,wh ich r etains so far itsverbal char acter . W 2pr adhilc, thinking in a high degree, A cc .
S ing . W pr adkyam; her e 1!pm is a pr epo siti o n belo nging to ‘fi dhi,which r etains
its verbal natur e .
“
3 3 1 : unnilz, leading o ut , A cc. S ing . W ining/am; her e 3 gad is
a pr epo sitio n bel o nging to Tl né'
. Th o ugh“
i f is pr eceded by two co ns o nants, o ne
o nly belongs to the r o o t . w : s’
uddhadhifi (if a Tatpur usha compo und), thinkingpur e things,would fo rm the A cc. S ing .W éuddhadkyam, and thus be distinguished
fr om w : s’
uddhadhili (as a Karmadharaya compo und), a pur e thinker , o r as a
B ahuvr ih i compound, a man po ssessed o f pur e th o ughts (S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 . p .
wh ich bo th have 51313-11
0
1 s’
uddhadhiyam fo r their accusative . Th e general idea which
suggested th e distinction between bases changing their final i f and 3 d either into
“inand fl an, o r into fly and i n, seem s t o have been that the fo rmer wer e tr eated
as r eal mo no syllabic nouns th at migh t be used by themselves (‘flt dkilz, a th inker ), o r
in such compo unds as a no un admits o f (W : sudhi’
l fi,a go o d th inker ; 11m
.s‘uddkadkilz, a pur e thinker o r pur e th o ughted); wh ile the latter always retained
somewhat o f th eir verbal character , and co uld ther efo r e no t be u sed by themselves,
but onl y at the end o f compo unds , pr eceded eith er by a pr epo sitio n (W : p r adhilz,
pr ovidens) o r by a no un wh ich was go verned by them . Th e no uns in wh ich i f andii stand after two radical conso nants fo rm an exceptio n to this general rul e , wh ich
exception admits, h owever , o f a ph o netic explanatio n so that th e o nly real
except io n wo uld be in th e case o f certain compounds ending in i bhd . Thus i bhd
becomes fi bhuv befo r e vowels, wh ether it be verbal o r nominal . (Pan . v1 . 4 ,
Ex . svayambhdlz, sel f-existing, A cc . S ing . W svayambhuvam. (Sar . 1 . 6,6 1 .
S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 . p . N o t
,h owever , in T315 3var sha
‘
bhdlz, fr o g , A cc. S ing .
a r ska‘
bhvam (Pan. V I . 4, and in some o ther compo unds, such as R 1 3
kar abhflli o r Emi t kdr abhii lz, nail , F i t punar bhiill , r e-bo rn, drinbhzilz, thunder
bo l t . (Pan . V I . 4 , 84 , var t .)
W2 sudhilz i s never to be tr eated as a verbal compo und , but always fo rms A cc . S ing .
W sudkiyam, &c .,as if it wer e a Karmadhar aya compo und . (Pan . v1 . 4 ,
0 2
1 00 D ECLENS ION. 222 .
2 . Po lysyl labi c B ases in“
i i and 3 5 fi .
222 . Po lysyllabic bases in £ 6 and 3 36 being bo th mascul ine and feminine, such as
W : papili , pr o tecto r , the sun, W : yayilz, r o ad, and 7112nyi tzZZz, dancer , ar e declined
the verbal compo unds F ifi: p r adhilt and 381112crikshalti lz, except that
1 . they fo rm the A cc. S ing . in 35m and
2 . they fo rm the A cc. Plur . in{F Un andW i n.
Remember also , that th o se in i f fo rm th e Lo c. S ing . in i t, no t in fil yi .
W W : va‘
tap r amilt, antel o pe, may he declined l ike mil!papilt but if der ived by fail
levip ,it may entir ely fo l low the verbalmfi:pr adlzilz (S iddh .
-Kaum .vo l . I . p . The same
appl ies to no uns like g'
rfi: sutilz, wish ing fo r a so n ;W 2 sukki’
la, wish ing fo r pleasur e .
They fo ll ow the verbal wi t p r adhi li th r o ugh o ut , but th ey have their Gen . and Abl . S ing .
in 3 : all ;"
333: sntyult (S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 . p. If the final l o ng i f is pr eceded by
two conso nants,it is changed befo r e vowels into {Rig Ex . W
ilt s‘ushkifi, ll f
fi l'
flfi§ushkiyau, &c.
102 DECLENS IO N .
s t res s a s
S Q FQ
a;Q"Q
75
3 3 2 3 25 6
Q é a fi fl gS a.
- as“Q ' Q S Q
as M » as e"
s li t. is;sit;as isz e n d g q s 5 5 4 z e n fi d q
222
224. D ECLENS ION . 103
223 . Al l th ese compo unds may be used with o ut any change , whether they refer to
no uns in the mascul ine o r in the feminine gender . If the head-bo r o ugh o r the sweeper
sh o uld he o f the femal e sex , the B at . S ing . wo uld still bem fa ? g rdmanye str iya i ,
m a Fa ? kkalapve str iyai (Kasika 1 . 4 , S ometimes,h owever , if the meaning o f a
compo und is such that it may by itself be applied to a woman as well as to a man, e . g .
t r adhili , th inking , some grammar ians all ow such compo unds to be declined in the
feminine, l ike smfi : Iakshmilz, except in the A ce. S ing . and Plur . , where they take 3?am
and G : alt rmi pr adhyam, m : pr adkyalz, no t fi pr adhim o rmfi : pr adhilz (S iddh .-Kaum .
vo l . 1 . p . A sim ilar argument is appl ied to F i t punar bhdli , if it means a woman
mar ried a seco nd t ime. It may then fo rm its Vo cat ive m be panaraba (S iddh .-Kaum.
vo l . 1 . p . and take thefivef ul ler f eminine terminati ons
MA S C . A N D FEM . FE M . O N LY .
S INGULA R. S INGULA R.
N . A .V . midpr adkyan mi l? p r adkyan
I . D . A b. m p r ad/zibhydm m p r adhibkydm
G. L . Huh: pr adhyo lz Huh: pr adhyo lt
PLURA L. PLUB A L .
N . W !pr adkyalz
G. M pr adhydm
L . W pr adkishu
1 . Mono syllabic B ases in i i and a ll,being Feminine only .
224. B ases like if? dh i, intellect ,‘zfi sr i, happiness, {i M i , shame
,
W’t bh i , fear , and ni b/m i , br ow,
may be declined thr o ugh o ut exactly liketh e mono syl labic bases in i i and a ti
, such as $2112, a cutter . Th eir o nly
pecul iar ity co nsists in th eir admitting a number o f optio nal fo rms in the
D at. Abl . Gen. and Lo c . S ing . and Gen. Plur . These may be call ed thefive
f ul ler f eminine terminati ons in Q ai, m: db, an: ti lt, w? aim, and vii nam .
W 2p r adkyalt
W 2p r adkyalt
wi ts : pr adhibhili
m pr adhibkyalz
“h ipr adhindm
wi gp r adhishu
104 D ECLENS ION. .225
S INGULA R .
A . furl dii z’
yam get bh iivam
I . fim dhiya’
gm bhuvti
D . fifil dhiyé f‘bfi} dli iyai 53 bliuve’
A b . fun: ang/en firm: dhiya’h gag bhuvdh
G. fun: dhiycili film: di ng/ tilt gar: bhuvah
L . firfil dhiyi firtfi dhiyam fife! bhuvi
V . xii : di nk.D UA L .
N . A .V . fifl fidhiyan
I .D .Ab . xfiwi di nt /agai n
G.L . fmfi: d/i iyo’
li
PLURA L .N . fin : dh iyali
A . fun: di n’
yall
I . zfif’m dh ibhilt
D .Ab . W dlt ibhya li
dhiydm t dnd’
m
L . iflg dhishu
2 . P o lysyl labic B ases in {i and‘
ai fi,being Feminine only.
225 . (1)Th ese bases always take the full feminine terminatio ns .
2)Th ey change th eir final i i and 3 5 ii into Ity and‘
i v befo r e terminationsbeginning with vowel s .
(3)Th ey take am and as as th e term inatio ns o f the A ce . S ing . and Plur al .
(4)Th ey sh o r ten their final {i and“
35 ii in the V o cative S ingul ar .
(5) Remember that mo st no uns in i i have no ( 3 ln the N om . S ing.,while
th o se in 3 22have it .
No te — S ome no uns in i t takeas in th e Nom S ing . : m i : ( wi ll , no t desir ing (appliedto women);m . lakshmih
, go ddess o f pr o sper ity;m tur ilz, bo at ; tia‘t: tantr ik
,lute .
Ver sus mem o r ial is m m m m m 7T
W ? " (S ar . p . 1 8 a .)
B ase as? nadi and W nady. B ase q vadh ii and East vadl w.
S I N G U LA R. S I N G U LA R .
FEM . FEM .
N . W nadi mg vaa’lui It
A . we? nadi-m A . fl vadhfl-m
I . am nady-d
'
1. mm nadha (i
106 D ECLENS ION. 226
excluding the ful ler terminations (i ai , an: tilt, Wi rim, Wi ndm) fo r the mascul ine, o r the
simple terminations (E e, 2ab, 33 2 all , i i ,“
all aim) fo r th e feminine . Th e same applies tothe compo und gi ll : sudhilz, when used as a substantive, go o d intel lect .
If the same compo unds ar e u sed as neuter s, th ey sh o rten th e final“
i i o r 3 11 o f th eir
base, and ar e decl ined l ikem vdr i and figmg'idu, with this differ ence, h owever , that in
the Inst . D at . A bl . Gen . Lo c . S ing . D ual and Plural th ey may o ptio nally take the mascul ine
fo rms .
Masc. and Fern.
S INGULA R .
gfifi sndhiyai
fif’tfl l
‘
l sudhiydm
D UA L . D UA L .
A .V . gf‘
u'
zfi sud/i iyan
1 . D . A b. gfvwi sudhibhydm
gfvafi: sndhino li
PLURA L . PLURA L.N .V . gfim: sudhiyali
I. W sudh ibhi li
D . gum sudh ibhgab
A b.W sudh ibhyali
I can find no auth o r ity bywh ich these fuller term inatio ns ar e excluded . In ngvi mfi
bahus‘r egasi , the feminineW e‘r egasi r etains its feminine character (nadi tva) th r o ugh o ut
(S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 . p . 1 1 6) and the same is distinct ly maintained fo r the compo und
po ssessed o f distinguish ed intel lect, if used as a mascul ine ( S iddh .-Kaum .
vo l . 1 . p .
o r“
gfll’fil ’t sndhibhib
o r“
5 13021: sndhibhyali
o rr gfii fl l: sudhibhyali
o r gu‘l'm sudh indm
o r gffl'
g s adhishu
227. D ECLENS ION. 107
Mm . and Fern. O pt ional ful ler forms .
O pt ions lgpgr
nns
amaz
e“ ex cept
with beaut iful br ows .
S l N O ULA n. S xN GULA n. S l N O ULA n.
N . H subhr dli fig subh’ru
A . gg'
ei subhruvam fig snbhrn
I . W sub/wand o r 1331111 snbhrund
D . fig? sub/wave fig? snblm wai o r subkrune
A b . W snbhr uvalz figmtsubhrnvdli o r W snbhrnna lz
G . gg‘
q : subhr uvalt gm subltr uvdlt o rwill: subhrnnali
L . ggfir snbhrnvi W subhruvdm o r gi fts sublim ni
V . S li t subltr zi lz figsubkm o r°€1-bhr o
D UA L . D UA L . D UA L .N . A .V . fig
‘fi subhrnvau m i subkruni
I . D . A b .W subki 'libltydm W subhrubbgdm
G . L .m subltruvo lt W subliminal;
PLURA L . PLUnA L . PLUB A L .
N .V . W t sublimi nal: gaffer snblminiA . gaffer: subhr uvali gi ft! subhr iini
I . ggfu : snbhr ii bli i li o rW snbhr ubhi li
D . “ in: snbhr dbhyalt o r tgn s ubhrnbkyali
A b .W t snbhr iibhgali o r gum: subhrubhyalz
G . fit—F’Tl subhr nvdm gmfisnbhrundm o rW subhr dnam
L. subhmishu o rm snbhr ushn
Comp ounds ending in Po lysyl labic Feminine B ases in i i and 3 fl .
227. Fem inine nouns l ike H'
Q'
l‘nadi and fl i ckamzi may fo rm th e last po rtio n O f com
po unds wh ich ar e used in the mascul ine gender . ThusW 1 bakus’
r eyas i, a man wh o
has many auspicio us qualities (S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 . pp . 1 1 6
,andW ati chamzi
,o ne
wh o is better than an army (S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 . p . ar e declined in the masculine and
feminine
S IN GU LA R. D UA L . PL URA L .
n'
gvimrfi bahus’r eyasi 53W bahus‘r eyasgan W bahusr eyasyali
figawait bahns
’
r eyasim w bahus‘r eyasyan gm bahusr eyasin
3315 118“bakus
’
r eyasyd W bahus’
r eyasibhydmW 2bahus r eyas i'
bh
3 3W baltus’
r egasyai W bahus r eyasi bkgamw m bakusr eyasibhyalz
g m bahus‘r eyasyalt W bakusr eyasfi hydm W W bahus’
r egas ibhyab
“5m a r “3m bahuér eyasyoza new bakus‘r eyasindm
W baknsr egasydmW 2bahusr egasyo lz W bahns‘r eyasishu
a“x
Hg bahus r eyasz W baku§ r eyasyau m . bahus‘r eyasyalz
Fr om 73 8 112lakshmi li , th e N om . S ing . wo uld be WW atilakshmfi .
P 2
108
S IN G ULA R.
N . m atichamu/i
A . W ati chamum
I . W ane/tamed
D . W e?
! atichambai
A b wfa'
arm : atichamvdli
G. W 2atichamvdli
L . m u ll atichamva’
m
V. wfirfl g atickamu
D ECLENS ION .
D UA L.
W atichamvan
W atichamvau
m ari tal atichamtibhydm
W atichamdbkydm
3 1W atichamdbkya'm
W 2atichamvo li
W 2atichamvoh
W atichamvau
228
PLURA L .
W 2atichamvalt“
Elm ? !atickamdn
W 2atichamubhilt
m um: atickamubkgalt
W W2atichamnbkyalz
W ati ckamz’
inam
fl “ ? atichamushn
W atichamvah *
No uns l ike “
finlfi'
kumar i , a man wh o beh aves like a gir l , ar e declined l ike agm’t
bahu§ r eyasi , except in the A ce. S ing . and Plur .,wh er e they fo rm W kumdryam and
W 2kumaryalz. (S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 . pp . 1 1 8
,
228. a ? s tr i , Woman,is declined like Ha
‘i nad i , o nly th at th e accumula
tio n o f fo u r co nso nants is avo ided by the r egular inser t io n o f an 3: i , e . g .
flaw s tr iyd, and no t W s tryd.
A cc . S ing . and Plu r .
Remember al so two opt io nal fo rms in th e
B ase {a} s tr t and fanstr iy. (A ccent , Pan vr . I ,
S I N G U LA R .
N H} s tr i,
D UA L .
N .A V . fi s tr iyau
A . {El s tr im o r ffa'
tl s tm’
yam I . D .A b .WR ITs tr ibhydm
A b .G.W 2S tTiZ/dl
ll
L . W Ts tr iydm
V . fa stm’
(Pan. I . 4, 4)
G. L .m s tr iydli
PL URA L .N . fa ts s tr igali
A . s tr ill o rW 2stm’
galt
I . am: s tr ibll ili
D . A b . a im: stm‘
bhga’
li
G.
L .m str ishzi
229. When {El s tr i fo rms the last po rt io n o f a compo und, and has to be tr eated as a
mascul ine, feminine, and neuter , th e fo l lowing fo rms o ccur
MA S C .N . Wfi‘lfifi? atistr ih
‘Hfilfia‘
atistr im o r
asfata ti atistr igam
I . W atistr ind
D . W atistr aye
ati str elt
L . fi fil’ifi atistr an
V.‘Hffl‘
a atistr e
A b .G.
The neuter 15 said t o be N . A . .V S ing .
“
33“ bahusr eyasi'
, N . A .V . D ual
S I N G U LA R .
F EM .
wfirfca: atistr i lz
W EE.
atis tr im o r
wfirfiafi atistr igam
wfafiam atistr iyd
W ati str iyai o r
fi li a l} atistr aye
33! atistr iycili o r
W ? a'
tistr‘
an
m atis tr e
NEUT.
wtafia atis tr i
wf’s fam atistr ind
‘Hfilfiafll ati stmne o r
W atistr aye
Wil li-
(HERatis tr inalzo r
“ 2atis tr eli
mafia-Fmatistr ini o r
W atistr an
bahufr eyasini, N A V Plur 3 3W bahusr eyasini , D at . S ing .w Gift 7) 0 1‘
°lfl7f bakus
’
r eyasyai-sye .
9) o r -sine, &c.
1 10
B ases in g i .
MA S C . F EM .
nfir
kam’
,po et mati
’
, th o ught
Elfin: flfi'
f :
kdvi-li mati -li
art-t i nfii
kavi-m mati -m
kavi —né maty-d
-eo r
Icava’
y-e Fifi maty
-a i’
3 52 HB2mate-li o r
[cave-li W T. maty-dli
HEB Iil'
FGmataii o rkanazi W maty
-dm
air
ma’
te
N. A .V . r
kavi
wfi0
I . D .A b .
kani—bhydm mati—bhga
'
m
wi th ash :
kavg-dli maty
-dli
handy-alt matdg
-ali
A .
main,
uni :
[cant-n matitlz
kavi -bli ili mati —bhilt
infi rm: nfimz
kavi-bhgali mati -bhyali
kani -ndm1‘ mati-ndm
was “Firskavi -shu mati -shu
The Guna m the V o c. S ing . O f
D ECLENS ION. 236
B ases in“
a n.
S I N GULA R .
NEUT . MA S C . F EM .
‘E i ivdr i
,water mr idu
’
,so ft myidn
’
, so ft
Taft qg 5g:
ndr i mr idzi-li mr idzi -li
‘K i ?mg
‘ idii-m mr idzi -m
WT
my'idzi né mg
‘ idv-d mridzi-nd
$133 Ramad an-c o r
ndr i-ne my ida’
v-e sf? mr idv-aiaffirm: gel : gametes
-li o r sign: mridzi-nalt o r
vdr i nalt inf ield-IL q'
g-r: mr idv «in sal t mridd-li
CE} 18mr idazi o rmr idan qg
'i mr ida din
Elfi vd'
r i o r $537h vdr e* mrido mn
’
do
D UA L“ in” i i 55. ‘E’fi
vdr i nt' ind mr idif0
af o ul qgs fi qgwi
ndr i bhydm mn dzi—bhya‘
m mmdii-bkga'
m mmdu-bhydm
mfinlfi: {i t si t: g ar ment-n
nd’
r i -no li mridv-dli my
‘idv-dli m mridv-dli
PL URA L .
W W sen gear: 1135?vd
’r i-ni mr iddv-alt mr ida
’
v-ali mridd-ni
K:
ndr i -ni mgi du-n i
vd
’
r i -bhili made-bin made-bin mridzi -bhili
mit e r: 11n 11n new:vdr i -bhgalz mridzZ-bhgalt mridzi-bhyali
1220
vd'
r i -na‘
m mridti -ndm mridii -nd’
m
a[lt“. as as as I
vdr i -sku mr idii -shn mg‘ idii -shu mri dzZ
-shn
neuter s in i i , 3 a, fi r i , is appr oved by Madhyandini
V yaghrapad, as may be seen fr om th e fo ll owing ver se : W W an N T
m e t a-1m m;fafifi ngnn nmnei nfie : n
1‘ No uns ending in sh o rt i i ,
“
i n,
may thr ow the accent o n Wi ndm in th e Gen . Plur . (Pan . V I . 1 ,I
m o r e usually, matinam.
fi n,and Rit a, and having the accent on th ese vowel s
,I
Hence matina’
m,o r ,
I Th e l ines O f separation placed in the transcr ibed paradigm s ar e no t intended to divide
232 . D ECLENS ION. 1 1 1
23 1 . Eff! kati, h ow many, W yatt as many and I f? tati, so many, are used
in the Plur al o nly, and take no terminati o ns in the N o m. and A cc . Plural . Fo r the rest ,
they ar e decl ined l ike EFF? kavi , and witho ut distinct io n o f gende r .
N om . V o c. E f f? kdti
A cc. “if? kdti
Instr . aifirfir : ka’
tibhih
D at . affirm: kdtibhyalt
A bl . aifirm: kdtibkyalt
Gen. W kdtindm
Lee.vista-3
232 . Fflfl'
scikhi,fr iend
,h as two bases
M sd/chdg fo r the A nga, i . e . th e stro ng bas e .
Ffifl‘
sdkhi fo r the Pada and B ha base .
It is ir r egular in some o f its cases .
S I N G U LA R . D UA L . PL URA L .
11mm? scikha'
gau
W ed/chin
1 . van sa'
khyd ats mi sa’
khibhycim nfisfin sdkhibhilt
D . afs mi sa’ lchibhydm nfism: sa’khibhyal.
A b .mag: sdkhyuli afsmi sdkhibhydm «Pam: sdkhibhyak
G. 1153: sa’
khyult man:
L. FERsa’lchg/au 113 132sa’
khyo lt
V. “Gsa’
klze l ike N om .
The feminine Edna/ch i is r egu lar , l ike ai l nadi .
A t th e end O f compo unds,we find F flfl'
sakhi , masc. declined as fo ll ows
B aseW susakhi, a go o d fr iend, masc .
S I N GU LA R . D UA L . PLURA L .
N . W susakhd w susakhdyau m susakhdyak“
A . gm susakhdyam m susakhdyau gum susakhin
I . gut-“
Gmsusakhind gnfami susakhibhydm gafafir: sesame/alt
D . W susak/zage gnfismi susakhibhydm 15m m: susakhibhyalz
A b. gain: susakhelt gs fiami susakhibhydm gsfiam: susakhibhyalt
G. W 2susakheli W 2susakhgo lz gm susakhina'
m
L. ERG} susakkau W 2susakkgo li m 3 susakhis l m
v. gainsusakke n fisusakhdyau 5 1mm: susakhdyall
A t the end O f a neuter compo und FEE sakhi is declined l ike flTfv dr i
th e r eal terminatio ns fr om the r eal base, h il t o nly t o facilitate th e learning byheart o f these
no uns . Masculine no uns in sh o rt“
3 11 ar e “Tabha‘
nu, sun,
“
cin vagu, wind, fangvi shnu,110m
pr 0p ‘fiQ pi ta, as masc., is the name o f a tree; as neuter , th e name O f its fruit
Feminine no uns in sh o rt 3 a ar e “a: dhennli , cow, ( Q 2r ai fali , r o pe,W2tanuli , bo dy.
S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 . p . 1 1 2 .
1 12 D ECLENS ION . 233
233 . trfirp ati , l o rd, is ir r egular
S I N G U LA R . D UA L . PL URA L .
N . W 2pdtili N . A . V . Val pa’
ti N . mm: pdtayali
A . nfiipe'
nm I . D . A b. nfirmi pa’
tibkgdm A . uni-{peat
I . m pdtyd G. L . with: 1 .trfirfir: pa
’
tibhili
D . pdtge D . A b .W 2pdtibhyalt
A b . G. “ 2pdtgnli G.11” pa
’
tinam
L . flapdtgau L . W patiska
V . QRpdte V . W 112pdtayali
Wfirpati at th e end o f compo unds, e . g . i nf}: bhdpati , l o r d o f the ear th,
m uffip r aj dpati , l o r d O f cr eatur es , is r egu lar , like“
difa kavi . Th e feminine
o f trfirpati is tra‘l patni , wife, i . e . l egit imate wife
,sh e wh o takes part in the
sacr ifices o f her hu sband . (Ffin . I V . I ,
234. The neuter basesm aleshi,eye,m as t/i i , bone, i f“dadhi , cur ds,W sakthi ,
thigh , ar e decl ined regu lar ly like HTFt vdr i , but in the B ha cases they subst itute the bases
W ab bit,W astkn, “dad/i n,W sakthn. In th ese cases they ar e declined, in fact, l ike
neuter s inM an,such asW ndman. (S ee no te to 203 .
A nga and Pada baseW akski, B ha baseW akskn.
S I N GU L A R . D UA L .
N .A .m dkski N . A .V . m dkskini
1 . mm akshnd I . D .Ab .mam? dkshibhydmD . mai l akshne
’
G. L. main: akshndlt
A b .G. W 2akshnali
L. mfimakshnz and 1 1m akshdni
V .53aa
’
kske ( o r m dkshi)
B ases inwri , Mascul ine,Feminine, N eutei
'
.
235 . Th ese bases are declined after two mo del s
S I N GU LA R .
I . M A sc . F EM . NEUT .
B ase H1!n’
a’
p tri , grandso n E 1!svdsri , sister H1?!dha’
tri , pr o videnceN . W na
’
p td E FTsva'
sd
A . m ndp tdr-um W e
‘
vdsdr -am
I . WETndp tr -a'
G ET sva’
si -ci Wm dha'
tri -na‘
o r W dluitrd*
D . Hi na’
ptr-e mé svdsr -e E li adhdtri -ne o r madlzdtr é
A b .G. 3 32na’
p tnlt E § 2svdsuli W dhdtr i—nali o r “ 2dka'
tzili
L . W ndptar-i m sva
’
sar -i
V .7m: na’
ptali (r ) W sva’
salt (r ) W dhdtg‘ i o r W 2dhdtali (r )
If“
fi ri has Udatta and becomes‘
g r and is pr eceded by a co nso nant , the feminine
and th e A jadi A sarvanamasthana cases have th e Udatta .
1 .infafir: dkshibhili
D .A b .m a’
kshibhyalt
G. maul akshndm
L. wing dkskiska
1 -14 D ECLENS ION . 237
S I N GU LA R . D UA L .
N . aim kr o shtd N .A .V . M kr o skydr au
I .D .A b.
“
saga? kr o shtubh c’
im
mi kr o shyrdy
The base‘
ifi‘
gkr o shtr i 1s the o nly o ne admissible as Anga, i . e . in the str ong cases ,
excepting theVo cative . (Eairs : he kr o sktah IS,I bel ieve, wr o ngly admitted byW ilso n .)
The base Efil‘
gkr o shtu IS the o nly o ne admissible as Pada, 1 . e. befo re term inatio ns begin
ning with co nsonants .
The o ther cases maybe fo rmed fr om bo th bases, but the A 00. Plur . isW h o shyfln o nly.
(Pan. V I I . I , 95
Tho sewh o admitW kr o shgfln as A cc. Plur . likewise admitW kr o shgum as A cc. S ing .
(Sar . I . 6,
The feminine is shi tkr o ehm,decl ined likewe? nadl .
237. 3 m i , man, a wo rd o f fr equent o ccur r ence, th o ugh , fo r co nvenience sake, o ften
r eplaced by 3 1 mm , is declined r egul ar ly l ike f'TQ'
pi tr i , except in the Gen. Plural ,where it
may be either 71“nflndm o r“
Gil li unadm. (Pan. V I . 4 , 6 .
S INGULA R . D UA L . PLURA L .
N HTnd 1 8 udr an TC mir alz
A . at ndr am H'é udr an 7
171:m in
1 . HT«mi quit nrz’bhydm qfir nm
’
bkz’
lz
D .
‘3 nr e’ (V ed . na’
r e) 31111 121 17771m “
T01I2nn
’
bhycili
A b . 32mil. inf!nn
’
bhytim T0112nr z
’
bhya’
li
G. 32mil: (V ed . na’
r ali) 312nr dlz Tmnrind'
m o rmnr indm (V ed. nar d'm)
L flfi nar i 332 M 611 i s nrfishzi
V.
"
3 271611. WEna’
g'
au 3 1 2mim ic
The femlmne ism ndr t'
2 . B ases ending in“
é! a and“m a.
238. This class is th e m o st numer o us and mo st impo r tant in S anskr it,
l ike the co r r esponding classes o f no uns and adjectives in us, a , um in Latin,
The accent may be o n‘
the fir st o r on th e second syl lables in the Pada cases beginning
with {bk andas . (Pan. V I . 1 ,
PLURA L .
N .
“
siren : kr o shwmz.
G.
“
figfl i kr o shfflndm
m kr o shgusku
239. D ECLENS ION . 1 15
and 09, 17, 011 in Gr eek. Th e case-terminatio ns ar e pecu liar , and it is best tolearn aim c ntalz, aim lcdntd, E ff! c ntam by hear t in the same manner as
we learn bonus,bona
,bonum, witho ut asking any questions as to the o r igin
o f the case-terminatio ns,o r their r elation to the terminatio ns appended to
bases ending in co nso nants .
N . A .V . aiiifi1.4mm at?
I . D . A b. W kc’
intdbhyd'
m m kdntcfbhytim
G. L.
"
i i i'
lfl fi2kdnta’yo lz. misfit: kc‘inta’
yo lz
N .V . aim: aim kdntJni
A . m kcinttin m ké'
ntd’
ni
I . wfi : kc’
intaz’
lz ski ka'
md'
bhiz. x ii-i: kdntanD . A b . aiiirm: kdntébkyali aiiinw: kdntd
'
bbyaz. ktinte’
bhyalz
G. aims ? kdntcfndm aims? art-cm? kdntdné'm
L . afi gkdnte’
shu fi g kc’
z’
nte’
shu
No te — C ertain adjectives in 3572all , ‘HT6, ‘fi’
am,which fo l low the ancient pr o nomina]
declension, wil l be explained in the chapter o n Pr onouns
Bases in m s, Masculine and Feminine.
These bases ar e der ived immediately from verbs ending in W1 6, such as “ pd,
WTdhmd. They ar e decl ined in the same way in the mascul ine and feminine gender . In
the neuter th e final WTd is sho rtened, and the wo rd decl ined likewe c ntam.
A r’
iga and Pada base i évapci
, B ha base i évap, al l -pr eserving, (mas c. and
fem .) The neuter is decl ined l ike fi i‘
d'kdntam
B ases in N T(7, meaning mo ther , fo rm th eir Vo cat ive in “N a e. g . E ? alcka, Eli amba,
W a l la ! B utm ambd‘
dd,W ETambdld, and sit-Eran ambikd fo rm the r egular Vo catives
aims ambdde, vis ta“
ambd'
le,s ifiqfii ambike.
m kdntdysz.
aim-ui
at? kinte
D UA L .
afi ka'
nte’
wimwi kdntd'
bhydm
m 2kdnta’
yo li
PLURA L .
aim: ksntd'
z.
1 1 6'
D ECLEN S ION. 240
MA S C U L I NE A N D FEM I N I NE .
S INGULA R . DUA L .
1 . fawn? vis‘vap-(i
D . fm fivis’
vap-e W 2viévapd-bhyalz
A b . W 2b is‘nap-ali
G. fawn: vifvap-ali
L . fa'
vsfnvifnup-i m 2b is
’
nap-o la
NE UTE R .
fami vis’vapam Fawnvi§vape mm vis’
vapa‘
ni, &e.
D ecl ine m s omapdfi, S oma dr inker ; Sim .s‘afikhadhmdlz, sh el l -bl ower ;m 2
dlzanaddfi, weal th giver .
240 . Mascul ines inW 6, no t being der ived by a Krit suffix fr om verbal r o o ts, ar e decl ined
as fo llows
B ase {Ta hdhd.
S I NGULA R .
{13 121 111111.
A . m i Izdkdm
I . {E Thd'
izci
D . in?A b . 3131:
gm :
gr?
C H A P TE R IV .
D ECLENS ION o r A D JECTIVES .
24 1 . A s every no un in S anskr it may, at the end o f a compo und, fo rm the
final po r tio n o f an adjective,al l th e essent ial r u les fo r the declensio n o f such
compo und adjectives had to be given in th e pr eceding chapter . Thu s in th e
declensio n o f neuter no uns in “ as,l ikem mainas, m ind, th e declensio n o f
W sumdnas , as an adjective masc. fem. and neut ., was exh ibited at the same
time I 6 In th e declensio n o f no uns ending in co nso nant s,and admitting
o f no distinction between mascii l ine and feminine terminatio ns, (thi s appl ies to
The Sar . 1 . 6, 38, g ives th e O pt io nal fo rm {1312 in the mascul ine. A t th e end o f
a feminine compo und the same fo rm is sanctioned in th e Rfipaval i, p . 9 b .
{mun11 1111 11 1 1 .
m axi 1 111 11113111 .
3 1mm?0 hdhauh
2bdkaufz
1 18 D ECLENS IO N o r A DJECTIVES . 248
248. The fo rmat ion o f feminine substantives must be learnt fr om the dictio nary. Thus
W 2aj alz, go at, fo rmsm ay . W 2as’
valz, h o r se, fo rms W asfvd.
3 11-732bdlalz, boy, fo rms m bald.
o f the S'
udra caste .
e wife o f a S’
udr a.
31133 2ma'
tulafi, maternal uncle,fo rms “ 3 5 mdtuli
'
o rW mdtula’
ni , an uncle’s wife .
m 2dchdryalz, teacher , fo rm s wmrfira‘t wife o f the teacher butmacharya
'
, a female teacher .
W 2patilz, l o r d, fo rms “all patni, wife, &c.
$ 2s’
iidr afi, a S'
udra,
D egr ees of Compar ison.
249. Th e C ompar at ive is fo rm ed by at tam ,o r {mt iyas the
Super lative bym tama,o r {a ishflza i . Th ese terminations Ht tar a and at!lama
ar e no t r estr icted in S anskr it to adject ives . Substantives such as 71mi , man,
fo rm 717m: nri tamab,
a th o r o ugh man ; (a? str i,woman
, {a‘hrt r str é
'
ta'r d i ,mo re o f a woman. Even after case-terminatio ns o r per sonal terminations,
at tar a and 7m tama may be u sed . Thus fr om pdrvdhzze, in th e
fo reno on, w pflrvc
‘
ihnetar e, earlier in the fo r eno on (Pan. v 1 . 3,
Fr om “ fapachati , h e co o ks,trafmm‘
pachati tar dm,h e co oks better (Pan v.
3 , W fil’fifl i pachati tamdm,h e co oks best (Pan. v. 3,
250 . Ht tar a and an tama, if added to changeable bases , r equir e the
Pada base . Thus fr om “Ti p/rack m mdktar a ; fr om d anin
W dfianitar a fr omm dhanavat m m dhanavattar a ;
fr om fargq vidvas fi r st : vidvattama ; fr om m p r atyach 1 8i),m matyaktar a . Ther e ar e
,h owever
,a few exceptions, such as W :
dasyukantamab, fr omm dasyukan, dem o n-killer ;W t supaflzintar alz,
fr om W supathimwith go o d r o ads .
2 5 1 . M iyas and {s iskzha ar e never added to the secondary suffixes
q tri , “mat,
“
afl o at, m va la
, few-( via, fi in. If adjectives ending in these
suffix es r equ ir e in: iyali and g? ishgfha, the suffixes ar e dr opt, and the i n: iyalzand {a ishtka added to th e last co nso nant o f th e o r iginal base. w balaJ
van, str o ng, W ba l- iyas, afa r bal-isbfiza . an!doga’lzg
‘ i,m ilk ing,m
dob- iya s, fifgv a’oh- ishgha . Hf!“ sr agvin, gar landed, W er aj j iyas, mo r e
pr o fu sely gar landed. W inai imdn, Wise, “ mat-{yamwfimmat-ishflza .
O n th e dental i n,see Gana Kshubhnadi in the Kas.
-V ritt i .
1' B efo r e i t tar a and 7ml ama adjectives r etain their accent ;befo r emfg/as and {E ishgha
they thr ow it o n th eir fir st syllable (Pan . 1 1 1 . I , 4;v1 . I , Ther e ar e a few exceptio ns .
I Feminines in i f, der ived fr om mascul ines,mu st sh o rten the i f befo re i t tar a and
7m tama; 1mm? bra'hmani fo rms awfulm brd’
hmani tara'
. O ther feminines in i f o r 3 22
may o r may no t sho rten their vowels ; {ail str i fo rms a im str i tar d o r fa i l
"
!str itard.
A l so W sr eyasi tar d o r afififi ifl .s‘r eyas itar d fagm vidushz
‘
tara'
o r Wviduski tara
'
.(Pan . v1 . 3 , 43
252 . D ECLENS ION. o r A DJECTIVES .
252. O ther adjectives,to o
,lo se their der ivative elements befo r eM ig/as
and n ishiha, o r ar e o th erwise ir r egu lar by substitut ing new bases fo r theC omparative and Super lat ive.
11W : pdpalz, bad ; mm pap- iyas , wo r se ;
wfimpap-ishtha, wo r s t.
s eco nn BA S E . CO MPA RA TIVE . supznu n vz .
1 . film antika,near m nedi
’
yas i f? ! nedi shtha
2 . m akm, smal l m kani’
yas kani shgha
W as ahaiyas wfamalpishgha
3 . 3 6 um wide m var fyas aft ! var ishgha
4 . fl mu, straight W rij'lyas W rii ishtha
VedicW r aflyas ( Fa? r aj ishtha“
5 .W kris’
a, lean
6 .m kshipr a, quick
7.m kshudr a, mean
8. {IE guru, heavy Tl? gar m gar iyas m gar i shtha
9. an tripr a, satisfied “ tr ap m tr apiyas m tr aptshtha
1 0 . flfi dirgha, l o ng m dra‘
gh m drdghiyas w dra'
g lus htha
gt di a, far ( 3 dav afar davishtha
. gz dr idha, firm W dr adhiyas Ef f ? dr adhi shtha
1 3l111181? par ivr idha, exalted lIft i lfi
'
par im'
adkW par ivr adhtyasM par ivr adhishth
1 4 .113 pyi thu, br o ad “ pr am m pr athi
‘
yas ufirs pr athishgha
1 5 . W pr asasya,praisewo rthy W s’
ra W s’
r eyas“a? s
‘r eshgha
o r 371 jya i dyas fi g j yeshtha 1‘
1 6 . funpr iya, dear 1!pm mpr egas a? p r eshtha
1 7.
“
figbal m, many {1 67112 bhz’
iyas w bhdyi shtha
1 8. 1 36 bakula,frequent fig bamh m bamhiyas fife? bamhzshtha 1
'
19.W bkg'is‘a
,excessive 8 51 bhr as
‘ 8 51m bhr as‘i yas m bhr aszshtha
20 .ligmg
'idu, so ft HQ: mr ad m mr adzyas HQ“? mr adzshtha
W yuvan, yo ung“IR yav m yaviyas yamshtfia
fl kan m kani‘
yas 3 51? Icamshtha 1“
22 .m adam, firm m sddh M adam mf‘
w sddhiskgha
23 . 33 vfiddha, o ld fi var sh m var shiyas var shishgha
o r wj ya m j ya'
yas fi s j yeshtha
24. im vflnddr akafi eautiful“
via;vrind v ndfyas vr indzshtha
25 ° FER N /l ir a, firm 8 ! stha film s theyas m s theshtha
26 . sthii la, str ong“
N i sthav m sthavi‘
yas Wm stkavishgha
27. feat sphir a, thick Emspha W spheyas £31? spheshtlza
28. £ 8 hr asva, sh o rt mhr as i f“? hr as tshtha
Pan. v1 . 4, 1 62 .
‘
I' S ee Phitsutra, ed . Kielh o rn,
1 . 7; 23 I P511 ." 3 , 63
120 NUMERA LS . i 253 :
C H A P TE R V .
i 2531 q 123 2, m , min
”
,e’
kalz, e’
lcd,e’
leam,o ne.
2 aa, a, a, a’vazi
,dve
’
, dve’
,two .
3 3 am,fi at,m ,
trayab, tisr db, tr im, th r ee .
NUMERA LS .
(B ase m eka .)(B ase 3 dva; in comp. fa
“
a'
vi .)
(B ase fa tr i .)4 8 W 2, W , W ft , chatvcfr alz, chcitasr alz, chatvdr i
,fo ur . (B ase
3 131 ckatur .)5 ‘I 1ifl ‘
pcificlza, m . f . 11 . five .
6 t,fi shcif, m . f . n. S IX .
7 s”mi sap tci , m . f . n . seven.
8 l; are? ashta ii , m . f. n . eigh t.
9 2“
H? miva, m . f. n . nine .
1 0 ac m daéa,m . f. 11. ten.
1 1 actm s ékddasa, eleven.
1 2 “Rm dvdaaéa .
1 3(13 am tr dyodasa.
I4 98 “323 chatur daéa .
15 anm pdr’
ichadaéa.
1 6 a;tha t shddaéa.
1 7 as was;sap tddaéa .
1 8 qt;w rest madam .
20 20 faiwfir: vimédti lz, fem .
2 1 R“!W 2 ekaviméati h.
24 38 figfiwfin chaturviméatih .
25 a“W fiwfi : panchaviméatib.
26 afifl fgfl fa‘shadviméati lz.
27 as wwf‘
ésrfa: saptaviméati lz.
28 a m rf-
q‘nfw: ashtdvims
’
atib.
29 QQ fi fémfif : navaviméati lz.
30 so fa“ tr imécit, fem .
3 1 32mm ekatr iméat.
3 2 d dtr iméat .
33 33m tr ayastr im'
sat.
34 38W eliatustr imsat.
(B ase m pafichan.)(B ase
(B ase m sap tan.)
(B ase 3 91 ash lan.)
(B ase m navan.)
(B asem dasan .)
(B ase as inm dasan.)
35 all
36 QfiW shaflmméat .
37 as “ fia saptatr iméat .
38 31:
39 aam navatr iméat.
40 80W chatvdr imsaat,fem.
4 1 82W ekackatva’
r iméat.
42 83 m m dvdchatvdr imsat o r
44 88m chatuéchatvdr imsat.
45 8M
46 at,m shatchatvdr iméat.
47 88W t“ sap tachatvdr iméat .
48 8bM ashmchatvdr iméat o rM m ashlachatvdr iméat.
49 3am navaclzatvdr imsat.
50 no W pafichdédt, fem .
5 1 HQW ekapafichdéat.
5 2 II;M dva'
pafichdéat o r
fgfim dvipafichdsat.
“3 51mm tr ayalzpafichdéat o r
fafim tr ipaficlzdéat.
122 N UMERALS . 253 .
I I 0 990 55rm 511? dasa'
dhikam satam o r 5515171 daéaéatam.
1 1 1 999 2 551551113138 517? eka'
dasadh ikam satam o r ( 75 15515111 ekddaéaéatam &c.
0 1’
5111 eka'
das‘
am éatam,i . e . a hundr ed h aving eleven (in
excess). P811 . v. 2,
1 1 2 999 3 13 11118191 5171 dva'
dasa'
dli i /f am sal am o r 3 1551 5171 dvddasam éatam.
I 1 3 M W 517? tr ayo a’asddh ikam satam o r anhuh rfrtr ayodaéam satam.
1 14 998 fl émm wchatur daéa'
dlzikamsatam o r a'
gé5i 51frchatur daéam satam.
1 1 5 999W mfifi i gfipafichadasddlzikam satai l i o r t iaafiWpafichaa’aéaméatam.
1 1 6 992, HEW 511i shodasddh ikam satam o r 15813 51517i shodasam satam.
1 1 7 99s mm 517? saptadas’
a'
dhikam satam o r W W saptadaéam éatam.
1 1 8 991;W 517i ashza'
a'aéddhikam satam o r 215 15 51517i ashlda
’aéam satam.
1 1 9 9cuq 5171navadasa
'
a'lzikam éatam o r 7151351 517i navadaéam satam.
1 20 920 15151311931: 513°
vimsatyaa’hikam satam o r fsi'5i 5lvi vimsam satam 9“
1 2 1 959 m fa'mfiraii 5m
°
ekaviméatyadhi/cam satam o r m fam517i ekavzméamsatam &c .
1 30 950 13 515131? 5m°
tr iméadadhikam éatam o r fa'
51 5rri tr iméam satam
140 980m m chalvdr imsadadhi /cam satam o r m 517? ebalad~
r imsam satam
1 50 990 m m 5111pafichdéaa’adhi lcam satam o r 1811151Wpafichdéam éatam“
o r 111155171 sdr d/zasatam,, 1 00 (hundr ed).1 60 9240 W fil
’ffi'
5r7i shashzyadh ikam satam o r s fnm’
shashtis’
atam .
1 70 990 m firfir 517i sap tatyadh ikam satam o r w firsm’
sap ta tisatam.
1 80 9958215113? 5111 aéityadhikam satam o r wai f-
(15maéitisatam.
1 90 92 0 M M 5171 navatyadh i lcam satam o r Raf-
115m nava tiéatam.
200 200 2'
517} due sate o r fg 51'
ii dvisatam o r fgm‘} dviéati .
300 500 afif’m51q tr ini sa lami o r fa511
°
1 tr i s’
atam .
400 800 5 173 111 51mf=1 chatvdr i satani o r 3 325111 chatulzs’
atam.
500 1100 115 1 51111F=rpaficlza satdni o r 115 1513°
pafichaéatam.
600 Hg shat satani o r 5155111 shafs‘
atam.
700 900 1111 5mfi=1 sap ia satdni o r W 517°
1 sap tasatam.
800 t o o 51111f=1 ashg’a satani o r 9515 5111 asktaéatam .
900 2 00 7131 51111f°=1 nava satani o r 713 5171 navas
’
atam .
1 000 9000 551 511-111? dasa satdni o r g5rm? daéaéati
'
,fem o r
“
823°
sahcis r am,
neu t . and masc . l‘
2000 5 000 3 Rafi dve sahasr e .
30 00 5000 ai fm113 1511q tr ini sahas rdni .
5 1371aga lam,neu t . and masc x f
Pan . v. 2, 46 . The same rules apply t o W sahasr am
,1 000
,so that 1 0 1 1 migh t be
r endered bym m 8 38 ekddas’
am sahasr am,104 1 bym “
HEB.“
ekachatvdr ims'am
sahasr am,&c . 1
' S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 1 . p . 635 .
253 . NUMERA LS . 123
3 31lake/1am,neu t. o r fem 151371niyutam,
neut . and mascd’
O ne m illio n, 11371p r ayutam,
neut . o r masc .
Ten millio ns,311158 Ieogi, fem . 1
A hundred millio ns, wi g ar bua
’a,masc . and neut.
A th o usand m illio ns,
mahdr buda,masc . and neu t .
,o r w padma , neut . ,
i . e . lo tus .
Ten th o usand m illi o ns, lfi
‘ Icharva,neut .
,i . e . m inu te.
A hundr ed tho usand m ill io ns, Fem? m
'
lcharva,neut .
A bill io n,113 11121 mahdpadma, neu t .
Ten bil lio ns, 5
°
r§ sai lka , masc .
,i . e. an ant-h il l .
A hundr ed bill io ns, 5
°
Rwéafzkha, masc . neut .,i . e . a co nch - sh el l, o r 1133
samua'r a,masc ., i . e . sea.
A th o usand bill io ns,115 15119 mahdéankka, o r 3331 anlya ,
ultimate .
Ten th o usand bil lio ns, gm hdhd
,masc. , o r manmaa
’
hya, m iddle .
A hundr ed th o usand b11110ns,m ammahdhdhd o r W fiparar dhaj 1 . 0. o ther hal f.
O ne m il lion billi o ns, 3a dl mna, neut .
Ten milli o n b illions,115 1371mahddhuna .
A hundr ed m ill ion billio ns, fi ft flfi a lcshaahini, fem .,
i . e . a h o st .
A th o usand mil lion bill ions, Rafi fg'qfimahdkshauhiai'
.
In the same manner as W ad/ aka,exceeding, m ari a
,dim inished, may
be used to fo rm numer ical compo unds . 513°
pafichonam éatam o r
11311 5111pafichonaéatam,100 5 , i . e . 95 . If o ne is to be deducted
, $ 71 127 m,
with o ut E311“
eka,suffices . m fiwfii a
'
navin'
zs’
ati lz o rW rath : ekonavz’
n’
zéati lz,
20 - 1,i . e . 1 9. A no th er way o f expr essing nineteen and simi lar number s
is by pr efix ing Em ekdnna,i . e. by one no t ; W W ekannavin
’
zsati lz,
by o ne no t twenty,i . e. 1 9. (Pan. V I . 3 ,
D eclensi on of Car dina ls .
eka,one.
S IN G U LA R . PLURA L
MA S C . FEM . NEUT . MA S C . F EM . NEUT .
N . m : e’
kalz. m M r at e’kam fi eke m e’
lca'
lz. em éka‘
m'
A . ( a? 41m was? ékdm m’
e’
kam m a s . t an: e’
kult m fa a s";
I . Eat-5Te
’
kena m c’
lcayd Val? ékena ( a! e’kai lz W e’
kabhiZL“
Eat" ékailz
D . e’
kasmai F i fi e’
kasyai 2711113 e’
lcasmai fi Ww’
kebkg/alam te’
kabkyah fi W .e’
kebhyalz.
A b.W ékasmdtm en: é/casyahW e'
kasmat m é kebkyalzW W’
ékabhyalzW W .e’
kebhyalz
G. W e’
lcasya m .
’
kasyalaW ekasya m i e'
kesham W ETe’
kasam m e’
kes /zam
L . W ekasminW ékasya'
mE ffi e’
kasmin ( 3173e’
keshu W’
fi e’
kasa fl ag ekes l m
v. n aca E311 e'
ke m e’
ka fi r e’
ke can: e’
kcilz m fa e’
ka'
ni
S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 1 . p . 635 . 1
‘ A mara-Ko sh a 1 1 1 . 6, 3 ,
24 .
I A d iff er ent str ing o f names is g iven in th eV aJasan .-S anh itaX V I I . 2 . S ee also W
'
o epcke ,Me'
mo ir e
sur la pr o pagatio n des chiffr es indiens p . 70 ; Lal ita-vistara
,ed . Cal cutt . p . 1 68.
R 2
124 NUMERA LS . 254
254. f‘
g dvi , two , base a dva, like“
61113 kanta
D UA L .
MA S C . F EM . NEUT .
N . A .V . i i do ati
G. L. 3 111 : dvayo lz
255 . Pa tr i , th r ee, fem . fin;tisri .
N .V . tr a’
yafi Fara : ama 1 66) afifin
A . m tr fn f i at tis r dfi
1 fafir: mafia. I tisr fbhilz.
D . A b . fan : tr ibhya'
z. finpn: tzsrz’
bhyafi
G. 3 13 1 1? tr aya‘
nam (V ed . tr ina'm) f iflzl tfi tisr ind
'
m 1‘
L . fag tr ishu firm: tism’
shu
256 .1cil
'
g'
gchatar , fo ur , fem .
N .V . W chatvd'
r alz (Parnvn . 1 , 98) W 2chaftasr alz W chatmfr i
A . W ! chatu’
r aZz (Pfin. v1 . 1 , 1 67) W chdtasr ah W chatvd'
r i
1 . wgfi'
i : chatzir bhiJz muffin chatasrz’
bhifi W : chatar bha.
D . A b. 3 3W. chatzir bhyak W 2chatasri’
bhyalz fl WI chatu’
r bkyak
G. c atur nd'
m w chatasrizzd'
m“
l“
W ehatur nd’m
L.vergé chatur shu chatasri s/ea wgfichatar s hu
25 7. 1q o afichan,five. six . W ashtan, e igh t.
N . A .V . W pa’
ficha fl? sha’
g.‘ ml askt
‘
azi o r W ashga’
1 .t iafa: pafichdbha.3: 3 561: shaabha mafia: askga ha. o r mafia: ashga
’
bhilzu
D . A b . flaw: paficha’
bhyalz 3 33111 skaqlbkya
’
lz W 2ashtdbkya’
fio r W : ashgabhyalz
G.TTQ FTTpafichdnd
'
m 11 W shamrd'
mQT WEN Tashyand'
m 11
L . flag pafic/zcisu W shatsui m ashgdszi o rm ashgasa
Cardinals With bases ending in 3 n,such as m sap ian, 3 513 navan,
m daéan, W ekddaéan, &c . , fo llow th e declension o f 3 917-1 pafichan.
fai51fi1: c in’
zéatib is declined like a feminine in th o se in 3 15 l ike fem inines
in “
i t 513°
éatam like a neu t . o r masc . in 15 a .
258. The co nstr uctio n o f th e cardinal s fr om 1 t o 19 r equir es a few r emarks . N eka
is natur al ly used in the singular o nly, except wh en it means some ; E35 Elfifii’ eke vadanti ,
N o t fiat: tisrz
‘
lz, no r 3 71122chatasfllz. (A ccent , Pan . v1 . 1 , 1 67, vart . ; v1 1 . 2, 99, var t .)
1‘ N o t FHQ
'
QITtisrizzd'
m, no r 3 3 5m chatasfiadm (Pan. v1 . 4, th o ugh th ese fo rms o ccur
in th e Veda and Epic po etry .
I A ccent , Pan . v1 . 1,1 80 ; 181 . [1 Pan . V I . 1
,1 72 . {1 Pan . vu . 1 , 55 .
1 26 NUMERA LS . 250
5119113 2 shashiitamdb, the sixt ieth33 1333 3 2ekashashgi tamdli ,
3 31133 2 ekashashtcib,
3 3 i°
3 3 3 2 sap tatitamdb, th e seventieth .
3 313 3 133 3 2 ekasaptati tamcifi,
3 3 3 3 3 2 ekasaptatailz,
W 2aéiti tamdlz, the eigh tieth .
3 3 11511fi13 3 2 ekd’
éititamdlz,
( 3 1151111: elcdéitdlz,
3 3 f33 3 2,°31,
°3, navatitamdb, i , am,th e ninetieth .
123 13 3 1333 2 ekanavati t
3 3113 3 3 2 ekanavatdlz,
513 3 3 2,°31,
°3, éatatamdlz, i, am,th e hundr edth . (Pan. V .
( 511513 3 3 2 eka§atatamdlj, th e hundr ed and fir st.'
3 3 3 3 3 : sahas mtamdlz, the th o usandth .
th e sixty-fir st .
the seventy-fir st .
ty-fir st .
th e ninety-fir st .
260 . N umer ical A dver bs and o ther D er ivatives .
1133 3 11111 115,once. 33 13 1 ekadhd, in o ne way.
fi t dvi li , twice . F53 1 dvi dhd o r 3111 dvedhd, in°
two ways .
fa: tr ib, th rice. Fawn tr idhci o r $3 1 tr edhd, in thr ee ways .
3 32chatulz, fo ur times . 3 331 chatur dhd, in fo ur ways.
113 3 312pafichakfltvalz, five times . 33 3 1pa1‘
ichadhd,in five ways .
3 57 3 2shazkri tvali , six times
,810. 313 1 shodhci , in six ways, &c. (o rW
3 215512ekaéale, o ne-fo ld.
125 12dviécqlz, two -fo ld .
fa5 l2tr isuli , th ree-fo ld, &c. (Pan . V. 4,
dvayam o r fgmi dvi tayam,a pair . (Pan. V . 2,
6 3 tr agam o r fa'mi tr i tayam o r a31 tr ayi, a tr iad.
3 35 11chatushzayam,a tetr ad .
£13 311pafichatayam,a pentad, &c .
Th ese ar e al so used as adjectives,in the sense o f five-fo ld &c .
,and may
th en fo rm th eir plur al as 33 33 12pafichataydb o r 113 33 pafichataye
113 1 pafichat
,a pentad, 35 13 daéat, a decad (Pan. V . I , ar e generally
used as feminine ; but bo th wo rds o ccur l ikewise as masculine in th e
commentary to P51}. V . I, 59, and in the Kas
’
ika-V r itti .
The o rdinal s fr om sixty admit o f o ne fo rm o nly, that is 3 3 : tamafi; but if precededby ano th er numer al
,bo th fo rms ar e al l owed (Pan . V . 2 , m s
‘atam fo rms its o r dinal as
W ! s’
atatamah only (Pan. V . 2 ,
26 1 . PRONOUNS A N D PRONOMINA L ADJECTIVE S . 1 27
C H A PTE R V I .
PRON OUN S A N D PRONOMINA L AD JECTIVES .
26 1 . Per sonal P r onouns .
B ase (in compo s ition) a? mad and B ase (in compo s ition)fi g ivad and
w asmad . m yuskmad .
N . W? ahdm,I
A . Hi mgm, mmd, me
I . IN Tmciyd, by me
D . a? mcihyam, ame, to me
A b. “ mdt,fr om me
G . in mcima, ame, o f me
L . aft!mégi , in me
D UA L .
marl dvd'
m,we two
ma? dvd'
m, a? nau, u s two
W dvdbhydm,by u s two
W W? dvdbhyc'
im, a? mm ,to u s two
33mm? dvc‘ibhydm, fr om u s two
N : dvciyo lz, H? mm, o f u s two
N : dvdyo lt, in u s two
PLURA L .
afi -vaydm, we Tl ydycim, yo u
A . W (13 772472, 3 : nalz, us gm yushmdn, 3 : w k, yo u
I . m : asmd'
bh ilz, by us auntie: yushmd'
bhib, by yo u
D . Emmi asmcibhyam, a : nab, to us gwai yuskmcibhyam, a : valz, t o yo u
A b.m asmdt,fr om us m yushmdt;
fr om yo u
G . W asmdkam, a : nak, o f us 3
65ml;yushmdfram,
“
at: w k, o f yo u
L . M fg asmdsu,in u s m yushmdsu,
in yo u
The substitutes in th e even cases, at met, ame, Ti} mm, H: nab, HT tvd,
te, ai vdm, 3 : w k, have no accent and ar e never u sed at th e beginning o f
a sentence,no r can th ey be fo l lowed by such part icl es as a cha
,and
, 3 1 1161,
o r, Ear eva, indeed, 3 ha, E 3 aka .
H tvcim,th o u
H i tvd'
m, a t tvd, thee
am twig/d, by thee“
ga l tzibhyam,te, to thee
H1 tvdt, fr om th ee
1m tciva, 3‘ te,o f thee
a f’u tvdyz
’
, in thee
F ri yuvd’
m, yo u two
33 ? yuvd'
m, a? vdm, yo u two
33 1W? yuvdbkydm,by yo u two
gamutyuvcibhydm, ai vdm,to yo u two
33 1W ? yuvd'
bhydm, fr o m yo u two
33 13 : yuva’
yo lz, Hf vdm,o f yo u two
"
gi rth: yuvdyo lz, in yo u two
128 PRONOUNS A N D PRONOMINA L A DJECTIVES . 262
262 . B ase (in compo sition)"
fig tad, h e, sh e, it . (A ccent, Pfinw l . I,
S IN GULAR . PLURAL .
DIA S C . F EM . NEUT . MAS C. FEM . NEUT .
N .
“
H! sdfi FT8d fi tdt.
fi’
te’
A . fr tdm“
fr? tdm ‘
H'
Tt ta’
t m td'
n m: tdla i f ? ! tdm'
I . i s ténu m tdyd fin te’
na ?r: mfg. 7115-3: tdbhilz mfg.
D . 7113 ta’
smai mi tdsyai"
Fifi tdsmai $011: te’bhyalz 71m : tdbhyalt $0112te’
bhyalz
A b .M tdsmdt KW : ta’
sydh W tdsmdt $9 112te’bhyalz 7mm td’
bhyalz M tébhyab
G. W tdsya Hen: ta'
sydlz m tdsya fin? te’skdm m i tdsdm h i téshdm
L . m w’
smin Hen’
tdsydm infe st tdsmin fig mg tdsu fig te’
shu
D UALMAS C . F EM .
N . A . 13 tad 3 te’
1 . D . A b . mm? tdbhydm am t tdblzydm
G. L . fi t: tdyo lz nth: tdyo lz
263 . B ase ( in co mpo sit io n)as iyad .
S IN GULA R . PLURA L .
MAS C . F EM . NEUT . MA S C . FEM . NEUT .
N . F? sydlz FITSyd M tg/ (i t 73 tyé m : td W tyd'
m'
A . 711 tydm mi tyd'
m N 1 tydt m tydn WT: tyd'
fi “Th tydni
I . i t? tye’
na am tydyd a? tye’
na fit tyaz’
lz mfir: tydbhilz i t tyaz’
lz
D . 71115 tya’
smai Na‘
tydsyai Wfi tydsmai M tye’
bhyalzt yd’
bhyalaW i tyébkyafi
A b .W tydsmdt WRIT: tydsydlzW tydsmdt inn: tye’
bkyalzW 2tydbkyafififmtyébhyalz
G. N ETtydsya WRIT!tydsydfim tyu'
syu W tye’
s hdm 7am? tydsdm fitfi tye’
shdm
L . M tydsmin WEN tydsydmM tg/dentin"213 tye
’
sha m tydsu i fs tye’
sha
D UA L .
MAS C . F EM .
N . A . Rfityad all tye’
1 . D . A b . mm? tydbhydm 7am ? tyd’
bhydm
G. L . m tya’
yok RFD: tya’
yofi
P o ssess ive P r onouns .
264 . Fr o m th e bases o f the th r ee per so nal pr o no uns, po ssesswe adjectivesar e fo rmed by m eans o f {q iya .
Hah n,
° 1'
IT,°ft, mad Z
A’
ya /ft , yd, yam,m ine .
Hafi z,0 111,
O il , tvadfya lz, yd, yam,th ine.
Ham,
O zi, tadzx
ya lz, yd, yam,h is
,h er
,its .
sag ging0m,
asmad iya lz, yd, yam,o u r .
Winn,
0211,O i l, yushmad iya lz, yd, yam,
yo ur .
3 331130 111, tadzyah, yd, yam,
the ir .
O th er der ivative po ssessive pr o no uns ar e m * mdmd/ca lt , m ine ; m 3 :
tdvd/ca lz, th ine; m : dsmdr
lcab, o ur ; dim . yaushmd’
ka lz, yo u r . Likewise
Pan . I V . 3 , 1—
3 ; I V . I, 30 ; V I I . 3 , 44 .
1 30 PRON OUN S A N D PRON OMINA L A DJECTIVES . 270
MAS C.N .A .V . {a imati Q ime
'
I .D .A b.W dbhg/d’
m W dbhytfm
G. L . W 2ana’
yofi W 2ana’
yok
270 . m eta’
d and {é iddmwhen r epeated in a seco nd sentence with refer ence to a
preceding E7112etad and {Q idam, vary in the fo ll owing cases , by substituting EH ena, wh ich
has no accent .
S INGULAR .
MAS C. F EM . NEUT. MAS C .0
A 4 A o
A .
‘
Efl’
enam W enam W enat A .m endn m enalz W fi enam
I . m enena m enayd fi n enena
MAS C . NEUT.
enau fi t fi ene
G.L.m enayo lc 127 61 : enayofi W 1? “ano gok
Ex . $31? W W 137i fiasunw anena vyd’
kar anam adki tam,enam ohbanda
paya, the grammar has been studied by th is per son, teach h im pr o so dy.
m 2 t rfia Q 3 “I f é anayo lz pavi tr am Imlam,enayo lz. pr abhdtam
th e family o f these two per so ns is decent , and their wealth vast .
271 . B ase (in compo sition)m adam,that (mediate).
S INGULAR .
MAS C F EM NEUT.
MAS C N EUT
A .
I . W N W: amt/
bhile
D .A b.w : amathyafi
G. W amiskdm
L. W amifshu
N .A .V . fl ame I .D .A b. G.L.m : amzfyo lz
«a: addb“
5513 111 (177112726
fl fi amzishmai
W amdshmd'
t
m amzishya
W amzishmin
274. PRONOUNS A N D PRONOMINA L A DJEC'I‘IVES . 1 3 1
Rela tive Pr onoun.
272 . B ase (in compo sitio n)q ydd, wh o o r wh ich .
PLURAL .
MAS C . new . n u .
11: inyd’
” ( z/ fit ‘1 y!
A .‘l ycim
"Il l ydm l 11 t m yin
I . i ? ye’
na W ya’
gd a? ye‘na 32yailt
D .t ra ya
'
smai 11a ydsyai fi ydsmai ye’
bhyalz
MAS C . F EM . NE UT.
Inter r ogative Pr onouns .
273. B ase (in compo sition)fi r lr i’
m,Who o r which ?
PLURA L .
MAS C . MAS C . FEM
A b.m kdsmezm zkdsydz.
G.
“
am ka’
sya aw n ings}.
L.ant—
"
maIca’
sminW Ikcfsydm mg ktfsu
MAS C.
N .A .73 kazi a.ke’
I .D .A b. am? ka’bhydm“
aim? ktbhydm
G.L. am}: ka’yo lz an}: Ica'
yolz
274. Pr ono uns admit the interpo sitiono f 33 35 alc befo re their last vowel o r syllable, todeno te co ntempt o r dubio us r elation (Pand a 3 , t ayakd, B y thee ! instead o f
a !"tvayd. W 2yuvakayo lz, O f you two m f g : asmakdbhilz,W ith us W ag/07cm .
fi makau, &c. (S ee S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . I . p .
8 2
mo m0
mfir
.
31
ii
mi
y bk
yaflz
yakW
O
yd
Mall aw
mébhyah
mg 4
84m wzye
’
bhya];m
y 8“ i n
3163t
ayé
’
shu
1 32‘
PRONOUNS AN D PRONOMINA L A DJECTIVES . 275
OOmp ound P r onouns .
275 . B y adding W dris, gmdrz'
s’
a,o rmdflksha, to cer tain pr onominal
bases, the fo l lowing compo und pr o no uns have been fo rmed
m tcidz‘ié,
“
angst tddriéa,m tc’
idr i /cska,such l ike .
W etddfls,m y!etddr iéa, W EI etc’
idriksha, th is l ike.
W y ddr is,m yddr iéa,m yc’
idg‘ iksha
,what like.
m idr is,m idyiéa,m idyiksha, th is like .
W kidr ié,m kidriéa,m kidri /csha, W hat l ike ?
Th ese ar e decl ined in th r ee gender s, fo rm ing the feminine in i i . mtddri /c, m .m. ;
“
angst? tcidr iéi , f. o r“
em °
sfi,O
si, tddrisab, i , am. S imilar lyfo rmed ar emy mddriéa, m to ddriéa, l ike me, like th ee, &c .
276 . B y adding fl o at and mt go t to certain pr o nominal bases, thefo llowing compo und pr o no uns, implying quantity, have been fo rmed
W idow,so much ,
m etdvat, so much , declined l ike no uns in arit vai
m ydvat, as much ,
m iyat, s o much ,
s’
yat, How much ?zyan,m m iyat.
N o te— O n th e declension o f i f?! kdti , Howmany ? Wfi? tciti, so many, and“li ft? ydti, as
many, see 23 1 .
277. B y adding fai chit, a ? chana , o r wfi: api , to the interr o gative
pr o no un flit kim,it is changed into an indefinite pr ono un .
aimIcaéchit, m fa
-(Lc ci n
’
t, firmkzmohit,some o ne ; also W kachchit,
anyt h ing .
m Icaéchana, W kdchana , fi fl kzmchana, some o ne .
151q lco’
p i , W fit kép i, h ath kimapi , some o ne .
In th e same manner indefinite adverbs ar e fo rmed : am Icadci,When ?
m ffl kaddchi t, 353m kadcichana,o nce ; 5 km ,Wher e ?
“
a“
a f t: na Icvc‘
ipi,
no t anywh er e .
S ometimes th e r elative pro noun is pr efixed to th e interr o gative, to r ender
it indefinite : 11: Eli: yalz Icab, wh o so ever ; my aim yasyn Icasya, wh o seso ever .
Likewise“
It: W yn/ft kaéchit, who so ever , o r 11: 3523 yak Icaécka, o r 11: W
yak kaéchana.
Th e r elative pr ono un,if doubled
,assumes an indefinite o r rather di str ibutive
meaning : Tfi 113,mm,
“
nag, yo yak, yd yd, yad yad,wh o so ever . O ccas ionallyth e r elative and demonst rative prono uns ar e combined fo r the same pu rpo se :
W ? yattad , whatso ever .
PRONOUNS A N D PRONOMINA L A DJECTIVES .
I . aim su’
rnagé
D . fi a scirvasyai
Ab . 173W : sa’
rvasydfi
G . 1738112sdrvasydla
L . 1138 1? scirvasydm m scirvdsu
S INGULAR.
N .A .V . Us? sa’rvam
The r est l ike the masculine .
279. am anya, W anyatar a, {at i tam , ant katar a,“
am! katama,
take V in the N om . A cc .V o c . S ing . o f th e neuter
N om . S ing . am : anya lz, masc . ; W ang/é , fem W anyat, neut .
280 . ubha is u sed in the D ual o nlyMasc . N. A . V. andubhau, I . D . Ab . W M
"?ubhdbhydm,G . L . snuff: ubhayo lz;
“
3 3: none, N. A . V . fem . and neut .
28I . m : ubkayalt, -yi ,
° 1i ~
yam,is never used in the D ual
,but only
in the S ing. and Plur . Haradatta admits the D ual .
MA S O ULINE .
S INGULAR. PLURAL .
N . m : ubkayalz 3 0a abbaye
A . ami ubkayam W ubkayd'
n
I . w ubkayena and: ubhayailc
D . m fi ubhayasmai , &c. swim: ubhayebhyak, &c .
282 . The nine wo r ds from {apdrva to W anton : ( 1 4 to tho ugh used in their
pr onominal senses, may take in the N om . Plur . {i o r m: aZz in the A b]. S ing .W m dt
o r “ at ; in the Lo c. S ing . “ m in o r {L
S IN GULAR . D UAL . PLURAL .
{5 pzi r o alz 13°pflrve o r 131:pdrvdfa
A . fit?
!pdrvau
I . {aimpdrvena 131W?pflr 'vdbhycim fi tptirvaeh
D . 15a purvasmai 15W“pzi rvdbkyd'
m fi n kpurvebkyak
A b W puro asmdt o rW pd'
rvdt W purvdbkydm fi fl l : purvebhyah
G 1 5? pumasya 1m pfir vayo h fi fl'l purveshdm
283 . The fo ll owing wo rds may l ikewise take fl : alz o r { i in th e N om . Plur . masc.
(Pan. I . I ,
mm: pr atkamalz, fir st, INF? pr athamau, m i pr atkame o r 11mm pm tkamd'
h; fem.
warmpr athamd’
.
W 2ckar amalz, last, and char amau, a t} char ame o r W : char amdh .
‘FZ W dvitayalz, two -f 1d, fem . fg ifl fl dvi tayt'
, and similar wo rds inantaya
thr ee-fo ld ; tr i taye o r farm : tr i taydlz.
Him? sdrvdbkydm
m sa’
rvdbkyd'
m
t rim? sdrvdbkydm
“i f “scir 'vayo lz
fi at sa’rvayo lz
N E UTE R .
DUAL .
285 . PRONOUNS A N D PRONOMINA L A DJECTIVE S . 1 3 5
3 112dvayalz, two -fo ld, fem . g'
lfi dvayt, and s imilar wo rds in ” ya E1 I2tr ayalz.
W3 12a lpalz, few, F a a lpe o r van: akadlz.
ardkah,half, fl ar dke o r «Qu ar tz/14h.
m katipayah , some,W katz’
paye o r aifirw r: Icatipaydh.
3112nemalz, hal f, fin neme o r 3m: nemdh .
In all o ther cases these wo rds ar e regular , like“
i f?“kd’
ntah .
284 . W 2dvi ti’
yalz and o ther wo rds in tiya are decl ined like an kdnta,but in
the D at . A bl . and Lo c. S ing . they may fo ll ow F 5 sarva .
MA S C ULINE .
S INGULAR. DUAL . PLURAL .
N . firm : dvi tiyalz fga’m) dvitfyau f
’gfi m: dvi tiyd
'
lz
A t the end o f B ahuvr ihi compo unds the S arvanémans are tr eated li ke o rdinary wo rds
D at . S ing .W pfl yobhaydya, to him to whom bo th are dear (Pan . I . I , The same
at the end o f compo unds such as W 2mi sapdrvak, a month ear l ier ; D at . ”W 151?
mdsapurva‘
ya (Pan. 1 . I Likewise in D vandvas ;W mmdpar dndm, o f fo rmer and
later per sons (Pfin. I . I , th o ugh in the N om . Plur . th ese D vandvas may take {1}
pzi r vd'
par e o rm purvd'
par ah. O nly in compounds expressive o f po ints o f the compass,
such as W uttar a-purva, no rth-east
,the last element may thr ougho ut take th e pro
nominal terminations (Pén. I . I ,
A dver bial D eclensi on
285 . In addition to the r egular case-terminatio ns by wh ich the declensio n o f no uns
is effected, th e S anskr it language po ssesses o th er suffix es which differ fr om the o r dinary
terminat io ns chiefly by being r estr icted in th eir use to cer tain wo rds, and par ticular ly topr onominal bases . The o r dinary case
-terminati o ns,to o , are fr equently used in an adverbial
sense. Thus
A cc. fat ckir am, a l o ng t ime.
Instr . fi rmchi r eno , in a l o ng t ime .
D at . fa rmchi ra'
yu, fo r a l ong t ime.
A bl . M antra}, l ong ago .
Gen. fm chir asya, a l ong time.
fa} chir e, l o ng .
O ther adverbial terminations are,
I . 3 2 taZz, with an ablative meaning, becoming general ly l o cal .
2 . a tr a, with a l o cative meaning .
3 . Ki dd, with a tempo ral meaning ; also raised tow c1a
4 .m hi t, with a l o cative meaning .
PRONOUN S A N D PRONOMINA L A DJECTIVES .
5 . WTtkd, with a meaning o f mo dal ity ; l ikewise Vi tham and Wtha.
6 .
“
Mi sfit, expressive o f effect .7. N d and mfg dhi , l o cal .
8. f? r hi, tempo ral and causal .
9 . 3¥tar , l o cal .
I O . 3 ha, l o cal .
S ee al so the terminatio ns fo r fo rming numeral adverbs
I . 3 2 tall , with an ablative meaning .
3 3 2 tatafi, thence.1m: yatalz, whence. {3 2 i talz, hence ; (cf. {fit i ti, thus, {3 iva, as .)
W 2atafi, hence. 5 3 2kutab,Wh ence ? W 2amutafi, thence . 3 3 2mo ttalz, fr om me.
wa s : asmattala, fr om us . was : bhavattalt, fr om your Hono ur . {33 2pflr 'vatafi,
befo re (in a general l o cal o r tempo ral sense). 1133 2sarvatalz, always . W agr ataé,
befo re, l ike “i f!ogr e. “fl-132abhi talz, ar o und, near . 3mm: ubhayatala, o n bo th sides .
m 2par i tale, all r o und . 11133 2gr dmatalt, fr om the vil lage . W 3 3 2 aj ficinatala,fr om igno rance.
2 . a tr a,l o cative o riginally 3 1 mi , as in
"
SW purushatrd, amongst men.
3 3 tatr a, there.113 yatr a, wher e. QH kutr a,Wher e ? W atr a, here . W amutr a,
there, in the next wo r ld. w ar ekatr a, at o ne place, to gether .
“
GET satr d, with ,
and Fa.
’
satr am, with (see
"
Hg saha).
3 . QTdd, tempo ral .3 31 tadc
’
z'
, then, andm taddnim.
‘
l l'
E’
Tyadd,when. m kadd,When ? W anyadd,
ano ther time. 3 331 sarvadd, always , at all times . W ET ekadd, at o ne t ime.
‘
G‘
e‘
Jsadd, always . {3Tidd, in the Veda, later {TNTiddnim, now.
4 . “ Mt, l o cal .
W pr dktd'
t, in fr o nt .
Frequently after a base in q s
W pur as tdt, befo re. adhar as tdt,bel ow. W par astdt, afterwards .
W adhastdt, bel ow. W upar ishgdt , above.
5 . WI that, mo dal .
7m tathd,thus . W yathd, as . aim sarvathd
'
, in every way. W ubhayathd, in
bo th ways . W Tanyatkd, in ano ther way. m m anyatar athd’
,in one o f two
ways . {3 3 11 i tar athd, in the o th er way. 3m cri thd'
, vainly ( i). O r Vi tham,in
[cat/mm, How ? {W i ttkam, thus. O r Y! tha, in W atha,thus.
6 . “ si t, effect ive.
W r cij asdt, (U ifi rajino’dht
'
nam, dependent o n the king.) m ohasmasdt,
reduced to ash es . M agma-ci t, r educed to fire .
7. WTd andmfg dki , l o cal .
aw dakshindhi , in the S outh , o r 25mm da/cshind'
. m uttar dhi, in the No rth ,
o r m uttar d. W o nto“? (o r°t -r am, o r
at -r e
,o r3m -r ena), between. St !
purd, in the East, in fr ont, fo rmer ly, (o r gt : pur afi andm pur astcit, befo re .)
W paschd, beh ind, (o rW pas‘chdt .)
A dverbs such as w mudhd, in- vain, 3131 mz
‘ishd, falsely, ar e instrumental cases o f
obso lete nouns ending in consonants .
11 38 CONJUGATION . 288
e .g .Wafflpackati , h e co oks; h e co oks fo r himself , W yaj ati , he sacrifices ;
W yaj ate, h e .sacr ifices fo r h imsel f . The same appl ies to Causal s (Pfin . I . 3 ,
These distinct ions, h owever , r est in many cases, in S anskr it as wel l as in Greek, o n
pecul iar co nceptio ns wh ich it is difficul t to analyse o r to r eal ize; and in S anskr it as wel l as
in Gr eek , th e r ight use o f the act ive and middle vo ices is best learnt by pr actice . Thus
Tfim‘
, to lead, is used as Parasmaipada in such expr essio ns as Ti? fawnfi gapdamvinayati*,
h e carr ies o ff a swelling ; but as Atmanepada, in“
aimw kr o dham-vinayate, h e turns
away o r dismisses wrath ; a subtl e distinction wh ich it is po ssible to appr eciate wh en stated,
but difficult to br ing under any general rules .
A gain,in S anskr it as well as in Gr eek , some verbs ar e m iddle in certain tenses o nly, but
active o r middle in o ther s;
4
e . g . Atm . 3 45i var dhate, he gr ows, never fi v ar dhati but A o r .
W avfi dfiat, Par ., o r fi ft h avar dlzishga, Atm . h e gr ew. (Pan. 1 . 3,
Other s take the Parasmaipada o r fitmanepada acco rding as they are compo unded withcertain pr epo sitions ; e . g .m vis‘ati, h e enters ; but fflfilfi ni-vi s‘ate, h e enters in.
(Pfin. I . 3 , I 7.)
288. Causal verbs ar e co njugated bo th in the Par asmaipada and Atmane
pada. Desider atives generally fo ll owthe Pada o f the simple r o o t (Pan. I .3 ,
Denominatives ending in W dya have bo th fo rm s (Pan. 1 . 3 , The
intensives have two fo rm s : o ne in 1: ya, whi ch is always fitmanepada; the
o ther with o ut 1!ya, which is always Parasmaipada .
289. The passive takes the term inatio ns o f th e A tmanepada, and pr efixes11 yd to th em in th e fo ur Special o r m o dified tenses . In th e o th er tenses the
fo rms o f th e passive ar e,with a few excepti ons
,the same as th o se o f th e
A tmanepada.
290 . Th er e ar e in S anskr it thir teen differ ent fo rms,co r respo nding to the
tenses and mo o ds o f Gr eek and Latin.
I . Fo rmed f r om the Specia l or Modified B ase.
PA RA S MA I PA D A . KTM A N EPA D A .
Th e Pr esent (Lat) mnfii bhdvcimi
2 . The Imper fect (Lan) W dobavam ‘mfi dbhave
ain'
t bhciveyam
4 . Th e Imperative (Lo t) Harri"
? bhcivcini a? bluivai
II . Formed f r om the Gener al o r Unmodified B ase.
PA RA S M A I PA D A . KTM A N E PA D A .
5 . TheReduplicated Per fect (Lit)my babhzfva $33 babhuve’
6 . Th ePer iph r astic Per fect (Lit)“
i fitmmf rcho r ayd/mbabhuva “ W eho r aydm
7. The Fir st A o r ist (Lun)8. The S econd A o r ist (Lun)
“
63 1 5! dbhdvam
M bhaviskydmi Hfalfi bhavishyé
291 . CONJUGA TION . 1 39
‘
1 0. The Co nditio nal (e ) w dblzam'
shyam W dbkavishye
1 I . ThePer iph r asticFutu r e (Lut) m bhavi tdsmi afa r} bhavitd’he
1 2 . The Bened ictive (A s ir lin) m bkzlydsam m 1! bham'
sh iyd
I 3 . The S ubjunctive (Let) o ccur s in the Veda o nly.
S ignification of the Tenses and Mo ods .
§ 29L I . 2 . The Present and Imper fect r equir e no explanati on. The
Imperfect takes th e A ugment which has always the accent .
3 . Th e pr incipal senses o f th e Optative ar e,
a . Command ; e . g. fi lm?“fi t tvam gr dmam gaclzchhelt, th o u mayest go , i . e .
go th o u to the village .
6 . W ish e . g .W K bhavdn ihds lta, Let yo ur h o no ur sit h er e !
0. Inquir ing ; e . g . m l ! 3 71 m vedam adhz‘
ylya, uta tar kam
adh ly’iya, Shal l I study the V eda o r sh al l I study l o gic ?
d . Suppo s itio n (sambhdvana); e . g . “3311? m m bhaved asau
vedapdm go br dhmazzatvdt, he pr o bably is a student o f th e V eda, becausehe is a Brahman .
6 . Co ndi tion ; e . g . ash fi a’fi ‘ W um: dandas chen na bhavel
lo lce vinas’
yeyur imdlzpr aj dlt , if th er e wer e no t puni shment in the wo rl d,
th e peo ple wo ul d per ish .11:W 8 W yak pathet eu dpnuydt, h e
wh o studies,wi ll o btain . w as
—21 1W m yad yad r o cheta
vip r ebhyas tat tad dadycid amatsamb, wh atever pleases th e Brahmans
let o ne give that to th em no t niggar dly.
f . It is u sed in r elative dependent sentences e . g . “ Hai l 5 131 ? W Q yach
aha tvam evam kur yd na ér addadlze,I believed no t that th o u co ul dst
act thu s . flat-
gm: m w yat tcidg'iéci lz krishzzam ninde mnn
déchar yam, that such per so ns sh o uld r evile Krishna, i s wo nder ful.
4 . The Imper ative r equ ir es no explanatio n, as far as th e second per so n is
co ncerned ; e . g . 33 tuda , S tr ike ! Th e fir st and th ir d per so ns ar e u sed
in many cases in place o f the Optative ; e. g . W flanged ichchhcimi
bhavdn bhw‘
zktdm, I wish yo ur h o no ur may eat .
5 . Th e Reduplicated Per fect deno tes someth ing abso lutely past .
6 . Cer tain verbs which ar e no t allowed to fo rm th e r edupli cated per fect, fo rmtheir per fect per iphr ast ically, i . e . by means o f an aux iliary verb .
7 . 8. The Fir st and S eco nd A o r ists r efer gener ally to time past, and ar e the
common histo r ical tenses in narr ation . They take the A ugment
9. The Futur e, al so cal led the Indefinite Fu ture e . g .W W W
devas ched var shishyati dkdnyam vapsydmah, if it r ain,we shal l sow
r i ce . m m m yavaj -j wam annam ddsyati, as l ong as life
T 2
1 40 SPECIA L A N D GENERA L TENSES § 292 ~
lasts , he will give fo od . Under cer tain cir cum stances th is Fut ur e
may be u sed Optional ly with the Per iph r astic Future ; e . g . 1 1 1 than
hadd bho htci o r bhokshyate, Wh en will he eat ?
1 0 . The Condi tional is used,instead of th e Optative, if th ings ar e spoken o f
that migh t have, but h ave no t happened (Pan . I I I . 3, e. g.
W WW M suwishtié ched abhavishyat tadd subhiksham
abhavishya t, if ther e had been abundant r ain,ther e woul d have been
plenty. Th e Condi tio nal takes th e A ugment
I I . The Per iph rastic o r Definite Futur e e . g . W m: m ayodhyc‘
im
saahpr aydtc‘
isi,th o u wil t to -mo r r ow pr o ceed to Ayo dhya.
1 2 . The Benedictive is u sed fo r expr essing no t o nly a blessing, but al so a
wish in g eneral ; e. g. W m ér imdn bhagat, May h e be happy!
ffl i aim chir am j ivydt, May be l ive l o ng
I 3 . Th e Subjunctive o ccur s in th e Veda only.
292 . The S anskr it verb has in each tense and mo o d thr ee number s,
S ingular , Dual,and Plur al
,with th r ee per so ns in each .
C H A PTE R V III .
SPECIA L A N D GENERA L TENSES A N D THE TEN CLA SSES O F VERBS .
293 . S anskr it grammar ians have divided all verbs into ten classes,
ac co r ding to cer tain mo dificatio ns which their r o o ts undergo befo r e th e
terminat ions o f th e Pr esent, th e Imper fect, th e Optative, and Imper ative .
This divisio n is very usefu l,and will be r etained with some slight alterations.
O ne and the same r o o t may belo ng to differ ent classes . Thus m bhr ds,
m bh laé, al l bhr am, mi kr am, as klam, aq tr as, g? tr at, “ lash bel o ng
to th e B hfi and D iv classes ; Emit hhr c’
iéate o rm bhr déyate, &c . (Pan. 1 1 1 .
I, A gain, q ska, Giu s tambh, g u stambh, fi gskambh , gimskambh belo ngto th e S n and Kr i classes ;w skano ti o r m fi-Ts lcandti (Pan. I I I . I ,
294 . The fo ur tenses and mo ods wh ich r equir e thi s mo dification o f the
r o o t will be called th e Sp ecial o r Mo dified Tenses ; the r est the Gener a l or
Unmo dified Tenses . Thus th e r o o t fa chi is changed in th e Pr esent,Imper fect ,Op tative, and Imperative into fag chi-nu . Hence c hi-na-mah,
we sear ch ; dchi-nu-ma,we sear ch ed . B u t th e Past Part iciple fi rm
chitdh, sear ched, o r th e Redupl icated Per fect fl ag: chichy- iih, th ey have
sear ched, with o ut th e 3 nu . W e call f‘
fl chi,the r o o t, fag china, the base
o f the special tenses .
142 SPECIA L A N D GENERA L TENSES § 2974
4 . Th e Chur class (the tenth with native grammar ians,and cal led by
them 3 r d? charadi , because the fir st r o o t in their lists is‘
g‘
r char , to
steal);
a . an: aya is added to the last letter o f the r o o t .
6 . If the r o o t ends in a simple co nsonant,pr eceded by w a
,w a is
length ened to s r (3.
Ex .mda l,to cut ;m ddl-ciya
-ti, (many exceptions.)
c. If th e r o o t ends in a simple co nso nant , pr eceded by U : 3‘
a,sq ri , Fi fi,
th esh vowel s take Guna, wh ile“
q r i becomes ini'
r .
E x . fg'
qélish , t o embrace ;m élesh-ciya-ti . 3
‘
schar , to steal ;mcho r -ciya
-ti . IR mrish, t o endur e ; Iratfi mar sh-dya-te. E
R krit, to
pr aise ; 33t kir t-aya-ti .
d . Final g i , i i , 3 a , 3 5 12,“
g ri , and a rt, take V riddhi .
E x . fa j r i , to gr ow o ld;W firj r dy-ciya-ti . Jfimi , to walk;wm rfirmay—dya-ti .
t!dhri , to h o ld ;“TU dhdr -dya-ti . 1
1pm”
,to fill W pdr
-dya-ti .
N o te — Many, if no t al l r o o ts arranged under th is clas s by native grammar ians, are
seco ndary r o o ts, and identical in fo rm with causatives , denominat ives, &c. Th is class differ s
fr om o th er classes , inasmuch as verbs bel onging to it , keep th eir m o dificato ry syllableW ag/a
thr ough o ut, in the unmo dified as wel l as in the m o dified tenses, except in the Benedict ivePar . and the Redupl icated A o ri st . The accent r ests o n the fir st
“
Q a o f W a’
ya.
I I . S econd D ivisi on.
297. Th e seco nd division compr ises all verbs which do no t,in the
Special tenses , end in wa befo r e the terminatio ns .It is a distinguish ing featur e o f th is second division that
,befo r e
certain terminatio ns,all verbs bel o nging to it r equ ir e str engthening o f th eir
r adical vowel,o r if th ey take 3 na , 3 a
, Hi nt, str engthening o f th e vowel s
o f th ese syl lables . This str engthening generally takes place by means o f
Guna, but =fini is r aised to mna in th e Kr i, and { n to wna in th e Rudh
class .
W e Shall call the terminatio ns wh ich r equire strengthening o f the
inflective base,the weak terminatio ns
,and the base befo r e th em
,the
str ong base ;‘
and vice ver sd,the terminatio ns wh ich do no t r equ ire
str ength ening o f the base,the str ong term inations
,and the base befo r e
th em , the weak base.
A s a ru le,the accent fall s on the fir st vowel o f str ong terminations, o r , if
the terminations ar e weak, o n the str ong base, thu s establish ing thro ugh o utan equilibrium between base and termination.
299. A N D THE TEN CLA S SES o r van s . 1 43
II a . Bases which take 3 nu, R u
,vflni .
§i
298. This fir st subdi vis io n compr ises thr ee classesI . The S u class (the fifth class with nat ive grammar ians
,and called by
them ‘
a'
rf’
q svddi , because the fir st r o o t in their l ists is Q eu).
3 nu is added to the last letter o f the r o o t, befo re str o ng term inat io ns,
i t no befo r e weak terminatio ns.
‘
E x . g su,to squeeze o ut ;“I! su-nu-mcih, I st per s . plur . Pr es .
gi f t! su-na-mi, I st per s . sing. Pr es .
2. The Tan class (the eigh th class with native grammar ians, and cal led byth emm tanddi , because the fir st r o o t in their li sts is m tan).
3 a is added to the last letter o f the r o o t,befo r e str o ng terminatio ns,
an0 befo r e weak terminat io ns .
Ex . fl tan,to stretch ;was : tan-u—mcih, I st per s . plur . Pr es .
fi fil tan-02mi, 1 st per s . s ing . Pr es .
N o te— A ll verbs bel onging to this class end in i n, except o ne, i Icy-i ,m kar omi, I do .
3 . The Kr i class (the ninth with native grammar ians,and call ed by them
W ing/del i , because the fir st r o o t in their lists is ‘
afi kr i).
=fi ni is added to the last letter o f the r o o t,befo r e str ong terminatio ns ,
Wi nd befo r e weak terminatio ns,i n befo re str ong terminatio ns beginning with vowels .
E x . fit Irr i, to buy ;m i l: kr i-ni-meth, 1 st per s . plur . Pres.
m Icr i-nci-mi , I st per s . sing . Pr es .
.
‘
fi‘ltflfit kr i-n-anti , 3rd per s . plur . Pr es .
II b. Bases to wh ich the terminatio ns ar e j o ined immediately.
299. The second division compr ises thr ee classes
I . The A d class (the second clas s with native grammar ians,and called by th em
1 13q adadi, becau se the fir st r o o t in th eir lists is W ad, to eat).
a . The terminatio ns ar e added immediately t o the last letter o f the base ;and in th e co ntact o f vowels with vowel s, vowel s with consonants ,consonants with vowel s, and co nso nants with co nso nants , th e pho neticrules explained above 1 0 7— 145)mu st be car efully o bserved.
6. The str o ng base befo r e th e weak terminati ons takes Guna where
po ssible 296 , 1 . b).
E x . fag lih , to l ick : fem: lih-mcih, we l ick ; fifa le’
h-mi I l ick;m le'
lt-shi,
th ou l ickest “
d ie l idhd, yo u l ick 1 28) W dlet, th o u lickedst
Th e accent is o n th e fir st vowel o f -th e termi nations, except in case o f
weak terminations, when the accent fal ls o n the r adical vowel .
144 SPECIA L A N D GENERA L TENSES A N D THE TEN GLA SSES o r VERBS .
2. The Hu class (the thir d class with native gr ammar i ans, and call ed byth emw j uho tyc
‘
idi,because the fir st r o o t in th eir li sts is 3 ha ,
W j aho’
ti).
a . Th e terminatio ns ar e added as in the A d class .
6 . Th e str o ng base befo r e the weak terminatio ns takes Guna,wher e po ssible.
0 . The r o o t takes r edupl icatio n. (Rules o f Redupl icatio n,
Ex . ha, to sacrifice : W : j u-ha-incih, we sacr ifice ; fif rfn j u-ho-mi, I
sacrifice. (Pan. v1 . 1 ,
Th e intensive verbs , conjugated in the Par asmaipada, fo ll ow this class .
The accent is on the fir st syllable o f the verb, if the terminatio ns are weak, l ikewise if’
the terminatio ns ar e stro ng , but begin with a vowel . Ex . N F?! dddha'
ti ;M '
dddhatiA
(Pan. v1 . 1 , 189 W hether this rule extends to the Optative A tmanepada is doubtful .W e find in th e Rig
-veda b o th da’
dhi ta and dadhita’
. Pr o f. B enfey,wh o at fir st accentuated
dadhttd, now places the accent o n the fir st syllable, l ike B o ehtlingk and Bo pp . The Agama
siyut is, no do ubt , avidyamAnavat svaravidhau (Pan. I I I . I , 3 , vat t . but the questio n iswh ether {ta is to be tr eated as ajadi, beginning with a vowel , o r wheth er th e terminatio n
is ta with Agama i . I ado pt the fo rmer view, and see it co nfirmed by the Pratyudaharana
given in v1 . 1 , 189. Fo r if yat o f dad-t is no l o nger ajadi, then i ta in ddd-ita must be
ajadi o n the same gr ound. The r edupl icated verbs bhi , hr i , bhri , bu, mad, j an, dhan, dar idra’,j agri have the Udatta on the syl lable preceding the terminatio ns, if the terminatio ns are
weak. Ex . fwfi bibha’
r ti, but fwfir bi’bhr ati (Pan. vr . I ,
3 . The Rudh class (the seventh class with native gr ammar ians,and called
by them s erfs rudhddi, because the first r o o t in their lists is q r adii,
gaff-g r andddhi , to o bstru ct).
a . The terminations ar e added as in the A d class .
11 . Between the r adical vowel and th e final co nso nant { n is inser ted, whichin th e str o ng base befo r e weak term inations i s r aised to a na .
0
E x . fi yaj , to j o in gin: yu-i
'
i-j -mcih, we j o in ; ‘
gafai ya-nci-j -mi , I j o in.
The accent falls o n a na, Wher ever it appear s, unless it is attracted by the
augment .
Fir st D ivisi on.
B hfi class, with native gr ammar ians
,B hvadi, I class .
Tud class,
Tudadi , V I class .
D iv class,
D ivadi , IV clas s .
Chur class, Ch uradi, X class .
Su class, with native gr ammar ians,Svadi , V class .
Tan class, Tanadi, VIII class .
Kr i class, Kryfidi, IX class .
A d class, A dadi,II class .
Hu class , Juh o tyadi , III'
class .
Rudh class, Rudhadi,V II class .
1 46 AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, A N D TERMINATIONS . 303
Gener al Rules of Reduplication.
303 . The fir st syllable o f a r o o t (i . e . that po rtio n o f it whi ch ends
with a vowel) is r epeated .
at!budhz m bubudh . zi t is exceptional in fo rming ag babha. (Pan .
V 1 1 4. 73
304 . A spirated letter s ar e r epr esented in r eduplication by their co r
r esponding unaspir ated l etter s .
fig bhid, to cut, =fitfil§ bibhid .
i ll icit,t o shake
,z fi dudhu.
305 .Gu ttural s ar e r epr esented in r edupl icat io n by their co rr esponding
palatal s ; gh by i f . (Pain. V I I . 4,“
gt hat, to sever , m chukut.
m khan, to dig , =W chakhan.
mrgam,to go , =m j agam.
a has,to
306 . If a r o o t begins with mo r e th an o ne co nso nant,th e fir st only is
r eduplicated .
“
gistkrus, to sh o ut , z w chakr as.
m kship ,to thr ow, farm chi lcship .
30 7. If a r o o t begins wi th a sibil ant fo ll owed by a tenuis o r aspiratedtenuis
,the tennis o nly is r edupli cated .
lg s tu,to praise
, gg tushtu 1 03 , I).
m stan,t o so und
, m tastan.
an? spar dh, to str ive, var? paspar dh .
an sthd,to stand, z m tas thci .
méchyut, to dr op,=w chuéchyut.
B ut 133smg‘ i,to pine
, we;sasmri .
308. If th e r adi cal vowel , wh eth er final o r medial,is lo ng, it is
Sh o r tened in th e r edupli cat ive syllable .
111i gah, to enter , =m jayah .
figsdd, to str ike,
sushiid .
309. If the r adi cal (no t final)vowel is E e o r Eai , it becomes 3 i ; if it
is sfi 0 o r WI an, it becomes 3‘
u .
sev,to wo r ship
, fifig si shev.
dhaulc, to appr o ach, gazi dudhaulc.
3 1 0 . Ro o ts with final I! e, i ai, sh 0, ar e tr eated l ike r o o ts ending in
1mat,taking at a in the r eduplicative syllable .
Q dhe, t o feed, z afi dadhau.
agai , to S ing,=wrfij agau .
sfi So , to sharpen, 5m? sasau .
3 1 2 . A UGMEN 'I‘,REDUPLICATION, A N D TERMINA TIONS . 1 47
3 1 1 . The fo ll owing r o o ts ar e sligh tly ir r egular on acco unt o f th e
semivowels which they co ntain, and which ar e l iable to be changed into
vowels . (Th is change is called S ampr asdr ana.) Pan. V I . 1 , I 7.
Ro o r . FIRS T FE E S . S ING . REDUPL . Paa r . W EAK Fo rm Wu n s'
r Fo nn'
l‘
.
fi yaj m iz/did , to sacr ifice, (fo r m yayaj a .) {1 if] .
“ vach m uvdcha, to Speak. dch . (3 1 uch .)mgvad m uvdda, to say. asg ild .
“ vap z m uvdpa, to sow. m1 tip .
Eurvas m uvdsa, to wish . m as. (m as.)“
sq vas Terra uvd'
sa,to dwell . as 128 . (
“
sq us .)Hgvah z asn
'
g uvdha, to carry. 3 1? an. (at ah .)“ivayI m uvdya, to weave . Emily o r a dv". (3 u.)
“ vi/acti fai n? vivycicha, to surr o und . fafiwvivich.
I N vyadh fawn!vivyddha, to str ike . W vivi dh . (Furvidh .)untvyath fa'afi vivyathé (Pin. V I I . 4, fa“ vivyath .
m svap ge rmsushvdpa, t o S leep . m sushi/4) . (u sup .)finas W éuédva, to swell 1l . “man. (an )i vye farm vivydya, to cover . fasfi vivi . (i t vi .)anj yd : first? j ifya ii, to gr ow o ld . (Ri ft )hve= § gfi j uhdva, to call (Pan. V I . I
,
”
i gj uhd. h it.)
m pydy fifitp ipyéfl o gr ow fat (Pan . V I . I, fit'f tpip i . (f l p i.)
11g g r ahz m j agrdha, to take . $171;j agrih . (K gri ll .)
mvr aéch m vavr décha,to cut (Pan. V I . I I 513g vavrisch . (wvyi éch .)
W pr achh w papr dchchha, to ask .
a bhr aj i was babhr dj ja, to fry . was t babhr aj i . (W bhrij j .)
In the last thr ee verbs th e weak fo rm in the r edupli cated per fect is pr otected against S ampr asarana by the final do uble co nso nant . (P511 . I . 2,
Ro o ts beginning with a va, but ending in do uble consonants,do no t
change a va to a u. E x .Era? vavri te
’
; trap} vavridhé.
3 1 2 . Ro o ts beginning with sho r t 1a a,and ending in a single consonant,
contract a a wa into at 12.
erg ad, to eat,
The weak fo rms appear in al l per sons o f the r edupl icated perfect wh ere neither V riddhino r Guna is r equired .
1‘ The weakest fo rms o f th ese verbs do no t bel o ng to the reduplicated perfect, but have
been added as u seful h er eafter fo r the fo rmation o f th e past part iciple, the benedi ctive, thepassive, &c .
I aflvay is a substitute fo r five, in the reduplicated perfect (Pan. I I . 4, If that sub
stitut ion do es no t take place, thenave fo rms TEDvavau, Fat vavuh (Pan . v1 . 1 ,
ll Pars V I . 39. 11 o r fsrmvsadya (rag . v1 .
NEW ES T, REDEI’LICATIQN ,
A N D . TERMIN A TIOE S i 3 1 3
3 1 3 R99 ts beginning with sh ort“
1 a, and ending with mo r e than one
consonant, pr efixm ain. (Pan . V I I . 4,
ar ch : Erra'
i dfi
ndr ch , (A lso 3151 as (Su), m i l dnase.) Pan. V I I .4,72
3 14 . The r o o t “
55 i i fo rm s th e base o f ther eduplicated per fect as m dr .
Other r 9 ots beginning with a r i pr efixm ain. (Pan. V I I . 4, 7 1 .
o btain, W an-rii . w ridh, to thr ive, d r idhfi
ar e tr eated In fact as if th ey wer e 1 5 ar ch , fi ar dh, &c .
o o ts o r“
a n (no t pr o sodi a‘lly l o ng), contract g i
d as 12; bu t if th e r adi cal g i o r q u takg
Guna o r V riddh i,‘
q y and Etv ar e inser ted between th e r edupl icatii e syllable
and th e base . (Pan. V I . 4, 78.
fi ish : m: ish-a tuh, they two have gone.
{an i r/-ésh -a (Guna), I h ave go ne .
s q uhh :MW dhh-atuh, th ey two have wither ed .
W av-dlch-a (Guna), I h ave wither ed .
A s to r o o ts wh ich canno t be r eduplicated o r ar e o th erwi se ir regular , see the
rules given fo r the fo rmatio n o f th e Redupl icated and Per iphr astic Perfect .
Special Rules of Reduplicati on.
3 1 6 . S o far the pr o cess o f r edupl icatio nwo u ld be th e same,whether app liedt o the bases o f the Reduplicated Per fect o r to tho se o f the fl u class . B ut there
ar e some po ints o n wh ich these two classes o f r edupli cated bases differ ;viz .
1 . I II theRedupl icated Per fect, r adical a ri, a r t,whether final o r medial ,
are, r epr esented,in r edupl icatio n by S t a .
2 . In'
the bases o f the, fl u class,final a!ri and
-
azr i (th ey do no t o ccur as
medial) ar e. r epr esented in r eduplication by { i .REDUPLI CA TED PERFECT. E U CLAS S . PRE S ENT, & c .
‘1 $1 bhri fi flffi bibhdr ti .
I!“
(I sr i fai lfil ' s isar ti .
The r o o t“
g ri , to go ,fo rms gaff iy
-ar ti ; Qpr i, to fill, fivfi p i
’
par ti .
3 1 7. The th r ee verbs fai nt], fast-m] , and fi nish o f the Hu clas s take .Gunaths reduplicatgd syl lable . (P613. V I I . 4, 75 .
Pi a nij , to wash , Rafi nénekti,m neni lcte; fi i vi] , to separ ate, M véve lcti
fi l l i vish, to pervade, fi fe véveshti.
3 18. The two verbs HT1nd, to measur e, and {I hd, to g o , o f the Hu'
class take ifi
in
the reduplicative syllable. (Pan. V I I . 4,
WTmd, W mimi té; {I hd, fi f th-j i had.
3 19. Cer tainRo o ts change th eir init ial co nso nant if th ey are redupl icated .
{Ti han, to kill , W j aghdna. Likewise In th e desiderativew fi j i’
ghdfiisati , and the
1 50 A UGMENT, REDUPLICATION,A N D TERMIN A TION S . 322.
S E C O N D D IVI S IO N .
S n,Tan
,Kr i
,A d
, E u, and Rudh Classes .
PA RA SM A I PA D A . ATMA N E PA D A .
Pr esent . Imper fect . O ptative. Imperative. Present . Imperfect . O ptative . Imperative.
vmum trig/am m ini z e g i ineya
g .. lzh l mt g/ca fg ki l a mum innate}; a m
lil i l mydt hm! i te ‘
a‘
ta is m Tl'
i tdm
I .11 2 vah El
“
eu ya'
va W 6m a? cake Hf? vahi W i’
vaki Imai dvahai I2 . W2 thah
"
ii tam “Wi g/6mm fitam “Taci theW dthdmW iydthdmW dtha'
m
3 . H: tab at tdm W yatdmni tam wfit dte wri t dtdm 3mmiydtdm W dta’
m
1 . 113mah Ir ma m ydma m ama Hi mahe Hfg mahi fireman m i amahai
2 .Y! tha H ta 1113 ya
’
ta H ta £5! dhve W dhvam i 860
! idhvam SE? dhvam
3 . fi anti zW an3a!yuh E 3 antu2 W?!ate W ata mir an W atém
The terminatio ns enclo sed in squar es ar e the weak,i. e. unaccented
term inatio ns wh ich r equir e str ength ening o f th e base .
No te I — When & hi is added immedi ately to the final consonant o f a
r o o t (in the A d, Rudh , o r Hu classes), it is changed to fit dhi (Pan. V I . 4, 1 0 1 .
S ee N O . The verb g ha ,tho ugh ending in a vowel
,takes fit dhi instead
O f fg hi , fo r th e sake o f euph o ny. (Pan . V I . 4,
Kr i verbs ending in co nso nants fo rm the 2nd per s. S ing. imp. in W dna .
(S ee N O . 1 55 . Pan . I I I . 1,
In th e 2nd per s . S ing. imp. Par asm . verbs o f the Su and Tan classes takeno termination
,except when a a is preceded by a conjunct co nsonant . (S ee
N O .
No te 2— In the 3rd per s . plur . pr es . and imper . Par asm . verbs o f the Hu
class and m abhyasta, i . e . r edupl icated bases,take wfir ati and mg atu.
No te 3— In th e gr d per s . plur . imp. Par asm . verbs o f th e Hu class
,r edu
pli cated bases,and fagvid, to
know,take 3 : uh, befo r e whi ch , verbs ending
in a vowel,r equir e Guna.
“
a: uh is u sed Optionally after verbs in m d,and
after Fg'
etdvish, to hate . (Pan. I I I . 4, 1 09
322 . B y means o f th ese term inations th e student is able to fo rm the
Pr esent , Imper fect, Optative, and Imper ative in the Par asmaipada and
A tmanepade o f all r egular verbs in S anskr it ; and any o ne wh o has clear lyunder sto o d h ow the verbal bases ar e pr epar ed in ten differ ent ways fo r
r eceiving th eir terminations, and wh o wil l attach to these verbal bases theterm inatio ns as given above
,acco r ding to the r ul es o f S andh i
,will have no
difficul ty in wr iting o ut fo r h imsel f th e par adigms O f any S anskr it verb info ur o f the mo st impo r tant tenses and mo o ds
,bo th in the Parasmaipada and
A tmanepada. S ome verbs,h owever , ar e ir r egular in the fo rmation o f their
base ; these mu st be lear nt fr om the D hatupatha.
326 . GEN ERA L O R UNMODIFIED TENSES . 1 5 9
C H A P TE R X .
GENERA L OR UNMODIFIED TENSES .
3 23 . In th e tenses whi ch r emain,the Redupl icated Per fect, the Per i
ph r astic Per fect, th e Fir st and S eco nd A o r ist , th e Futur e, the Co nd it io nal ,the Per iphrastic Futur e, and Benedictive, the distinctio n o f the ten clas ses
vanish es . A ll verbs are tr eated alike, to whatever class they belo ng in the
m o dified tenses ; and th e distinguish ing features , th e inserted anu, 3 a, fi ni
,
&c .,ar e r emoved again fr om the r o o ts t o wh ich th ey had been attached in
the Pr esent, the Imper fect, th e Optative, and Imper ative . Only the verbso f th e Chur class pr eserve their 3m dya thr o ugh o ut, except in the A o r ist
and Benedictive.
Redup licated Perf ect.
324. The r o o t in its pri m itive state is r edupl icated. The rul es o f
r eduplicatio n h ave been given abo ve . 30 2
325 . The Reduplicated Per fect can be fo rmed o f al l verbs,except
1 . Mono syllabic r o o ts wh ich begin with any vowel pr o so diall y lo ng but
i f;a o r an62: such as$954, to praise ; t ired/z, to gr ow ;“ind/z, t o l igh t
flannel , to wet .
2 . Po lysyllabic r o o ts, such as m ohakds, to be br igh t .
3 . Verbs O f the Chur class and der ivative verbs, such as Causatives ,Desider atives
,Intensives
,Denom inatives .
326 . Verbs wh ich canno t fo rm the Perfect by r edupli catio n,fo rm the
Per iphr astic Per fect by means o f compo sitio n .
S o do likewise al l day, to pity, &c ., wit ay, to go , m és , t o S it down
(P511 . I I I . I , “ h is, to co ugh (Pan . 1 1 1 . I , al so m m ,to sh ine
(S im); Optio nal ly 3 19ash , to burn, (fi at o shcim), fagai d, to know, (file?viddm),
W j dyri , to wake, (W j dgar dm,Pan. I I I . 1
,and, after taking r edupli
catio n, bfi bh i (fwgmj ihr aydm), t!bhri (Fa rt ?bibhar dm),and hu (gamj uhavdm,
Pap . 1 1 1 .
Th e verb drna , to cover , al th o ugh po lysyllabic, al lows o nly o f s lim?drnunava as its Per fect .
m r ichh,to fail
,al th o ugh its base In th e Per fect ends In two co nso nants ,
fo rm s o nlyW anar chchha . I t Is tr eated, in fact, as ifwé i ar chchh . 3 1 3 .
Terminations of the Reduplicated Perf ect.
S INGULAR .
1 60 GENERA L OR UNMODIFIED TENSES . 327
D UA L .
I . {i t wa
2 . i13 1 athuh
3 . avg: atuh
PLURAL .
1 . i n ima glfi imahe
2 . a: a idhve o r g? idhve3 3 3 “11 ft i r e
These termi natio ns ar e h ere given, with o ut any r egar d to th e system s o f
native o r compar ative gr ammar ians,in th at fo rm in wh ich th ey may be
mech anical ly added to th e r edupl icated r o o ts . The r ul es o n th e o missio n o f
the initial { i O f cer tain terminatio ns will be given bel ow.
327. Th e accent fall s o n th e terminat io ns in th e Par asmaipada and
A tmanepada, except in the th r ee per sons s ingular Par asmaipada . In
.
these
the accent fal ls o n th e r o o t,wh ich th er efo r e is str ength ened acco r ding to th e
fo l l owing ru les
I . V owels capable O f Guna, take Guna thr o ugh o ut the singular , if fo ll owed
by o ne co nso nant .are;bhia
’
, faaabibhe’
d—a, s crewbibhe
’
d-itha, refs
—c: bibhéd
-a .
fi budh, gi f t: bubo
’
dh-a,WM bubo’
dh—i tha, 3m bubo
’
dh-a .
B ut‘
ifiqj iv, a lo ng medial vowel no t beingliable to Guna
,fo rms fai l ?
j ijw a, fa
’
afifawj iiw- itha, W a j y
'
tv-a .
2 . F inal vowel s take Vr iddh i o r Guna in th e fir st,Guna in th e second,
Vr iddh i o nly In the thi r d per so n s ingular
a? ui , fawn: nina'
y-a o r firm: nindy-a, f=r=m nine
’
tha o r fanfare nindy-i tha
,
3 . wa if fo ll owed by a S ingle co nso nant , takes V riddhi o r Guna in the fir st,
Guna in the seco nd , V r iddh i o nly in th e th ir d per so n singular .
a hamm j aghd’
n-a o r smaj aghdn-a,W j aghdn-i tha,m j aghdn—a.
N o te — If th e seco nd per so n S ingular Parasmaipada is fo rmed bylEl tha, the accent fal ls o n
the r o o t ; if with 31 1 i tha, th e accent may fal l o n any syllable, but gener al ly it is o n th e
term inatio n . In th is case the r adical vowel may, in certain verbs, be with o ut Guna,firstl y, far
-Emme'
j a, but fafi fam uyaha . (Pan . 1 . 2,2 ;
328. A S th er e is a tendency to str engthen th e base in th e th r ee per so nssingular Par asmaipada, S O th er e i s a tendency t o weaken th e base , under
cer tain c ir cum stances,befo r e the o th er terminations o f th e Per fect , Par asmai
and Atmanepada. Her e th e fo l l owing ru les mu st be o bserved :1 . Ro o ts like Wpat, i . e . r o o ts in whi ch i t a is pr eceded and fo ll owed by a
single co nso nant,and wh ich in their r edupl icated syl lable r epeat th e
initial co nso nant with o ut any ch ange (th is excludes r o o ts beginningwith aspir ates and with guttural s ; r o o ts beginning with i t v, and
162,
THE INTERMEDIATE g i . 33 1
Ro o ts ending in“
S'
u,
“
as it, change these vowel s always into 3 1 m) .
Mo st r o o ts ending in a rt, change th e vowel to sugar (Pan. V I I . 4, I I ).11gri, m zj agar dtuh
a? ni, t’
afwa'
niny-ivd, we two have led . fist sr i , f
’
slfzrfq'
q siér iy-ivd, we
two h ave gone . 7 kri , was: chalcr-dthuh, yo u two h ave do ne . q siri ,
m : tastar -dthuh, yo u two have Spr ead . g yu, m yuyuv—dthuh, yo u
two have Jo ined. fi stu,my: tushtuv
-dthuh, yo u two have pr aised .
“
i kri,W 3: chakar
-dthuh, you two have scatter ed .
C H A PT E R XI .
THE INTERMEDIA TE i .
33 1 . Befo r e we can p r o ceed to fo rm th e par adigms o f the Redupli catedPer fect
’
by means O f jo ining the term inatio ns with th e r o o t,it is necessar y
to consider the intermediate i i , wh ich in the Reduplicated Perfect and in
th e o ther unmo dified tenses has to be inser ted between th e verbal base and
th e terminatio ns,o r iginally beginning with conso nants . Th e rules whi ch
r equir e, a l low, o r pr ohibi t the inser tion O f thi s { i fo rm o ne o f th e mo st
di fficult chapter s O f S anskr it grammar,and it is the Object o f the fo ll owing
paragr aph s to simplify th ese rules as much as po ssible .
Th e general tendency, and, so far , the gener al rul e, is that the terminationso f the unm o dified o r general tenses, o r iginally beginning with conso nants,inser t the vowel § i between base and termination and fr om an h isto r icalpo int O f view it wo uld no doubt be mo r e co rr ect to Speak O f th e rules whi chr equir e the addi tion o f an intermediate {i than (as has been do ne in 326)to r epr esent th e g i as an integral par t O f the terminatio ns
,and to give th e
r ules which r equ ir e its omissio n. B ut as th e intermediate {i h as pr evailedin the vast maj o r ity o f verbs , it will be easier
,fo r pr act ical purpo ses
,to
state th e exceptions,i . e . th e cases in whi ch the {i is no t empl oyed, instead
O f defining th e cases in wh ich it must o r may be inserted.
O ne termination o nly, that O f th e 3rd per s . plur . Per f. Atm .,fi ir e,keeps the
intermediate 3 i under all cir cum stances . In the V eda,h owever
,th is 3 i , t o o ,
has no t yet become fixed, and is o ccasio nally omitted; e . g . duduh-r é.
In 31ar t, i dri , and li pri a furth er Sh o r tening may take place ; M f g: safardtuh
being sho rtened to 313 13 : saér dtuh, &c.
332 . THE IN TERMED IATE g i . 1 6 3
Let it be r emembered then, that there ar e thr ee po ints to be considered1 . W hen is it necessary to omit the g i ?
2 . W hen.
is it Opti onal to inser t o r to omit the Q i
3 . W hen is it necessary to inser t the g i
Fo r th e purpo ses o f r eading S anskr it , al l that a student is o bl iged to knowis , Wh en it is necessary to omit the g i . Even fo r wr iting Sanskr it th is
knowledge wo uld be sufficient , fo r in all cases except th o se in which the
omissio n is necessary, the { i may safely be inser ted, al tho ugh , acco rdingto views O f native grammar ians
,it may be equal ly r ight to omi t it . A
student ther efo r e , and par ticular ly a beginner , is safe if he only knows the
cases in wh ich {i is necessar ily om itted, no r will anyth ing but extensiver eading enable h im to know th e verbs in whi ch th e inser tio n is either
Optio nal o r necessary. Native grammar ians have indeed laid down a numbero f rules
,but bo th befo r e and after Panini the language o f India has
changed, and even native gr ammarians ar e o bli ged to adm it that o n the
Optional inser tio n O f g i auth o r ities differ ; that is to say, that the liter ar y
language o f India differed so much in differ ent par ts o f th at eno rmo us
co untry, and at different per io ds o f its lo ng h isto ry, that no r ules,h owever
minute, woul d suffice to r egister all its fr eaks and fancies.
332 . Taking as the start ing-po int the general axiom (Pan. V I I . 2, 35) that every
term ination beginning o riginally with a co nso nant (except Ry) takes th e Q i , whi ch wer epresent as a po rtion o f the termination, we pr o ceed to state the exceptions, i . e . the cases
in wh ich the {i must o n no acco unt be inserted, o r , as we sh ould say, must be cut Off fr om
the beginning o f the termination .
The fo l l owing verbs, wh ich have been car eful ly co llected by native grammar ians (Pan.
V I I . 2 , ar e no t al l owed to take th e intermediate {i in the so -call ed general o r unm o dified
tenses, befo re terminatio ns o r affixes beginning o r iginally with a co nsonant (except ( y).(N o te — The r eduplicated perfect and its participle in “ vas are no t affected by these rules ;
see
1 . A ll mono syllab ic r o o ts ending in ”511 d.
2 . A ll mono syll abic r o o ts ending in Q i , except fifl s’
r i , to attend (2 1 , 3 I )* fws
‘vi , to grow
(23, (N o te— f? ! smi , to laugh , must take { i in the D esiderat ive. Pan. V I I .
22
3 . A l l mono syl labic r o o ts ending in i t, except 34di , to fly (2 2 , 72 ; 26 , 26 . anudtitta), and
sfia,t o r est (24,
4 . A l l mo no syl labic r o o ts ending in 3 u, except 3 3m, to mix (24, 23 ; no t 3 1 ,“
Km ,
t o so und (24, amt , to prai se (24, 26 ; 28, 1 04‘
g kshu, to so und (24,
w kshnu, to sharpen (24 , “
Q sun, t o flow (24, takes {i in Parasmaipada
(Pan. V I I . 2, (N o te—
Q stu, to praise, and g su, to pour , take {i in th e Fi rstA o r ist Parasmaipada. Pan . V I I . 2 ,
Th ese figur es r efer to the D hatupatha inW estergaar d’
sRadicesLinguae S anscr itae, 1841 .
Y 2
1 64 THE INTERMEDIA TE g i . 332
5 . Al l mono syllabic r o o ts ending in$ 273 except aim} to ch o o se (3 1 ,Impo rtant exceptio n : in th e Fut . and Cond . in E sya, al l verbs in a {i take Q i (Pan.
V I I . 2,
q sari , to so und, may take i i (Pan. V I I . 2,
3!bhr z’
, to car ry, may take {i in theD esider . (Pan. V I I . 2
, T;dri, to r egard, ‘i dhg‘ i , to h o ld, and a n} to go , take
{i in the D esider . (Pan. V 1 1 . 2 , 74,
In the Benedictive and Fir st A o r ist Ktmanepada verbs ending in i s?ri and beginningwith a conjunct conso nant may take {i (Pan. V 11 . 2,
6 . A l l mo no syl labic r o o ts ending in E e, i ai, mi 0 .
Therefo r e,with few exceptions, as mentioned above, all mono syllabic r o o ts ending invowels, except the vowel s 3 aand fl fi,
must no t take 34’ i .
7. O f r o o ts ending in fi le,W sale, to be able (26, 78; 27,
8. O f r o o ts ending in fl ak, “ pack, to co ok (23, “ each, to Speak (24, flmuch
, to l o o se (28, 1 36) filfl si ch,to spr inkle (28, fl i nch, to leave (29,
“ s ick, to separate (29,9. O f r o o ts ending in Q chh
,mpr ackh, to ask (28, It must take{5 in the D esider .
(Pan. V I I . 2 ,
10 . O f r o o ts ending in fl j , enig m a, to embrace (23. Wo
isai . to leave (23 , flsan
'
j , to adher e (23 , 18) fi bhaj , to wo rsh ip (23 , 29) fi r afij , to co lo ur (23 , 30 ;
26, W yaj , to sacr ifice (23 , to clean (25, “ vii, to separate(25 , 1 2 ; no t 28
, 9, o r 29, [Kas'
. fi mnj ] fi yuj , to meditate (26, to jo iri
(29, 113 m}, to let o ff (26, 69 ; 28, Ga b/wai f, to bake (28, 4, except
“ may“
, to dip “ r aj , to br eak (28, fl bhm’
, to bend(28, to pr o tect (29, fi bhafij , to br eak (29,
1 1 . O f r o o ts ending in i d, 3? had, to evacuate (23 , G ig skand, to step (23 , 1 0) “lgad,to eat (24, 11gpad, to go (26, flag/skid, to be distressed,&c. (26, 6 1 ; 28, 142 ;29, mi nd
, to be (26, fagscid, to sweat (26, R tud , to strike (28,
fig and, t o push (28, 2 ; 28, RE;sad, to dr o o p (28, SQ sad, to per ishfi gvid, to find (28, 1 38 ? 29, 1 3 ; no t 24, fi
gbhid, to cut (29,
fag qu id, to divide (29, gazes/ms, to po und (29,O f r o o ts ending infldh,fl budh, to know (26, fi yudk, to fight (26, “ r adii ,
with $73 anu, to l ove (26, to keep o ff (29, W r ddh, to gr ow (26, 71 ;
“ vyadh, to strike (26, “ km dh, to be angry (26, “ kshudh,to be
hungry (26, except Part . W kshudhi ta and Ger .W kskudkitvd (Pan.
V I I . 2, “smi le, to clean (26, M si dk, to succeed (26, W sddk, t o
ach ieve (27, fl bandh , to bind (3 1 ,1 3 . O f r o o ts ending in i n, G han, to kill (24, except th e Fut . and Cond. (Pan. V I I . 2 ,
likewise its substitute fl badh; “ man, to th ink (26,
1 4. O f r o o ts ending inRp,W tip, to pour ( 1 0 , fi sflp, to go (23, “ tap, t o heat
(23, 1 6 ; 26, “ sap, to swear (23, 3 1 ; 26, “ mp ,
to sow (23 , a tsvap, to sleep (24, m ap, to reach (27, t c kip , to thr ow (28, m lup,
t o cut (28, fa l lip, to ano int (28, igl chhup, to to uch (28, (N o te
“ trip and fl dflp , which . ar e generally included, may take Q i, acco rding to Pan.
V I I . 2,
15 . O f r o o ts ending inRbh, D i r abh, to desir e (23 , 5) E ‘Uabh, to take (23, 6) H yabh,
co ire (23,
1 66 THE IN TERMED IATE g i . 333:
(Remark that the par ticiple in H ta is mo st o ppo sed, as the r eduplicated perfect is mostdispo sed to the admission o f 3 i .)
Mono syl labic r o o ts ending in 3 a,3 ii
, a fl fi, do no t take {i befo r e the part iciplein H
‘
ta, no r befo r e o th er terminations wh ich tend to weaken a verbal base.
(Pan. V 1 1 . 2,
3 ya, to jo in, 3712ya-tak,W yn-tavdn, gm ya
-tva'
. (Pan. V 1 1 . 2,
am, to cut ,"
ef f-T2 Iii -nah,W Iii -nava
'
n, 135m Iii -tad. (Except 1 1912, 335, II .
a!mi , to co ver , 33 2mi -tah,W efi -tavdn
, 33 1 cri -tva'
.
mggdk, to enter , may fo rm (Pan . V 1 1 . 2, 44) th e futur e as“Ti-
37"gdk-i -td o r 7113 1 gddkdh ence its part iciplewe : gddhah o nly.
“ gap, to pr o tect , may fo rm (Pan . V 1 1 . 2 , 44) the futur e TfifilflTgop-i-td o r Tfimgap-td;h ence its participle IH2guptah o nly.
2 . Ro o ts wh ich by native gr ammar ians ar e marked with technical m e? o r i i do no t take
3 i in the par ticiple in 71'
ta . (Pan . V 1 1 . 2 , 1 4 ,
Ffi i said, to sweat (marked as fi lm F6 3 2svinnah.
B i laj , to be ashamed (marked as wh en? o lafl); 373 2lagnak.
List of Par ticip les in H ta o r 71 na which f or special r easons and in special senses
do no t take 3 i .
f‘fl s’
r i, to go ;fiflm f r i tak,W Tsm
'
tvd. (Pan. V I I . 2, S ee 332, 2 .
f? sci , t o swell ; 35 2sdnah. (Pan. V I I . 2,
S ee 332, 2 .
‘
Qfi kskubk, to shake ;”
83342kshabdkak, if it means the churning-stick . (Pan. V 11 . 2 ,
S ee 332 , 1 5 .
ER scan, to sound ; a im svdntah, if it means the mind.
85 5i dhvan, to sound ; fi lmdkva‘
ntah, if it means darkness .
EKlag , to be near ; 8 7 7-12lagnah, if it means attach ed.
mlechckh,to speak indist inctly mlisktak
,if it means indistinct .
firm vir ebh, to sound ; fafw : vir ibdhak,if it r efer s to a no te .
t an, to pr epar e W 2phantak, if it means with out an effo rt .
arevdh, to labour ;m : va'
dhah, if it means excessive .
fl dkg‘ isk, to be co nfident ; 39 2dhrishyak, if it means bo ld. (Pan. V 1 1 . 2 ,
m visas, to pr aise ;m vis’
astah, if it m eans ar r ogant .
K dr ik, to gr ow ;“
653 2dpidkak, if it means str o ng . (Pan . V 1 1 . 2,
WW par ivr ih, to gr ow;W 2par iegi dkah, if it means l o r d . (Pan. V I I . 2 ,
“ leash, t o try ; 359 2kaskyak, if it means difficult o r impervious . (Pan. V 11 . 2 ,
a17i ghash, to manifest ; 39 2ghashiak, if it do es no t mean pr o claimed . (Pan. V 1 1 . 2,
fi ar d, with the pr epo s . Ii sam,
‘Ffl a i,fa vi ,wi narnnah samamnah, plagued . (Pan.
V 1 1 . 2,
Wi ar d, with th e pr epo s .‘Hfi! abhi ; w ai t: abhyarnnak, if it means near . (Pan. V 1 1 . 2, 2
11 cm? (as cau sative), 33 2cm’
ttah, if it means r ead .
W mid, to be so f t, th ough having a technical W ei,may, in certain senses, fo rm its
participle asW 2medi tak o r 178752minnak (Pan. V 1 1 . 2 , Th e same appl ies to al l verbs
marked by technical‘Efl a
'
.
335. THE INTERMEDIATE g i . 1 67
Intermediate {i in the Redup licated Perfect .
334. The preceding rules, pr oh ibiting in a number o f r o o ts the x i fo r all o r mo st
general tenses, do no t affect the redupl icated perfect . Mo st o f the verbs just enumerated
wh ich must omit i i in al l o ther general tenses , do no t omit it in the perfect . S o general ,
in fact, has the use o f the {i become in the perfect , that eight ro o ts o nly are abso lutelypr oh ibited fr om taking it . These are (Pan. V I I . 2 ,
I . f’
kri , t o do , (unless it is changed to q skri), I st pers . dual W cha-i -va ; but
m samckaskar iva; 2nd per s . sing .m sanickaskar i tha .
2 .
”
q sii , to go , 1111's? sasri -va.
3 . q bkri , to bear ,W babhri-va.
4 . ami (351 vri ii and a? aria to ch o o se, Par .W eavfi-va fi tm .W ? vavri -vahe,Fifivavri -she.
5 . lg stu, to praise, 3g?! tushtu-cc . gin: tushto -tha.
6 . 2dm , to run,$23 dadra-va. m dadr o -tha.
7. g sru,to flow,W sasra-cu. m suer o -tha .
8.”g s
‘r u, to hear , “ a sasra-va. w sasr a-tha.
335 . In the second per so n singular o f the reduplicated per fect Par . the {i befo r e1 l tha must necessar ily be left o ut ,
1 . In the eight r o o ts, enumerated befo r e. (The fo rm sari vavar -tha, h owever , being
restricted to theVeda, is considered the r igh t fo rm. See N o . 1 42 , in
the D hatupatha.)
2 . In r o o ts ending in vowel s, which ar e necessar ily with out 3 i in the future (HTté), Pan.
V 1 1 . 2, 6 1 . S ee 332,wher e these r o o ts ar e given.
1“yd, to go ; Fut . 11TH"
!yald; mm!yagd-tha.
fa chi, t o gath er ; Fut . fim cketd; ffléfl l‘
ckiche-tha.
3 . In r o o ts ending in co nsonants and having an ‘3 ii fo r th eir radical vowel , wh ich are
necessar ily with out {i in th e futur e (HTté), Pan. V 1 1 . 2 , 62 . S ee 332 ,where these
r o o ts are given.
W1 pack, to co ok ; Fut .m paktd; W papak-tha.
B utm krishati , he dr ags ; Fut . aré i kar shtd; waif l5m ckakar sk-i -tka.
(B haradvaja r equir es th e omissio n o f i i after r o o ts with Q .r i o nly, which are necessar ily
with o ut {i in the per iphrastic futur e (Pan. V 1 1 . 2,
except r o o t fl ri itself . Hence he
al lows hf“ : pecki tha, besides um papaktka {um iyaj itha, besides m iyashtha
al so ufimyag/ i tka, firafim ckichayi tka, &c.)
4 . A l l o ther verbs ending in co nso nants with any o th er r adical vowel but“H a, requ ir e i i ,
and so do all verbs with wh ich { i is either o ptional o r indispensable in th e futur e
fi vrifi, (27, 8) s t i r var ane, S u . fi vri r‘
i , (34, 8)m duar azze. Chur . Ti ”Tm:
(3 1 , 38)W sambhaktaa, Kr i .
1‘ The fo rmw cavar iva, which W estergaar d mentio ns , may be der ived fr om
ano th er
l‘O Ot 3 vii . the rule o f Panini being r estricted by the commentato r to Titan
'
s and fi vri n.
1 68 THE INTERMEDIATE g i . 336
Exceptions1 . In fl ar e] andW ant , the omissio n is o ptio nal .
W ere},m sasr asktka, o r‘
fl'
flfi l'
q sasrii i tha.
2 . The verbs i f ? atti, i‘l
’ffiar ti, must take {a 338, 7.
W ad, d -i -tha, (exceptio n to N o .
wor i,
1'c‘ -i -tha, (exception to No .
isTi ng/ e,W c ivyay-i -tha, (exception to N o .
Tables showing the cases in which the intermediate{i must be omi tted between the Unmo difiedRo o t and the Terminati ons of the so -cal led Gener al Tenses , o r ig inal ly beginning wi th a
Consonant, ex cept Q y.
336 . In these tables h ta stands fo r the Past Participle; ”
(T-{sari stands fo r the D esidera
tive ; El si/a fo r the Futur e and Co nditional ;mtd fo r the Per iphrastic Future ; fil'fl sick
fo r the Fir st A o r ist ; fanl ift fo r the Benedict ive.
I . Fo r al l Gener al Tenses, ex cep t the R
'
edup l icated Perf ect,Omit 3 i ,1 . Befo re “
E ta, N i san, El sie/a, H1 td, ” sick,
In the verbs enumerated 332 .
2 . Befo re “
17 ta, “ sari, N eg/a, HTtd
In fl klip ,if Parasmaipada. 333 , A .
3 . Befo re 71” ta, fi san, F l sya
In ag ent, fl cn’
dk, desg/ana, “seek, if Parasmaipada. 333 , B .
4 . Befo r e “
Hta,”
GT-[ sun
In mono syllabic verbs ending in 3 ,
“
35i,W,w75, Hggr ak, and {Kgnk. 333 , C .
5 . Befo re ‘
tl‘
ta
a. A ll verbs which by native grammar ians are marked with “ d, i f, o r 3 5it
b. The verb f? !s‘r i and o ther s enumerated in a general l ist, 333 , D .
II . Fo r the Reduplicated Perf ect,
Omit Q i ,1 . Befo re all terminatio ns
, except ft i r eIn eight verbs, mentio ned 334 .
'
2 . Befo re VTtha, 2nd per s . sing
A l l verbs o f 332 ending in vowel s
Al l verbs o f 332 ending in consonantswith 3 a as radical vowel per iph rastic future.
Op tional inser ti on of Q i .
337. Fo r practical purpo ses, as was stated befo r e, it is sufficient to know when it
would be wr ong to use the intermediate {i fo r in all o th er cases, whatever th e V iews o f
differ ent grammar ians, o r the u sage o f differ ent wr iter s, it is safe to insert th e Q i .A s native grammar ians, h owever , have been at much pains to co ll ect the cases inwh ich {i
must o r may be inserted, a sh o rt abstract o f th eir rules may h ere fo l l ow, wh ich the ear ly
student may safely pass by.
Th e technical 3 11 sh ows that in the o ther general tenses the{i is O ptional . 337, I . 2 .
170 THE INTERMEDIA TE r i . 338
5 . Befo re th e gerundial termination HTtedIn verbs having a technical 3 a . (Pan. V I I . 2
,
511mm (wsamu),m samitvd o r Elli? !s‘dntvd.
6 . Befo r e the gerundial termination Fintail and the par ticiple in ‘
d ta
In the verbW icks. (Pan. V I I . 2 ,
fafsrm klisitvd o r tag klishtvd, f§ f51‘
fl2klisitak o r fair : kl isktah.
In the verb 1 pm (Pan . V 1 1 . 2, 5 1 .
t I'fas'l
'
fi Tpavitvd o r 1 3 1p itted wfampavi tak o r 1112patah . It must take Q i in
the desiderative (Pan. V 1 1 . 2,
7 . Befo r e th e part icipial terminations "
if ta o r Hna; ( see al so 333 , D . 2,no te)
In the verbs QH\dam
,to tame, sin: da
‘
ntak o rm dami tak. (Pan . v1 1 . 2 ,
“ sam,to quiet,W 2s’
dntak o rm samitah.
R pm”
, to fill, {3 2pz
’
lrnah o rW 2pdr i tak.
mad e, to perish , as : dastah o r arts-d: ddsi tah.
“ spas, to touch , an : spasktah o rm spds‘italz.
EQ chhad, to cover , 3 3 2ckkannah o rm chkddi tah.
fl jnap, to info rm, 5 112j fiaptak o r “ 2j fiapitak.
“ rush, to hur t, Isa: m ade o r s tem: rushitah.
gBrit ain, to g o , datah o r E ff-W2ami tah.
HQ tear , to hasten, 30382tarnah o r RFC?“tvar i tah.
m ean-Musk, to sh o ut, sanghusktah o r tigfim sanghushi tah. (S ee 333,
D .
s van, to so und, ma in: dsvdntak o r m dsvani tah. (S ee 333,
D .
a nhgi sh; to rejo ice
, g r : hrishtak o r gfim hrishitah, if applied to h o rr ipilation.
(Pan. V I I . 2,
surf-
s apa-chi , to ho nour ,W 2apachi tah o rm apackdyi tah
8. Befo re the participle o f the r edupl icated perfect in NIn the verbs 7“(yam to go ,W j agmivdn o r W j aganvdn
a ’
kan, to kill ,M agkniva
’
n o r W aghanvdn.
fil'
Qvi d, to know, fafafe'
srq e ieidiean o r Fafagmeividedn.
W at'
s, to enter ,W aivifivdn o rw vivis’
vdn.
“
gadris‘, to see
,W dadrisivdn o rW dadms"
vdn.
N ecessary inser ti on of Q i .
338. Q i must be inserted in all verbs inwhich , as stated befo r e, it is neither pr ohibited,no r o nly O ptio nal lyal l owed (Pen. V I I . 2 , Besides these, the fo ll owing special cases may
be mentio ned :
1 . Befo r e “ vas,par ticiple o f r edupl icated perfect
In the verbs ending in WTd (Pan . V I I . 2 ,1ITpa
‘
,W papivdn.
In the verbs r educed t o a single syl lable in th e r edupl icated perfect (Pan . V I I . 2,
w as, to eat, s ieda .
In the verbW ykas, to eat,W j akshivdn.
O th er verbs reject it .
3“ Pan. V 1 1 . 2 , 30 . 1‘ Pan . V I I . 2, 68.
34 1 , THE INTERMEDIA TE g i . 1 7 1
2 . Befo re El si/a o f the future and co nditio nal
In al l verbs ending in and in {Khan (Pan . V I I . 2,
In “ yam, if used in
the Parasmaipada (Pan. V I I . 2 ,
3 . Befo re the terminatio ns o f the fir st ao rist (fil‘Qsick)In the verbs fi stu, g sa,
Vtgp dhzz in the Parasmaipada (Pair . V I I . 2 , Thus fr om
lg stu, to praise , Fi r st A o r ist (Fir st Fo rm), m astdvisham; but in the
Atmanepada,m asto ski .
4 . Befo r e the terminatio ns o f the desiderative (117-( sen)In the verbs “
Tkfl,Ti gr t, g dri,
l i dkri, and “ pr ackh (Pan. V I I . 2 , and in
Tlflgam, if used in the Parasmaipada (Pan. V I I . 2 ,
In th e verbs fa? smi ,Kpd, fl ri ,W anj , and 33 91 as. (Pan. V I I . 2 ,
5 . Befo r e the gerundial HTtee? and the par ticipial terminatio n“
d ta . (Pan . V I I . 2 , 52
In theverbs “ vas, to dwel l ;l
Q‘h c kud/z, to hunger ;“ mi ck, to wo r ship ;“ lab/i ,
to confo und (D hatupatha 28,
6 . Befo re HTtva' o nlyIn i j ri , to gr ow o ld ;W er as
’
ch, to cut . (Pfin. V I I . 2,
7. Befo r e “ the, zud per s . sing. r edupl icated perfect :In “ ad, t o eat ; wri , to go ; a aye, to cover . m dditka
,against 335 , 3
W a’
r i tha, 335, 3 , no te;W aivyayi tka .
§ 339. The vowel Q i thu s inser ted is never l iable to Guna o r
Inser ti on of the long i i .
340 . Lo ng i i may be substituted fo r th e sh o r t wh en subj o ined to a
Verb ending in at rt, also to 51vr i , except in th e r eduplicated per fect,the
ao r ist Par asmaipada, and th e benedi ctive . (Pan . V I I . 2, 38
Etri; Per . Fut . Tram tar ita o r m tar i ta,&c.; but Per f. zud per s . sing .
ter i tka ; I . A o r . Par . 3rd per s . plur . wmftg: atdr iskuk; B ened .
grd per s . sing .
‘
ilftfl’te tar iskiskta
1 vri ; Per . Fut . af t-mvar itd o r af t ?" var i ta
'
; but Per f. Raft ? ! vavar i tka ;A o r . Par . c g
‘avdr isknk; B ened .
‘
élf'
t lfi? var iskiskta .
34 1 . In the desider ative and in the ao r ist Atm. and benedi ct ive Atm . these verbs mayo r may no t have Q i (Pan. V I I . 2 , 4 1 wh ich , if used, is l iable to be changed to Q i , no t,
however , as far as I can judge, in the benedict ive Atmanepada.
“
Ur i : D es. far t—"
cafe titar ishati ; fire titar tshati ; fi a‘tfifir tittr shati ; A o r . Atm .
m ite atar iskta, W I? atar iskta, and W ati r skta; B ened. rrt‘
cw’rs tar isktskta,ifitfi‘
e ti r skiskta.
3mi ; D es . tantra? vivar ishate; W EI} vivar ishate; W vuvii r skate;
m avar ishta, W 1? avar ishta, and “a? avri ta; B ened.m var ishiskta,
We vrishtskta.
The verb HQ gr ak, to o , takes the l ong i t, except in th e reduplicated perfect , thedesiderative, and certain tenses o f the passive . (P513. V 11 . 2,
aregr ak; Per . Fut . new gr ahitd Inf . trefi gr ahi tum; but j agg-ihima .
The fo rm s given in th e Calcutta edi tio n o f Panini V I I . 2 , 42, m 7 car iskishta,Hfi ‘fi? star tshishta, ar e wr o ng . (S ee Pan. V I I . 2 ,
Z 2
1 72 PARA DIGMS o r REDUPLICA TED PERFECT. 342
342. V erbs wh ich,acco r ding to 5)325 , canno t fo rm a r edupli cated per fect,
fo rm th eir perfect by affixing is“
?an (an accu sative terminatio n o f a feminine
abstr act no un in “
i n d)to th e verbal base, and adding to thi s th e r eduplicatedper fect o f 33 1m} to do , i bim, to be, o r w as
,to be.
é gund, to wet, m , W EI, W ,unddmckakdr a, babhziva, asa.
W ehakds,to sh ine
,m m ,m am ,chakdsamchakdr a, babhdva, asa.
a’nm bo d/zaya, to make known
, W , 5 3,-E ,
arm,bo dhayd
'
mchakam ,
babhuva,dsa.
A fter verbs which ar e u sed in th e fitmanepada, th e auxiliary verb 5 kriis co njugated as Atmanepada , but m as and 31 61312 in th e Par asmaipada.
Hence fr om IN ? edkate, he gr ows ,
W edh-dmchakr e; bu t w babhdva. and m dsa .
In the passive al l th r ee auxiliary verbs fo ll ow the Atmanepada.
343 . Intensive bases which can take Guna, take it befo re“
N Idm; desiderative basesnever admit o f Guna.
“ 6061112, fr equentative base o f g blm’
,M am bo bhavd'
fitckakdr a.
ga3mbubodhish, desiderative base o f fi budh,W m &c. bubodhishdm.
chakc‘ir a &c.
Par adigms of the Reduplicated Perf ect.
I . Verbal bases in WT d, r equir ing intermediate 3 i .
“Tdhd’
, to place .
A
PA RA SMA I PA D A . A TM A N E PA D A .
S INGULAR . DUAL . PLURA L . S INGULAR . DUAL . PLURA L.
am am v3 we wedadkivd dadkimd dadhé dadhivcike dadhimdhe
are“.
"
a Em mi? zfinfidadhdthulz dadké dadhishe
'
dadhd'
the dadhidl wé
m : as: as w? aredadkcitulz dadhzila dadhe
’
dadhd’te dadhi r e
’
2 . Verbal bases in {i and i t, pr eceded by one co nso nant , and r equ ir ing intermediate Q i .
“I a i, to lead .
fawn may. o r area-q fafias fai t Fafi nrif h a s ?
W nindya ning/ ind ninyimd ninye’
ninyiva’
he ninyimdke
faam III-
nan o r fang: em far-na fame fafiua o r e 1 05)
W ninayi tha* ninydthulz ning/d ninyishe
’
ning/{the ninyidkvé o r-dhvé
3 . fawn!nindya fawg: fag : fafi fauna fafz'
ftninya
’
tufi ninyu’
fi ninge’
ning/ li te ninyir é
335 , 2 , and 335 , 3
174 PARADIGMS o r REDUPLICATED PERFECT. 343
8.Verbal,
bases InWrt, preceded by two consonants, and requir ing intermediate Q i .E!stri , to spread .
W t tasttfr a, o r mafia m fm WEI} m m ?m testar a tastam
’
vd tastar imd tastar é tastar imihe tas tar z'
mdhe
2 . new? tastdr tha Hang: mat mafia mend mafi a} o r0
?tastar a
’
thulz tastara’
tastar z'
she’
tastar dfthe tas tar z'
dl wé o r -dhve'
3 . m tasttfr a "
da ta! m m m nfi N FC}tastar a
’
tufi tastar zilz tastar é’
tastard’te tastar i r e
'
9. Verbal bases in “
af t, r equiring intermediate 3 i .BEkfl ,
to scatter .
m ohakdm o r W ft’
q’ watts fl ak m ay? “ Fm?
W chakdm chakar ivd chakar imd chakur e'
chakar ivdhe ckakar ima’
he
W ehakar i tham “ I w ith m i W m
chakar cithuk chakard chakar iské ckakar tfthe chakamdhvé o r -dlwe’
3 W ehakd’m m : an : a i r m ? “ fa
chakar dtulz aka/cam ]; chakar é’
chakard'
te ckakam’
r e’
I o . Verbal bas es in co nso nants, r equiring intermediate 3 i .
W tutdda W ? W as? We ? Wtutudivd tutudimd tutudé tutudiva
’
he tutudimdhe
W tutodaha m : 333 W was 331533tutuda
’
thula tutudd tutudishé tutt ke tutudidlwe’
m :“
as as? W safestutuddtufi tutudu
’
ll. tutude tutuddte tutudir e'
I I . Verbal bases in consonants, h aving 2 e, and r equi ring intermediate 3 i .H tan, to str etch .
m a tatd’
na o r i f“ fi r M mm tata
’
na tem'
vti tenz’
md tené tem’
vcflze tem'
ma’
he
iffim teni tka fins : $etena
’
thuh ten teniské temfthe tenidhve
3 . m tatcfna w: B3? 39: B7"? fififitendtnlz tené tendte tenz
‘
r e
12 . Verbal bases in co nsonants, having S amprasarana, and r equir ing 3 i.tJi g/aj , t o sacrifice.
se e: ism is i sms ismsijz
'
vd {jimcf tfie'
tj ivcfhe tfjimdhe
m iya’
shtha o r ing: in i fs } i afit 53 63
{11m z'
yaj i tha ,iia’
thuio rj af
ij z’
she’ Mme wa s
3117? iyéfj a W 3 i i; 3 Wtjd
l
te
344. PARA DIGMS o r RED UPLICA 'I‘ED PERFECT. 1 75
I 3 . Verbal bases in co ns onants, requir ing co ntract io n, and intermediate 1 i .
a ban,to kill .
wit wfifl i ’
W j agha’
na j aghm'
vci j aghnimd j aghné j aghnivdlte j aghnimdhe
m j aghdnma o r was: an fifi fi w eW j aghanitha j aghna
'
thulz j aghnd j aghnishé j ag lmdthe j aghnidhve’
W j aghdna an : am at: m wfmj agkndtulz j aghnzilt j aghné
’
j aghmfte j aghnir e'
I 4 . Verbal base ¥Lbhii ( irregular).
m babma flats-s wafers
babhdviva’
babkdvimd babkdve'
babhflvivdhe babhflvimdhe
fi h babm ima am : we W m "?
bablnivdtkulz babhdvd babhavi shé babhevme babhdvidhvéo r -dhve'
“my! babhatva am : an : 1 13 mi s fit t ats}babkflvdtula babhztmilc babhdve
’
babhevd'
te babhflvire’
C H A P T E R X II .
STRENGTHENING A N D WEAKENING O F THE VERBA L BA SESIN THE S IX REMA INING GENERA L TENSES .
344 . It may be u sefu l , with o ut enter ing into minute details,to
tingui sh between two sets o f gener al tenses , mo o ds,and verbal der ivatives
,
wh ich di ffer fr om each o th er by a tendency either to St rength en o r to weaken
their base. Th e str ength ening takes place chiefly by Guna, but , under
special cir cumstances,likewi se by Vriddhi , by length ening o f th e vo wel
,
o r by nasalization. Th e weakening takes place by sh o r teni ng , by ch anging
a rt to {g ir , o r,befo r e conso nants
,to it tr , by S ampr asfir ana, o r by
dr opping o f a nasal . Ther e ar e many r o o ts,h owever
,wh ich eith er canno t
be str ength ened o r canno t be weakened, and which ther efo r e ar e l iablet o ch ange in o ne o nly o f th ese sets . S ome r esist bo th str ength ening and
weakening, as,fo r instance
,all der ivative bases, cau satives, desider atives,
and intensives (in th e which gener al ly have been str engthened, as
far as their bases will al low,pr evio u sly to th eir taking the co njugati o nal
term inatio ns .
1 7 6 STRENGTHENING A N D WEAKENING o r VERBA L BA SES 344
Th e base is,if po ssible
,Th e base is no t str ength ened, and, if
s tr engthened in po ssible,weakened in :
I . The Futur e . 1 . The Participle in a ta (unl ess it takes
2 . Th e Condi tio nal . intermediate i).
3 . The Per iphr astic Futur e. 2. Th e Ger und in m ted (unless it{
takes
4. Th e Benedi ctive Atmanepada. intermediate 3 i).(Except bases ending in conson.
01° E5 Ti
, and no t taking interm .3 ° The PassIve.
g i . Pan. 1 . 2 , n 1 2 . vu . 2, 4. Th e Benedictive Par asmaipada .
5 . Th e Fir st A o r ist, I . II . 5 , Th e Fir st A o r ist,IV .
(Except Fir st A o r . II . Atm . o f
verbs ending in co nson.,3G117, o r
6 ° The S eco nd A O H S t .
am (i . 350 (Except verbs in a ri , &c.
I .Ro o t. Base Futur e. Co nditional . Per . Fut . B en .Atm . Fir st A o r . I . II.strengthened .
tfi
bho bhavishydti
dto tsyat dtautsft
ddevtt
cho r ayz’
shydti dcho r ayishyat cho r ayi td cho r ayisktsktd
kar iskydn karitd kar ishtshgd
so shydti dso shyat so shtshtd
H W mmtan tanishydti dtanishyat tani td
'
taniskisktci dtantt o r dtdnit
is Emkr e kr eshydti dkr eshyat kr etd
’
kr eshtshta’
dkr aishi’
t
fir st E1 m Est (tr ai t )dvish dvekshydti ddvekskyat (dvikshtshta
’
)
g ishu ho ho skydti a
'
ho shyat ho shishtd dhaushi’
t
F‘i fix
r udh r o dk r o tsya’
tz'
dr o tsyat (r utsishta’
) dr autstt
7 Caus .
Jeri kdr ay kdr ayiskya’
ti a’
lcdr ayishyat kdr ayi td'
kdr ayishtshtd
D es.m ffl '
fi ffi‘ lfi‘l W ET
kri chiktr sh chiktr skishydti dckikt'
r shishyat chiktr shi td chiktr shishishtd dchiktr shtt
a; Int-am am «saw sam ene ss v i s i ts?
kri chekr ty ckelcr tyishya’
te dchekrtyishyata chekr iyim’chekr tyishtskté dchekr iyishta
W Atm.
bhavits'
bhavishtshta’
dbkavishta
to ttdr (tutsishta’
)
dw ite'
devishtshtd
STRENGTHEN ING A N D WEAKEN ING
gkokshydti dghokshyat
gdhishydti dgii hishyat
‘fisr aj sr akshycfti a
’
sr akshyat
fa 111 3
mi 7nd mafsya’
ti dmcisyat md’
sisktai
as fivenas
‘ nankskydti dnankshyat nafizshtd
Gin W5 é fam affi rm waiter
sr an'
zs sr ani s sr ainsishydte dsr a iizsi shyata sr afizsitdl
sr afizs ishishta’
cisr ainsishta
w asI'm
bandh bandk bhantsyctti dbhantsyat banddhd a’
bhdntst’
t
II.Ro o t . Base Part i t ta, Genfi Ttvci'
, B en.Par . S ec.A o r . Fir st A o r,l V .
W ith out {a W ithout i t. and II , A tm .
fl in t ? aw wai tI
mg’ishtdli mg
'ishtvd mf iiyli te
as as use 23 18
as ?
uh guh gfldhvd guhydte a’
ghukshat
H3 in as as we
fit fa fan:
“l
“I
‘Q
nas‘ nas
’
nashta’
n
HQ HQ W 310
sr afii s sr as s r as tcili sr asycite dsr asat
fl W? Wbandh badh badhydte
1 Pan . vI . 4, 89 .
2 Pan . V I . I , 58.
3 Pan . V I . I , 50 .
4 Pan. V I I . I,60 .
5 Pan. V I . 4, 24 .
6 B ut with i i , mfftmmdrj i tvd, no t fi atmarj i tvd.
7 A s t o the l o ng 3 512, see 1 28. 8 O r TLla
gfi'
l gzflzitvd', 337, I . 2 .
9 O rW nan’
zshtnd.
1° Ro o ts whi ch may thus dr o p th eir nasal , ar e wr itten in th e D hatupathawith th eir nasal ,HQ o rW arr ants . wh ile o thers wh ich r etain th eir nasal thr o ugh o ut , ar ewr itten with o ut the
nasal, but with an indicato ry Q i Rf? nad, &c. (Pan . V I . 4 , 24 ; V I I . I , Two verbs thu s
marked by 3 i , E fi'
l lag and i f? leap ,may, h owever , dr o p their nasal , th e general ru le no t
with standing, if used in cer tain m eanings, M ir“? vi lag i tam, burnt ; W Wvikapi tam,
defo rmed 24,var t . dr o ps its nasal befo r e terminatio nsbeg inning wi th a vowel , but no t befo r e th e intermediate Q i ; fi fl ffl var hayati , but i f? “
vyin’
i hi td. f i t-an}, to t inge, may dr o p its nasal , even in th e causative (i . e . befo r e a vowel),
if it means to Spo rt ; ( ants r aj ayati (Pan .v1 . 4 , 24, vart . 3 , The same r o o t,l ike some o th ers,
dr o ps its nasal befo re sdrvadhdtuka affixes ( are r aj ati, &c . (Pea. v1 . 4 , season,if it
means to wo r sh ip, must r etain its nasal (Pan. V I . 4 , 30)and take the interm ediate 3 i (Pan. V I I .
2 , 53) Elffl fi t wo rsh ipped ; o th erwise W aktalz o r fi fl fi : an’
chi tali , bent .
11 O r Hffl fi l‘
sr aiizsi tvd.
o r VERBAL BASES,&C . i 345
mm (gal! )90t (ghukshishta
’
)
i f? “ Mgamut githishisktai ayaki
‘
t
sr ashtd dsr d'
kshi t
nas‘ydte
347. A CRIST. 1 79
N o te— The verbs beginning withmbut (D hatupatha 28, 73— I08) do no t str engthen
their,base
,except befo r e terminatio ns wh ich ar e marked by { it o r BU ; fl hut, to be
bent, Fut .W kutiskya’ti,Per . Fut .W kuti td, Fir st A o r .W
'
Qdkufit (Pan. I . 2 , I ).
W m}, to fear , never takes Guna befo r e intermediate 3 i ; Per . Fut . f’af
’mnmj i td (Pi n. 1 .
2 , flrnu, to co ver , may do so o ptio nally; zi rnuvi td o r wfifim flrnavitd
(Pfin. I . 2,
C H A PTER XIII .
A ORIST.
346 . W e can distingu ish in S anskr it, as in Gr eek, between two kinds o f
A o r ists , o ne fo rmed by means o f a sibilant inser ted between r o o t and termi
nat io n,— this we call th e Fir st,— ano th er
,fo rmed by adding th e terminatio ns
to the base, this we cal l the S eco nd A o r ist .
Bo th A o r ists take the A ugment, wh ich always has the Udfitta, and, with
some m o difications,the terminations o f the Imper fect .
347 . Th e Fir st A o r ist is fo rm ed in fo ur differ ent ways.
Terminations of the Fir s t A o r is t.
Fir st Fo rm .
PA RA SMA I PA D A . ATMA N E PA D A .
gfi isham {E r iskva W ishma ste am {a fieaheaki rwf‘
z ishmahi
i : if? {Eishgam se esaw W ishtkdfiW ishatkam 386i o r gq’
idheam o r idbvam
inn {s i enna ggzishuze {E i ghts semi is lzd'
td‘
m W ishata
In thi s fir st set o f term inations the intermediate g i stands as par t o f theterminatio ns , because all the verbs th at take th is fo rm ar e verbs liable to
take th e intermediate i i . The fir st and second fo rm s o f the Fir st A o r ist
di ffer , in fact , by this o nly, th at th e fo rmer is peculiar to verbs which take,
the latter to verbs wh ich r eject intermediate g i . (S ee 332, 4, no te .)
S econd Fo rm .
PA RA SM A IPA D A . ATM A N EPA D A .
i i sam er sea 8 ? sma fi fé svahi F i fi smaki
fi s tam E sta SE.
dkvaman: an mm ‘
tho r
“
d tam o r"
ITtasa rim
o r g f,171m
0, mi mmsuit am sdtdm W sata
180 A ORIST.
3 Th ir d Fo rm .
Th er e ar e some verbs wh ich add q s to the end o f the r o o t befo r etaking th e terminations o f the A o r ist , and wh ich after th is as, empl oy th eusual term inat io ns with g
r i, viz . {i t i sham,
&c . Th ey ar e conjugated in th ePar asmaipada o nly.
PA RA S M A IPA D A .
fini s-i -sham filfl s-ishna
lfi: 3 (fo r few: sish(a)h) fire'
s-ishyam
sins -it (fo rmadman) feat s-ishgdm
4. Fo urth Fo rm .
Lastly, ther e ar e some few verbs, ending in q s, fi sh
, g h , pr ecededby g i , 3 26
,
”
sar i , wh ich take the'
fo ll owing terminations,with o ut an inter
mediate g i (ksa).
PA RA SMA I PA D A .
“5 sum ma sciva m scima
8 2sah 8 i satam EH sata
“( sat F if i satdm W “Tiff sd'
tcim
Specia l Rules f o r the F ir st Fo rm of the Fir st A o r is t.
348. Fo r final vowel,V riddh i in Par asmaipada
*. am,
to cut,m
dldvisham (Pan. V I I . 2 , I ).Fo r final vowel
,Guna in A tmanepada . Q Iii , W ci lavishi .
Fo r medial o r initial vowel,Guna (if po s sible) bo th in Par . and Atm .
“ budh , to know;Pw .wfl)fl lfidbo dhisham Atm . d o dhishi .
Th e vowel as a,fo ll owed by a single final co nso nant
,may o r may no t take
V r iddh i in Par . if the verb begins with a co nso nant “
an them,to so und
, W
fmfi ci/cc‘
inisham o r W dhanisham (Pan . V I I . 2, Atm . M FG!dhanishi .
Except f? s’
vi , t o swell ,m asvayi t; fl T’Ij dgg‘ i , to wake,m aj a
'
gar i t
(Pan . V I I . 2,
3 13drai n, to co ver , may o r may no t take Vriddh i W aumuvi t, o r
fi fil'
afifl aurzzdvit, o r fi fiififl aumavi t (Pan. V I I . 2,
1' Ro o ts ending inW al o r “SQ ar always take Vriddhi in the Par asmaipada Q aj val,
to burn, fiW tfiedZ’i t (Pan. V I I . 2, Likewise Hgvad, to speak, and Eli o r uj , t o go
(Pan. V I I . 2 , Ro o ts ending in ( h,flmfl iy, the r o o tsmkshan, t o hurt , Va'
li svasfi o br eathe,and verbs o f the Chur class
,r o o ts with technical E e
,do no t take Vriddhi (Pan . V I I . 2,
Hi gr ak, to take, t gr ahi t; El li syam, to sound, W fi dsyami t; mavyay, to
thr ow,3 15 11131 doyayi
'
t; a l l kshazz, to hurt,maniadkshazi i t;
”JRs’
eas, t o br eath e,M i ds
’
vasi t ; E fl flnay, to minish , fi fi fi i aiinayi t; Ul r ey , to suspect,EM didhi
,to shine,
23fif'l ve'vi, to desir e, and afifil dar idr d, to be po o r , dr o p th eir final
vowel s, acco rding to th e rules o n intermediate i i aft ? !dar idr ci ,W h fi'
fitddar idr i t.
1 82 A ORIST. 357
Special Rules f o r the Th ir d Fo rm of the Fir st A or is t .
357. Mo st verbs taking thi s fo rm o f the A o r ist end in m d,o r in
diph th o ngs which take a t d as their substitute. Th is an d r emains
unchanged. In th e A tmanepada th ese verbs take the S econd Fo rm .
358. The verbs Ffimi , to hurt, fi? mi , to th r ow,and Ffi li, to stick, in taking th is fo rm,
ch ange l ikewise their final vowels into W 6 . Ex . unf air amdsisham, I t hrew,and I hur t
W aldsisham (o r fi fi alaisham). 353 .
359. Thr ee r o o ts ending in Tim take th is fo rm 1myam, to h o ld, G r am, to rejo ice,
“ from, to bend, A o r . m tai ayams isham,&c. (Pan. V I I . 2
Specia l Ru les f or the F our th Fo rm of the F ir st A or ist.
5)360 . The r o o ts wh ich take th is fo rm must end in 31s (as to “ this, to
see, cf. Pan. I I I . I, fish
, i ts , g h , pr eceded by any vowel but w,EN 8
Th ey must be verbs wh ich r eject th e intermediate g i , 332, I 7— 2o ;
(Pan. I I I . I , Th eir r adical vowel r emains unchanged .
36 1 . The r o o tmslish takes this fo rmo nly if it means to embrace (Pan. I I I . I, 46)
fl m as’
likshat. Oth er verbs, such as g push and ms’
ush, are specially excepted .
366 )
362 . The r o o ts fi duh,to milk
,fai dih, to ano int
,W h iz,to l ick, Tri g/uh, to h ide
(Pan . V I I . 3 , may take In the Atmanepada
WT! thah instead o f W . sathdh.al l? vahi instead o fm fg sdvahi
H ta“
(Fri sata . V ii dho om l 18i.
sadhvam.
They thus appr o ach to the S econd Fo rm o f the first ao rist in mo st, but no t in all pers o ns .
Ex . SKduh , 2 . p . sing . Atm .m . adugdhdh o r ‘HW adhukshathcflz.
3 . p . sing . A tm .gSlg
'
T'kl adugdha o r W adhukshata.
I . p . dual A tm.“3m aduhvahi o rW adhulcshdvahi .
2 . p . plur . Atm.W W adhugdhvam o rw adhulcshadhvam.
F IRST A O RI S T .
with intermediate i i .
a . V erbs ending in a vowel ; 7g hi , to cut .
Vriddh i In Par asmaipada, Guna In A tmanepada.
PA RA SM A I PA D A .
1 .m rfi-fi a’
Idv-isham wa if-m i a
’
ldv-isho d s imian: a’ ldo -ishma
wmf'em’
a’
ldv-ishtam m 2 a’
ldvi -shta
3 . W attles -u W ar t dldu-ishtdm wa fers:’
ldvi -shuh
ATM A N E PA D A .
1 . m fafq a’
lav-ishi s tafm f‘
z a’
lav-ishvahi wa fawfg a’
lav-ishmahi
2 .
“
sa far i : a’
lav-ishthdh m ma’
lav-ishdthdm s tatu sa'
lav-idho am -dho om
3 . ava tar a’
lav-ishtu fl afflflfi ll dlav-ishd'
tdm wa fer“ dlav-ishata
362 , A ORIST. 1 83
b. V erbs ending in co nso nants ;“ bud/i,to know.
Guna in Parasmaipada and Atmanepada .
PA RA S MA I PA D A .
wi th abodh-isham W abo dh-ishva a i rfa re abodh-ishma
m .-abo dh ih W abodh-ishtam W abodh ishta
3 .m am a-u m ’tfimi abodh-ishtdm «implan t ed/14mm
ATM A N E PA D A .
1 .was.abodh-ishi mam a abodh-ishvahi m an-g abodh-ishmahi
2 .m : abodh ishghdh W W abo dh-isha’
thdm W abodh -idhvam
3 .W m abodh ishtu mfifimai d hadh-ishd’tdm wa‘
tfimr abo dh-ishata
S econd Fo rm,
with o ut intermediate Q i .
a . Verbs ending in co nso nants ; fact kship ,to thr ow.
Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, no change in Atmanepada.
PA RA SM A I PA D A .
ward akshaip-sam m alcshaip
-sva m akshaip-sma
W akshaip-sih was alcshaip
-tam 35 1 ) Ea? alcskaip-ta
3 .W akshaip si t fl ai l akshaip-tdm m 2akshaip-suh
ATM A N E PA D A .
x m akship-si wfzmaf
‘
g alcship-svahi W ant
-
g alcship-smahi
2 . wfwwr: alcship thdh fl aw alcship-sdthdm wfmj akshib-dho om
3 .W alcship ta «fiesta-makship
-sdtdm m alcship-sata
b. Verbs ending in vowel s i i, a, a il);“
a? h i, to lead.
Vriddhi in Par asmaipada, Guna in Atmanepada.
PA RA SMA I PA D A .
.
Z’
Z:anaisham 3 13W anaishva
m .
‘
anaishih fi e anaishtam
3 .M anaishi t sfimanaishtdm
A TM A N E PA D A .
1 . fi fe aneshi Wm aneshvahi m aneshmahi
2 . fl ai l": aneshthdh W aneshdthdm W5? anedhvam
3 . fl at aneshta fi mwi aneshdtdm m aneshata
c . Verbs ending in a ri ; T kri, to do .
Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, no change in Atmanepada .
PA RA SM A I PA D A .
1 .
2
mm? alcdr sham mm? akdr shva
akdr shih was? akdr shtam
3 .
z
flm akdr shi t W IFTakdr shtdm
184 A ORIST. 36 2.
ATM A N E PA D A .
W alcpisho ahi m fg
W W akpishdthcim
W W I alcpishdtdm W W a lcpishata
d. Verbs ending in =srr d ; a dd,to give .
Atmanepada o nly; WTd changed into 3 i .
ATM A N E PA D A .
n it rate adisl wahi mm adishmahi
wfeflmi adishdthdm safe? adidhvam
mamadishdtdm art‘
s“ adishata
e. Verbs ending in a p i «I s tpi, to st re tch .
Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, with intermediate i i .
In Atmanepada th e inser tio n o f {i is o pt io nal . (S ee 337, II . 4 . Pan . V I I . 2 ,
If i i is inser ted , then Guna 348) and o pt io nal ly lengthening o f i i .
If {i is no t inser ted, then a pt ch anged to k in
PA RA S MA I PA D A .
ma'rf’u’
r as tdr isham, &c., like Fi r st Fo rm.
Fi r st Fo rm, ATM A N E PA D A . S econd Fo rm,
with Q i . S INGULAR . with o ut Q i .I . W fifq o r W astar ishi o r astar ishi waflfi asti r shi
2 . matter: o rm : astar ishthd‘
h o r astar i shthdh W i t: as fir shihdfi
3 .W I ? o r mafi a astar ishta o r astar i shta W ? asti r shta
DUAL .
1 .W W o r W WI? astar i shvahi o r astar ishvahi m as ti r shvahi
2 .W o r W W astar ishdthdm o r astar ishdthdm W W as ti r shdthdm
3 .W or m m astar ishdtdm o r astar i’
shdtdm W fifi l’ asti r shdtdm
1 . m m o r W “ astar ishmahi o r astar ishmahi m asti r shmahi
2 . mafi a?!°§ o rm l 85l astar i dhvam -dho om o r astar idhvam-dho om W ? as ti rdhvam
3 .m o r mini “ astar ishata o r astar ishata
f . Verbs with penultimate a pi W spij , to let o ff.
Pecu l iar Vr iddh i ln Parasmaipada, no change In A tmanepada .
PA RA SM A IPA D A .
1 .m asr dlcsham m asrdlcshva
m i l“ ? asr dlcshih m asrdshtam
3 .W asrdlcshi t W WI asr dshtdm
ATM A N EPA D A .
1 . atg1’araSpikshi aga te aspi lcshvahi
2 .
“mm: aspishthdh m ini aspikshdthdm
W asr ishta W i ll asrikshdtdm
W asr dkshulz
W asn’
kshmahi
W asriddhvam
181g“ aSpikshata
1 86 A ORIST. 363
A TM A N E PA D A .
I .‘H‘
gfl’i aghukshz w agki
i kshavahz o rW aguhvahz w aghufcshamahz
2 .W 1aghukshathd/zo r'
fl fg l!agzidhdfiW aghukskfitkdmw o rW 1
3 .w aghukshata o r W amid/La w aghukshdtdmB3IW?I agkukshanta
It may also fo ll ow th e Fir st Fo rm , “I f?“agdhisham'
and mf gffl agd/zishi .
Q 337, Ifag lib, to smear .
PA RA SM A I Il
’A D A .
I .m al iksham m a likshciva «Pam a likshdma
2 .m alikshala ‘HfEH’
d‘
alikshatam m a l ikshata
3 .m alikshat WW al ikshatdm W a l ikshan
ATM A N E PA D A .
I .m alikshi W alikskd'
vahi o rW alihvahi W alikshdmahi
2 .m w zalikskathdh mm : alidhd’
lz. «farm a l iks/zdthdm W O rm ?
3 .W alikshata o rm a lidha W a likskdtam m al ikshanta
gg duh , to milk.
PA RA SMA I PA D A .
m adhulcskam, &c .
ATM A N E PA D A .
I .W fl adhukshi W I? adhukshdvahi o rm fg adui wahi w adhukskdmahi
mW adhu/cshathdfio r'
flg’vl i adugdkdfiW adhukskdthdmW o r 35 3783.
3
3 .W adhukshata o r “g“!adugdka W adhukshd‘
tdm “313madhukskanta
ff ? dih , to ano int .
PA RA SM A IPA D A .
m adkikskam, &c .
A TM A N E PA D A .
1 .wfirfis adhikshi m adhiks’
hdmahi
L W OMm wfirmwi adhikshdthdm m ail o r a ffine}6
3 .when o r $1q 7 m am? adhikshatdm «Fa-ah adkikshanta
S E C O N D A OR I ST .
363 . V erbs ado pting this fo rm take th e augment,
and attach theterminatio ns (Fi r st Divi sio n) o f th e imper fect to a verbal base ending
in a a,like th o se o f th e Tud fo rm .
1aghukshadkvam o r aghzidhvam.
2a likshadl wam o r a lidhvam.
3adkukskadkvam o r adkugdhvam.
4adkikshc
’
ivaki o r adihvaki .
5adkikshatha
'
li o r adigdhdli . 6adhikshadkvam o r adkigdhvam.
7adhikshata o r adigdha .
367. A ORIS'I‘ . 187
f“ s ick,to Spr inkle . Pr es . ffiWTfiI si r
‘
ichdmi Impf. vfiit i as i iicham .
PA RA S M A I PA D A .
I . W asi cham w asichdva
2 . asiabak «Fem? as ichatam
3 .M usickat wfima’i asichatdm
KTM A N E PA D A .
I . Elfil'aus iche M asichdvahi
2 .m asichathdlz W asichethdm wfa'w i asichadhv
3 . wfimwasichata m asicketdm vfin‘
masichanta
live,to call . Pr es .m hvaydmi ; Impf. 1513 6 ahvayam ; Gener al base g lut
PA RA S M A I PA D A .
I .as? ahvam W3 13 ahvdva
2 . WI : ahvalz m ahvatam
3 .W akvat W ahvata’
m
KTM A N E PA D A .
1 . vi ahve m fg akvd'
vahi t ag-mfg ahvdmahi
2 . al watkdh V i vi ahvethdm mag i ahvadhvam
3 .m abud ia V i al“
ahvetdm m ahvanta
364. Ro o ts ending in and, E e, g i , dr o p these vowel s, and substitute
a base ending in “J a : i“ five substitutes 3 km
,A o r . w; akcam ; fie évi
substitutes w éva, A o r . W aévam . Ro o ts ending in“
53 pi , and th e r o o t
gwdpié, to see,take Guna (Pan. V I I . 4, I 6), and th en fo rm a base ending
in sho r t as a : g spi , to go ,m asar at ,’
“
gs!dris, to see, mfmadar éat .
365 . Ro o tswith penul timate nasal,dr o p it : Eli;skand, to
366 . Ir r egu lar fo rm s ar e,wi ts?!avo cham,I spoke, fr om aflvach (acco rding
to Bo pp a contr acted r edupli cated ao r ist, 370 , fo r W avavacham) m i
apaptam,I flew
,fr om pat (po ssibly a co ntr acted r edupli cated ao r ist fo r
W apapatam); fi st aneéam,I per ish ed
,Kaé. o n Pan . vI . 4, w e (po ssibly
fo r W ananaéam); wfsré aéisham,I o r der ed,
‘
fr om m ads , W E I ds tham,
I th r ew,fi om w as . (PanN I I . 4, I 7.)
367. Ro o ts wh ich take this fo rm ar e,
as as, to th r ow (N d d'
s tham), “ s ack, to Speak (wfi'é avo cham), ankhyd, to speak(W akhyam), if the agent is impl ied . (Pan . I I I . I ,
M lip, to paint , f“ s ick, t o spr inkl e, i“
hve, to call (ir r egular ly“
a ? ahvam), in Par
and o ptio nally in fitm . (Pan. I I I . I , 53 , Par .W alipat, Atm .W a lipata
o r ssh -n alipta .
The verbs classed asM pushddi , beginning with Si push (D h . P. 26, 73 EH“?
Hya tddi , beginning with gfl dyut (D h . P. and th o se marked by a technical 35 ii ,
in th e Parasmaipada. (Pan . I I I . I ,
B b 2
1 88 A ORIST. 368
The verbs 1!sri , to go ,w as , to o r der , and‘
55 r i,to go (W dr am), in Par . and Atm .
(Pan JI I .
Optional ly, verbs technically marked by a i r , but in the Parasmaipada o nly (Pan. I I I .
I, W fl abhidat o r 531W abhai tsi t .
Opt io nally, i 1 14 to fail , “ stumble, to stiffen (W fi astabhat o r M astambhi t),
a? mruck, to go (“ amm o /tat o rW fl amr o ckit), g? mluch, to go ,“much,
to steal , fi g luch, to steal , 78 ? g lufich, to go (W ag luckat o r Wag lufichi t), fa s
’
vi, to gr ow (irr egular ly but m the Parasmaipada o nly.
(Pan .
368. Ther e are a few verbs, ending in sm i, E’
s, fi l o , wh ich take th is fo rm o f th e
second ao r ist in th e Parasmaipada ; al so 31 67212, to be. They r etain thr o ugh out th e l o ng
final vowel,except befo re th e uli o f the 3r d per s . plur .
, befo re which th e final m d is
r ejected . In the fitmanepada these verbs in Q !6 take th e S econd Fo rm o f th e first ao rist ,
and change33 1 (i to g i .
31 dd, to give. Pr es . safe daddmi Impf. WE? adaddm.
PA RA SMA I PA D A .
I .w addm W addma
mm? addtam were addta
n aduk
fi bkz’
i , to be. W fil bhavdmi ; Impf.m abhavam.
PA RA SM A I PA D A .
I .‘H‘fil
‘
abhiivam* w abhflva
2 . m1: abkzih any ablni tam
3 . sumabhzi t was? abhfitdm
Verbs wh ich take th is fo rm ar e,
TITyd, to g o ; EUdd, to give ; VTdi m”
, to place ; t npd’
, to drink ; an sthci, to stand ;Edc,to guard ;ado , to cut ; g uts, to be . (Pain. 1 1 . 4 ,
Optional ly, mghra‘
, to smel l ;adhe, to drink ; Qfis‘o , to shar pen ‘
f f chho , to cut ; TO
t o destr oy. (Pan .
369 . The nine r o o ts o f th e Tan class ending in T—[n o r II!n may fo rm the zud and 3rd
per s . sing . A tm . in WT: tkah and E ta, befo r e wh ich the final nasal is r ejected . E mm to
stretch ; A o r . M FR? atanishia o r W atata; m ataniskthdli o r m : atatha‘
lz
(Pan . 1 1 . 4 , These fo rms migh t be co nsidered as ir regular A tmanepada fo rms o f the
second ao r ist, o r o f th e fir st ao r i st II, with l o ss o f initial as .
S econd o r Redup licated Fo rm of the S econd A o r ist.
370 . A few pr imitive verbs,and . th e very numer o u s clas s o f the Chur
r o o ts,the denom inatives and cau satives in m ay, r eduplicate their
base in th e second ao r ist,taking th e augment as befo r e
,and the u sual
terminations o f th e imper fect .
Ir r egular in the I st per s . sing ., dual;and plur ., and in th e 3rd per s . plur .
1 90 A oms'r . 375
l o ng vowel (achuchyutat, no t achdchyutat). In r o o ts beginning and ending in
two co nsonants,this metr ical rhythm is necessar ily br oken (achaskandat).
375 . In the r o o ts wh ich do no t r esist the sh o r tening pr o cess,W a, g i , 3
“
u,sq ,
r i ar e r epr esented in the r edupl icative syll able bygs1a o r i i , E u, {i and al l length ened, wh er e necessary.
S econd o r Redup licated Fo rm of the S econd A orist.
I . u u .
“ pack, to co ok, M pdc/zdyati ;
muted,to cut
,its-afar bheddyati ; w m dbibhida t .
R mud,t o r ej o ice, W mo da
’
yati w dmdmudat.
a vri t, to exist, fi
‘
qfirvar tdyati d ivri tat.
fi mr ii , to cleanse, afi ufa
‘ mdrj dyati d immat.
fi kr it, to pr aise, Efifi‘
flfi kir tdyati ; W W dch ilcri tat
Th e lengthening becomes superfluo us befo r e r o o ts beginning with two consonants
, because the two consonants make th e sh o r t vowel h eavy (guru).
Rm;tyaj , to leave, 311m tydj dyati ;W dti tyaj at .
e rstbhr dj , to sh ine, em f? bhr dj dyati m l dbibhr aj o t.
M kship , to thr ow,m kshepdyati W dchikshipat .
to fall, Wm chyo tdyati ; wm dchuchyutat.
{i svr i,to so und
, s dr dyati s iwar at .
2 0
( g r aksh,to pr o tect
, mufir r akshdyati ; q r ar akshat i .
finsbhz‘
lcsh,to beg, t3rm bhz
‘
kshdyati ;m wat ibh ikshat .§ 376 . If th e r o o t begins and ends with do uble consonants, th is rhythm ical law is
br oken.
11'
s p r achh, to ask,m p r achckhdyati ; d apr achchhat .
Ed? skand, to step,m fil’ skanddyati ;W eichaskandat .
377. Ro o ts with r adical 5 5 ri o r a rt, fo l lowed by a conso nant , may o ptionally taketh e u u o r u u fo rm s .
TIERgazm’
y and W kathdy take i i o r 33 a o ptio nal ly; fi fl l flmd dflganat o r
W afiagaziat .
1' Th e fo l l owing verbs take “3 a instead o f {i o r i t in the r edupl icative syllable o f the
ao r ist in the causative”
B i smgd , i dr i ,“
132tear , “ pr am, Hgmr ad,“
El strt, “ spas.
( I;smr i Caus .W smdrdyo ti A o r . Es asmar at .
Th e same verbs wh ich,as will be sh own h er eafter r edupl icate ‘Sfi liav, (the Guna o f
3 5 ii ) in th e desiderative by 3 a , take i n instead o f {i in th e r eduplicated ao ri st :
and ; Caus .? fi fl ffl ndvdyati; D esfima’
fqflffl ndndcayiskati; A o r . o f Causfl li‘
fié dminavam.
I Radical “Ha is r edupl icated by 337 a if th e r o o t ends in a do uble co nso nant .
380 .A ORIST. 19 1
“wi t , to be,m var tdyati ; flm a’
vivg'itat o r d avar tat . (Pen. V I I . 4,
fi mrij , to cleanse,W mdrj dyati ; d imnj at o r d amdq'
at .
Tel /erst, to praise, fl int? ki r ta’
yati ;W a ke/mm: o rM ac/15mm .
378. Ro o ts beginning with a vowel have the same inte rnal r eduplicatio n,
which wil l be descr ibed h er eafter in the desiderative bases .
Thus “ as fo rms th e Caus .m dsdy. Thi s afte r th rowing o ff mt ay,and sh o r tening th e vowel , becomes “ as; this r edup
licated, fl ui d s
-is;
and lastly, with augment and terminatio n, safari : dé- is-am.
In the same manner, wfi ‘é dr ckicham, ah ?!azibj iiam, &c .
379. A re slightly ir r egular :
QTpd, to dr ink, whi ch fo rms its causal ao rist as W dflpyat (instead o fmdpfpayat). Pan. V I I . 4 , 4 .
WTstbd, to stand, wh ich fo rms its causal ao r ist as W dtishthipat (inst ead o f
M a ismhapat).
m ghr d, to smell , wh ich fo rms its causal ao r ist as d ghr ipat o r mdjighr apat .
RE D UPL I C A TE D A o m s'
r .
PA RA SMA IPA D A .
x . «Fara-ti déis‘r ayam warm s asis‘r aydma
2 . 11 13 t as‘is
’
r ayah wfsrama‘
as’
is’
r ayatam W m as’
is’
r ayata
3 .M af is’
r ayat W W I as‘iér ayatdm m asis’
r ayan
A TMA N E PA D A .
1 . WW asis‘r aye W asis‘r aydvalzi W as‘is
’
r aydmahi
2 .m 2as isr ayathdli W asis'
r ayetkdm W as‘is‘r ayadhvam
3 .m a§ i§ r ayata W m asisr ayetdm m asisr ayanta
380 . In th e pr eceding o ccas io nal ru les have been given as to the
par ticular fo rms o f the ao r ist wh ich certain verbs o r classes o f verbs ado pt .A s in Gr eek
,so in S anskr it
,to o
,pr actice o nly can effectually teach whi ch
fo rms do actual ly o ccur o f each verb ; and th e r ules o f grammar ians ,
h owever minute and compl icated, are no t unfr equently co ntradicted by theusage o f S anskr it auth o r s .
However,th e gener al ru le is that verbs fo l l ow the fir st ao r ist
,unless thi s
is specially pr o hibited, and that th ey take the fir st fo rm o f the fir st ao rist,
unless they ar e bar r ed by general ru les from the empl oyment o f the interme
d iate g i . Verbs, thu s bar r ed, take the seco nd fo rm o f the fir st ao r ist .
The number o f verbs which take the thir d fo rm o f the fir st ao r ist is very
limited,thr ee r o o ts ending i n H m,
and r o o ts end ing In GT4.
The fo ur th fo rm o f the fir st ao r i st is l ikewise o f very limited use see 360 .
A s to the seco nd ao r ist,th e r o o ts which mu st o r may fo llow it ar e
1 92 FUTURE. 381
indi cated in 367, and so ar e the r o o ts wh ich take the r edupl icated fo rm o f
th e seco nd ao r ist in 371 .
Ro o ts wh ich fo ll ow th e seco nd aor ist Optio nal ly, o r in th e Par asmaipada
o nly, ar e al lowed to be co njugated in th e fir st ao r ist,subject to the general
r ules .
C H A PTE R X IV .
FUTURE, CONDITIONA L, PERIPHRA STIC FUTURE, A N D B ENED IOTIV E .
Futur e.
Terminations .
PA RA SM A I PA D A .
S INGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL .
{61:a ishydmi gum : ishydvalz {1mm ishydmalz
. {wfir ishydsi m ishya’
thafi m iss/sma
3 . {unfit ishydti m : ishydtalz vi ta ishydnti
ATMA N E PA D A .
1 . {a iskyé 3m ishyévahe {W iskydmahe
2 . ishya’
se {GIGishye’
the M iskya’
dlzve
3 . {WITishydte {a ishye’
te {W} iskydnte
Th e cases in wh ich the 3 i o fm ishydmi &c . must be o r may be omitted
h ave been stated in chapter XI, 33 1 seq . Fo r th e cases in wh ich g i is
ch anged to i i , see 340 . O n the change o f El si mand F sa,see 1 0 0 seq.
O n the str engthening O f th e r adical vo wel,see ch apter XII
, 344 seq .
382 . The changes which the base undergo es befo r e the terminatio ns o f
the str engthening tenses, the two futur es, th e conditio nal , and th e benedictiveA tm . ar e r egulated by o ne general pr inciple, that o f giving weigh t to th e base,th o ugh th eir application var ies acc o r ding to the pecu liar ities o f certain verbs .
S ee illustr atio ns in 344 (bhavishydmi) and 345 Th ese
pecul iar ities mu st be learnt by practice, but a few gener al r ules may h er e be
r epeated
I . Final 12 e, 3 d i, i t!) 0 ar e changed to i n d fl gai , to sing, m fiz
gds’
ydmi , &c .
2 . F inal {i and i: i,‘
3‘
it,ai d, a ri and 5 3;14, take Guna; fa j i , to conquer ,
awfuj eshydmi ; 31 6ml, nfiwrfirbhavishydmi ; a;1m, afifnmfnIcar ishydmi
2dr i
,to tear
‘
, aftwrfil dar isiiyd'
mi o r afimfi! dar ishydmi . Ther e“
ar e the
u sual ex é eptions, 1 led, to so und, g fa
‘mfi? kuvishydmi . 345 , no te )“
3 . Penul timate g i , E u,
“
sq ,r i,pr o so dially sh o r t
,take Guna a rt becomes
3? tr ; garbud/i , W"
bo d/zishydni ; sag bhid, am : chemist.
1 94: PERIPHRA STIC FUTURE. 384
ATM A N E PA D A .
1 . 315 aishi/e aishydvahi Rm aishydmahi
2 . h m : aishyatha'
li Ravi aishyethdm h as? aishyadhvam
3 . h i s aishyata Rafi aishyetdm Qatar aishyanta
Per iphr astic Futur e.
384 . The terminat ions ar e,
PA RA S MA I PA D A .
sma : i tdwala
{imami tdsthali
{and i tdr au
A TM A N E PA D A .
I . m? i ta’ke W i tdsvahe W i tdsmahe
2 . {mi i tdse m i tdsdthe {HTS} i tddhve
3 . {in i td {Md i tdr au {ETC i tdr alz
These terminatio ns ar e clear ly compounded o f m td (base atr i), the common1
suffix fo r fo rm ing nomina agentis , and the auxiliary verbw as,to be . Th er e
is , h owever , with r egar d to m ta,no distinctio n O f number and gender in th e
I st and and per sons, and no distinctio n o f gender in th e 3rd per so n.
O n the r etentio n o r om issio n o f intermediate { i o r i;i, see 33 1 seq .
O n the str ength ening o f the r adical vowel,see 382 .
S INGULAR. PLURAL .
1 . mm bodhitdsmi m : bodhucismazi
2 . infirm bodkitdfs tha
3 .sum bodhi td exam bodutd
’mz.
1 . si tuatebodutd'
he W bod/zi tdsmalze
2 . ai rtime} bodhitddlzve
3 . W mbo dhi td tfifim t : bo dhi tdr ali
1 . m etdsmz
git budh , to know,
with intermediate 3 i .
PA RA S MA IPA D A .
DUAL .
a’tfima ‘
bo dki tdsvalz
A TM A N E PA D A .
W E ? bo dhi tdsvahe
W m ?!bodhi tdsdthe
M bodhi td’
r au
3 5,
with o ut intermediate Q i .
PA RA S M A I PA D A .
m etdsvalz
em : etd'
sthaii
a nd etd'
r au
388. BENEDICTIVE . 1 95
A TMA N E PA D A .
21 TH? etdsvahe
m etdsdtke
( mi etdrau
B enedictive.
385 . The so -called benedictive is fo rmed in clo se analo gy to the
Optat ive . It differ s fr om the Optative by no t admitting th e ful l mo dified ve rbalbase
,and
,seco ndly, by the inser tio n o f an g s befo r e the per so nal term ina
tio ns . In th e Par asmaipada th is“
q s stands between the 111 yd o f the Optat iveand the actual s igns o f th e per sons, being lo st , h owever , in the 2nd and
3rd pers . sing . Thus,instead o f
O pt . “I, 1m, W , W , m i, W , m , 3
yd’
m, ydlz, ydva, ydtam, yd'
tdm, ydma, ydta, yzilz, we have
B en. m i, m, we , met, mat, tum, m , wewill , yd
'
t, ydsva , ydstam, ydstdm, ydsma, ydsta, ydsulz.
A s the O ptative is a verbal compo und o f the mo dified base with an ancient seco nd ao rist
o f the r o o t “ yd, the benedictive seems a similar compo und o f the unmo dified base with an
ancient fir st ao r ist o f”
411 yd. In 111: grinand “ grit we have co ntract io ns o f W yds s
and W yds t. In the Veda the 3r d per s . sing . is m: ydlz. (S ee Bo llensen, Z eitschr iftder D .M . G., vo l . xxii. p . 594 ; and Pan . VI I I . 2 , 73
In the Atmanepada the q s stands bef o r e th e terminatio ns o f th e Optat ive.e . g . lfi'
q s iya instead O ffiuiya. Besides thi s,the per sonal terminatio ns o r iginal ly
beginning with ( t o r 1
aih take an additional as . C f. 35 1 . Thu s , instead o f
O pt . in, inn, i s, tats, twat, innit, M , £85, i fibiya
’
, i thdli , i ta'
,ivdhi , iydthdm, iydtdm, imdhi , i dl wa
'
m, tr ain, we have
B en. BTU, W t, m , m , m , Ham , “ 9 W , m .
S ig/d, sishthdli , sishtd, siva’
ki , siydsthdm, siyd’
stdm,sima
’
hi,sidhvdm, si
'
rdn.
Th e benedictive in the Atmanepada is r eal ly an O ptat ive o f the fir st ao r ist . Thus from
i bkd, A o r . w fi ffl abkaes hi , B en.Vl
’ffl'
flh bhavishiya ; fr om a;s in, O pt . Atm . «pmstuvita
,A o r .m asto shta, B en .M s to shishga; fr om fil lm'
,O pt .Atm.m tfifi r an,
A o r . “at“? akr eshata, B en.W kr eshir an.
386 . Verbal bases ending inW ay (Chur , Caus . D enom. &c.) dr o p 1Emmy befo re theterminatio ns o f the benedict ive Par . : “
I
l l acho r ay, B en . fi i fl i cho rydsam
W cho r ayishiya’
. D enom inative bases inRy dr o p{y in the B en. Par . W mtfi'
y,
B en. ga‘hmiputr iydsam but in Atm .m putr iyishiya
’
.
387. The benedictive Par asmaipada belo ngs to the weakening, the
benedi ctive Atmanepada to the str engthening fo rm s Hence fro m
M chi t,Par . fimmi chi tydsam,
Atm . am chetish iyd .
388. Th e benedictive Par asmaipada never takes intermediate i . Th e
benedictive Atmanepada gener ally takes intermediate 3 i . Exceptio ns are
pr ovided fo r by the rules 33 1 seq .
C C Z
1 96 BENEDICTIVE. 389
Weakening of the B ase befo r e Terminati ons beginning wi th {y.
389 . S ome o f th e rul es r egulating the weakening o f the base, wh ich is r equired in th ebenedictive Par asmaipada, may her e be stated to gether with the rules that apply to theweakening o f the base in the passive and intensive .
390 . Wh ile, gener ally speaking , th e terminatio ns o f the benedictive, passive, and
intensive exer cise a weakening influence o n the verbal base, th er e is o ne impo rtant , th o ugho nly appar ent, except io n to th is rule with r egar d to verbs ending in i t, 3
‘
u, Final
i i and“
S'
u,befo r e the 1{y o f the terminat io ns o f benedictive, pass ive, and intensive, ar e
lengthened (Pan . V I I . 4, but no t strengthened by Guna.
f? !chi , t o gather ; B en .M obil/cit; Pass .W chiycite; Int . QM chechiydte.
Final a fl is changed to ft r i . (Pan. V I I . 4,
31“
kri , t o do ; B en .W Pass . W kr iya’
te. (The Intensive has Q‘
s‘hfi
chekr tydte, Pan. V I I . 4 ,
In r o o ts,h owever , beginning with co njunct conso nants, final fl ri is actual ly str engthened
by Guna, and appear s as W ar . (Pan. V I I . 4, 29.
msmr i,to r emember ; B en .wafflsmarytft ; Pass .mfi smarydte; Int .mafi a sdsmarydte.
A l so In fi n, to go B en.W an/ (ft; Pass .w'
fi arydte; Int . “( Ti aardrydte.
Finalwe is changed to i t s , and, after lab ials, to s t ar .
El s tr t, to str etch ; B en.M a in/ft; Pass .W a in/ci te; Int .W ? testtrydte.
EM , to fil l ; B en. Rampant/ (ft; Pass . fi purydte; Int .m popurydte.
Exceptio ns . $56 18 changed to “ My .
Qfi‘
a, to l ie down ; (B en.W s‘ayydt do es no t o ccur , because th e verb Is A tmanepadin);
Pass .M i s‘ayyctte; Int .W } (Pan. V I I . 4 , 2 2 .
i i , after prepo sitio ns, do es no t lengthen the final 3“
z in th e benedictive .
i i : to 80 3 B en W ig/ (it butM samiyd'
t . (Pan . V I I . 4, 24 .
S i nk, to understand,after pr epo sitions, Is sh o rtened to K uh . (Pan. V II . 4, 23 .
B en.W a in/cit Pass .m ukya’
te .
B en.W samuhydft; Pass .W samukydte.
391 . The fo ll owing r o o ts may o r may no t dr o p their final i n, and then length en the
preceding vowel . (Pan. V I . 4,
W j an, to beget ; W j anycft Pass .d ya’
te o r fi j anydte;
Int .mam? j afij anyci te.
“ sun, to o btain; B en. 1111 11 36t o r “ fl “anyd
’t Pass.
“
81W sdycite o rm eanya’
te;
Int . m sasdya’
te o r W samsanya’
te.
m khan, t o dig , B en.m khaydt o r m khanyd'
t Pas s. smfi khciydte o r W
khanyate; Int . ans-m? chakhd
’
ya’
te or“arm chafikkanycite.
In the passive o nly, fi tan,t o str etch ; B en .W tanyd
‘t; Pass . tciydte o r m
tunga’
te; Int. Tim tantanya’
te.
392 . A cco rding to a general rule, r o o ts ending in ai and fi 0 change th eir final
diphth o ng in the general tenses into ”HT4 .
‘El dhyai, W } dhydya’
te. Ro o ts ending in
WTd'
r etain it : TN pd, W ITpéga’
te,h e is pr o tected . B ut th e fo ll owing r o o ts change th eir
final vowel into i t in the passive.
and intensive ; into E e in the benedictive Pan ; and keepit unchanged befo r e gerundial 1: ya. (Pan. V I . 4 , 66, 67,
1 98 PA SS IVE . 55396
fr om “ sw ans, Part . B ET. sr astcfk, Pass .M sr asydte, B en.W W asg/dt, Ger .msr astvcf, Int .m sanisr asya
’
te, A OL c sr asat; fr om fi tm fij , B en .W r ajydt,Pass . t amr ajya
’
te,Part . ( 353 r aktdlz, Ger . r aktvtf (o r W Tr aizktvd, Pan . V I . 4 ,
396 . W ith r egar d to the benedictive Atm . see th e gener al r ules as to
the str engthening o f th e base, 344, and par ticular ly 348 seq . Remember
,
that if the benedi ctive Atm . do es no t take intermediate 3 i,penul timate i,
3 u, a ri ar e l eft unchanged, Wher eas in o th er str ength ening tenses they take
Guna Final “
3 fl ,to o
,r emains unchanged, and becomes £5 fr ,
o r , after labials, avgdr . W kship, to th r ow, W lcships fyci ; 11pré
‘
,to fill
,
s ir shiyci .
I .w budhydsam
2 . 32m: budhydk
m budfiydt
x . fifinflubodhiské'
yd M bodhishima’
hi
2 . fi fira‘m: bo dhishishghdza W e}bo dhishidhvdm
s‘rf
‘
vfi s bo dkisht’
skta’
fi finfiq bod/zishi rdn
C H A PTE R XV .
PA SS IVE .
397. The passive takes the term inatio ns o f the fitmanepada.
Specia l Tenses of the Passive.
398. Th e pr esent, imper fect, Optative, and imperative o f the passive ar e
fo rmed by adding 11 yd to th e r o o t . This uya is added in the same manner
as it is in the D iv verbs,so th at the A tmanepada o f D iv verbs is in all
r espects (except in th e accent) identical with the passive .
fitm .m ndhyate, he binds Pass .
“
i f-fir nahycite, h e is bo und .
§ 399. Bases in “ as; (Chur , Caus . D enom . &c.) dr o p “ try befo r e“
1! ya o f the
pesewe.
bodha’
y, to make o ne know;M bo dk-ydte, he is made to know.
ckor dy, to steal ; fl cho r -ya’
te, h e is sto len.
Intensive bases ending in i l y r etain their fly, to which the”
Hg/a o f the pas s ive is added
with o ut any intermediate vowel .
W lowy, to cut much W ?! lo lziyycfte, he is cut much .
B enedictive.
PA RA SM A I PA D A .
3mm budhydsva
W budkytfstam
A
A TMA N E PA D A .
i tfim‘iwf
‘
g bo dhishivdhi
M arn i bo dhishiya’sthem
M bo dhishsydstem
40 1 , PA S S IVE . 1 99
Intensive bases ending inRy, preceded by a co nsonant, dro p their Ry.
W bebkidy, to sever ;W bebhidya’
te,it is sever ed .
m didki, to shine,w vent, to yearn,m 1 dar idr d
,to be po o r , dr o p their final vowel,
as usual .
m didhi,M didkycfte, it is l ightened I c it l ightens .
§ 40 0 . A s to the weakening o f the base, see the rules given fo r the
benedictive, 389 seq.
I
53 bhflyé
my}: a’
bhziye
W bhflycfvahe
m i bhz’
iyrfmake
Ixnpf . m afg dbhdya'
mahi
O pt . afimfg bluiyémaki ri fts-ai bhdyédkvam
Imp.sma? bhayd
’mahai was bhziyddhvam
Gener al Tenses of the Pass ive .
40 1 . In th e gener al tenses o f th e passrve, I t yd is dr o pt, so that, withcer tain exceptions to be mentio ned h er eafter , ther e is no di stincti o n betweenthe general tenses o f th e passrve and th o se o f th e Atmanepada. Th e "
c g/a o f
the passive is tr eated, in fact, like o ne o f the conjugatio nal clas s-marks
(vikar anas), wh ich ar e r etained in th e special tenses o nly, and it di ffer s
ther eby fr om the der ivative syl lables o f causat ive, des iderative, and intensiveVerbs
,whi ch ,with cer tain exceptio ns , r emain th r o ugh o ut bo th in th e special
and in th e gener al tenses .
Redup licated Perf ect .
Th e r edupli cated perfect is the same as in the Atmanepada.
Per iphr astic Perf ect .
The per iph r astic per fect is th e same as in th e A tmanepada, but the
auxil iary verbs W as and ti bial must be co nju g ated in the Atmanepada,
as wel l as q M .
Passive.
S IN GULAR .
2 . 3 .
1 11i bhaydse a ? bhflydte
W 2dbhdyathdli W dbhflyata
g3m : bhfiyéthdla {i nbhayna
m bhayasan m shaman
D UAL .
i i i : bhayéme {a bhflye’
te
mi ni a’
bhziyethdm was? dbhflyetdmwfimwi bhflyéydtlzdm M bhflyéydtdm
fi st? bhrZye’
thdm xfimi bhziyétém
PLURAL.
bhz’
iya’
dhve
200 PA SSIVE. 40 2
A o r ist .
40 2 . Verbs may be conjugated in the thr ee fo rm s o f th e fir st ao r ist
which admit o f A tmanepada, and wi th o ut differ ing fr om the par adigms givenabove, except in the th ird per son singular .
Th e seco nd ao r ist Atmanepada is no t to be u sed in a pur ely passive sense
403 . Inthe th ir d per s on singular a pecul iar fo rm has been fixed in thepassive
,ending in g i , and r equir ing Vriddhi o f final
, and Guna o f medial
vowel s (but“
a a is lengthened), fo llowed by one co nso nant .
Thu s,instead o fm dlavishza, we find
Fl l ’ S t Fo rm .
$1q adi ta, S eco nd Fo rm .
W adi /( sham, waist ades-i .
WW aghukshata, W agzih-i .
m a likskata, was; a leh-i . F o urth
331W adhu/cshata,
13 3W? adok-i .
m i adhikshata,
sfifg adeh- i .
404. Verbs ending in W d o r diphth ongs, take fly befo re the passive Q i .
at dd, snarl—"
q ada'
gi , inst ead o fsafes adi ta .
405 . Verbs ending inM ay (Chur , Caus . D enom . &c. dr o p fl ay befo re the passive3 z, th o ugh In the general tenses , after the dr o pping o f the passive 1!ya, the o riginalW ay
may reappear,i . e . th e A tm . may be used as passive.
M bo cflzay,m abo dki ; “ cho r ay,W ITacho r i ;m r dj ay,m arafj i .
In the o th er per so ns these verbs may eith er dr o p lE‘
l i a‘g/ o r r etain it, being co njugated ineither case after th e fir st fo rm o f the fir st ao rist :
m bhavay; wmfi fq abhdvishi, marti an abhdvi skyka’
lz, W abha‘
vi ; o r W flfilfi!
abhdvayishi , m m : abhdvayishtka'
lt ,m fa abha’
vi .
406. Intens ive bases in Ry add th e passive i i , with o ut Guna.
Int . fimbobhay,w as abobhfiyz’
.
Intensive bases ending in fly, preceded by a consonant , dr o p Ry, and refuse Guna.
Int .m bebhz‘
dy A o r . wi firf‘
aabebhidi .
D esiderative bases, likewise, r efuse Guna.
es .W bubo dhish; A o r . wga‘
tfiufa abubodhishi .
Th is wo uld fo l low if kar tar i extends to Pan. I I I . I , 54, 56 .
202 PA SS IVE. 4 1 1
Dual I . per s .mm a ldvi-shvahi,by th e side o f W a le
‘
tai—shvah i .
2 . W W a ldvi-shdthdm, W W a lc‘
ivi-shdthc’
im.
3 . W a ldvi-shci tcini , W m? a l itai - shdtdm.
Plur . I . per s .wa rfamf‘
g a ldvi-shmahi , by th e side o f m fawfg a ldvi-shmahi .
2 . W as}a ldvi-ahnam o r W alc‘
ivi -dho om o r0
g.
3 . m a letai—shata , m a ldvi -shata .
Fu t .m ldvi-shye, by the side o f lc‘
ivi -shye.
Co nd . m a lavi-shy‘
e, mafia a ldvi-shye.
Per . Fut . mamalas t-take, m lc‘
ivi - tdhe.
B en . B TW lc’
ivi-sh iya , E‘Fa'tflwlt
‘
ini—sh iy’
a .
Fr om Fa ch i , to gather , gr d per s . s ing . A o r . Pass . fi rfix achagi ; hence
A o r . W filfi l achdyishi, besides Wail? acheshi,&c.
Fut . mfixfi cha'
yishye, cheshye.
Cond. W achdyishye, T ara acheshye.
Per . Fut . ‘m'fimfi eha'
yi tdhe, Q'
afi chetdhe.
B en. m chdyish i'
ya, Q lfl'
fl chesh i'
ya .
Fr om wyhra, to smell, gr d per s . s ing . A o r . Pass . W fir aghr ciyi ; hence
A o r . W aghr dyishi , besides m aghr ds i .
Fut . uTfirQ ghr dyishye, E ttajghr dsye.
Co nd . W aghr dyishye, m aghr dsye.
Per . Fut. mfixmi' ghr dyi tdh e, um? ghr dtdhe .
B en.
‘
flTfifl fi'
q ghr dyish iya, m ghr ds z‘
ya .
Fr om as!dhuri , to hur t , grd per s . S'
Ing . A o r . Pass .W adhvdr i ; hence
A o r . W adhvci r ishi,besides waf er adhvrishi o r W EI adhvdr ishi .
Fut . dhvdr ishye, wfifi dhv’
c‘
i r ishye.
Pe r . Fut . Wm dhvci r itc’
ihe, tain? dhuc‘
i r tdhe .
B en.wfctfiu dhva'
r ish i'
ya, W dhvrish iya o rW dhvc‘
i r i sh fya’“
F r om a han,to kill
, gr d pers . sing . A o r . Pass . fl uff"
? agha'
ni ; henceA o r . W f’a
’f’fl aghdnishi , besides (m filfil avaa’
hishi). Pan .V I . 4, 6 2 T.
Fut .
“Eff-1a ghdnishye, {F213 hanishy
'
e.
Per . Fut .m ghdni ta'
he, g in
-
Ehautahe.
B en . m ghc’
inish iya , (m i ! nadhishiya).
Fr om “
gs!dris, to see, gr d per s . sing . A o r . Pass . staff: adarsi hence
A o r . mfftffl adar éishi , besides m adrikshi .
Fut . affifi dar éishye, 3 15} dr akshye.
Per . Fut . f ilm? a’ar sitdhe, gwi dr ashtdhe.
en. fi rth dar sish iya, W driksh i'
ya .
S ee 332. 5
1' S iddh .
-Kaum . vo l . I I , p . 270 , seems to al l ow R FB akasi .
4 1 4 . PA RTICIPLES,GERUNDS
, A N D INFIN ITIVE . 203
Fr om Hgg r ah , to take, gr d per s . s ing. A o r . Pas s . m fg agr cih i ; hence
A o r . w rfzfil agr dhishi , besides W agr ah ishi .
Fut . urfigfi g r dhishye, £13115 gr ah ishye .
Per . Fut . mfgm'
i g r dhitdhe, M fg g r ahitdhe.
B en .mm gr dhish i’
ya, afi q‘h gr ahish i
'
ya .
Fr om (mt r amay, to deligh t, Caus . o f ( it r am, 3rd per s . s ing . A o r . Pas s .
ut fs ar ami o r waft! ar dmi ; h ence
A o r .mfi ffil ar amishi o r W flfi ar dmish i , besides m ar amayishi .
4 1 2 . Certain verbs o f an intransitive meaning take th e passive {i in the 3rd pers . sing .
A o r . Atm . Thus 3 3TH?! utpadgate (3rd per s . sing. present o f the Atmanepada o f a D iv
verb), h e ar ises , becomesm udapddi , he ar o se,he sprang Up; but it is regular in the
o ther perso ns,m udapatsdtdm, they two ar o se,&c . (Pan . I I I . I
,
4 1 3 . Other verbs o f an intransitive character take the same fo rm o ptio nally (Pand I I . I ,6 I )
W elt}; (M dipyate, he burns , D iv, m adipi o rm adipishta .
afl j an (31TH?!j dyate, h e is bo rn,he is, D iv, Atm . ; it canno t be fo rmed fr om W
(Hu, Pan ), to beget), G ET? aj ani o rm aj anishta .
“
3? t (33W?!budhyate, he is conscio us, D iv, fi fe abo dhi o rW abuddha .
(W pur ayati , he fil l s, m apur i o rW apzir ishga .
“ My (WWII tag/ate, he spr eads, B hu, Atm . ; r eally D iv fo rm o f Tan),m atdyi o r
m atdyishta .
W pydy (m pydyate, h e gr ows), W fil apydyi o rm apya'
yishta .
C H A P TE R XV I .
PA RTICIPLES, GERUNDS , A N D J N FIN ITIV E.
4 14 . The par ticiple o f th e pr esent Par asmaipada r etains the V ikar anas
o f the ten classes . It i s m o st easily fo rmed by taking the grd per s . plur . o f
the pr esent,and dr opp ing the final 3 i . Th is gives u s the Anga base, fr om
which the Pada and B ha base can be easily deduced acco r ding to gener al
rules Th e accent r emains in the par t iciple o n the same syl lablewhere it was in the gr d per s . plur . If the accent fall s on the last syl lableo f the par t icip le
,and if that par t ic iple do es not take a nasal , th en al l B ha
cases and the feminine suffix r eceive th e accent . (Pan. V I . 1,
Thus
“all N om . S . “31 A cc .want Instr .m &c.
bha’
vant bha’
van bha’
vantam bha’
vatd
m 367? m mtuda
'
nt tuddntam tudatd
m &c
d i'
vyantam
PA RTICIPLES,GERUNDS
,A N D INFINITIVE.
N om . S .W A cc.W Instr . a’mm &c.
cho r dyan cho r aiyantam cho rdyatd
M &c .
sunva’
nti sunna’
n sunvcintam sunvatcf
m &c
tanua'
nt tanvafn tanvdntam tanvatd’
shim &c
kr inafntam kr inatlf
m &c
ado’
nti ada’
ntam adatd
W I 84)
juhvati j u’
hvatam j zihvatd
W T&c
r undha’
nti r undha’
nt r undba’
u r undha’
ntam rundhattf
W Intens . m 1 84)
bdbhuvati bo’
bhuvat bo’
bhuvat bobhuvatam bobhuvatd
4 1 5 . The par t iciple o f the fu tur e 18 fo rmed o n the same principle .
afawfir wf'amw N om . s .wtawa A ccfi fw’
ni Instr .wfawmbhavishyanti bhavi shydnt bhavishyctn bhavishydntam bhavishyatcf
4 1 6 . The par t iciple o f the r eduplicated per fect may best be fo rmed by
taking the gr d per s . plur . o f th at tense . Th is c o r r espo nds, bo th in fo rm and
accent , with th e B ha base o f th e par t iciple,o nly th at the 11 3 , as it is always
fo l lowed by a vowel,is changed to i
tsh . Having th e B ha base, it is easy to
fo rm the Anga and Pada bases,acco rding to 204 . In fo rming the Anga
and Pada bases,it mu st be r emember ed
,
I . That r o o ts ending in a vowel , r esto r e th at vowel,which
,befo r e uh,
h ad been natur al ly ch anged into a semivowel .
2 . That,acco r ding to th e ru les o n intermediate 3 i , al l ve rbs wh ich , with o ut
co unting th e“
3 : uh, ar e m o no syl labic in th e gr d per s . plur .,inser t 3 i .
(S ee Necessary g i , § 338, 1 ; Optional 3 i , 55337,
grd P. Plur . Instr . S ing . N om . S ing . A cc. S ing .
was : 3 1 3m warsbabhumih babhuvusha
'
babhavdn babhuvdinsam
ning/22h ninyzisha’
ninivd'
insam
m3
tutudzih tutudu'
shd
didis h
cho r aydmdsu’
h
PARTICIPLES,GERUNDS
,A N D l N FIN ITIV E .
Fir st D ivisio n . Seco nd D ivisio n.
“in? bhcivaf nte— b-‘
fimm: bhciva ama'
nah ga l—ri sunv-dte— gfi m: sunn-dncih
gal? tuda-nte—
gqtrm: tudai manah
fiafi dwya-nte— ifialmfi . divya—mdnah W } tanv-ate— m . tanv-dncih
firm?! cho r dya-nte— ‘
éfim m: cho r dya-mdnah m M inu te—“
951m : hr in-ancik
Passw tudya nte—
gmm: tua’
ya manah“
saga ad—dte— m : ad—anah
bha'
vciya-ntefl m bhdvdya
-ma'
nah ag nj uhv-a te—
s uhv-anah
D es . gi fi bubhusha—nte—
gi flflm :bubh i'
isha-ma'
nah“
knit r audh—dt
Int . bodhziyd—nte— H
‘ngqm : bo bhzlyci
—ma'
nah
420 . Th e par ticiple o f th e futur e in th e Atmanepada is fo rmed by adding
an : mdnah in the same manner .
afa'
ufi bhavishyci—nte— wfi rwqm: bhavishyd
-mdnah
fifl fi neshyd—nte— fim neshyd
-mdnah
fiafi to tsycf—nte— Tfim a : to tsyci
-mdnah
was edhishyd-nte— zfixm m: edhishyci
-mdnah
§ 42L The par t iciples o f th e pr esent and fu tur e passive are fo rmed by
adding Fm: mcinah in th e same manner .
wasmagna te—
am : bhu'
yci-mdnah mfauifi— q m m
gu ifibudhyci-nte— ‘
gum zbudhyci—mdnah bhdvishyd
—nte— bhdvishyd—mdnah
l if t?! s ti’
lya-nte— EQJW : s tziyd
—mdnah W — HTFQW W :
f-
fifi kr iyci-nte— q flm: kr iyd—mdnah
nayishyd—nte— ndyishgi
ci-mdnah
bha'
vyci—nte m : bhcivydW (4ndll
O r like the Par t . Fut . A tm .
The Past Par ticiple Pass ive in H: tab and the Ger und in m tvfii.
422 . Th e past par ticiple passive i s fo rmed by adding“
a: tah o r a : nah
to the r o o t . t i, $3 : kr i tah, do ne, masc . 311 1 Mini , fem.; 3m hr i tcim,
neut . Q M, Ti a“ l iluah, cut .
Th is terminatio n a ta is, as we saw, m o st Oppo sed to th e insertion o f inter
mediate 3 i, so much so that verbs wh ich may fo rm any o ne general tense
with o r with o ut 3 i, always fo rm their past par ticiple with o ut it . Th e numbero f verbs which mu st inser t g i befo r e 71
“
ta is very small . 332, D .)Besides being aver se to th e inser tio n o f intermediate 3 i , the par ticipial
termination a ta, h aving always the Udatta, is o ne o f tho se whi ch have a
tendency to weaken verbal bases . (S ee 344 )
§ 423 . The gerund o f simpl e verbs is fo rmed by adding RT turf to the
r o o t .“
5 kr i , m kr i tval,h aving do ne . 1 pu, gm putvd o r , fr om Eagpun,
wh a rpavitval, h aving pu r ified .
The ru les as to the insert io n o f th e interm edi ate g i befo re m tad have
been given befo r e . W ith r egard to the str engthening o r weakening o f th e
430 . PARTICIPLES,GERUN DS
,A N D INFIN ITIVE . 207
base,the general r ule is that
“m tvd with o ut intermediate { i weakens , with
intermediate { i str engthens the r o o t (Pan. I . 2 , It always has th e
Udatta. In giving a few mo re special r ul es o n thi s po int,it will be co n
venient to take th e terminatio ns 71 ta and HTtvd to gether , as th ey ag r ee to
a gr eat extent , th o ugh no t alto geth er .
I .
“
112tab and HTtva’
, wi th intermediate i .
424 . If“
rt: tah takes intermediate 3 i , it may in certain verbs pr o duce Guna . In th is
case the Guna befo re an tvd 18 regular .
53 a, to l ie down,m sayitdh m s’
ayi tvd.
Fa g said,to sweat, E 1313 . sveditdh o r fern: svinndh ; fifizfi
'
l'
sveditvd.
fire mid, to be s o ft,w . medi tdh ; meditvd.
W Icshvid, to dr ip, fifi'
flk kshvedi tdh;m kshveditvdf.
a dhrish, to dare, vfia: dhar shi ta’
h; “F53 1 dhar shi tvd.
fl mrish, to bear , nf'
fiw: marshita’h (patient), (Pan . I . 2, 20) affirmmar shitvd.
apii , to pur ify, tT5577: pavitaih (Pan. 1 . 2, M pavi tvd, fr om fi pflh . S ee N O . 1 56 .
425 . Verbs with penultimate 3 a may o r may no t take Guna befo re "
tl ta with inter
mediate i,if th ey ar e
‘
used imper so nally.
fi dyut, t o shine, dyuti ta’
m o r Efifil'il'dyo ti tdm,it has been shining . (Pan. 1 . 2 ,
426 . If RTtvd takes intermediate i i , it r equir es, as a general rule, Guna (Pan . 1 . 2,
o r at al l events do es no t pr o duce any weakening O f th e base . ad m i t, t o exist, 3 55731
var ti tvd. W s r ams, to fal l, EFHHTsr amsi tvd (Pan . 1 . 2 , { pa ( i . e . 13: pun), to
pur ify, W pavi tvd (Pan . 1 . 2 ,
Verbs, h owever , beginning with conso nants, and ending in any single co nso nant exceptl l y o r i n, pr eceded by 3,
“
i i o r 3 5 ii, take Guna O ptional ly (Pan . I . 2, fi dyut, to
sh ine ,m m dyo ti tvd o rWETdyutitvd. The same O pt io n appl ies to a i r ish, to th ir st ;
Qi mr i sh;to beam ? Sl i ms , to attenuate (Pan . 2‘
IIfqfi Ttr ishitvd o r tar shi tvd.
427. Th o ugh taking intermediate 5 2, HTtvado es no t pr o duce Guna, but , if po ssible,weakens th e base, in S Q r ud, to cry, Rafi
"
!rudi tvd"(Pan. I . 2 , Fagaid, to know,
fflfifi'
l’
uidi tvd; fif i mush, to steal, gffl
'
fi"mushi tvd'
; 2Kg r ak, to take,TEETH
"
!grihi tvd'
; 313: mp2},
t o del igh t, fiffi l mr ‘iditvd (Pan . 1 . 2 , {Q mr id, to rub,m mr iditvd; W gadh, to
co ver , W yadhitvd; m kl is‘
, to hur t, W klis’
itvd'
; 7=f§ vad, t o Speak,m l
udi tvdl; 31{vas, t o dwel l,m ushi tvd.
428. Ro o ts ending inRth o r 1Qph, preceded by a nasal,may o r may no t dro p the
nasal befo r e HT tud (Pan . 1 . 2 , m gr anthitvd o rm g r athitvd, having twisted .
The same appl ies to th e r o o ts “ m uch, to ch eat, and Q‘
fl lunch, to pluck (Pan. 1 . 2 ,
Elfi fi l vanchi tvd o r vachitvd.
II . and m tva‘i, wi thout intermediate 3 i .
429. Ro o ts ending in nasal s l ength en their vowel befo r e i t tah and HTtad (Pan . v1 . 4 ,
W sam,to r est,W ’
s’
dntdh, Slim sdntvd.
M kr am t o step,may o r may no t lengthen its vowel befo r e 73 1 tva
'
(Pan. V I . 4 ,
m kr am,m 3 kr dntah
,mm kr dntvd o r aim kr ant'va ; al so m kr amitva .
430 . The fo l l owing r o o ts , ending In nasal s, dr o p th em befo r e 71" tah and HTtad. (Pan.
v1 . 4,
208 PA RTICIPLES,GERUNDS , A N D INFIN ITIVE . § 43 1
“ yam, to check,W 2yatdh, flfi 1 yatvd* “ r am, to spo r t,W r ata’
h,m i nted; “ 71am,
to bend, H’
H‘
natdh, am natmt a han, t o kil l, gmhata’
h, gm hatvd 11:19am,
g o , 71112 gata’
h , "HTgatvd; Iii i-( man, to th ink, an: “ can, to
ask ; Hi tan, t o str etch , W 2tata’
h, WETtatvd; and the o th er verbs o f the Tan clas s,
ending in i n.
N o te — O f th e same verbs th o se ending inan dr o p th e nasal befo r e the ger undial H yaand insert TU; mmpr amdtya (Pan. V I . 4 , th o se ending in 31m may o r may no t dr o pth e nasal befo r e the gerundial Tl ya; NW pr agdtya o r M pr aga
’
mya .
43 1 . The fo ll owing verbs dr o p final Fl a , and l ength en th e vowel .
FFUan, to bear , “
in?“j dtah, W j dtvd; N i san, t o o btain, am: sdtah, mansdtvd;
“ khan, to dig, W 2khdtah, W khdtvd.
I . Ro o ts ending In“
Q okh, o r“
i n, substitute and ai d . (Pan . V I . 4 , 19 .
W pr achh, to ask, pr i shtah WTpr i shtvd h div,to play, EEK dyi
’
inah,
W dyz’
itvd.
2 . Ro o ts ending In i r chh,o r {m} , dr o p their final co nso nant . (Pan . V I . 4 , 2 1 .
W mur chh, to faint, i h
‘
mi’
i r tah ; 3? turn, t o str ike, 1132 tii rnah .
432 . The fo llowing verbs change their"
i nwith the preceding o r fo ll owing vowel into
3 12. (Pan . V I . 4 ,
fl j var , t o ail, 1332j ii rnah, EES
I j flr tvd; i t! tvar , t o hasten ,
“
1132t'
IZrnah, 7235
1 tii r t'vd
fie—c
i v i c , to dry, 63”
sr iZtah, GE Tsr ii tvd; W av, to pr o tect , 3 3 2dtah, W dtvd
“man, to bind, 1fi 2 mutah, 1fi 1 mutvd.
§ 433 . Ro o ts ending in fia i substitute W d; fi dhyai, to meditate,mm: dhydtah,
W E Tdhydtvd . o r i f; figai , to sing ,7fifi
‘
2g i lah, n tvd. Final 2 e and WT6 , t o o ,
ar e changed t o i i ; mpd, to dr ink, tfl'
fl i pi tah,tfifi
‘
l p i tvd; adhe, to suck, W 2dhi tah,tfim dhitva .
434 . The fo ll owing r o o ts change th eir final vowel into 3 i .
i t do , to cut, few: di tah, fam dava (Paa vu . 4 , wh o,to finish , fan: S i tah, fem
s i tvd; mm, to m easure, fin : mi tah, fflfi‘
Imi tvd; W s thd, to stand,fem sthi tah,
farm sthi tvd; tn dint, to place, far: bi tah, far hi tvd (Pan . v1 1 . 4 , 3 1 M, to
leave (gin: hinah), fzfi'
l hitvd (Pan. V I I . 4,
435 . Sfis‘o , to sharpen, and chho , t o cut , substitute 3 i , o r take th e r egular W at.
sit a , firm: am o r W : s‘dtah, faint and o rm s‘dtvd (Pan . vn . 4 ,
436 . Exceptional fo rmsETdd, to g ive, fo rms 33 2dattah
‘
I‘
, W Tdattvd (Pan . V I I . 4 ,
m Sphdy, t o gr ow,fo rmsm 2sphi tah (Pan . V I . 1 ,
fi styai , t o cal l (with Itpr a), fo rmsm p r asti tah (Pan . V I . 1 , 23)andmafia: pr astimah
(Pan. V I I I . 2,
fi s‘yai, to cur dle, fo rmsm 2s‘iaah, and W s
’
i tah, co ld ; butm sams’ydnah, r o l led
up (Pan . V I . 1 , 24,
M pg/dz] , to gr ow,fo rms 1Tfifl 2p inah; but lumzpydnah after cer tain pr epo sitio ns (Pan .
V I . 1,
437. The verbswh ich take S ampr asarana befo r e 32 tahand FITtad have been ment io ned
S ee verbs with o ut intermediate i . 332 , 1 3 , and
1‘ A fter pr epo sitio ns ending in vowel s, ada may be dr o pt , and the final {i and 3 a o f a
pr epo sitio n l ength ened . m 2pr adattah, W 2pr attah; W sudattah,$82sz’
i ttah.
210 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS , A N D INFINITIVE . § 443
an indicato ry ‘Efi 0; fi bhuj (15 h bhaja, D hatupatha 28, to bend,3373 : Magnet/ft .
6 . Verbs beginning with a do uble consonant, one o f them being a sem ivowel,
and ending in i s! d, o r a e, 3 d i
, sh o , changeable to“
an d (Pan . V I I I . 2,
43) flg laz'
, ma: g ldnalz, faded. Except {3 dhyai, to meditate, um :
dhydtalz (Pan. V I I I . 2 , m khyd, to pr o claim , m : khydtalz. In
3‘
tr ai,to pr o tect
, mghr d, to smel l,the substitution is Optio nal ; amt .
tr dnalt o r an : tr dtalz (Pan. VI I I . 2,
7. Miscellaneou s par ticiples in “
a: nab : {i npdma lz, o nly if der ived fr om
Er: pdr , and then W ith an Optio nal fo rm afa r: pdm
’
tab (Pan . V I I . 2 ,
while the par ticiple o f 11pr i is said to be gi t pdr talz (Pan. V I I I . 2 ,
aim: ks/zinah, fr om far kshi , to waste ; W dydnalz, fr om fr et div, to
play, (no t to gamble, wher e it is a? dydtah)* m lagnalz, fr om am
lag ,to be in contact with (Pan. V I I . 2, als o fr om fi laj , to be
ashamed sfia“ éma li andma: éydnalz, co agul ated, butW : éitalz, co ld;
{tunbr ig/tab o r 311 : br im/ft , ash amed (Pan . VI I I . 2,
§ 443 . N ative gr ammar ians enumerate cer tain wor ds as part iciples wh ich , th o ugh bytheir meaning they may take th e place o f part iciples, are by their fo rmat io n t o be
c lassed as adject ives o r substantives rather than as par t icipl es . Thus m : pakvdlz, r ipe ;W 2.s‘ziskkali , dry (PanN I . I , W : kskdd z,weak ;N i kyis
'
dlz fihin;W h ipr astimdlz,
cr owded;Era: pkul ldlz, expanded ;W : kskivdlz, drunk ,&c .
444 . B y adding th e po ssessive suffix aq vat 1 87) to th e par t iciplesin H m and 11 na, a new par ticiple o f very comm o n o ccur r ence is fo rmed,being in fact a par ticiple per fect act ive . Thu s 31m: kri tdlz, do ne , becomes
7m kri tdvdn, o ne-wh o has do ne
,but gener ally u sed as a definite verb .
“
G
“
Gri m eu kagam kri tavdn, h e has made the mat ; o r in th e fem inine In
W sé kri tavati, and in the neuter W i ts-
( tat kr itavat. Th ey ar e r egu lar ly
de clined thr o ugh o ut l ike adject ives in “ vat .
Ger und in 2! ya .
5)445 . C ompo und ver bs , but no t verbs pr eceded by th e negative particlew a
,take 11 ya (with o ut th e accent), instead o f Fan tvd
'
. Thus, instead o f
m bhdtvd,we find Iii-331 sambhdfiya but infi rm aj i tvd, no t h aving co nquer ed.
446 . V erbs ending In a sh o r t vowel take“
a: tya. instead o f It ya . fa j r,
to co nquer, f i lm j i tva, h aving co nquer ed ; but fi f
'
v'm vzj z
’
tya . x!Mai , to
carry, him bhr i tvd ; but mmsambhr z’
tya, having co l lected . Except fa kshi ,which fo rmsm makshzya, having destr oyed (Pan. V I . 4 ,
Pan. VI I I . 2, 49,
‘
al lows fi dydna in al l senses o f the r o o t fa? div, except in that o f
gambling ; see D hatupatha 26, 1 . dydna and WW par idyzina, pained, come fr om
a [differ ent r o o t , fi'
i die , to pain, D hatupatha 33 , 5 1 .
453 . VERB AL A DJEC'I‘IV ES . 21 1
447. Causative bases with sh o rt penult imate vowel , keep the causat ive sufiix fl ay
befo re 11 ;/a (Pan . V I . 4 ,”
(firm saizyamdyati , m m sarigamdyya, having caused to
assemble . Otherwise the causative suffix is , as usual, dr o pt : M FRtdrdyati,W pr atdrya,having caused to advance. 1“t pr dpdyati fo rms WW prfl
'
pya and 1mm prdpdyya,
having caused to r each (Pan. V I . 4 ,
448. The verbs call ed 3 ghu 392 RTmd, to measur e, m stbd, to stand, m yd, to
sing o r to go , W pd, to dr ink o r to pr o tect, {TM , to leave, i i t o , to finish , take m d, not
i t‘
(Pan. V I . 4, f l do , to cut,W avaddya ;”
G!"stbd, “W masthdya. B ut “ pd,
to drink,may fo rmm pr apdya o r winp rapi
'
ya (sat ).
449. Verbs ending in Rm,which do no t admit o f intermediate 3 i , may o r may no t
dr o p their 31m. Ex . “ 12am, to bow, W mapdmya o r W p r aadtya; "fl yam, to go ,
m dgdmya o rm dgdtya. O ther verbs ending in nasal s , no t admitting o f intermed iate
{i , o r bel o nging to theTan class, always dr o p their final nasal . E x . ( Khan,W pr aha’
tya;
Ti tan, W pr ata’
tya H i khan and W j an fo rm W Icha’
nya o r W Ichdya, m j dnya
o r m jdya.
450 i Verbs ending In
Sar i change it to i t if , and, aft er labials, into fl ai r . Ex . fmfii
vi tirg/a, having cr o ssed , R1 11 sampurya, having fil led .
45 1 . Certain verbs ar e irr egular In no t taking S amprasarana. Thus awe, to weave,fo rms mm: pr avdya; WTjyd, t o fail , 3 1 1m upajyd
'
g/a; 6 eye, to cover ,warmpr avyd’
ya,
but after fift par i o ptional lyW par ivydya o r 1f rat?“par ivtl
ya (Pan. V I . I , 4 1
452 . S ome verbs change final { i and i i into“
5511 4. Thus ifi m, m mina
'ti,he
destr oys, and ffl mi,m mino’
ti, he th r ows, fo rm farm: nimd'
ya ; fl di , to destr oy,mupaddya a t It
”
, to melt, o ptio nal lyParasmvi ld'
ya o r farm vi liya (Pan vr . I , 50
C H A P T E R XV II.
VERBA L A D JEC'I‘IV ES .
Ver ba l A djectives in aw: tavyah (o r tavyah), W : aniyah, and it: yah
(o r yah and yah)
453 . Th ese verbal adjectives (cal led Kr i tya)co r r espond in meaning to the
Latin par ticiples in ndus,co nveying th e idea that the act io n expr essed by the
verbs o ugh t to be do ne o r will be do ne . aim : kar tavyah,m : kar apiyah,
Hilfi: kdryah i , faciendus . E x . vim “
6553 1: dharmas wag/d kar tavyah, r ightis to be done by th ee .
1‘ Ver sus memo r ial is o f these verbs : (w z
’
faq errnW l 773 W mW W “3WWI A no th er suffix fo r fo rming verbal adject ives is el imah, wh ich is, however , o f
rare o ccur r ence ; fi pach, to co ok, W W mm. pachel imd mdshdh, beans fit to co ok ;
ffi ffi fl‘
bhidel imah,br ickle, fragile . (Pan. I I I . I var t .)
E 6 2
212 VERBA L A DJECTIVES . i 454
454. In o r der to fo rm the adjective in m : tavyah, take th e per iphr asticfutur e
,and instead o f m id put HER tavyah
Thus {I dd, to give W Tddtd
figai, to sing mmgdid
fa'
j i , to co nquer sl'
fi'
Tj etd
i bhu, to be“
65 kr i, to do minkar ta
i jfl , to gr ow o ld W j ar‘
itd
mkshvedi td
m 2ddta’
vyah
mm : gdtavyah
W j etavyah
W 2kar tavyah
W 112ddnij/ah
t avi td “m 2bhavi tavyah t avaniyah
m har aniyah
W 2j ar itavyah W 112j ar aaiyah
asfmmkshveditavyah
fies ta:kshvedaniyah
31 5m , to know zfifim bo dhitd W ho dhi tavyahW bo dhaniyah
Tflkr ish, to draw 35§To rm 1 m 2o rm 2 fi m‘w‘
karshaniyah
gia kuch“,to squeezeW kuchi td W kuchi tavyah W 2kuchaniyah
fii 'gmih, to sprinkl e NETmedhci3111gam, to go "HTganté
w dris‘, to see m dr ashgd
é'
ETdan'
zshtd
Caus.M bhdvay, to
cause to be
D eam bubhdsh, to
wish to be
Int .what!bobhziy
Int .wbobhd
bobhavi td
. fi'finrbebhidybebhidi td
bhdvayi tavyah
mmbubhi
’
ishitavyah
sham-a:
bobhiiyi tavyah
affirm :
bobhavi tavyah
bebhidi tavyah
umbhdvaniyah
31mbubhiishaqzi
'
yah
shaw l :
bo bhziyaniyah
W e:
bobhavaniyah
star—fin“
.
bebhidaniyah
bubhdshyah
bobhiiyyah
bo bhavyah
bebhidyah
In o rder to fo rm th e adjective in W : aniyah, it is
sufficient to take th e r o o t as it appear s befo r e Hal : tavyah, om itt ing, h owever ,intermediate Q i , and putting m aniyah instead . Guna-vowels befo r em d a iyah have, o f co ur se, th e semivowel fo r th eir final element , and
th er e can be no o ccasion fo r th e interm ediate Q i . Th e“
a l l ay o f the
c au sative and th e 11y after co nso nant s o f intensives and o th er der ivative
Verbs ar e , as usual , r ejected . fi budh,‘
afivufa bo dhayati , M badhani
yak; firebhid, saws bebhidyate, am bebhidaniyah.
456 . In o r der to fo rm th e adj ective in tr. yah (m ayat , &c .) it is
1 kar shid o r kr ashyd.2 kar shtavyah o r kr ashtavyah.
3456. 3
4 N ever takes Guna 345, no te), except befo r e terminatio ns wh ich have g( ii o r Q it .
Th is terminatio n isW ag/ at .
21 4 VERB A L A DJECTIVES . 4552
457. The fo l lowing ar e a few derivatives in 112yah, fo rmed against the general rules :
{Kguh, to h ide, may fo rm {1312guhyah o r wheng o hyahf(Pan . I I I . I
,1 09, Kas
'
ika) “flash,
to ch er ish , v 2j ushyah; Hi g r ak, to take, W 2gri hyah, after Wffl pr ati and “Hf“
api ;ER: vad, to speak, W 2udyah, in compo sitio n ( Pan. I I I . I , I 06; I I 4 . avi an
am br ahmo dyd kathd, a sto ry to ld by a Brahman); to be, {11 bhdya, in
compo sition (Pan. I I I . I , 1 07.W EE!Tfil‘
2br ahmabhdyamgatah, arr ived at Brahmah o o d)SITEs
’
ds, t o rule, “ 2s’
ishyalz, pupil .W e find Kt inserted befo re 112yah, in anal ogy to the ger unds in
1!ya, in th e fo l lowing
V erbs :
5 i , t o go , {W2i tyah; q stu, t o pr ais e, 13m: stutyah; fi vri , t o ch o o se, 517112vfl tyah
g dri , t o r egar d, W 2drityah; q bhg'i, to bear , ”
017112bhri tyah; q kri , to do ,wkr i tyah. B ut many o f th ese fo rms are o nly used in certain senses
,and must no t be
co nsider ed as supplanting th e r egular verbal adjectives . Thus {1312guhyah and
m : go hyah bo th o ccur ;$6 2duhyah and$312do bgah, &c .
458. Verbs ending in“
i ch o r i j change their final co nso nant into 35k o r y if the
f o llowing 11 ya (nyat) r equires th e length ening o f the vowel . “fl pach, W pdkyam; flbhaj , to enjoy, firm bhogyam, butm bhoj yam, what is to be eaten (Pan. V I I . 3 ,
Ther e are, h owever , several exceptions . Verbs beginning with a guttural do no t admit
th e substitutio n o f guttural s . Likewise the fo ll owing verbs : W yaj , W i g/deli , “ r uck,
m pr avach, 3.
1K ri ch, W tyaj , fi pdj , fi aj , a vr aj , 33
vafich (to go). Thus
W pdj yam (Prakriya-Kaumudi , p . 55 b).
Infinitive in fitum .
§ 459. The infinit ive is fo rmed by adding j tum,which has no accent .
The base has the same fo rm as befo r e the 711 id o f the per iph rastic futur e,o r
befo r e the am: tdvyah o f the verbal adjective.
“
air budh , fi fug bo’
dhitum.
(S ee E x . 3pm35g‘
a‘
s'
rfir krishnam dr ashtum vr aj ati, he go es to see
Krishna ; i t? Ema“. bhoktum kdlah, it is time to eat .
Ver ba l A dver b.
460 . B y means o f the unaccentuated suffix ‘
szi am, wh ich , as a gener al
ru le,is added to th at fo rm wh ich th e verb assumes befo r e th e passive g i
(3r d p'
er s . sing. ao r . pass ., (5 a verbal adverb i s fo rmed . Fr om 53 bhuj,
to eat,ififi bhq
’
jam ; fr om mpd, to dr ink, trm’
pdyam. E x . an} &fivi emf-II
agr e bhoj am vr aj a ti , having fir st eaten,h e go es . Th is verbal adverb is mo st
fr equently u sed twice o ver . E x . ihsi t-fi'
fl'
z!w bhdiam bhoj am vr aj ati , h avingeaten and eaten
,he go es (Pan. I I I . 4, It is l ikewise used at the end o f
co mpo unds ;m dvaidhanzkdr am, having divided ; fi ‘mt uchchaihkdr am,
l o udly.
46 2 . CA USA 'I‘IV E vsnss . 21 5
C H A PT E R XV I II .
CA USA 'I‘IV E vs s ss.
46 1 . S imple r o o ts ar e ch anged into causal bases by Guna o r V riddh i
o f their r adical vo wel , and by the add itio n o f a final g i . The r o o t is then
tr eated as fo ll owing the B hfi class , so that {i appear s in the special tenses as13 11 aya . Thus &
‘Lbhzi bec omes mfa oheim’
and W fir bhdvdyati , he causes tobe ; H budh becomes f tflt bo dhi and M bo d/zciyati , he causes to kno w.
The accent is o n th e cf o f dya.
462 . The r ules acco rding to wh ich the vowel takes either Guna o r Vriddhi are as
fo ll ows :
I . Final {i and i f,“
i n and 3 12, Q pi and fl f i take Vriddhi .
Thus fin smi, t o laugh ,M m dyayati , he makes laugh .
=fim’
, to l ead, awnfirnd'
yayati , he causes to lead .
g p lu, to swim,M p la
‘
vayati , he makes swim .
i bhzz, t o be,m afia bhc’
z’
vayati , he causes to be.
j Igri , t o make,W kdr ayati , he causes to make.
TM, t o scatter , 3m c r ayati , h e causes t o scatter .
2 . Medial Q i , 3 a, i n,E li , fo llowed by a single co nsonant , take Guna ; fl fl beco me s
Thus figmid , to know,M eedayati, he makes know.
326mm, to know, a’mfia bodkayati , h e makes know.
“
i v to cut, fl ifi'
fl fil kar tayati , he causes to cut .
mkfip, to be able,m kalpayati , h e r ender s fit .
3 . Medial $1 a fo llowed by a single co nsonant is l ength ened, but th er e ar e many excepti o ns .
RE;sad, to sit,W scfdayati , he sets .
“pat, to fall , W fil‘pdtayati , he fell s .
Except io nsI . Mo st verbs ending in 2a
‘
Efl i am do no t lengthen their vowel
1l’l‘i gam, to go , W f‘
fl‘
gamayati , he makes go .
M kr am, to str ide,m kr amayat i, he causes to str ide.
Verbs inmam wh ich do lengthen the vowel are ,
fl kam, t o desir e, W 5 kdmayate, h e desires ; Caus . m lcdmayati , he makes
desir e.
“ am, to mo ve ,W amati, he moves ; Caus . W d'
mayati , h e makes move .
vi“( chasmto eat, W fil‘ chamati , he eats Caus . wmufa chdmayati , he makes eat .
ms‘am, if it means to see, M FR s
’
cimyati , h e sees ; Caus .m f’a s
'
dmayati, he shows ;
but W fil s‘amayati, he qu iets .
Wi g/am, unl ess it means to eat ,W yachchhati; Caus .W ydmayati, h e ext ends ;but mmfir yamayati , he feeds .
21 6 CA USA TIVE VERBS . 462
3 1 1 mm,t o bend, o ptio nal ly lengthens its vowel if it is used with out a prepo sitio n ;
7mm? na’
mayati o r mafia namag/ atz’
,he bends . If pr eceded by a pr epo sit io n, the
vowel always o ugh t to r emain sh o rt (D h . P. 19,
“ cam, to vomit , o ptio nal ly lengthens its vowel if it is used with o ut a pr epo sitio n ;EI
'
T‘
Fl'
l lfii fvcimayati o r aunt'
s vamayat i, he makes vomit . If pr eceded by a pr epo sition,the vowel always o ugh t to r emain sh o rt (D h . P. 19, 67)
II . A class o f verbs co llected by native grammar ians,and beginning w
ith i f? gha;(D h . P
1 9, do no t lengthen th eir vowel . Th e same verbs may o ptio nal ly r etain th eir sh o rt
vowel in the 3r d per s . s ing . ao r ist o f the causat ive pass ive The fo l l owing list
co ntains the mo r e impo rtant am o ng th ese verbs
CAU S AT IVE .
Ro o t . 3 ta Pers . S ing . Pr es . Par . 3rd Per s. S ing . A o r . Passive .
I .11? ghat, to str ive m ghagayati
2 .m cyath, to fear amufir vyatbayati snafu o r W avyc‘ithi
3 .W pr ath, to be famo u s m fl? pr athayati wafer o r W apr iitki
4 . HQmr ad, t o r ub m ffl mr adayati m o r W amrgdi
5 . M kr ap,t o pity m kr apayati “ fix o rW akr c
‘
ipi
6 . HQ tvar , to hur ry m fir tvar ayati W o r W atvdr i
7. fl jvar , to burnwith fever W fi? j var ayati “Ra ft o rm ajvcir i
8. a? nut, to dance W nagayati m o r w f‘
z anci
gi
9.W s’
r ath, t o kill s‘r athayati m o rm as
‘rgthi
1 0 . “ can, to act'
l‘
um firp r avanayati m o r W p rdvd’
ni
fi jval , t o shine'
l' m t lfil pr ajvalayati m o rW prdj vgli
F!smri , to r egr et 8 1a smar ayati W m M asmdr i
1 3 . dr i , to r espect , (no t to tear) W E dar ayati waft o rm adcir i
1 4 . an5r d, to bo il m ufir .s‘r apayati snafu o r W e as
‘rgpi
1 5 .mj fia'
,to slay, to please, to M j fiapayati m o r “ If“aj fi
’
cipi
sharpen t o per ceive1 6 . “B;cha l, to tremble Wm chalayati m o r m fg ackc
‘ili
1 7. figmad, to r ejo ice,&c. “Ti ff?!madayati m o r M fr} amaidi
I 8. d vanfio so und, t o r ing Wm dhvanayati W o r W IPE adhvgni
19.m dal , to out w dalayati (o ptio nal) W o rm adgli
20 .W eal,to cover W va layati (o ptio nal) W h o rm avgli
M skhal, t o dr o p manta skha layati (o ptio nal) W C 1'm askha li
“ tr ap ,to be ashamed aunts tr apayati W O rm atr api
23 .akshai , to wane W fil kshapayati w t! o rm akshapi
D hatupatha a s: g as as: as? mam (firs) (wag-35313 111196 3
W m W W W ). It seems indeed that th e verbs with o ut pr epo s itio nso nly, ar e o ptio nal ly mi t (i . e. sh o rt-voweled), while with pr epo sitio ns th ey ar e mit
,and
no th ing el se. S ee, h owever , Co lebr o oke, S anskr it Grammar , p . 3 1 7, no te .
1“ \V ith o ut a pr epo sitio n,
and o ptional ly with a pr epo sitio n. S ee no te
2182 CAUSATIVE VERBS . 463
6 . chi , to co ll ect, fwfilfil‘ chiao ti ; Cau s . mm chdpayati , o r r egular ly
W chdyayati , h e cau ses to co llect . (Pan . V I . 1 ,
7 . a”: chho , to cut, mfir chhyati ; Caus . m irth chhdyayati , he causes to cut.
8. 5m!jagg’ i, t o be awake, j dgar t i; Caus .W j dgar ayati , h e r o uses .
faji, to co nquer , i nfaj ayati Caus . c ipayati , h e causes to conquer .
aft dar idr d,to
’
be po o r,m dar idr dti ; Caus . aft
-
{qfii dar idr ayati ,
h e makes po o r .
g‘hfid idhi , to sh ined fifi d idh ite; C au s .e
‘iw ffi didhayati , he causes to sh ine.
a dm it,to sin
,dashyati Cau s .W K ddshayati , he cau ses to sin ;
al so fiflufir do shayati , he dem o r al izes . (Pan. V I . 4 ,
I 3 .
IAt zZ,to sh ake ,
‘tf fifir dhzino ti ; Caus .W dhdnayati , h e causes to shake.
14 . to dr ink, fimfirp ibati ; Caus . m fapdyayati, h e cau ses to dr ink ;al so fipai , tn
‘
t rfh pdyati , to be dry .
1 5 .Inpd, to pr o tect, mfapdti ; Cau s . m fii palayati , h e pr o tects .
I 6 . Iflpr i , to l o ve, M minati Cau s . Ifim fi pr inayati , h e del igh ts .
I 7. fi bhr ajy’
, t o r o ast, qa
‘
fir bhrijiati Cau s . m bhr aj jayati, he makes
r o ast,o r tré ufit bharj jayati , fr om R bhr ij .
1 8. &fi bhi,to fear , fifiIfiTbibheti ; Cau s . urmfi bhdpayate o r xfimfi bli ishayate,
h e fi'igh tens ; al so r egu lar ly m ufi! bhdyayati . (Panw l . 1,
fit mi, to thr ow, firm mino ti,and fitmi, to destr oy, fia
'mfir minati , fo rm
their Cau s . l ike Inmd.
20 . fi r i,to flow, o r to go , fifi r ig/ate; Csu s .m r epayati , he makes flow.
2 1 .
“
S i r ah,to gr ow, figfit r ahati ; Caus . fig
‘
qfir r ohayati ,“
Em'
qfir r opayati,
h e cau ses t o gr ow. (Pan . V 1 1 . 3 ,
22 . to adher e,fafl
'
lf'
fl l ina’
ti andwi th l iya l e; C au s a‘hmfir l inayati ,m fil
ldpayati , andm ldyayati ; and,i f th e r o o t takes th e fo rm 8 1 Id, also
M idlayatiwanwu . Th emeaningvar ies ;see Pan .v1 . 5 1 .
23 . anad, to blow,Enfii vci ti ; Cau s . 31m vdj ayati , if it m eans h e shakes .
‘
rfi vi,to o btain
,Cau s .
“
énqufi-r vdpayati o r m qfa sayaga l i , if it
means to make co nceive . (Pan . V I . 1 , 5
25 . E: ac, to weave, Emfir vayati ; Cau s .W vdyayati , he cau ses to weave .
26 .313? vevi, to co nceive, ves ite; Cau s . aw fit vevayati .
27. Q vye, to cover , amfirvyayati ; Caus .v dyayati , h e cau ses to cover .
28. 3? vl i’
,to ch o o se
, fgfi‘
lfi vlindti ; Cau s .gm vlepayati , h e cau ses to ch o o se.
29. mgsad, t o fal l , m’
hfir s’
iyate; Cau s . sm fit satayati , he fel ls ;
it means to move . (Pfia I . 3 ,
30 . sh so , to sharpen, snf
'
fi éyati; Cau s .mu'
qffi édyayati, he causes to
3 1 . F811sidh , to succeed, fewf‘
a s idhyati Caus . 111w sa'
dhayati , h e pbut atmfit sedhayati , h e per fo rms sacr ed acts .
32. a}so , to destr oy, Fi fi syati Caus .m fif sciyayati, h e causes to
466 . CA USATIVE VEB B S . 219
33 . Egg sphur , to sparkle, w whur ati ; Caus . m sphcir ayati and
Efimfir sphor ayati , h e makes sparkle .
34. m sphdy, to gr ow, m i sphc‘
iyate; Caus .m sphcivayati, he causesto gr ow.
35 . fansmi, to smile, m ? smagate; Caus .m smdpayate, h e asto nishes;
also m fit smdyayati, h e cau ses a smile by so mething . (Panw l . I,
36 . g? kr i, to be ashamed,fwfifil j ihr eti Caus .m hr epayati , he makes
ashamed . (Pan. V 1 1 . 3 ,
37. i‘ hve
,to cal l
,m hvayati ; Caus .m hvdyayati , he cau ses to cal l .
38. a han, to kill , i f?!hanti; Caus . m fir ghdtayati, h e causes to kill .
464. A s cau sat ive verbs ar e co njugated exactly l ike verbs o f the Chur
class, ther e is no necessity fo r giving h er e a complete paradigm . Like Chur
verbs th ey r etain m ay th r o ugh o ut, except in the r eduplicated ao r ist and
th e benedict ive Par asmaipada ; and th ey fo rm th e perfect periphr ast ical ly.
The o nly difficul ty in causative verbs is th e fo rmatio n o f their bases,and the
fo rmation o f th e ao r ist . Thu s q kri , as causative, fo rm s Pr es . Par . and fitm .
m ,
(a; kar agati ,-te ; Impf .m ,
°a, ahdr ayat, -ta ; O pt .m ,
°71,
har ayet,-ta ; Imp. 3 1mg,
°a'i, kar ayatu,
- tdm Red. Per f. m ,
Ofi ,
hdr aydfichakdr a,-chalcr e A o r .
“
am ,0a, ach ikar at, -ta ; Fut.
m ,
°fi, kdr ayishyati , -te; Co nd .m ,071, alca
'
r ayishyat,-ta ;
Per . Fut .m ha'
r ayi td; B en .W ham/cit W e kdr ayish ishta .
465 . If a causat ive verb has to be u sed in the passive,way is dr o pt
but th e r o o t r emains the same as it wo uld have been withw ay . Hence Pr es .
mfi hdryate, h e is made to do ; fiufi Mpg/ate, fr om ( gr ah, h e is made to
gr ow. The imperfect , Optative, and imperative ar e fo rmed r egular ly. The
per fect is per iphr astic with th e auxiliary verbs in the A tmanepada.
§ 466 . In the gener al tenses, h owever , wher e the It ya o f the pass ivedi sappear s the cau sative 1enr ay may o r may no t r eappear
,and we
thus get two fo rms th r o ugh o ut (see Co lebr o o ke, p . 1 98, no te)
Fut . mafiahha'
vayishye o r “Tfaa bhdvishye.
Co nd.m abha'
vayishye o r W abhdvishye.
Per . Fut .mm bha'
vayi tcihe o r mfawfg bhdvi tdhe.
B en . W W bhdvayish iya o r w i th bhdvish iya.
Fir st A o r . I . 1 . p .m abhdvayishi o r W fi fq abhdvishi .
2 . p .m : abhdvayishyhdh o r s ham : abhdvishflidh.
3 . p .m fa abhoivi .
220 DES IDERATIVE vas es. 467
C H A P T E R XIX .
DES IDERA TIVE VERBS .
§ 467. Desider ative bases ar e fo rmed by r eduplicatio n,the pecul iar ities
o f wh ich will have to be tr eated separ ately, and by adding.. t( s to the r o o t .
Thus fr om i bhd, to be,w bdbhdsh,to wish to be . The accent is on the
r edupl icative syllable .
§ 468. These new bases are co njugated like Tud r o o ts .
"
gm babhd
shdmi, 3 31W bubhdshasi,
‘
gi-pi ffl bubhdshati , 311m : bubhdshdvah, &c .
469. Th e r o o ts whi ch take th e inte rm ediate if i have been given befo r e
33 1 , as well as th o se wh ich take intermediate i i . Thu s fr om fifgvid,to know, W evividish, to wish t o kno w; from q i r i, to cr o ss, fmrft fl i i tar ish
o r fimfi trti tar ish, to wish to cr o ss .
470 . A s a general rule, th o ugh l iable to exceptio ns,it may be stated that bases ending
in o ne conso nant may be str ength ened by Guna, if th ey take th e intermediate i i . Thus
fi budh fo rmsW babo dhishati ; f'
g’
fl div,m didevishati : al so“
Thr i ,wchikar ishati ; E dr i ,w didar ishati . B ut fur;bhi d, D es . fi rflmfi bibhi tsati (Pan. 1 .
2, {It guh, W j ughukshati (Pan. V I I . 2 , In fact , no Guna with o ut intermediate i .
471 . B ut ther e ar e impo rtant exceptio ns . In many cases the base o f the desiderat iveis neith er str engthened no r weakened , 6 ? r ad, W r urudishati . Other bases maybe str ength ened o pt io nal ly; a dyat, W W didyatishate o r W “ didyo tishate.
Certain bases wh ich do no t take intermediate 3 z ar e actual ly weakened ; “ swap ,Wsushupsati .
1 . Verbs which do no t take Guna, tho ugh th ey have intermediate 3 i .
g r ad, t o cry,“
EFFE‘
EIfiI rur udishati ; figvid, to know, fi fflfifi ffl vividishati; § fl\mush
,
to steal ,W mumushishati .
2 . Verbs wh ich may o r may no t take Guna, th ough they have intermediate i i .Verbs beginning with co nso nants, and ending in any single co nso nant, except fly o r
“
i v,and having
-
{i o r“
3 u fo r their vowe l . (Pan. 1 . 2 ,
“ dc/a t, fay-«WEdidyut ishate o r fqa
’tfimi didyo ti shate.
Ii i div, fiaffl'
fifil didevisha ti o r , with o ut Q i , gaf f ?! dudydshati (Pan. V I I . 2 , 49)
a vr i t, fEFéI'fiQ
IflTI vivar tishate o rw vivr i tsat i .
3 . Verbs ending In 3°
i o r 3 a, no t taking intermediate 3°
2, length en their vowel ; final fl r i
and £ 74 become W , and, after labial s, W ar . (Pan. V I . 4, 1 6 .
fl y ,to conquer , fflTfifl fif j igi shati ; 3 ya , to mix ,W yuyushati .
7 hr i , to do , fiTEIil’
fl'FH chiki r shati ; H tr i , to cr o ss
,W fifil ti ti r shati .
3!mr i , to die,W fi mumur shati ; 1
1pm to fill , Hgfifil pupur shati.
If, h owever , they take intermediate 3°
i , th ey l ikewise take Guna.
fen smi,to smile
,m si smayi shate; g pd, to pur ify,W pipavishate;71914, to
swal low, W j igar ishati ; g dr i , to r espect,W didar i shate.
222 DES IDERATIVE VERBS . 473
m1badh,w bibhatsate,he l o athes . W ddn
,W diddfii s ate,h e straightens .
m ain,m s‘isdmsate, he sharpens .
Redup lication in D esider atives .
§ 473 . Besides the general r ules o f r edupl ication given in 30 2—3 I 9
*,
the fo ll owing special rules with r egar d to the vowel o f th e r eduplicativesyl lable ar e t o be o bserved °
In fo rming th e des iderative baseRadical wa and and ar e r epr esented by 3 i in the r edupl icative syllable
(Pan . V I I . 4,
“ pack,mafiap ipalcshati ; ansthd, fflvmfil' tishzhdsati .
§ 474 . fl ew and m dv, standing as Guna o r Vr iddh i o f r adical 3 a o r 3 5 1i , ar e
r epr esented by 3 i in th e r edupl icative syllable, pr ovided they be preceded by l p, Q ph,
i h, { bh,Km, {31,”
gr , 3 1, i v, i f (Pan. V I I . 4,
1 1911,W p ipdvayishati , (Red . A o r .W apipavat .) S ee 375 .
fi bhd,W bibhdvayishati , (Red . A o r .W abibhavat .)
3 ya, and Caus . D esid . W yiydvayishati .
s;j u, famafi sfii j iidvayishati , (Red . A o r .m issiles .)
B ut"
anu,M nundvayishati , (Red . A o r .W andnavat .) S ee 375
475 . Ro o ts E sr a, to flow, new , to h ear ,°
ié‘
dru,to run,
”
gpm , to appr o ach , gp in, toswim ,
33 chyu, t o fal l , may under similar cir cumstances O ptionally take 3 i o r 3 14 in the
r edupl icat ive syllable .
g sru,M sisr dvayishati o r gawfqflfasus rdvayishati ; but the simple desiderat iveW susr iishati only.
W wdpay, th e Caus . o f H ‘Uvap, fo rmsm sushvdpayishati .
§ 476 . Ro o ts beginning with a vowel have a pecul iar kind o f internal
r eduplicatio n, to wh ich al lusion was made in 378. Thus (Pan. V I . 1 , 2)
“
sq uchchh fo rmsm 3‘
Etffl uchichchh ishati .
477. If the r o o t ends'
In a double consonant, the fir st letter o f wh ich 18 Fl u, 3d, o r 3 1 3then the second letter is r edupli cated.
v i ar ch, sfi fwfir ar chich-ishati . a’
sand,a
’
f‘
qfqafa undid-ishati .
marubj , s fs rfaufaabj ij-ishati .
fi tr shy th e last consonant is r edupl icated .
fi fr shy,w i r shyiy-ishati o rw i r shyish
-ishati . (Pan.vI . I ,
In the verbs beginning withW kanddyati 498) the final Ry is r edupl icated.
Wig kandfl'
y,w kandziyiy-ishati .
Exceptional r edupl ication o ccur s in fw ’mfir chikishati , besidesw chichishati,
fr om fa chi (Pas . vu . 3, in fafi ufirfighahati fr om fg hi (Pas . vn . 3 , &c.
481 . INTENS IVE vas es. 223
C H A P T E R XX.
INTENS IVE vas es .
§ 478. Intensive, o r,as they ar e sometimes cal led
,fr equentative bases
ar e meant to co nvey an intenseness o r fr equent r epet itio n o f the actio nexpr essed by the simple verb . S imple verbs, expr essive o f mo tio n, some
times r eceive the idea o f to rtuo u s mo tio n,if used as intensives . S ome
intensive bases co nvey th e idea o f r epr o ach o r disgr ace, &c .
§ 479. Only bases beginning with a co nso nant,and co nsisting o f o ne
syl lable, ar e liable to be turned into intensive bases . Verbs o f the Ch ur
class canno t be changed into intensive verbs . Th er e ar e,h owever , some
exceptio ns . Thus W at, to go , th o ugh beginning with a vowel, fo rms
W ?! aldiyate, h e wander s abo ut ; $731 as, to eat, W aédéyate sq ri ,
to go , a nd? ar dryate and attfi'
i ar ar ti (S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . I I . p . an? flmu
,
to cover, whiff ? drnondyate (Pan. I I I . I ,
480 . Th ere ar e two ways o f fo rming intensive verbs‘
I . B y a peculiar r eduplication and adding I: yd at th e end . Th is yd has
the accent .
2 . B y the same pecul iar r edupl icatio n with out any mo dificatio n in the final
po rt io n o f th e base . Th e latter fo rm o ccur s less fr equently. It has
the accent o n the r eduplicative syll able.
Bases fo rmed in th e fo rmer way adm it o f fi tmanepada o nly.
E x . i bhd,“
f li t ? bo bh iiydte.
Bases fo rmed in th e latter way admit o f Parasmaipada o nly, th o ugh , acco r dingto some gr ammar ians
,the A tmanepada al so may be fo rmed .
E x . M i"
? bo’
bhaviti o r M bo’
bho ti .
The Atmanepada wo ul d be $53 bobh ii te.
Ro o ts ending in vowel s r etain th e ‘
q ya o f the intensive base in th e generaltenses ; r o o ts ending in conso nants dr o p it . Hence Tfitgfqm bo bhzlyitd,
but tfi'
qf flm so sz’
ichitd . (Pan . V I . 4 ,
481 . W hen It ya is added,th e effect o n th e base is generally the same
as in the passive and benedict ive Par . Thus final vowel s are
length ened : fa ch i, to gather , w chech iyate ; a (rm
,to hear
, shag }
éoér z’
iyate. an d is changed to i i V I dhci , to place , 3M dedh iyate. a r t
becomes k in o r,after labial s
,$9 27 2 7
1i i i
,to cr o ss, him tet iryate; 3 1914,
to fil l,Ifififi p opzi ryate. Final “
55 xi , h owever , wh en fo llowing a simple
consonant , is changed to ("
l r i, no t t o fi r i : i i kri , to do ,w chekr iyate.
Wh en fo llowing a do uble co nso nant it is ch anged to wear : 83 smri , to
224 INTENS IVE VERBS . 482
r emember , mmfifi sdsmaryate. Th ese i ntensive bases ar e co njugated l ikebases o f the D iv class in the A tmanepada. It sh o uld be o bserved
,h owever ,
that in th e gener al tenses r o o ts ending in vowel s r etain"
3 y befo r e th e
intermediate 3 i , wh ile r o o ts ending in conso nants th r ow o ff the 1: ya o f
th e special tenses al to geth er . Thu s fr om $531 bo bhdya, a’ngfqmbobh ii -y-i td;
fr om saw bebhidya, £1121q bebhidz'
td.
482. When 1: ya is no t added,th e intensive bases ar e tr eated like bases
o f th e Hu class . Th e rul es o f r eduplicatio n ar e the same . Observe,h owever ,
th at verbs with final o r penul timate anr i have pecul iar fo rm s o f th eir own
489, and verbs in star t fr om a base in “
anar
,and ther efo r e h ave
and in th e r edupl icative syllable.
“
antar , m fii tdtas'mi ; 3rd per s . plur .
al fal fa tdtir ati .
483 . A cco r ding to th e rules o f th e Hu clas s, th e weak term inat io ns r equ ireGuna Hence fr omm bo budh
, W bobo dhmi but shgw bo
budhmah. Fr om $11 bo bhd, M FR bo bhomi , M FR bo bhavdni ; but $15 3 :
bo bh i’
i'
mah. Remark, h owever , that in I . 2 . 3 . p . sing . Pr es ., 2 . 3 . p . sing .
Impf., 3 . p . sing . Imp . i i may be o ptio nally inserted
W bo bo dhmi o r bo budhimi ; M bobhomi o rw bobhavimi .
A nd r emark fur ther , that befo r e th is intermediate 3 i , and l ikewise befo r eweak terminatio ns beginning with a vowel
,intensive bases ending in co n
s o nants do no t take Guna (Pan . V I I . 3 , Hence w bobudh imi ,
Tvfigmfi bobudhdni, abobudham. Fr o m fagvi d,
PRE S ENT . IMPERFE CT. IMPERATIVE .
53
W? ! o r W mafiavevedmi o r vevidimi avevidam veviddni
fififiq o r affl '
iflffi W o r M :
vevetsi o r°
vevidishi avevet o r avevidih vevida’hi
z-fi ‘f'
a o r arena “43331 o rm 333 o rm
vevetti o r vevid iti avevet o r avevi d it vevettu o r vevi d itu
vevidvah, &c . afifag ‘
avevidva aferm veviddva
Rules of Redup licati onf o r Intensives .
484 . The s implest way t o fo rm th e pecu l iar r edupl icatio n o f intensives,is
to take the base u sed in th e gener al tenses, to change it into a passive baseby adding 11 ya, th en to r edupl icate
,acco r ding to th e gener al rules o f r edupli
catio n, and lastly, to r aise,wh er e p o ssible
,th e vowel o f the r edupl icative
syl lable by Guna (Pan . V I I . 4, and wa to an d (Pan. V I I . 4,
fa chi, to gather ,
‘
i fin ch iya, Q fifi‘
lfi chech iyate; fi fir checheti .
gal lo ws, to abu se,
“
gm: hr usyat,“
aw cho /cr usyate;m chokr o shti .
al fi tr ait/c,to appr o ach
, aim tr aukya, to tr aukyate ; filfi f'fi to tr aukti .
226 INTENS IVE VERBS .
490 . The same appl ies t o r o o ts ending inwgi , if used in th e Parasmaipada. (Pan.
g kyi ; afifi fwcha r kar z‘
ti . fi ffi char kar ti .
a fa fifir cha r i Icar i ti . a tt est"
? char ikar ti .
m fi fi cha r i kar i ti . m char ikar ti .
491 . A few fr equentative bases ar e pecul iar in th e fo rmatio n o f their base
“ swap, t o sleep, W W?! s o shupyate; but m fi: scisvapti . (Pan . VI . I,
{an syam,t o so und,m ses imyate; but W P?! samsyanti .
eye, to co ver , Elam vee iyate; but am vdvydti ; o r 483)mafil‘
vévyeti .
W vas’
, t o desir e,W ? eavas’
yate; mats vévashti . (Pan . V I . I,
“ okay, t o r egar d, 3 3311? ckekiyate; fi ffl cheketi . (Pan. V I . 1 , 2 I .
WW pyay, t o gr ow,w pepiyate;m pdpya‘
ti . (Pan. V I . I , 29.
P93 svi, to swel l, 31W s’
o suyate o r W W sesviyate m s’
es‘veti . (Pan. V I . I
,
a ban, t o kil l ,W j eghniyate; W j afighanti . (Pan. V I I . 4, 30 , vart .)
WTghr d‘
, t o smel l ,W j eghr t’
yate; W j dghr dti . (Pan . V I I . 4 ,
andhma'
,t o bl ow, éufiuir dedhmiyate m dddhmdti . (Pan . vu . 4 ,
7?Qgr i , to swal l ow, Wrm aj eg i lyate; mfi j dgar t i . (Pan . V I I I . 2 ,
$1 s i, t o l ie down,m um s’
ds‘ayyate; fififii’ ses’eti . (Pan . V I I . 4 , 22 .
(l 492 . Fr om der ivat ive verbs new der ivatives may be fo rmed, mo st
which , h owever , ar e r ath er the cr eatio n o f gr ammar ians, than th e pr o per tyo f th e spoken language . Thu s fr om manta bhc
‘
ivayati , the cau sal o f L1 bhd,h e causes to be
,a new desiderative is der ived , W W bibhdvayiskati , h e
wish es to cause exi stence . S o fr om th e intensive HIDE ?! bobhz
’
lyate, he
exists r eally, is fo rmed fi fif’q
‘
flfit bobhfiyishati , h e wish es to exi st r eal ly ;
th en a new causative may be fo rmed, MM bobht
’
i’
yishayati , he cau ses a
wish to exist r eal ly ; and again a new desider ative,
‘
éfii f’
qflfimfil bobbdyis/za
yislzati , he wish es to excite th e desir e o f r eal existence .
The fo rmatio n and co njugat io n o f th e Intens ive in the Parasmaipada, o r th e so-cal led
Charkar ita, have given r ise t o a gr eat deal o f discussion among nat ive gr ammarians .
A cco r ding to their th eo ryW ym’
z, the S ign o f the Intens ive Atmanepada, has t o be sup
pr essed by Q"
? luk. B y this suppr ession th e changes pr o duced in th e ver bal base byK ym}
wo uld cease (Pan . I . except certain changes wh ich ar e co nsider ed as A nangakarya,
ch anges no t affect ing th e bas e, such as r edupl icat io n . Changes o f the r o o t that ar e to take
place no t o nly In th e Intens . A tm ., but al so In th e Intens . Par . , ar e distinctly ment io ned byPanini
, V I I . 4, 82—
92 . A bo ut o th er changes, no t dir ectly extended to the Intens . Par .
grammar ians d ifi’er . Thus th e Pr akr iya
-Kaumud i fo rmsm so shop ti , because Pan . V I .
I , I9, pr escr ibesfi g“? so skupyate; o ther auth o r it ies fo rm o nlyM sasvap ti o r W IFEsasvapzti . Co lebr o o ke al l owsW oke/ecu (p . becau se Pan . V I . I , 2 1 , prescr ibes
'
aafi'fi
chekiyate, and the commentary argues in favo ur o f fi ffl cheketi . B ut Co l ebr o oke (p . 3 2 1 )decl ines t o fo rm s tair ses inte, because it is in th e Atm . o nly that Pan. v1 . I , I9, al lows
m sesimyate. W hether th e Per fe ct sh o uld be per rphrastic o r redupl icated Is l ikewise
a mo o t po int am o ng gr ammar ians ; some fo rm ing W i t bobkavdnchakdr a, o thers"
5821? bo bbava, o th er sM bobhci'
va .
496 . DEN OM INA TIVE VERBS . 227
C H A P T E R XXI .
DENOMINA TIVE VERBS .
493 . Th er e ar e many verbs in S anskr it wh ich ar e clear ly der ived fr om
nominal bases *,and whi ch gener al ly have the meaning o f behaving l ike , o r
tr eating some o ne l ike,o r wish ing fo r o r do ing whatever is expr essed by the
no un. Thus fr om fiwsyena, hawk, we havem syendya’
te,h e beh aves
like a hawk ; from 33 putr a , so n,W fil putr iyciti , h e tr eats so me o ne l ike
a so n,o r he wishes fo r a so n. S ome denominatives ar e fo rmed with o ut any
der ivative syl lable . Thu s from arm!krishnci, gu lf? kr ishzza’
ti,h e behaves l ike
Krishna ; fr om fil 'qpitri , fath er , flnl't fapi tdr ati , h e behaves li ke a fath er .
Th ese denom inative ve rbs,h owever
,canno t be fo rmed at pleasur e;and many
even o f th o se wh ich wo u ld be sanctio ned by the rul es o f native grammar ians ,
ar e o f r ar e o ccur r ence in the natio nal liter atur e o f India . Th ese verbs sh o ul dther efo r e be l o o ked fo r in the dictio nary r ather th an in a grammar . A. few
rules, however , o n their fo rmatio n and general meaning , may her e be given.
D enominatives in"
q ya, Par asmaipada .
494. B y adding 11 yd to th e base o f a no un,deno minatives ar e fo rmed
g a wish . Fr om 7h go , cow, Hal f? gavyati , h e wishes fo r cows .
e call ed no minal desider atives, and th ey never go vern a
ame uya, denom inatives ar e fo rmed expr essing o ne’8
lo oking upon o r t reating something l ike th e subject exp ressed by th e no un.
Thus fr om gaputr a, so n, 361?a fslfl iputr iyati s’
ishyam, h e tr eats th e pupil l ike
a son . B y a sim ilar pr o cessW p r dsdd iyati, fr o mm p r dsdda, pal ace,means to behave as if o ne wer e in a palace mm W fire;pr dsddiyati ‘
kutydm bki lcshub, th e beggar l ives in h is hut as if it wer e a pal ace .
496 . Befo re th is Tl ya,I . Final ‘R a and 351 d ar e changed to
‘
i ’i ; gm satd, daugh ter , gm suttyati , h e wishes
fo r a daughter
2 . {i and‘
3‘
u ar e length ened ; 1Tl'l
fl‘
pati , master ,m patiyati , he tr eats l ike a master ;
kavi , po et,m kaviyati, h e wish es t o be a po et .
They ar e call ed in S anskr it fiTg l idhu, fr om fé fl lmga, it is said, a crude so und,and
3 di m, fo r W dhdtu,r o o t . (Car ey, Gr ammar , p .
1' Minute distinctio ns ar emade between "
8 51W ? as’
aniyat i, h e wish es t o eat at the pr o pertime
,and ‘a
'm fil as'
andyati , h e is r aveno uslyhungry;betweenW fi udakt‘
yati , h ewishes
fo r water , andm fil‘udanyati , h e starves and craves fo r water ;betweenW WfiTdhamiyati , he
is gr eedy fo r weal th , andm dhaniyati , h e asks fo r some mo ney . (Pan. V I I . 4 ,
s g z
228,DENOMINATIVE VERBS .
3 . H g‘ i becomes f l r t, $1} 0 becomes fl aw) ,
“
a? an becomes W i de ; fil ’gpitri , fath er ,
fmfl'fil p itr iyati , h e t r eats l ike a fath er ; H} m m, ship, em f?! ndvyati , h e wishes
fo r a ship .
4 . Final i n is dr o pt, and o th er final conso nants r emain unchanged ;W r dj an, king ,
( fi fiflffl'
r dj iyati , h e tr eats a man l ike a king ; M payas, milk, W‘Ffl'
payasyati ,
h e W ish es fo r milk ; instvdch, speech , W fil vdchyati (Pan. I . 4, 1 5) m namas,
wo r sh ip ,W fil namasyati, h e wo r ships (Pan. I I I . I,
D enominatives in‘
II ya, f itmanepada .
§ 497. A second class o f denom inatives , fo rmed by adding I t yd, has
th e meaning o f behav mg like, o r becoming l ike , o r actual ly do ing wh at is .
expr essed by th e no un . They differ from th e pr eceding class by gener allyfo llowing the Atmanepada
*,and by a di ffer ence in th e mo dificatio n o f th e
final letter s o f th e nominal base . Thu s
I . Final s : a is length ened ; sawsyena, hawk, 531 m? Syendyate, h e behavesl ike a h awk ;m éabda
,so und
, W sabddyate, h e makes a so und,
h e so unds ; l ist bhriéa, much , m i bhriédyate, h e becomes much ;Elm Icaskta, misch ief, m kashtdyate, h e pl o ts ; fifm r amantha
,
r uminating, m r omanthdyate, h e ruminates . Th e final i t o f
feminine bases is gener al ly dr o p t,and th e masculi ne base taken
instead ;"
glut ? kumdr i’
, gir l , gum kumdr dyate, h e beh aves like a
gir l . (Pan. V I . 3 , 36
2 and 3 . Final g i and“
a n, ai m}“
ash 0,and au ar e tr eated as in 496 ; sf ?
sushi,pur e,W it éuch iyate, h e becomes pur e .
4 . Final i n is dr o pt , and the pr eceding vowel is lengthened ;m r aj an,
king, r dj dyate, h e behaves l ike a king ; W ushman,h eat
, ‘
m ushmdyate, it sends o ut h eat .
S ome nominal bases in i ( s and V may , o ther s mu st (Pan . I I I . I , I I) hetr eated like nom inal bases in wa . Hence fr om fa
'
g'
q vi dvas, wi se, firg lgfi
vidvasyate o r fi'
fifl lfir vidvdyate, h e behaves like a wis e man fr omm payas,
milk,1mm} payasyate o r m paydyate, it becomes m ilk ; fr om m
apsar as,m apsar dyate, sh e beh aves l ike an A psar as ; fi om“
a!“brihat,
gr eat, Sign?! br ihdyate, h e becom es gr eat . (Pan. I I I . I,I 2 .)
498. S ome verbs ar e classed t o geth er by native grammar ians as Kandvadi’s, i . e .
beginning with Kandu. They take Tl ya, bo th in Par asmaipada and Atmanepada, and keepit th r o ugh th e gener al tenses under th e r estr ictio ns applying t o o th er denominatives in fl ya
N o uns ending in i ? a dr o p it befo r e ”
H g/a . Thus fr om 351116 agada, fr ee fr om .
Th o se that may take b o th Parasmaipada and Atmanepada ar e said to be fo rmed byin ? kyash, th e r est bym kyaiz. Thus fr om B BQ ? lo hita, r ed,M o r fi lohi tdyati
o r -te, h e becomes r ed . (Pan. I I I . I,
230 PREPOS ITIONS A N D PARTICLES . 503,
S ome o f these verbs ar e always Atmanepada. Thus fr om sa puchchha, tail , W ?!
utpuchckhayate, h e l ifts up th e tail (Pan. I I I . I ,
If W ag/a is to be added to no uns fo rmed by th e seco ndary affixes“mat, “vat,M min
,
m via, these affixes must be dr o pt . Fr om 8m sr agvin, having gar lands ,
Hm s r aj ayatz’
.
If W aya is added to fem inine bases, they ar e general ly r eplaced by the co rr espo ndingmasculine base . Fr om first s‘yem
'
wh ite,m éyetayati, he makes her
wh ite (Pan. V I . 3 ,
Certain adject ives wh ich change their base befo re {8 ishgha o f th e super lative, do thesame befo r e an aya.
if;mg'
z'
du, so ft, e adayati , h e so ftens ; gt dflr a, far ,
m ffi davayati, he r emo ves .
S ome nominal bases take W apaya. Thus fr om W satya, true,m satydpayati ,
he speaks truly; fr om ar tha, sense, wfim fir ar tha'
payati , h e explains .
D enominatives wi thout any Afiw.
503 . A cco r ding t o some auth o r ities every nominal base may be turned into a
denominative verb by adding th e o rdinary verbal terminatio ns o f th e Fir st D ivisio n, and
tr eating the base l ike a verbal base o f the B hfi class . W a is added to the base, exceptwh ere it exists alr eady as the final o f the nominal base ; o ther final and medial vowels take
‘
Guna,where po ssible, as in the B hfi clas s .
Thus fr om“
q iu Icyishqza,m kriskzzati, he behaves l ike Kr ishna; fr om “TESTmaze,
gar land, W IFEmalati, it is l ike a gar land , Impf .W amdldt, A o r .mama
'
ldsi t; fr om i f? kavi, po et, 35m kavayati , h e behaves li ke a po et ; fr om fi t vi,bird
,
‘
c‘
fl fil‘ vayati, h e flies like a bird ; fr om fin!pi tg‘ i , father , fimtfir pi tar ati, he is
l ike a fath er ; fr omW r dj an, king, tmmfa raj dnati, he is l ike a king (Pan. v1 .
4 ,
C H A P TE R XXII .
PREPOS ITIONS A N D PA RTICLES .
504. The fo ll owing p r epo s itio ns may be jo ined with verbs, and ar e then
called Upasarga in S anskr it (Pan . I . 4 , 58— 6 1 ;
wf‘
a ati, beyo nd .
”aft! adhz
'
,o ver (sometime s fit era anu, after .
a t! apa, o ff. wfi: ap i , upo n (sometimes fir pi). $5! abhi,towards .
m ava, down (somet imes E va). m a,near to . 3 7;ad, up. an upa ,
next,bel ow. g: dub, il l . f
’
am’
,into
,downwar ds . f
‘
rT: m’
lz, with o ut.
an para, back,away. trfi par i , ar o und. up r a, befo re . nfirp r ati ,
back . f‘
cr vi , apar t . t i sam,to gether . g su
,well . Th ey all have the
uddtta o n th e fir st syllable except 3 5 : abhz’ .
5)505 . Certain adverbs, called Gati in S anskr it , a term appl icable al so to
Upasaryas (Pan . I . 4, may be pr efixed, like pr ep o sit io ns, t o cer tainpar ticular ly to 1 61111, to be,mas
,to be
,Tkri , to do , andmi yam,to go .
50 7. Ps s r o sm o s s A N D n ar rows . 231
W achekha ; e . g .m achchhagatya, having appr o ached machchho dya, having addr essed . “a: adalz; e . g . wz
‘
qm ada lzkri tya,
h aving done it thus . W antar ; e .g.m anl afr i tya, having passedbetween. $3? a lam; e . g . M alav
’
dcritya , having o rnamented .
W astam ; e . g . mains! astar’
zgatya , having go ne to r est,having
set . m : dvib; e . g . W i g: dvir bhflya , having appeared . Fart : tir ab
e. g . firflg}! ti r o bhdya, h aving disappeared. gt : puma; e . g . Wpur askri tya, having placed befo re 89, I I . mg: pr ddulz; e .g . Inga}:
pr ddur bkziya, having become manifest. “ sat and N asa l,when
expr essing r egard o r co ntempt ; e . g . m asatkri tya, having dis
r egar ded. mm sci /what; e . g . M sdlcshdtlcri tya , having made
known. W o rds l ikeW éu/clz‘
,inW éukl ikri tya, having made white.
(Her e the final 33!a o fW éu/cla is changed to i i'
. S o metimes,but r ar ely,
final 38 a o r w ar, is changed to m a. Final {i and 3 a ar e lengthened ;"
a ri is changed to fi r ? final m an and “ as ar e changed to i f
e . g . ( 13 33531 r dj i lcri tya, h aving made king .) W o rds like"
af t tir i, in
afi qm fir ikri tya, h aving as sented . W o r ds l ike m a st,im itative o f
s ound ; e . g . mam kkatkri tya , h aving made Ichci t, the so und pr oducedin cl ear ing o ne
’s th r o at .
50 6 . S ever al o f the prepo sitions mentioned in 503 ar e al so used with
no uns,and ar e then said t o go vern cer tai n cases . Th ey ar e then call ed Kar;
mapr avackaniya, and th ey fr equently fo ll ow th e no un which is go verned by
them (Pan. 1 . 4,
is go verned by atfa atz’
, beyo nd ;"
aft! abhi , towards ; vf'
t
pr ati , against ; 3 73 anu,after ; 3 1! upa, upo n. E x . Tfifé
m ati neévar alz, I s’
var a is no t beyond Go vinda; gr 1151venom was fo r Har a ; w vishzm
ped after Vi shnu ; W3 gfi gt t: anu har imswab,
by ufa pr ati , uft par i , m apa,“
and . E x .
amr i tam,immo r tal ity in r eturn fo r faith ; anw: d
33W fa’ffifl fi i f ? i s : apa tr iga r tebhyo vz
‘
z'
shto devab, it
In Tr igarta, o r l ift fan-En zpar i tr igar tebhyab, r o und
ch ing Tr igar ta.
and avfir adhi . E x . 3 11 ffl'fi ‘m upa
a Kfir shapana is m o r e than a Nishka ;WfitW m :
hmadatta lz, B r ahmadatta go verns o ver the Panchalas .
many o th er adverbs in S anskr it , some o f wh ich may
e u sed as an adverb .
232 PREPOS ITIONS A N D PA RTICLES . 507
Thu s fr om fig: mandala, S low, d'
ef as mandam mandam, slowly, slowly ;
sfi'
a'
sip/tr am,qui ckly ; g
‘
q
‘
dhr uvam,trul y.
2 .Cer tain compo unds , end ing like accu satives o f neuter s
,ar e u sed adver
bially, such as m i"
? ya thaéakti, acco r ding t o o ne’s power . Fo r
these see the rules o n co mpo sitio n .
3 . A dve i bs o f place :
m t antar , within, with 100 . and gen . ; between,with ace . ism antara,
between,with acc . m antar e’
aa, between,with acc .; W ith ou t, with
ace . M arat, far o ff,with abl . afg : vahz
’
b,‘
o utside, with abl . m
samaya, near , with ace . Prawn ni lcasha,near , with acc . awft upar i ,
above , o ver , with ace . and gen . fi t uchchai lz, h igh , o r l o ud . 3 13 :
nichai lz, low. W adhalz, bel ow,with gen . and abl .“
WEI: avab, below,
with gen. fat : l ir ab, acr o ss, with ace . o r lo c . {g iha , her e . an para,
befo r e . W samaksham,m sdkskdt,in the pr esence. W eakdédt
,
fr om . gt : par ab, befo r e , with gen. sum amd, tfi n sachd, mi l? sci /cam,
um samd, mi? sar a
’kam, to geth er , with instr . affirm abhitah, o n all sides
,
wi th acc. 3mm ubhayatab, o n bo th sides,with acc . M samantdt
,
fr om al l sides . at dur am, far ,with acc . ,abl .
,and gen. i f}? antikam
,
near , W i th acc . , abl ., and gen . W r idha lc, 11W p r itkak, apart .
4 . A dverbs o f time
m pr a'
tar,ear ly. {mi sag/am,
at eve . fain diva, by day. W al mdya,
by day. Effin do s/2a, by nigh t . ai l;naktam, by nigh t. W ushd,ear ly.
arm‘
s;yugapad, at th e sam e t ime . am adya, to—day. a : lag/a lt , yesterday.
m: purvedyuh, yesterday.va
‘
: svab, t o—mo r r ow. utuf
’q par edyavz
'
,
to -m o r r ow. m j yok, l o ng . fat chir am, farmchir ezza , Farmchir aya,
farmchiral, fat e-I shim s
-ya , l o ng . am sand
, m eandt, m eanat,
perpetual ly. a t ar am,qu ickly. fi t éanaih, S l owly.
“
an: sadyah, at
o nce . finfir sampr ati, now. 37“ punar , 133 : muhulz, i n: bhzZyah, m
va'
r am,again . 1171 sakrzt, o nce . gm par a , fo rmer ly. i s? pflrvam,
befo r e. zir a'lzvam
,after . unfawpadi , immediately. m paéchdt,
after,with abl . sugj atu, o nce upo n a t ime, ever .
1si‘
gmadlnma ,now.
W tadni’
m, now.
“
8 31 sadd, m santatam, aim am
’
éam,always .
”4355 a lam, eno ugh , with dat . o r instr .
5. A dverbs o f cir cum stance81m mr z
’
sha , fawnmi thya , fal sely . m manak, Wa
shed,a li ttle .
“
duff
tushmm,qu ietly . 3m vgi tha , gm mud/ta
,in vain .
“
affix sami, hal f.“
assi gn—rt akasmdt, unexpectedly. m s;updv
’
zéu,in a whisper . fim:
mi thalz, to geth er . mu: p r dyalz, frequently, alm o st . W at i'
va,exceed
ingly. am} kamam,
‘
ififi j o sham, gladly. m avaéyam,cer tainly.
234 COMPOUND WORDS . 5 1 1
5 I I . S ometimes the sign O f th e fem inine gender in th e pr io r elements o f a compo und.may be r etained . This is ch iefly th e case wh en th e feminine is tr eated as an appel lative,and wo uld l o se its distinct ive meaning by l o sing th e fem inine suffix : mkalyanimata, th e m o th er o f a beautiful daughter (Pan. V I . 3 , m ra: kaghiblzdryale,
having a Kath i fo r o ne’
s wife (Pan. V I . 3 , If th e fem inine fo rms a mer e pr edicate ,it gener al ly l o ses its feminine suffix ; sfinamfi: s
’
o bhanabharyab, having a beaut iful wife"
( Pan V I 3. 34 ;
The ph o netic ru les t o be o bserved ar e th o se o f external S andhi with certain m o dificatio ns,
explained in 24 seq.
*
(55 1 2 .Compo und wo rds might h ave been d ivided into substantival ,
adjectival, and adverbial . Thu s wo r ds l ike m 3 : tatpnrushalz, h is man,
vfisfimfi ni lo tpa lam,blue l o tu s, fang: dvigavam,
two o xen, W agni
dhzimau,fir e and sm o ke, m igh t have been classed as substantival ;
bahuvr ih i lz, p o ssess ing much r ice , as an adjectival ; and W yathdsakti ,
acco rding to o ne’s str ength , as an adverbial compo und .
Native grammar ians , h owever , h ave ado pted a di ffer ent pr inciple O f divi
sion, classing all compo unds under six differ ent heads , under the names o f
Tatpurusha, Karmadhar aya , D vigu, Dvandva, B al mvr i’
hi,and A vyayz
‘
bbava .
Tatpur usha is a compo und in wh ich the last wo r d is determ ined by thepreceding wo r ds , fo r instance, W 3 tat-pur ushafz, h is man
,o r ( ragga:
r dj a-pur ushalz, king’
s man .
A s a gener al term the Tatpur usha compo und comprehends the twosubdivisio ns o f Karmadhar aya (I b) and D vigu (I c). Th e Karmadha
r aya is in fact a Tatpu ru sh a compo und,in wh ich the last
determined by a pr eced ing adjective,e . g .W ni lo tpa lam,
blue 10Th e component wo r ds , if disso lved, wo u ld stand in th e same 0
wher eas in o th er Tatpu ru shas the pr eceding wo r d i s go verned bylast
, the man o f the king, o r fir e-wo o d , i . e . wo o d fo r fir e .
The D vigu again may be call ed a subdivisio n o f the
being a compo und in wh ich the fir st wo r d is no t an adjebut always a numer al fans}dvigavam, two o xen
,o r F3 13
fo r two o xen.
Occasional ly bases ending in a l o ng vowel sh o rten it , and bvowel length en it in th e m iddle o f a compound ;m udaka, wate
br idaya, h eart, fr equently substitute th e basesm udan (i . e . 3T: uda
wr i t hr idr ogalz, hear t-disease, o r W OW br idayar ogafi. (Pan . V I . 3 , 5 1
The part icle Q kn,wh ich is intended to expr ess co ntempt , as
a bad Brahman, substitutes 35g lead in a determ inative compo undwith co nso nants : saga: kadushyr alz, a bad camel . The same take
5 6 vada, and 71mtr ina : 3 13 W: kadr athalz, a bad car r iage ;“
Gal l ic
gr ass . The same par t icle is changed to EFTka’ befo r e QW pathin
kapathafi, and O ptio nal ly befo r eW pur uska. (Pan . V I . 3 , 1 0 1
5 1 3 , COMPOUND WORDS . 23 5
These th r ee classes o f compo unds may be comprehended under th e
general name o f D eter minative Compounds , wh ile the Karmadharaya (I b)may be d is tingu ish ed as oppo si ti ona l determ inatives , the Dvigu (I c) asnumer a l determ inatives .
I I . The next class,cal led D vandva
,co nsists o f compo unds in wh ich two wo rds
ar e simply j o ined to gethe r , the compo und taking either th e terminatio ns
o f the dual o r plural, acco rding to the number o f compo unded no uns,
o r the terminatio ns o f the singular , being tr eated as a co llective termat a? agni-dlulmau, fire and smo ke ;m m saéa-kuéa-pa ldédlz,
nom . plur . masc . th r ee kinds o f plants,o rW éaéa-kuéa-paldéam,
nom . sing. neu t. They wil l be cal led Co l lective Compounds .
III . The next class,cal led B ahuvr ihi by native gr ammar ians, compr ises com
po unds wh ich ar e u sed as adjectives . Th e no tio n expr essed by the lastwo r d
,and which may be var io usly determ ined, fo rms th e pr edi cate o f some
o ther subject. Th eymay be call ed P o ssess ive Comp ounds . Th us fl'
g'
afifg
bahu-vr ilzi lz, po ssessed o f much r ice,scil . ? g
'
ndesalc, co untry ;m i :
r dpavad—bhdryalz, po ssessing a handsome wife
,scil . t r?"r dj d, king .
Determinative compo unds may be tur ned into po ssessive compo unds ,sometimes with o ut any change, except that o f accent, somet imes by
sl igh t changes in the last wo rd .
The gender o f po ssessive compo unds, l ike th at o f adjectives , confo rms
to the gender o f the substantives to which they bel o ng .
The last class,called A vyayi
’
bhdva,is fo rmed by j o ining an indecl inable
par ticle with ano ther wo rd . The r esulting compo und, in wh ich the
indecl inable par ticle always fo rms th e fir st element , is again indecl inable ,and generally ends
,like adverbs
,in th e o r dinary terminatio ns o f the
nom . o r acc . neut . : wfflfia adh i-s tr i,fo r woman
,as in Wfitfla
adhistr i gr ihakdrydni , h o useh o l d duties ar e fo r women. They may
be called A dver bia l Compounds .
I . D eterminative Compounds .
5 13 . Th is class (Tatpuru sh a)compr eh ends compo unds inwhich general lyast wo r d governs the pr eceding o ne . The last wo r d may be a substant ive
o r a par ticiple o r an adjective,if capable o f go verning a no un.
1 . Compo unds in wh ich th e fir st no un wo uld be in the A ccusative
quantum krishna-sr italz, m . f . n . go ne to Krish na, dependent o n Kr ishna,
instead o f gmi fa i r: krishnam ér itab. gtm‘
tfi‘
flz dulzkha-atita lz, m . f. n .
having over come pain,instead o f gtm fi fl : dubkham at i
‘
talz.“
Gramvar sha-bhogyali , m . f. n . to be enj o yed a year l o ng . ar t-mm: gr dma
pr dp tali, m . f. 11 . h aving r each ed th e vil lage, instead o f uni um: gr dmam
H h 2
23 6 COMPOUND WORDS . j 5 1 3 4
pr dptalz it is m o r e’
usual,h owever , to say m am: pr dp tagr dma lz
(Pan. n 2, S imilar ly ar e fo rmed determ inatives by m eans o f
adverbs o r pr epo sitio ns, such as mfirfi'
rft a tigz'
r i,past th e h ill
,u sed as
an adverb, o r as an adjective, WW : atig ir z
’
h,ul tr amo ntane ;W
abhimukham,facing, &c .
2 . Comp ounds in wh ich the fir st no un wo uld be in the Instrumental
W 5 : dhdnya-ar thalz, m . wealth (ar t/cab) (acqu ir ed) by gr ain (dhdnyena).
Sli m : sankuld-khandalz, m . a p iece (khandalz)(cu t)by nipper s (sankuldbhi lz). W W : ddtr a -chchhinnalz, m . f. n . cut (chhinna lz)by a knife
(ddtr ena). gfiam: har i- tr dtalz, m . f . 11 . pr o tected (tr dtab)by Har i . 3m :
deva-dal talz, given (dattalz)by th e go ds (devai lz), o r as a p r oper name with
the suppo sed au spicio u s s ense, may the go ds give h im (D ieu
WITH: p i tr i- samalz, m . f. n . l ike the father , i . e . pitr c
‘
i samalz. am :
nakha-nir bh inna lz, m . f. n . cut asunder (ni r bhinna lz)by the nails
farm : viéva-updsyulz, m. f. n . to be wo r shipped by al l . RUTH”
svayam-Icmtalz, m . f n. do ne by o neself .
3 . Compo unds in wh ich the fir st no un wo u ld be in th e Dative
W ydpa-ddru
,n .wo o d (ddru) fo r a sacr ificial s take (ydpciya). Thfig
'
a‘
: go
hi tafi,m . f .n. go o d (hi talz)fo r cows (go bhyalz). (”Emi tdviiaé ar thab, m . f.n .
o bject (ar tha), i . e . intended fo r Brahmans . Determ inative compo unds,
wh en tr eated as p o ssessive,take the term inatio ns o f th e masc. ,
fem . , and
neut . e . g. fgafin Tim dmj dr tkd yavdgdb, fem . gr uel fo r Brahmans .
4 . Compo unds in wh ich th e fir st no un wo ul d be in th e A blative‘
i fit flfi cho r a-bhagam,n . fear (bhagam) ari sing fr om th ieves (cho r ebhyalz).
Hfi'
Q‘FRH: svarga
-
pati tab, m . f. n . fallen fr om h eaven . 3 1W : apa-
gr dmab,
m . f. n . go ne fi'
om the villag
5 . Comp o unds in which the fir st no un wo uld be in the Genitive
WW : Iat—purushalz, m . his m an,instead o f tasya , o f h im ,purushan, the man
*.
( 13 36 51: r dj a-
purushalt, m . the king’sman, instead o f r dj fiab, o f the king,
pur ushab, th e man . W E : r dj a-sulchab,m . th e king’s fr iend . In these
compo unds sakizi , fr iend, i s ch anged t o sakha lz. 3m : kumbha kdr alz, a
maker (kdm h)o f po ts (kumbkdndm). W g o-éatam, a hundred o f cows
6 . Compo unds In wh ich th e fir st no un wo u ld be In the Lo cative”Emil ia aksha-saundalz, m . f. n . devo ted to d ice . ur o -j a lz, m . f .
pr o duced o n the br east .
puj akalz, wo r sh ipper o f the go ds, &c.
238 COMPOUND WORDS . 5 1 8
ai m; o f. m : utl amdkak, th e last day. S ometimes m3 ahna isQ
substituted fo r m ahan; m pdr vdhna lz, th e fo r e-no o n. 3735 s :
ku-pur ushall , mascu a bad man,
o r WEE“: lcdpurushalz. m fi : p r a
dchdryalz, masc . a h er editary teach er, i . e . o ne wh o has been a teach er
(dchdrya) befo r e o r fo rm er ly (p m). m m: a-br dhmanab, masc . a no n
Brahman,i . e . no t a B rahm an . m : an-usuali , masc. a no n-h o r se, i . e . no t
a h o r se .
”En-131ml : ghana-sydmab, m . f. n . cl oud—black,fr om ghana, cl o ud,
and s’
ydmo , black . W 2 {shat-p ingalalz, m . f . n . a little br own,
fr om fshat,a l ittle
,and pinga la, br own . mfirqm: sdmi
-km’
tab, m . f. n .
half-done,fr om sdmi
,h al f
,and Icm
’
ta, done .
5 1 8. In some appo sitio nal compo unds, th e qualifying wo r d Is placed last . famfit :vip r agaurulz, a white Br ahman;
"
( WNW r dj ddhamalz, the l owest king ; m iss : bhar ata
s‘r eshthab
,the best Bharata ;KEN T? pur usha vydghr alz, a tiger -l ike man
,a gr eat man ;
°
W 2govm’
ndar akah,a pr ime cow.
I c . N umer al D eterminative Comp ounds .
5 1 9. Determinative compo unds,th e fir st po r t io n o f which is a numer al ,
ar e cal led Dvigu. Th e numeral is always the pr ed icate o f th e noun wh ichfo ll ows . They ar e gener ally neuter s , o r feminines, and ar e meant to expr essaggr egates,but th ey may al so fo rm adjectives
,thu s becoming po ssess ive
compo unds,with o r with o ut secondary suffixes .
If an aggr egate compo und i s fo rmed,final as: a is changed to i f, fem. , o r in
some cases to =si am,neut . Final W an and amat are changed to i t o r 3
.
am.
fiané paficha-gavam,neut. an aggr egate o f five cows
,fr om panchan, five
,
and g o , cow. fi g o (in an aggr egate compo und)i s changed to 1mgava
(Pan . I I . 1,
and If} nau to an ndua . dag: p oncho-
gull , as an
adjective,wo rth five cows (Pan. v . 4 , fgfil : do inaulz, bo ugh t fo r
two sh ips . 3 13m"
dvy-ungulam,
neut . wh at has th e measur e o f two
finger s , fr om dvi, two , and angul i lz, finger ; final i being changed to 2 .
m 2dvy—ahab, masc . a space o f two days ahan changed t o ahab (Pain. 1 1 .
1,
l im z‘
paficha-kapdlalz, m . f. 11 . an o ffer ing (pur o ddsalz)
made in a dish with five compar tments,fr om panchan, five
,and
kapc'
i lam,neut . (Pan. 1 1 . I
, 5 1 , 52 ; I V . I, m tr i- lokf
,fem .
the th r ee wo r l ds h er e the Dvigu comp o und takes th e fem . term ination
t o expr ess an aggr egate (Pan . I V . I, finger? tr i
-bhuvanam,neut . th e
th ree wo r l ds : h er e the Dvigu compo und takes the neuter termination .
W dasfa-kumcim'
,fem. an assemblage o f ten yo uth s . fi g§fi chutur
yugam, neut . th e four ages .
520 . The fo l l owing rules apply to th e changes o f th e final syl lablescompounds . Very few o f th em ar e general as r equ ir ing a change with o ut
5 20 . COMPOUND WORDS . 239
pr eceding wo rds in the compo und . The general r ules are g iven fir st, afterwards the mo re
special , wh ile r ules fo r the fo rmat io n o f o ne s ing le compo und are left o ut , such compo undsbeing with in the sphere o f a dict io nary rather than o f a grammar .
I .
“
ai r fo il , ver se , gt pur , t own, “ up ,water
,HT dlzur , charge, “Wi pe r/tin, path , addfinal W a (Pan. v. 4, $ 2 ar dhar chafi, a half-ver se. This is O pt io nal withtl f'l'i patlzin after th e negat ive
‘H a ; sum apat/mm o r when: apanthdb.
2 .
-( r ayo n, king ,W uhan, day, Ffifl
'
sakl u'
, fr iend, become ”
( T3 r dja, ”at aha,F 8
sakha ; m 2mahdr dj alr. (Pan. V . 4,
3 . m w as , if it means ch ief, becomes m ur asa m as’
co r asam,an excellent
h o r se (Pan . V . 4 , Likewise after “fit pr ati , if the l o cative is expressed ;mpr atyur asam,
o n th e chest (Pan. V . 4,
4 .m akshi , eye, becomes WEI aksha, if it ceases t o mean
'
eye . W 2gava’
kshab, a
window; butm br dhmana’
kshi , the eye o f a Brahman . (Pan . v . 4 ,
5 . W and s, cart ,33m as
’
man, sto ne,m ayas, ir o n, “ sum s , lake, take final“
a a
if the compo und expr esses a kind o r fo rms a name . w as Ica'
ldyasam,black-iro n
butm 2sadayalz, a piece o f go o d ir o n. (Pan . V . 4 ,
6 . m br ahman becomes as: br ahma , if pr eceded by th e name o f a co untry ; 311msur dskgr abr akmalz, a Brahman o f S urashtr a (Pan . V . 4, A fter ha and mmakd that substitutio n is o pt io nal (Pan . V . 4 ,
7. m takshan takes final 33 a after amgr dma and fi x kauza m 2gr dmatakshala,
vil lage carpenter . (Pan. v. 4 ,
8. W .s‘van,
do g , takes final W a after ‘Hfil‘ al l , and after certain wo r ds, no t the names o f
animals, with wh ich it is compar ed ; m fivs: dkar shas‘valc, a do g o f a die,a bad
thr ow (Pan . V . 4 ,
9. 3 1883 adhvan becomes 3886 adl wa after pr epo sitions ma : pradkvalz. (Pan . V . 4 ,
I o . M sdman, hymn, andW loman, hair , become 11TH Santa and 8h ! loma after ufir
pr ati , 3 13 anu,and “SW aca; 313 38112anulomab, r egular ;
“Rafi anul omam,adv.
with the hair o r grain,i . e . r egular ly. (Pan . V . 4,
m tamas becomes m tamasa after“
first ana,“
G sam,and “SN andba ; W andha
tamasam,blind darkness . (Pan . V . 4,
IKE r ahas becomes m r ahasa after "Ha anu, W mm,and 7m l apta ; Em
anur akasalz, so l itary. (Pan. V . 4,
fi var ckas becomes 3 5 8 var chasa after as: br ahma and {F6 hasti ;m br a lzma
var chasam, the power o f a Brahman. (Pan . V . 4,
s. 1 4.Thgo becomes W gava, except at the end o f an adject ival D vigu .
t“WEIpaiichagavam,
five cows but “ 112panchagulz, bo ugh t fo r five cows . (Pan . V . 4, 92 .
1 5 . fi nau, sh ip, becomesW nava,if it fo rms a numer ical aggr egate W panchandvam,
five sh ips . no t wh en it fo rms a numer ical adject ive ;W 2panchanaulz, wo rth five
sh ips . (Pan. V . 4,
1 6 .
“
FRnau, sh ip,after i f ?! ar dha, becomes WT? udva “3m ar dkandvam, half a sh ip .
(Pan . V . 4 ,
1 7.
“
fi lfi khdr i, a measur e o f gr ain, becomes W klzar a as an aggr egate ; fg‘
fiTt dvikkdr am
also after Eraar dlza;m 1 ar dhakhar am. (Pan . V . 4, 1 0 1 .
i18. m anj ali , a handful , after fa dm
'
o r fa tr i, may, as an aggr egate, take final Q a
W dvyanj alam o rm dvyanj a l i, two handfuls . (Pan. V . 4, 1 0 2 .
240 COMPOUND WORDS .
19.“WIFE angulz
'
,finger , after numer al s and indecl inables , becomes W any
dvyangulam,a length o f two finger s . (Pan . V . 4,
sakthi , th igh , becomes“
8 3W saktha after fi t uttar a, 3111 mgr iga, and g? pflrva;
fi fl fl pa’
rvasalctham. (Pan . V . 4 ,
Ufa ra'
tr z'
,nigh t , after
‘ fi sar va, after part it ive wo r ds, after m sankhydta, gm!
punya, l ikewise after numer al s and indecl inables,‘ becomes UH ra'
tr a m sar ca
ratr alz, the wh o le nigh t ; 151 13 2pflrvar dtr alz, th e fo r e-nigh t ; fave?dvi r dtr am, two
nigh ts . (Pan . V . 4,
W uhan,day, under th e same cir cumstances , becomes 151} al ma;m 2sarvdknalz,
thewh o le day : but no t after a numeral wh en it expr esses an aggr egate ;m 2dvyahafi,
two days . Except al so W punydham,a go o d day, and ( 3 713 eka
'
ham,n . and m .
a single day. (Pan . y . 4 , 88
II . Co l lective Comp ounds .
5 2 1 . Co ll ective compo unds (Dvandva)ar e divided into two classes . Th e
fir st class (call ed af a r i tar etar a)compr ises compo unds in wh ich two o r mo r e
W o r ds,that wo uld natur al ly be co nnected by and
,ar e united, the last taking
th e term inatio ns either o f the dual o r th e plur al,acco r ding to the number
o f wo r ds fo rm ing the compo und . The seco nd class (calledm eamdhdr a)compr ises th e same kind o f compo unds but fo rmed into neuter no uns in th e
s ingular . {Ema} has ty- aévaa , an eleph ant and a ho r se,is an instance o f th e
fo rmer , m has tyaévam,the elephants and h o r ses (in an army), an instance
o f th e latter class . Likewisem m? éukla-kri shnan, wh ite and black mgava
’
s’
vam,a cow and a h o r se .
If instead o f a h o r se and an eleph ant, {Elna hastyaévau, th e intentio n
.i s to expr ess h o r ses and elephants,th e compo und takes th e term inations o f
the plural, m : hastyaévdlz.
522 . S ome rules ar e given as to wh ich wo r ds sh o uld stand fir st in a D vandva com
po und . W o r ds with fewer syl lables sh o uld stand fir st w s‘iva-kes
’
avaa, S iva and
Kes'
ava no t"aim kes
’
avas’
ivaa . W o r ds beg inning with avo wel and ending inas a sh o uldstand fir st :mmfiis’a-krz
'
sknau,l sia and Kr ishna . W o r ds ending in Q i (gen. 2 2elz)and
3 a (gen.‘Sfi20k) sh ould stand fir st gfigfi
‘
har i -kar au,Har i and Har a also
bhoktri -bkogyau, the enjo yer and the enjoyed . Lastly, wo r ds o f gr eater impo rtance sh o ul d
have pr ecedence 33331} deva-dai tyau, th e go d and th e demon m a br eikmana
kshatr z'
yan, a Brahman and a Kshatr iya m } mata-pi tar an, mo ther and fathe
in ear lier S anskr it W RI Tp i tar d fath er and mo th er . (Pan. V I . 3 ,
5 23 . W o r ds ending in $1 ,r i, expr essive o f r elatio nship, o r sacr ed titles, fo rming th e
fir st member o f a compo und , and being fo l l owed by ano th er wo r d ending in o r by
33 putr a , so n, change their E5 .
r i into 35"(3 (Pan . V I . 3 , RTEmd’
tfl -t-ffi pi ty-i fo rm
3113 11817 6 ma'tdpi tar an, fath er and m o ther ; q pitfi+ga putr a fo rmW pitdputr au;
if”!ho tr i+¢ fl1poni fo rm fl aws-ml ko tdpo tdr aa , th e Ho tr i and Po tr i pr iests .
524 . Wh en the names o f cer tain deities ar e compo unded, th e fir st sometimes l engthens
its final vowel (Pan. V I . 3 , Thus fflafi‘
s‘
qfi mi tr dvar unau, Mitra and Varuna ;
W i lda} agnishomau, A gni and S oma. S imilar ir r egu lar ities appear in wo rds l ike
242 COMPOUN D WORDS . 5 29
3 . fl i mdr dhan, h ead, substitutes final 35!a after Pg dm'
and fa tr i;W 2dvimzi r dhafi,
having two h eads . (Pan . v . 4 , 1 1 5 .
.m loman, h air , substitutes final 3 !a after W antar and fife. vahilz; W 2antar
l omaZz, having the hairy part inside . (Pan. v. 4 ,I I 1 °
5 . W ndsikd, no se, becomes “ nasa, if it stands at the end o f a name ;m 2gonasafi,
cow-no sed,i . e . a snake ; but no t after s thd la W s thflla-ndsikalz,
large-no sed, i . e . a h o g . The same ch ange takes place after - pr epo sitions ; m
unnasafi, with a pr ominent no se . (Pan . v. 4 , 1 18,
6 . A fter ‘3 a, g: dull , o r g sa , hali, fur r ow, and M sakthi, th igh , may substitute
final ‘3 a ; m : ahalalt o rm : ahal ifi. (Pan. V . 4,
7 . A fter the same particles, W pr aj d, pr o geny, and “ medkd, m ind, ar e tr eated like
no uns ending inw as; gfikfl’
: durmedlzdb. (Pan . v. 4, 12 2 .
8. “fidharma,law, pr eceded by o newo rd, is treated l ike a noun ending 1nW an;W T
kalydnadharmd. (Pan . V . 4 ,
9 . W j ambhd, jaw,after certain wo rds
,becomes W i j ambhan;W suj ambkd.
1 0 . 3 T3 j dnu, knee, after 13pm and‘
H sam, becomes '
§ j nu; IQ . pr aj fiulz (Pan. v. 4,
Th is 18 o ptio nal after fi flr dhva (Pan . v. 4,
W udhas,udder , becomesW udhan;W kundo dhni . (Pan. v. 4,
m dhanus, bOW ,becomes W dhano an , W pushpadhanvd, h aving a bow o f
flower s (Pan . v. 4, In names this is O ptional .I 3 . W j dyd, wife, becomes Wh j dni ;W subhaj dnilc. (Pan. v. 4,
1 4 . W gandha, smel l , subst itutes Tlfll gandhi after cer tain wo rds gfifir: gandhilz. (Pan.
V 4, 1 35- 1 370
1 5 “TE“
pdda, fo o t, becomes WE: paid after certain wo rds ;m vydghr apdd. (Pan . v. 4,
1 38
1 6 . EN danta, t o o th , becomes fi dat after many wo r ds ; Fgfi dvidan, having two teeth ,
(sign o f a certain age); fern . fE'
ET-fi dvidati . (Pan . v. 4 , 1 4 1
— 1 45 .
1 7. kakuda, hump, becomes W kakud after certain wo rds and in certain senses ;
“Elm aj dtakakud, a yo ung bul l befo re h is h umps have gr own. (Pan . v. 4,
1 46- 1 48.
1 8.W w as and o th er wo r ds bel o nging to th e same class add final“
3 ka Wvyddho r askafi, br o ad-chested . (Pan . v. 4 ,
19. W o r ds in fi in add final a ka 1n th e feminine;W bahusvdmikd, h aving many
master s , fr om s dmin,master . (Pan . v. 4 ,
20 . Feminine wo r ds in i f, l ikeW nadi,and wo r ds inW pi , add final
‘
ai Ica Wbahukumdrz
‘
kafi, having many maidens w bahubhar tfl'
kak, having many
hu sbands . (Pan. v. 4 , I 53 )2 1 . Mo st o th er wo r ds may o r may no t add final fi l m;W : bahumdlakalz o r
bahumdldkalz o r“
er-
gem : bakumdlah . (Pan . v. 4, I 54 )
IV . A dver bia l Compounds .
529. A dverbial o r indeclinable compo unds (Avyayibhava)ar e fo rmed
j o ining an indeclinable par t icle with ano th er wo r d . Th e r esulting co
p o unds,in wh ich the indeclinable par t icle fo rm s always th e fir s t
ar e again indecl inable,and generally end
,like adverbs, in th e
terminatio ns o f th e 110m . o r acc. neu t .
53 1 , COMPOUND wo s . 243
Examples : wfirgflzad/zi-har i , upo n Har i , instead o f a ft: ( 3 adhz'
har au,
lo c . sing . mm anu-vishnu, after Vishnu,ins tead o f 3 13 fang anu
via/mum,acc . s ing. 3 11W spa
-Icfl shnam,near to Krishna. fafifm
nir -makshikam,fr ee from flies, flylessly. wfirfign ati-himam
,pas t the
winter , afte r the winter , instead o f wfit fi n ati h imam,acc . s ing .
ugfiqni pr adakshinam, to the r ight . W anu-r dpam,after the fo rm,
i . e . acco r dingly, instead o f 3 13 E l i anu r dpam, acc . sing . W yat t/1d
éakti, acco rding to o ne’s abil ity, instead o f W W saktir yathd. W
eu-tr inum wi th th e gr ass ;m afia satr inam atti , he eats (everything)even th e gr ass , instead o fW 113 tr inena saka, with th e gras s . Wydvach-chhlokam,
at every ver se . m fg amukti,unt il final del ivery.
anu-
gaftgam,near the Ganga. 3 11m upa
-éar adam,near the
autumn ; fr omW sar ad, au tumn (Pan. v . 4, W upa-j ar asam,
at the appr o ach o f o ld age ; fr om 3 l1gjam s,o ld age M alad
sami t o r 3 1mm upa-samidham
,near th e fir e-wo o d fr o m M samidk
,
fir e-wo o d . W upa-r dj am,
near th e king ; fr om m r dj an, king .
530 . There ar e some A vyayibhavas the fir st element o f wh ich is no t an indecl inablecle . Ex . firs
-
g tiskthad-gu, at the t ime when the cows stand to be milked ; W fi’ i
afigam,at th e place wher e the five Gangas meet
, (near the Madhav-rao ghat at
W IT!“pr atyag-gr dmam, west o f the village .
The fo ll owing rules apply to the changes o f the final syllables in adverbial
W o r ds ending in mutes (k, kh, g , gh, ck, okh, j , j h, 1, 171, d, dh, t, th, d, dh , p, pk, b, 611)
may o r may no t take final 3 ? a; m fw upasamidkam o r m fiq upasami t, near
the fir e-wo o d . (Pan. v. 4,
W o rds ending in“SE;an substitute final ‘H a 5911113 5 adhydtmam, with r egar d to o ne
self . (Pan. v. 4,
B ut neuter s inM an may o r may no t ; a s ? upacharmam o r W upacharma, near
the skin . (Pan . v. 4,
H'
cfi nadi,1861111111paur namds
i
,W dgr ahdyani , and fiTfi g ir i may o r may no t
take final 35 a W f‘
a’upanadi o r m upanadam,
near th e r iver . (Pan. v. 4 , 1 10 ,
and
W o rds belonging to the class beginning with ma;s’
ar ad take final ‘3 a 3 1 1Wupas
’
ar adam,about autumn. (Pan. v. 4,
A P P E N D I X I .
D HATUPATHA O R LI ST O F VERBS .
Exp lanation of some of the Ver ba l A nnbandbas o r Indicato ry Letter s .
111 a is put at the end o f r o o ts ending in a co nso nant in o rder to . facili tatetheir pr o nunciatio n .
A ccent . —The last letter o f a r o o t is accented with th e acute, the grave , o rcir cumflex accent
,in o r der to sh ow th at th e verb fo l l ows th e Par asmai
pada,the Atmanepada, o r bo th fo rms .
The r o o ts th emselves ar e divided into uddtta,acutely accented, and anuddtta,
gr avely accented, th e fo rmer admitting , th e latter r ejecting the inter
mediate Q i .
m d pr o h ibits the use o f the intermediate gz’
in the fo rmatio n o f th e N ish thas,
333 , D . Pan. V 1 1 . 2 , 1 6 . E x . gar. phul la lz from W Tfiipkald .
i t r equ ir es the inser tio n o f a nasal afle r th e last r adical vowel , wh ich nasal
is no t to be omitted wh er e a nasal that is actual ly wr itten wo uld be
omitted Pan . v1 1 . I, 58; v 1 . 4, 24 . E x . 3
°
q nandatz’
fr om at?nadi
,Pass . fiufi nandyate ; bu t fr o m fur o r mar manth, Pr es . tit lfir
manthati,Pass . Hm} mathyate.
{( i r sh ows th at a verb may take the fir st o r seco nd ao r ist in th e Parasmai
pada Pan. 1 1 1 . I , 57. E x . m achyutat o r M achyo tit
fr om W chyutir .
i t pr o hibits the use o f th e inte rm ediate Q 7: in the fo rmat io n o f the N is
333 , D . Pan . V I I . 2,1 4 . E x . 3 a: nnnalz fr om andf.
3 u r enders th e admiss io n o f th e intermediate V. Optio nal befo r e the
FIT ted 337, II . Pan . V I I . 2 , 56 ; and ther efo r e inadm is
past part iciple (Pan . V I I . 2 , I E x .W sami tvd o r mm313 éamu; but stint édntab.
3 5 12 r ender s th e admissio n o f the interm ediate { i Optional in th e general
tenses befo r e al l co nso nants but y 337, I . Pan . V I I . and
th erefo r e inadmissible in th e past par ticiple (Pan . V 1 1 . 2 , I EX . 33 1
seddhd o r sax-msed i td fr om fag s idmz; but Fag ; si ddha lz.
‘
EQ ,m
'
pr events th e substitutio n o f th e sh o r t fo r th e lo ng vowel in th e
cated ao r ist o f cau sal s Pan. v1 1 . 4, 2 . E x .Wfr om a}? lokm
'
.
246 131111 CLA SS , PARA SMA IPA D A VERBS .
P. F . m famfm bham‘
tafimz’
, 2 . ufan fa bhavitdsi, 3 . wfim bhavi td, 4 . wf’enn'
a :
bhavitdsvalz, 5 .m : bhavi tdsthab, 6 . Miami} bhavi td’
r au, 7.11mm : bhavi
tdsmab, 8. ufamm bhavi tdstha, 9 . affirm : bhavitdfr a lz, B . 1 . 513111} bhdydgam
2 ,11111 : Nadya
/b, 3 . Em blem/di , 4 . {11TH bhdydsva, 5 . {B REENaif/49161772, 6 .
113mm
bhdydstdm, 7.1331181 bhdydsma, 8.
bim bhdydsta, 9 .1331113: bhziydsnb II Part .
Pr es . tram: bhdvan, Per f. am babhdvdn, Fut . W dhavishydn, Ger . {at
bhdtvd o r0 1111 J i m
/
ya, A dj . affirm : bbavi tdvyab, twain: bhavaniyalt, 31m:
bhc‘
ivyalz
A tmanepadai“: P. 1 . fi bhdve
,bhdvase
, 3 . Wcfif bhdvate,
bhdvdvahe, bhdvethe, 6 .11
'2fi bhdvete, 7A fi fl § bhdvdmahe, blad
vadl we, 9. mfi bhdvante,I . 1 . W 3 dbkave, 2 . W i n: dbhavathdlz, 3 . w as
dbhavata, 4.W dbhavdvahi , 5 .1511-151 1? dbhavethdm, 6 . 3 1313171? dbhavetdm,
7.m fg dbhavdmah i, 8.W dbkavadhvam, 9 .
85015171 dbkavanta, O . 1 . fi n
bhdveya, 2 .m : bhdvethdlz, 3 . W331 bhdveta, 4 . fl at? bhdvevahi , 5 & 1!wbhdveydthdm, 6 . fi imri bhdveydtdm, 7. want? bka
’
vemah i, 8. W386? bhdvedhvam,
9. Wat -1: bhdver an, I . 1 .If? bhdvai , bhdvasva
, 3 .mm? bhdvatdm,
bhdvdvahai , 5 .311?w bhdvethdm
,bhdvetdm,
-13 111? bhdvdmahai , 8 mm?bhdvadl wam, 9.m
i
ni bhdvantdm ll Pf . L a i ababhdvé ,(see no te page
2 . axl fifi babhdvishé, 3 .
“51133 babbdvé, 4 . fl i fi ifi babh i
’
ivivdhe, 5 .
Elm babhd
vdthe, 6 .
-GIT?! babhdvdte, 7.wi fenfi babhdvimdhe
, 8.
“
Raf-
1 831 o r 0
? babkdvidhve’
o r -dhve’
(see 9. fl fa’t babhdvi r e
'
,I A . 1 . W dbhavi shi
, 2 .m :
dbhavishthdb, 3 .W dbhavishta , 4 .mm dbhaviskvahi, 5 .W dbha
vishdthdm, em f-1 11171?dbhavishdtdm, 7.W 1
“? dbhavishmahi , 8.W o r
0
?dbhavidl wam o r -dl wam, 9 . W W dbkavishata
,F . wf‘
q'fi bhavishyé &c. ,
C. w h it} dbhavishye &c .,P . F . 1 . name bhavitd
’
he, 2 . wfimfi bha fvi tdse,
3 . wf‘
arnbhavi td, 4 .m bhavitdsvahe, 5 1112111112 bhavi tdsdthe, 6 . wffl‘
fl'a
bhavitdi’ au, 7.m bhavitdsmahe, 8. 3 96171153 bhavi tdd/we, 9 .
31947111 : bhavi
tdr ab, B . 1 . Wfi‘
flh bhavish iyd, 2 . wf‘anfim: bhavish ishthdlz, 3 . m bhavi
sh ishtd, 4 11121111112 bhavish ivdhi , 5 . wfasfiwm i bhavish iydsthdm, 6 .m mbhavishiya
/stdm
, 7. Wfi fl’tfl fg bhavish imdh i , 8.m o r
0
? bhavish idhvdm o r
-dl wdm, 9. t avish ir dn ll Part . Pr es . m m: bhdvamdnalz, Per f. Hmbabhdvdndb, Fut .W : bhavishydmdnalz.
Passive : P. 1 .1531 67112961, 2 . {di lating/deg 3 . t z
’
tydte, 4 . {swig blat
ydvahe, 5 .3fi
'abhz’
iye’
the, 6 .1fifibhdye’
te, 7.3331131? bhdycimake, 8333153 6hdyddl we,
9 . {lfi bhztydnte, I. abba'
ye &c., 0 .153mbhdye
’
ya &c ., I .315 blzdyaz
’
&c . n
54 67112may be u sed in th e Atmanepada after certain pr epo sitio ns . Even by itself it is
used in the sense o f o btaining : F fimi Fifi sa s’
r iyam bhavate, he o btains happiness . (S ti r .
p . 4 , 1.
1 31 61112with 183 anu means to per ceive, and may yield a passive .
13110 CLA SS, PA RASMA IPA D A vas es . 247
Pf"mg? babhdve
’
l ike A tmanepada, I A . 1 . W fi f’fl o r W dbhavis lzi
,
m am : o r w arm: cit/1511131 111411, 3 . W fir 46mm, dbha’
vishvahi&c .
,l ike A tmanepada, F. Wfiifi o r mfifi : bhc
‘
ivishye’
&c . , C .W o r mnfafidbhdvishye &c . , P. F . Hi
ram? o r “11
353 1? bkdvitdfze &c . ,
B .m o r mf‘qw‘
fubhdvish iyd 810. ll Part. Pr es . 153mm: bhdydmdnalz, Fut . wfawqm: bhc
‘
ivighya’
.
mdnalz, Past 5 3 : bhdtdn.
Causat ive, Parasmaipada : P. Warmth b/zdva’
ydmi , I.W dbhdvayam,
O . mar-Tm bhdvdyeyam, I . bhdvdydni II Pf . WW W bhdvayd
’ficlcakdr a ,
11 A . w ine;dbibhavam,F . wrafinnfiwbhdvayishydmi , 0 . 1 1mm
shyam, P. F . WWW bhdvayitdsmi , B .m bitdvydsam.
Causat ive, Atmanepada P. “WETbhdvdye, I . 2mm} dbhdvaye, 0 .m in;bhc
‘
ivdyeya, I . men? bhdvdyai Pf. Wm bkdvaydfichakr e, II A . t rai n?tibia/l ave
,F . mafia bhdvayislzyé, C . W dbhdvayishye, P. F . Hwfinrfi
bhdvayitdfie, B . mam bhdvayish iyd.
Causative, Passive P. ma bhdvye’
,I .
“SD-11a dblzdvye, 0 . mi n: bhdvyéya ,1. ma bhdvya i Pf. max i-ass, 0
2 1121,cm,
bkdvaydfichakr e, -babhzive,
-dse,
I A . W dbhdvayishi o r W EI dbhdvishi,F. m finfi bhdvayisbye
’
o r
mf‘q’ i bhdvishye’
, C . wwfi firfi dblzdvayishye o r W dblzdvishye, P. F .
m ama» bhdvayitd'
lze o r mfawrzv bhdvitdke, B . m ama bhdvayish i’
yd o r
Hrfafih : bhdvish iyd .
D es iderat ive , Par asmaipada : P. 31551181 tab/1491147111, 1.m 2dbublntsham
,0 . 333113 bdbhdskeyam,
I . 3:31m bdbhdshdni II Pf . gi fl fm bub/12111431"
chakdr a,[ A wgbgfilfidbubhdsh isham, F . ggfw rfwbubhdshis/zydmi , C .
fs
'
gtgfflvidbubhdshishyam,
P. F . gi fflfl‘
rfm bub/idshitdsmi,B . 3 121“ bubhds/zydsam.
D esiderative,A tmanepada P.3 173;bdbh i‘
i she, I . 3 13 1531dbubhfishe,0 .353mbdbhfisheya , I . 313 bzibh i
‘
cshai ll Pf. “
aim bubhfisbdii clzakr e,I A . 1 .W W
dbubhfish ishi, 2 .
1513n dbuhh iish ishthdll , dbublni slzis lzta,bubhashishye
'
, 0 . 1131111 111 dbubhfishishye, P. F . 3 11m bublutslt
gi f’fllfifl bnbh i
‘
tshislaiyd.
D esiderat ive, Passive : P.
“
3115: bubkiishye
'
, I. 21311131 dbubkashye, 0 . 3 713311bubh i
‘
cshye’
ya , bubh i‘
ashyaz’
uPf ggfl fi bubkfishd'
ficlzakr e,I A . 1 .
553mdbubh i
‘
tshiski , 2 . wggf’sm: dbubhz
‘
cshishthdlz, 3 . $121q dbubh i‘
csh i (see0
F . gi fifi bubh i‘
csh ishye’
, C .wggfifi dbubh i‘
cskishye, P. F . 31“ bubhfish itdfte,B . gfifqfih bubin
’
iskish iyd .
Intensive , A tmanepada : P. 1 . bobhaye’
, 2 .31353131bobhfiydse, 3 . 3311317}
bobbin/ cite, 4 .
“
ang ina? bobh i‘
cyd’
vahe, 5 . £ 15313: bo blzz‘
iye’
the, 6 . $1113} bobhfiyéte,7. 33n bo bh i
‘
cydma/i e, 8. bo bh i‘
tydd/we, 9 .3‘
Tbi zfi bo bkdydnte, I .
dbobhz’
iye, 2 . fi l m : dbobhdyatlzdlz, 3 . $1?)n dbo bhziyata , 4 .
bhziydvahi , 5 . mafia-fist? dbo bhdyethdm, 6 . dbo bhdyetdm, 7 .wm fgdbobhdydmaki , 8.
331381531215dboblniyadlzvam, 9 .w i ns a’
bo bhziyanta, 0 .M 11
248 13116 OL‘
A ss, PA RA SMA IPA D A VERBS .
bobhdye’
ya &c.,I . 1 .
fifth-fl bobhdyaz'
, 2 : 3313318 3 .W W Ib'
obhiiydtdm,
4 , 414m ? bob/144411111 111, 5 .bobndye
’
thdm, 6 . bobhdy'
étdm,
7,
13311531111? bobhn
’
ydmahm’
, 8.
“
53111195 bo bhiiyddl wa’
m, 9.
“
48m bobhflya’
nidm ll
Pf . “W asbobhdydinchakr e, I A . 1 .m filfii dbo bhdyiS/zi , 2 .W W : dbobhd
yisfitkdn, gwm 41057147 13144 , 4 . s p am dboshagishmm, N ewdbo bhdyishdthdm, 65 513813f q817lf dbo bhdyishdtdm, 7.W M dbobkdyishmahi ,
8. m i i f’qaai 6 r 0
? dbobkz’
iyidhvam o r -d/ivam, 9. W igfimfl dbobhdyishata,
F .Trfibi f
'
fi bo bbz’
lyishye’
,C .W i fiifi dbo bhz
’
iyisitye, P. F . HIM bo bhdyitdhe,
B . 331W bobh i'
iyis/t iyd.
Intensive, Parasmaipada : P. 1 . M bo’
bhomi o r W bdbhavtmz’
;
2 . fi bfifil bo’
bho shi o r W bo’
bhavis/zi, 3 . fiwfifii bdbho ti o r‘
fl’tifififfl bdbhaviti ,
do bhdvdlz, 5 . f ast: bobhdthdlz, 6 . bobhdtdb, 7. $1548 : bobhdmdlz,
8.
‘éfitgfirbobhdfizd, 9 .M bdbhuvat i , I. 1 .W dbo bhavam, mm : dbobhofi
o r W : dbobhavilz, 3 . mm dbobho t o r W ei-
1 1160671222, 4 .W 660
bh i’
iva,
dbobhdtam, 6 .M RIdbobhdtdm, 7. 8. fl ifi l
dbo bh i’
ita, 9. WM : dbobhavub, 0 .
“
61711111? bo bhdydm,
I . 1 . a‘
marfir 555720514725,
bobhdhz’
, 3.
“
Eh -fig bo’
bho tu Dr W bo’
bhavitn, 4 .
‘
Efiflafi bo’
bhavdva,
5. bobhdtdm,6 .213171? bo bhdtdm, 7. W bo
’
bhavdma, 8. i i i ?!
‘
bo bhdta’
,
9.Eng
-
q bo’
bhu'
vatu n Pf. 1 5 11115112 3 11 bobhavdfizchakdr a, 4 .m bo t/ Iza
vdmc/zalcr iva, 7. $12 11q bobhavd
'
mchakm’
ma al so 1 .W bobba'
va o r i nf :
bo bhdpa, 2 . 3141
—1111 batman/ m, 3 .1mm bo bhdva o r s ma bobbziva, 4 .
111111114
bobhdvivd'x'
,
‘
5 . $11 3 3 : bobhdva'
thnlz, 6 . bbbhdva’
tule, 7.WW bo bhdvimd,
8.$1535!boblnivd, 9 . $113 : bo bhdvdlz, II A . 1 .W 1 35!dbo bhdvam, 2 .m dbo bhdn
p r 35161311311: dbobhdvilz, 3 . swi g dbobhdt o r “
15133153871 dbobhdvit, 4 .m ar dbo
bhdva, 5 . N adi adbo bfidtam,
6 . dbobhdtdm, 7 .W 5? dbobhdma, B fwi fitn
‘
dbobfidta, 9 .W 313: dbobhdvnb (no t W 131 dbobhdvan), I A . W
dbo bhdvisham, 4 . WW dbobndvishva
, 7. W W dbobhaviskma, F .
W 5! bobhavishyc‘imi
, C . “W dbobhavishya‘
m,P. F.M 606112
vitdsmi,B .
1111111111 bo bhdydsam.
No te — Grammar ians wh o al l ow the intensive with o ut“
Ug/a to fo rm an Atmanepada, give
th e fo l lowing fo rms : Pr es . $1336 bo bhdte’
, Impf. "
fla il ? a’
bo bhdta,O pt .M K bdbkuvi
’
ta,
Imp. 6051111111311, Per . Perf . s ums bobkavd’
mchakr e, A o r .m ay a’
bobhaviskta,
Fut . 32W bobhavishya’
te, Co nd .“Hm a
'
bobkavishyata, Per . Fut . ai s f‘
ambobka
vi td'
, B en.M E bobkavishi’
shtd. (S ee Co lebr o oke, p .
The fo rm fi ‘jfi'
fl‘
bo bhuviva is no t sanct io ned by any ru le o f Panini .I
TThe fir st ao r ist is th e u sual fo rm fo r intensives, but in i bhd it is super seded by theseco nd ao r ist
,th is being enjo ined fo r th e simple verb . S ome gr ammar ians, h owever , admit
th e first ao r ist O ptio nal ly fo r 5167112 (C o lebr . p . The co nflict ing O pinio ns o f native
grammar ians o n the co njugatio n o f intensives ar e fully stated by Co lebr o o ke, p . 191 seq.
250 13110 CLA SS , PA RA SMA IPA D A V EBB S .
9 users; F aim s‘
P F . sam,B . 51m , (m , 99, no t
with lingual m,as Car ey gives it) 11 Pt . g fizmg
'v'
élO
W ,Ger . gm O
WA dj . gm : II Pass . g um,
Cau s .m ,D es . a g fimfir, Int .m ,“ Fa .
7 . fmrs idh, to go (fa r), andM s idh,to command (fag).
P .M I .W "Pf. 1 . fairs , 2 .W , 9 . q fig:, I A .W ,
F.M , P. F . irfirar, B . firm .
In th e sense o f commandi ng o r o r daining , this r o o t is marked by technicaland h ence th e intermediate 3 may be omitted . Thus Pf. 2 . fawfim
o r fin e , 4 . f«fisrfirer o r fa ffiw &c .,F . «firt rfir o r «mitt, P . F . «M a ile r,
I A . W 1 (as befo r e), o r 1 . m , 2 211111111 , 3 . WW , 4 . W A
7.exam , 8.
“
251113 , 9 . fl ag: ll Pt . F83 3 Ger . M o r fflgw,°fm ,
A dj .
«firm : o r m : ll Pass . firmrr, Cau s .«unfit, D es . firafimffl o r faffl'
fl ffl QInt .M , a fa
8. weIchad, to be steady, to kil l, to eat.
P. «art‘
s n 2 . a larm, 3 m , warm7.w ere , 8. W , 9 . «Egg I A . mm o r W 6), (PfiD . V I I . 2, 7;
F .M ,P . F . «fem,
B .m u Pt .W t, W E ,Ger .m ,
°«zr, A dj .
Kim : Il Pass . Rafi, Caus . mafia, D es . fi rm ,Int .W , m .
9. «ggad, to speak .
P . «qfir (nfimrefw), I . W (m m ), 0 . 1131 , I . f rag 11 Pf.
W , 9. 31113; I A .W o rW 6), (P513. V I I . 2, 7; F .M ,
“
C . «11W , P. F . «fizz-r, Him "Caus .m fw, D es . fanfaflfi ,
Int .W ,
1 0 . ( Q r ad,to tr ace
,to scr atch .
P. ( i f? ll Pf. 1 . t n? I A .W m W 6),
P. Rafi! (m fir, M fi) Pf. 1 . W (Li), 2 .w , 9. figt, I A . WW 0
1 2 . i s? ar d, to go , to ask,to pain .
P. wi th, I . «rim P1"
. 1 . 2113 3, 2 . «mfiw, 9. m ix , I A .W ,F . a féwfir
Pt .‘
fl féfl z, no t wri t, see al so p . 1 66 ll Caus . fi nfir, W 1 , D es . fl fiq f‘
a’
.
1 3 . g? ind, to govern,
P . igfir, I .m ,0 . $1 , I .m u
The change o f fl into fl i s fo rbidden by Panini VI I I . 3 , 1 1 3 , w
It is admitted by the S ar . The A nubandha 3‘
is somet imes adde
explained to be fo r the sake o f pr o nunciatio n o nly.Co lebr o oke
Its pr o per meaning wo uld be that intermediate is optio nal in thein the past participle 337, II . The fo rms with o ut intermediate
11110 CLA SS , PARA SMA IPA D A vas es . 25 1
IA . f ear ,F .M , o bese“ ,
P . F . 1151111, B .m 11 Pt .m , Per f.
fiat-warm o r mm o rm ,
Per f. Pass .m o r W o r m .
14. fi gm’
nd,to blame
, (m .)P . («Fi fi o r ufirizfi, 98, 8, 2) ll Pf. fi fa
’
z, I A .W ,F . fi q fa,
1 5 . to kiss, (m .)P .
-f’flmfir (M PH, no t 11m , 98, 8, 2) Il Pf . fifim, I A . «firm,
F . fa’r‘
arwfw, P. F . H am, Rm1 6 . mulch, to go .
Rm (may, I . wi
ll s-( nPf. 2 . 3 . aim,
I A M , E sfif’m rfir, P . E sfifm r, R m 11
Pass .
“
SW IG Caus . M , D es . «i faf‘
mrfir.
1 7. fl 0 171011, to go , to wo r sh ip , (4313 and refi t.)Th e Anubandha 3
“
u o f “53 afichu al l ows the o pt io n o f intermediate{i in the ger und,maficki tvd o r W Taktvd
’
,and its nasal r emains, except befo r e weakening fo rms (see mo nth ,
N o . but theA nubandha i i o fgETffi achi r equir es the nasal thr o ugh o ut (D hfitupfitha7.
Pfififl ffl ll Pf. 9.W : (bu t see N o . 5 , no te), I A . WMR,
F . W 911, C .sai l-sma, P . F .
gLi f’i l
'm, B .m (may h e wo r sh ip), w(may he
Pass . W ? andm i , Caus . W fir, D es . M .
D istinguish between ‘Hffl ? ’
wo r sh ipped, Ger .m having wo r shipped, and W
moved (Pan. v11 . 2 , 53 ; v1 . 4 , W never seems to l o se its nasal when it means to
h o no ur . Pass .m h e is h o no ur ed, W he is mo ved . The two r o o ts, h owever , ar e
no t always kept distinct .
1 8. m dnchh, to str etch , (m .)
P . Pfim o r fi a I A .13 13 11 , E N IFKWfi u Cau s .
Wm , D es . mm .
1 9. g? mruch, to go ,
m ll Th is and o th er verbs enumerated 367 take o ptio nally th e fir s t
o r seco nd ao r ist ; W m W ll Pt . 133m, Perf . W 9 Ger . Hffl a'
r,
fi fflm (Pan. 1 . 2 , o r gar.
20 . 5? kar okh, to be cr o o ked, (gi n)P. {é fa 1 43)nPf. Ii i
-é , I A . «W u Pt . gffia : o r git: 43 1 ,
2 1 . fi vaj , to go .
P. W FH u Pf . (a ), 2 . aafaw I A M o r W ,
22 fi vr aj , to go .
P. afl fir n Pf. « affi x, I A . w in 11 Pt. afar : u
es ters fasfir, I .nt m am, mafia .
K k 2
25 2 13110 CLA SS , PA RA SMA IPA D A VERBS .
23 . Eli a];to go , to th r ow.
P.‘Hfi ffl
‘
,I . 3 113 1 "
Efi mu st be substitu ted in the general tenses befo reterminatio ns beginning with vowels . Befo r e al l co nso nants except ( (Pan.
1 1 . 4, 5 6 , var t .)th is substitutio n is o ptio nal , i . e . bo th fl and Efi may be u sed II
- 1 . W m), 2 fess o r farm 335. [mam]. 3 . fi1m , 4 . arm
[E IFWH], 5 ° fm fl‘» 6 W 3, 7° W [mm], 8 m , 9 .w:,I A
ssafl'
i‘
it F . 3'w 332, C .W , P. F . Erin, B .m[F . wfimfir, C . m ,
P. F .‘S fi
'
fi fl 11 Pt . a’ia: [wh im], Per f.m
[mam—q], Ger . afim [warm],
°a1v, A dj . 5mm: [s fim z], swim,
5m: u
Pass .
‘
Ffi‘f fl , Cau s . Emmfir, D es . fafi flfir [E ffl ffl fl ffi], Int .W (afifit is no t
sanctio ned by Panini).
24 . fa ks/ n'
, t o wane, tr ans . to diminish, (Co lebr o o ke)
P M 11 Pf . 1 . Fawn 2 . fafim o r famfim, 9 . fat I A .W ,
F . fiwfir, B .mm 390) ll Pt . Fara: o r film: II Pass .W , Caus m flfir,
D es . fi lm ,Int. ”51m , fififa. The Caus .m bel o ngs to Q 462,
II . 23)it
25 .
"
Gig Ita l, to r ain, to encompass, (3558)
The A nubandha E e prevents th e lengt hening o f the vowel in the ao rist .
P . 311s nPf. W , I A . 213 291 01 0 Vriddh i,
26 . “ gap , to pr o tect ,The verbsmgup , to guar d, fi dhflp, to warm, vi ckh, to g o , “ pan, to traffic,W pan,
t o pr aise, take ”al l ! dya in the special tenses, and take it o ptio nally in the r est .
(Pan. 1 1 1 . 1 , 28;
P. rfim‘
ufir, I . W ham rm ,In fitmxg n Pfi rhqwiw 325 , 3)
3 1mm . mm ,m ,-afa‘n4,
rfif‘
qwfir, o r ffitwfil, P. F . 1fiq 1fimr, Tfififin, o r tfim, B . W o r m "
Pt. rfitnf’crfr: o r mrz, Ger . rfimfiza'
r, rfifirm, o r rmr, A dj .W t, W t
;o r firm“II Cau s . Tfitmfir o r rhmmxfir, D es . W , 3M , W , O
W ET, Int . fi fl ‘lfi ,m .
27. fi dkfip , to warm .
P. {math ll Pf . 13mm o r gm : (no Guna, becau se the vowel is long),I A . 2133111131 o r W .
28. ” tap , to burn, (3)332 ,P. l7a ll Pf. 1 . 1mm (Ci), 2 . 1mm o r PM 335 , 3 . am , I A . L W ,
a m t, 3 3 111111111 , 6 .
“
Emmi F .ma fia, P. F . 11111 , B .m u Pt . 1m ,
The causative canno t have sh o rt a, and th o ugh bo th W estergaar d and B o ehtl ingk
Ro th g ive th e sh o rt a, they pr o duce no auth o r ity fo r it . Th e part icipleW is equally
impo ssibl e, and sh o uld always be changed into W 3.
25 4 13116 CLA SS , PARA SMA IPA D A VERBS .
N o te — 111i may be used in the Atm . with th e pr ep .
“
SIT, if it is eith er intransitive,
W TIE. the tr ee spr eads, o r g overns as its o bject a member o f th e agent’
s b o dy ;W Wlfill h e puts fo rth h is hand . Likewi se with th e pr ep .
eJE‘TT,
“
8,
if it is used
Lr eflect ively; mm ?
‘
a‘
l'i lT-[ he h eaps to geth er h is own r ice . Likewise after 3 11, when it
means to espouse ; “
( F l t 151115 2111151Rfimamar r ied sag : her e the A o r .
.
may al so be 3 1111111;
l ike SEW“be divulged ano ther’
s faults .
3 2. 3 1 9zam, to bow, (m.)P.m 11 Pf. 2 .
717 i? ! o r am ,I A .
1117 11111 F
W ffi, P . F. fiat, B . 3 11111 810 , l ike 1111. 0n th e Cau sative, see 46 1 .
No te— H‘Tmay be co njugated in the Atmanepada. (Pan. 11 1 . 1 ,
Th e A nubandha 3‘
given t o it by some grammar ians is declared wr o ng by o thers .
33 . “ yam, to go , (Hg)P .
713 1’s ll Pf. 1 . W 6), 2 . smfim o r W , 3 . W , 4 . 328,
5 , m 3 : &c ., II A . aqua-
{Q F . nfwwf'
fi (j)338, P . F . 1i1n, B .m u
Pt . 11m, Per f .wffl renq o r W ET-1 , Ger . 11m,°m'
11 o r Wm, A dj . Th an, 717 11: 11
Pass . ”R IF, Caus . “Rafi , A o r . W m , D es .W E, Int . mm? o r firifir.
N o te— W ith pr ep .
”
If it fo l lows th e Atm. , if intransitive. Th e Caus . to o , with th e prep .
WT, may fo l low the A tm . if it means to have patience m W Wait a little . In
. the Atm . the final ,{may be dr o pt 1n the A o r . and B en. m o r W ITH ,W o rm .
( S ee 355 .
Pass .m , Caus .m , A o r .
11snfiuma, Des . fq a'wfa, Int . aw , vgfat .
(Pan. vn . 4, 78
35 . ffl'
i shfl n'
v, to spit,P. W 3 11 Pf. ffi a o r fzfia, I A .W , F . sfawffi 11 Pt. 11 Pas s .
M C aus . ? amffl, D es . fHfi fi RfH o r W it (Pan . vu . 2 , Int .
W . N o Intensive Par asmaipada.
Vowel lengthened in special tenses (see No . Init ial sibilant'
unchangeable
36 . fa ji , t o excel .Pfi l
'
flfiT11 Pf. 2 .Fsr?m o r fanfw , gi ants, am , 5
6 . fwvga 7. f‘
vrfiuw, 8. fan , 9. fa'
rgz, I A .M G F . 91111131, P. F .
B . “ 11 ll Pt.m 3, Perf .m , Ger .m ,A dj W 2, m , in“,
3 1111: 456 , fan: o nly wi th zfa : (Pfin . 1 1 1 . 1 , 1 1 7) 11 Pass .
W , Cau s . W ar, A o r .m , D es . ffl lfifl f’fl, Int m , €1$rfin
fo l l ows th e A tmanepada with the pr epo sit io ns an and far.
_The change o f { into ’T
\in the r edupl icated perfect 1s anomal ous
11111} CLA SS , PA RA SMA IPA D A vas es . 25 5
take place inWTto wither (W ), altho ugh the rule o f Panini might seem to co mprehend
that r o o t after it has taken S amprasfirana . WTfo rms its reduplicated perfectW .
37. W alcsk, to obtain, (W )
N akek fo ll ows also the Sn class ,m akshno ti &c .
5
P.w fn 11 Pf. 1 .m m :
Caus .m , A o r . mm , D es . mfsrfismffi 476)
m, to hew, fo l lows W th ro ugho ut, also m the o ptio nal fo rms o f the
Sn class .
38. fl krish , to drag alo ng, to fur r ow.
P. fi fil ll Pf . 1 .m , 2 .W , 3 .m , 4 . Wm 335, I A . 1 . “ a,
2 . m m , 3 .m mfi( , 41113 1115, 5 .
11m i 6 .m , 8.m , 9m ;
o r am &c . , o r I A . &c . If used in the Atmanepada, the two
fo rms wo uld be,
I A . 2 . m m, aw ,
I A . 4 . 1 . id . 3mm ,
I A . 2 . 4.mm , s wim ,
I A . 4 . 4 .a1qm , 6 . id .
“
I A . 2 . 7.Wm , 9. 3 7mi ,I A .. 4 . 7wm fa 9 “W
F. W o r m ,P . F. fivT o r
‘
éfifir u Pt . firs t, Ger . gig!"Pass .W , Caus .
m ,A o r .m o r W “,
D es . W K, Int. H13W , W m
.
The pecul iar Guna and Vriddh i o f “
56 , viz . ( and ( T, instead o f fi gandW ,take p lace
necessar ily in ER, to emit, and w,to see (Pan . v1 . I , B ET, W , W , and
W K: o ptional ly in verbs with penultimate a , which r eject intermediate Q (Pfin . v1 . 1 ,
a to r ejo ice, am o r “fir, A o r .mm , m m o rW
39. 5 1 121311, to kill .
R imfa 11Pf . L u i s , 2 . sam ,I A fisrflwfi , E flfaw‘f
‘
w, P . E flm
f i l’fim 337, II .
40 . fl ush,to burn.
P. fi s t-“
ar, L ads -11 11 Pf . 1 . vh f-( 1m o r “Ra fi 2 . 3 1111111 1, 3 . ai m,
&c . , I A .M F . afifiwfir, P. B antam,R m 11 Pt .
"
sfifi r: o r
425) 11 D es . i'fifflfflflfir.
L f‘
wg mih , to spr inkle .
Pf . L fifi‘
g, 2 .
4
mm, I A .W F. waft , P. F . W 1 11
25 6 13116 CLA S S,PA RA SMA IPA D A VERBS .
Pt . tfiaz, Per f. Hm (farm ), Ger . lfig'
t ll C au sfi zqfit,M m , D es .m ,
Int . fifnsfir, Ri fe, (i fafa,W esterg .)
42 . {g dab, t o burn .
P . as fa n 2 . &fgv o r a m, E m s; P . F .m , B
23 71 , I A . LW , am t, 3 . 4 . W E , 6 .m , 7. 3mm ,
8. W u, 9. W ag: (see p . 1 85) ll Pt . gm: Caus .mqfa, A o r .W , D es .
w ill , Int . éfifm
43 .73 g lad , to dr o o p al so i mlaz
'
,to fade .
P.va r
-afar, 0 . 1mm?“ Pf. 1 . W él 2 . W o r m , gm d
4 was , 6 3 78 5 . 7 wa s , 8 W , 9 W I A 1 W 8“1 13 7 3 11132, 3 . m a rsh , 4 . 5 . W W , 6 . m rfim , 7. W M ,
8.m m , 9 .wm f‘
agz, F .78 1
'
81fif , P . F .7mm, B .
rum o r f i rm-
( Q 11
Pt . 7EW , Ger . 73 15 11,0 73 111, A dj . mm z, 7 3min; 731 1: N Pass . (imper s .)
7 8 1t h Caus . 73 1111151 o r m afia (D h. P . 1 9, D es . firm , Int .“
ST!
44 . 3 gm’
, to sing ; al so i r ai , to bark, a? kai , to cr o ak .
P. mufir n Pf. an), I A . m in, F .m , P. F . m , B .mMark the ditTer ence between aand T% in the B ened . ll Pt . Tfifi t, Ger .
rfi'
ar,
°mt r, A dj . m am, mal ts , fin: II Pass . rfifi , A o r . wnfir, Caus . nm fa, A o r .
W m , D es . W 3 , Int . a‘ffi‘fi , 3 1m .
45 . fi sktyai, to s o und, to gath er ; al so s tya i, th e same .
P. mi sfit 1 . 3mm” Pf. wail , I A . «mm, F .m , P. F . mm,
B .W 0 ? firm 11 Pt . mum, W m, W WN o te — W ith r egar d to th e initial l ingual sibilant , the Prasada quo tes the V artt ika to
Pan. v1 . I,64 , as gmgwnau sfam Ga ff-[W t I A marginal no te says ,W
m ? 1 W W W375} am aW fiamafiafiq fimm u
46 .
2
27 dai , t o cleanse, (am)Th is verb is dist inguish ed by a mute Rp fr om o th er verbs
,l ike 31 def &c. It is th er efo re
no t compr ised under th e g ghu verbs it takes th e fir st ao r ist (3rd fo rm),and do es no t substitute “
i f o r E e fo r“r!"(i .
P . ( N F?! 11 Pf. afi, I A . 1 .W as, &c ., F . mafia, P. F. arm, B.
M II Pt . 3171: Il Pass .mfi, Caus .m fir, D es .W , Int .W , amfir.
47. Q dhe, to dr ink, (a? )Th is verb is o ne o f th e six so -cal led ”
gghu r o o ts r o o ts wh ich in th e general tenses
h ave fo r th eir base QTdd o r mdbd.
P.W nPf. L atfi, a sh o r e-um, 3 . 4 . afim, 5 . 6 .was 7. afim,
9. 333. It admits I A . 3 . II A . and Red . II A .
25 8 am) CLA SS , PA RA SMA IPA D A VERBS .
9 . figz, II A .m , F .m fir, P . F .mar, B .m n Cau s .mm (mam? h edr ives), D es.W ,
Int .W ,m .
5 2 . a? sad, t o per ish , (Hg )P . 111t (W ) n Pf. 1 . 1mm(a), a irfare o r m , 9 . fig: , II A m
(W ), F . m fir, P. F . na r, B . 1mm11 Pt . 11a : 11 Pass . an}, A o r . mrrf’
q,
Caus . M FR, A o r . “ Fifi , D es .m ,Int .man},m .
53 . tnpd, to dr ink .
P . ftfi fif ll Pf. I .IN}, 2 .W o r “ N , 9. war, II A .W , F .m ,
P . F .
mar, B . 32111 6 392) Pt . tfifiz, Ger . ram ,°qrt r, A dj . mm , mm , i n: u
Pass. fl air, A o r .
‘
flmfir, Cau s . trrmrffr (o r o’er to swal l ow), A o r .m (Pfin.
W I . 4, D es . firtrmfir, Int .W , W TFH.
54 . m ghr d, to smell , to per ceive o do ur .
Lwfirarb O . fain, nPf. 2 . 3m m m ,
II A .m , o r I A W Q 368, F . m fir, P . F . m , R m o r
innit Pt . m : o r m t, Ger . mar 11 Pass .m , A o r . W fir, Caus.
m nfir,wfm o rm ama . vn . 4, D es .m , Int .W , rmrrfir.
55 . rm ( 17177261, to blow.
P asta 1: Pf. an), I A N , F Jmtafa, B . umm( o r M uPam : 11
Pass . marl , A o r .W , Cau s . urrtrrrfir, A o r .
“NW , D es . M fi , Int .
56 . an s thd, to stand, (m.)P. F.rsrf
’a u Pf. m ) (M ), II am g F . enerfir, B .
fi nnu§ 392) 11 Pt.farm, figure", 0mm, A dj .m m ,W :, can: 11 Pass .W ,
A o r . W ri t, Caus . E lm , A o r .W ’ D es . firsrrrf‘
rr, Int .w ,m fir.
N o te— A fter and far, F ITis used in th e Atm . ; also after E T, if it means to affirm
with 3 5 , if it means t o str ive, no t to r ise o r with W ,if it means to wo r sh ip, &c. Pr es .
fim r, Red . Per f. afi , A o r . affa ir, 9 .
"
s tars-
fr, Fut .m i B en.mafia.
57. er mud, to study.
P. H7-rfir ll Pf . L ira}, zfl f’fifl o r HEW , 9 .
1r‘
gz, I A W , B .W o rm "
Pt. W : ll Pass .
‘
a'
rtfi, Caus . 3 1m , A o r fi srfimmr, D es . fwmfir, Int . mam-Ft,
58. gr dd, to give, (m .)P.
i ra frri'e
(M ) uPf . 33, II A .W eB.M G392) 11 Pt . gar , Ger .
ga r (see N o . 200 , Pan . V I I . 4,0m , A dj .mart, W m, Em ll Pass .M ,
Caus . agr‘
trt lfa'
, D es . fq ir, Int .w , m fir.
59. hvr i,to bend .
P . arm-r n Pf . I . 3 . Hart , 4 .m 330 ,
A fter th e pr epo sitio n I! it may be used in the Atmanepada.
13116 CLA SS , PA RA SMA IPA D A vnass . 25 9
9 m : I A warm 9 w ri t, F afa r-
M P . F . 1 i r, B . fi wrII Pt $7 9
Ger W 9O
F , A dj m i, M m, fi t It Pa88 . fi ,
Caus .M a, D es .w fia, Int.m ,m .
60 . ag skand, to appr o ach , (my )
P . a gfa (trfitaafia o r wft fiaiiafia, Pe‘
m. V 1 1 1 . 3 , 73 , 74) ll Pf. L i raa,'
o r wa rn, 9. wa g. o r was" : (see i a, N o . 5), I A .m , 6 . m ,
9m ; o r II A .wa a, F . amfir, P . F . aar, B .
(6 1 03 , Ger . a'
ar 438) ll Pass . a fi , Caus . a a'
qfir, A o r .MQ D es fwa ‘
rafa, Int. W m ? 485), w=fla fa
6 1 . atr i'
, to cr o ss .
P . HTfiT ll Pf. 1 . am 2 . fift fl , 3 .m , 4 . FEET, I A .m , F . 1c wFa
o r at’twfrr P . F . afitm o r afiar, B . fi fira In the A tmanepada
we generally find the verb u sed as Tudfid i, P . fan}, Pf. Pr} , A o r . w e
o r waft ? o r mafia, F . afit flfi B . afi tfia o r m ll Pt . a‘hfig Ger . fi fir,
Orfifr 11 Pass . afifir, Caus . HTUTfiT, D es . Faaft af
’a o r fiarrfiwfa o r
fififififa, Int . firfifi ‘
, araffi.
6 2. “I r anj, to tinge .
This verb and 351 dams’
, to b ite, fi safij , to stick, and H i svanj , to embrace (Pan. v1 .
4 , 5 , dr o p th e penult imate nasal 1n th e special tenses 345 ,10)andm theweakeni ng
fo rms 344. 395 , no te)
I.
D. ,W FH
-rrt rm, F . ia rfia, P .
“
(ma A l so u sed
the A tmanepada : P . a re}, Pf. 1 . ( ta, 2 . t tfiafi I A . 3 .m , 9. W ll
“
( a t o r fair (P99 . v1 . 4, 3 1 , § 438) ll Passa afir (Pan. 1 1 1 .
o r t flwfir to hunt 46 2, A o r .m o r m , D es .
Int . ( Rafi , t ri fai .
63 . W ki t, to cur e, (fan )and some o ther verbs wh ich ar e r eferr ed to the B huclass always take the desiderative
terminat io ns, if used in certain senses . fan—
( ki t, if it means to dwel l , bel o ngs to th eChur cl ass , o r , acco r ding to V opadeva, it may be r egular ly co njugated as a B hfi verb ;but if it means t o cur e , it is fwf
‘
amfir chiki tsati .
P. ffi 'fii fl tfia, 1 . a rm &c . n Pf. ram -arm , I A .m , F . fa
P. F . fwfafiaar.
In th e same way ar e conjugated 472)1 . “ (to conceal),W he despises .
2 . W (to sharpen), fafaafi h e endur es .
3 . m (to r ever e), lfifli ‘lfir h e investigates .
4 .
“
W (to bind), film h e lo ath es .
5 . W (to cut), a'
i‘a'mfia h e st raightens .
6 . m (to sharpen), afisfitrfia he sharpens .
L I 2
260 CLA SS,ATMA N EPA D A VERBS .
64. t rapat, t o fall , (wn.-
g.)P. trafa (trf
‘
mrafa) n Pf. L W H, 11 A . W F . am 11
Pt . wfim: ll Pass . ma, A o r . a trrfa, Cau s . mania, D es . fitmfawfir o r frmrfk
3379 II ’
65 . wavas , t o dwel l .
P. aafa n Pf . 1 . m (a), 2 . a fa r o r m , 3 . m , 4 . sati re, 5 .w ,
7. affair, 9. agz, I A . L amar 2 . awmfiz, 3 .
65 1172113 ? F . aarfa, P . F .Eran, B . au ra 11 Pt .
"
affirm, Ger
0m u Pass . 3 a, Caus . m afia, A 0 13 mm , D es .
66 . aavad, to speak .
P.W II Pf . 2 . 3 3m, 9 . I A .W , F .
m a 11 Pt . a'fiaaa Ger . wf
‘
aarr 11 Pass . “a, A o r . aarfa, Cau s . w'
rawfir,
aw’twaa, D es . Int .W ,
“
errata.
67. fa ém'
,to swel l
, (m .)P. a trfia ll Pf. 1 . 31m m) o r ffiram (ii), a w l ! o r fisra fitrw, 3 .
MW 4wrjvjfaa o r fafiafaa 5 .m z o r fafm rgt, 9 m ? “
I A . aa‘
lfia, II A a aa o r a fifirfia'
qa and aam , F . M , P. F
B . mura l!Pt . fir‘
a: II Pass . sma, Cau s .m afia, A o r . a ffirm ,D es .
Int .W o r fifisgra.
II . A tmanepada.V erbs .
68. airedit, to gr ow.
P . mar, 1 . an , o ar-a, L ea
-at u Pf. m a F . Pfiwfir, Q i firwa,
‘
EfiJflT, I A . 1 . W ET, 2 . 3133912, 3 . PM , 4 . Elem , 5 . W ,
7 M B wafirn‘ta u Pt rzf’ua "Pass .
Caus . Pr es . m fir,°H, Per f W , F . ( M ,
03, Co nd .
°fr. P. F . Hui
—"rm , H A . m m, D es . t avern .
69. W flesh, to see .
P. am}, I . 3m , 0 . afia, I . fia ai n Pf. am , I A . 93m,F .
( l i faaa, P. F . i faar, B . {fafiv ll Pt . affirm ll Caus . ia trfa, A o r .
D es . fifwfiafi .
70 . aadad, to give .
P. gi ft, I . a gar, 0 . rain, I . aaai n Pf. 3 . aaa 328, 6 . aaafi ,
(Pain. V I . 4, I A . aafaa, F . afavfi , P . F . afa'
ar, B . afatfi'
e ll Pt .
Pass . WIT, A o r . aarfa, Cau s . ara'
qf'
a, A o r . aa’raaa,
D es . fiaafiafi ,Int
th e passive that 33 111 and 3 353'
s! take Atmanepada terminatio ns .
B IN?! CLA SS , ATMA N EPA D A VERBS .
78. amay, to go .
P . am}, I . W ll Pf. amiafii (Pan. I I I . I , I A . nm , 2 .W ,
3 .m , 4 . M , 5 . W , 6 .mfu ni, 7. mfiwfg, a wfimi o r
9.W , F . wfuwii , B .W W II Causa n‘
q'
qfw, D es .W W .
W ith no it fo rms m ini : h e flees (Pea vm . 2 , Genm ;with n,w it ; and
with Wfi , awai t.
79. fig fit , to aim .
P .$339 I . Q3 ? II Pf.W , I A . F .W , B . ll Caus .W ,
A o r . 3 331 , D es .W .
80 . m ms, to sh ine, (m .)R ama?! n Pf. w fi o r m fifi I A . martin , E m u Caus .
mm , A o r .W , D es .W ,Int .m ,
81 . m feds , to co ugh , (amp)P . aim} nPf .w as 326)n Caus m fa, A o r .m 6
82 . fa? s iv, to serve, (53)Pi ta? N Pf. f’fifi ,
I A . s lim, F .M It Cau s . 5m , A o r .
fl fafifi , D es . fafih fi , Int .M .
83 . in yd, to go , (m .)P . 3 .mi , 6 .
11fi , 9 . fl fi , I st per s . s ing . 3, I . mi l, I st per s . sing . B, O . fi'
rT,
I . aim n Pf . 3 . FR, 6 . awn-Fr, 9 . “fi t , I A . mamf’a, 2 .
‘W TTFJ‘
R, 3 . m &c .,
F .TITBfi , B .m ll Pass . wfi
'
qfi, A o r .m , Cau s . m uffl, A o r .m , D es .
m , Int .W .
84 .
“
5 m , to go , to kill ( i), to Speak, (8 35)P . ( a? n Pf. 3 .
”
6 6 3, 6 . Em ir, 9. gcfift , I A t as u Caus . tm fi ,A o r .
M G474 and
85 if de, to pr o tect,P. §fi Il . 1 . fi afin . V I I . 4, $3, I A . I .m , 2 .m
N o te— It Is o ne o f th e ”
g verbs ;3 ,to pr o tect , fo rmsM In th e pr esent, but fo l l owsa
in the gener al tenses .
86 . g irdyut, to sh ine, (gm)P . i n? II Pf . fag? (Pan . V I I . 4, I A .
33 3?!w o r alga-
( G)367 : Pan . I .
3 , 91 ; U I 1 9 E m , B . zfifififiv ll Cau s .M , A o r .W , D es .
fagfafi o r fe'
zfifilfi , Int .Egfifl ,E'
sfif’
a .
N o te— The verbs beginning with fi o ptionally admit th e II A o r . Parasmaipada
87. fi vr i t, to be,
P . Hfii ll Pf. I A . o r.W ’ F . affiufi o r afifir, B .m ll Cau s .
B Hfi’ CLA SS , ATMA N EPA D A vas es . 26 3
‘
élfi'
QfiT, A cnmfl o rm wanw u . 4, D es . f’fl'
flffi'fi o r m , Int.
N o te— The verbs beginning with 31 , i .s .31 ,w,919 3 Fig“ , are o ptio nally Parasmai
pada in the ao r ist, future , co nditi o nal , des iderative (Pan. 1 . 3 , 9 1 The same verbs dono t take 3: in their Parasmaipada tenses (Pan. V I I . 2
, as to 31 , see Fi g . vu . 2 , 60 ,
and I . 3 , 93 .
88. B ig syand, to spr inkle o r dr o p, (tug )r am s,
a smifizwmi ; m m “. W ), o r II A . ame m a ul“ F IFE-flo r tzi
'
afir o r W (Pan. V I I . see N o . B .mfztfi? o r W e inPt .
amt, Ger . 1 : 1“
q o r W (Pan. V I . ll Caus .W , D es .m o r
M o r fafimfi .
89. 5 1 1m’
p , to be able,P . m a ll w
’a'
ga I A .. 3 .W o rm , 6 . 21m ” .m m , o r II A o r .
90 . “ vyath, to fear , to su ffer pain .
P.W ll Pf.ma (Pam vu . 4, I A .W ,F .W ll Pass . W 3,
A o r . waxfiq Cau s .m fa‘
, D es . firmfwfi , Int .W , wafer.
91 . ( 1 r am, to spo r t , (m.)P. tfi ; with f
‘
q'
, an, l i ft , an, o ptio nally Par asmaipada ; fatnf‘a (Pan. 1 .
3, 83) Pf. i s} , I A .W , after pr epo sitio nsW , F . tar} Pt . rm, Ger .
(m,00 11 o r ll Caus . ( unfit, A o r . ? flufib D es . fi ts-ir, Int . tt t zfi, i t sfifir.
92. HQ tvar , to hur ry, (m .)The verbs a
? jvar , H Qtear , fai sr iv, fl at)
, fl i mav, substitute i tvmr , 7g ti r , Q M ,
3 5a, {mu (Pan . V I . 4, 20) befo r e weakening terminatio ns beginning with co nso nants,
except semivowel s, and if used as mo no syl labic nominal bases . Hence 35332j urzmlz,m : tur nah, QR. srutalz,
“
aimutah,11a: mutab.
R W n Pfiwan l A n g m fta s w o r m fiq, F fi’mfit gfi
432) o r E tta: u Caus . m qfii 462, II . A o r . mm 375’
r), D es .
93 . Hg sah, to bear ,P. as? u Pf. IE , I A .m tge , F . ufzwir, P. F .
“
afa r o r that 337, II . 2) 11
Pt . that, A dj .”
Ga : 456 , 6) Pass . ( refit, Cau s .m fir, A o r .W , Caus.
D es .m m , D es . fafl fgflfi’
, Int .m ,m .
No te—‘
fl'
i and"
i i change i t? into i ifiwh en as wo ul d be fo ll owed by Q,the r esult o f the
amalgamatio n o f i with a fo l lowing dental Pan. V I . 3 , 1 1 2 .
III . Par asmaipada and A tmanepada V erbs.
9 "I i r dj , to sh ine,
P . tmfir, °i\
l ll Pf .”
( U-fl , ( I la o r fi (Pan . V I . 4, I A .W ’ m ,
264 13116 CLA SS, PA RA SMAIPA D A‘
A N D ATMA N EPA D A VERBS .
95 . Fri khan, to dig .
P. m fa’kuPf. 3 . am , 6 . ag gz, 328, I A .W 6),
but Atm .m o nly, F . afiwfir, B .m o r W 391)uPt. m 2, Ger .
{arm o r ah a r, A dj . 1311: 456 , 6) II Pass . law? o r an? Cau s .
m ,D es .w ,
°Ir, Int . fi li a l? o r‘
w‘
fl l imfi
96 . g hr i , to take,
97. {Kguh, to h ide, (igg )
{K guh takes 3 5 22 befo r e terminat io ns beg inning with vowels that wo uld o r dinar ily
r equ ir e Guna.
PJ gfif u , 3 gr rg, 4W €33 5 3W 3 810 ¢
Atm . L gfi ,o r Hfl fgfi &c I A o r . see § 36 2, F .W m M ,
P . F .main o r Thar, B en. A tm . {fai ls o r W ? 345) II Pt . g t, A dj . o r
98. fist sr i , to go , t o serve, (m.)R M 11 Pf. 2 . farm , 3 . farm
'
s , 4 . WW , 5 . WW ,
II A .m F .M FR, B . S im ll Pass . uh }, A o r .m ,Cau s .
mum’s, A er -
“
ammo D es fswfw fa o r w sfir 471 , 3 ; § 337, 11Int .W .
99. fl yaj , to wo r ship .
P ‘N fi'"Pf ”W o rmwsa sxfi ffi s is"?d aifl
'
s'
w i fsfl S . .M I A r mmm ,
. x
0
333: ll Pass . gafi , Caus . ma‘
qfir, A o r . W fl ’ D es . finrmfir, Int
1 00 . fl vap ,to sow, to weave, (gent)
Pm aqfir n Pf x 3 3mm), A tm
1 “ ,m
their own, o r ar e o th erwise difficult .
266 TUD CLA SS , PA B A SMA IPA D A VERBS .
1 0 7. fi much , to l o o sen, (fig)Certain verbs beginning with gfl much take a nasal in th e special tenses . Th ey ar e ,
a? much, “ lap ,
to cut, fag vial, t o find, fa l l ip ,to paint, fil ‘
fl si ck, to spr inkle ,fi kr i t, to cut , fagki nd , to pain, filmpisfl to fo rm . (Pan. v1 1 .
P.W n Pf. gtfi‘
a,I
'
A . WW ,A tm .
fangs D es .W or M ?!
vid, to find,
P . Faef’
wII PINE-era, I I A .m , A tm .safest, F . u
’
Pt . firs t.
1 09. famhfp, to paint .P. rainfal l Pf . ffi fim, 11 A W Q A tm . 11 A fi stf
‘
wm o r I A .safan
(15367)II . Par asmaipada V erbs.
1 1 0 . fl kri'
t,to cut, (ain'
t )P . q
’
afit (see N o . I A .W ,F .M o r w fi w337,
P. F. afim, B .m u Pt . 5 ? II Pass . 3mm,Caus .m , A o r .W fil
o r W W D es . fi l‘
élififl ffl o r Pam 337, Int .m1 1 1 . g igkut, to be cr o o ked, to bend .
Cer tain verbs beginning with $2 kut (D hatupatha 28, 73
— 1 08) do n o t admit o f Guna o r
Vr iddh i, except 11) th e r edupl icated perfect , the causative,and the intensive Parasmai
pada. (Pan . 1 . 2, 1 ; 345, no te .)
P.m nPf . nai ve, aw ,I A .W , F.W ,
P. F . affirm inCau s .
m y l nt i figiza‘fi,
Efiafifg.
1 1 2 .
“
erg erasch, to cut, (W )l3 . aw (see N o . 1 05) u Pf. 1 . m , 2 . Ham o r eras , I A .W
mm1 ! 337, I . F . M o r m ,B .m u Pu r im
1 13 .
“
Tkr i , to scatter .
P. ffi tfir u P£ 3 .W , 6 . van-
gs 9.m : F .
m o r m ll Pt .“
alfi'fl : ll Pass . Caus m ,
D es .W .
N o te— A fter"
S q and”
REIT, 37 takes an initial E if it means t o cut o r to str ike : 3mhe cuts, W ; HFHFERFH he cuts o r he str ikes (Pan V I . 1 4 1) Al so «vi
—“
a ir ?
he dr o ps (Pan . v1 . 1 ,
spr is’
, to to uch .
PW nPIim fi, I A . WW O rW o rw , E mssxfa o rmfi fa,B .W ll Pt. m t "B eam s ,
h am , m .
1 1 5 . W pr ackk, to ask
P. 33 1131 (see N o . 1 05) n 2 .1mm o r m , 32
D
D IV CLA S S , PA RA SMA IPA D A vnaa‘
s . 267
1 1 6 . wmy, to let o ff .EW 11 Pf. L imit, mu ffin o r m (see N o . 48), I Ae , R am 11
Pt . gm.
1 1 7. fl i tmay , to sink, (Rif t)
fi majj and “ m s (D iv) insert a nasal befo re strengthening terminat io ns beginning withco nso nants , except nasals and semivowel s . (Pan. V 1 1 . 1 ,
P m u Pf . L ima , 2 .1mm o r W , I A . 6 .wris t,
9. swig; F .m , P . E th er 11 Pt . mat, Ger . $5 1 o r m 438) u Caus .
m afia, A o r .W , D es .m , Int . W }, “Fifi .
1 1 8. “ ish, to wish ,
P. {a fil (see N o . 3 1), L BW "Pf. 2 . fiffl'
v, 3 .$111, 5 . £33 2,6 . W ‘» wi th , 8. i s, 9 . i gz, I A .m,
F . ( M , P. R m o r t fim 337,
II . I ) ll Pt . gs : Ger . {gr o r vzfirm II Pass . {w}, A o r . i fs, Caus . m fit , A o r .
III . A tmanepada V erbs .
1 1 9. qmri , to die,
qmz'i , to die, th ough an Atmanepada verb
,takes Atmanepada fo rms o nl y in the Special
tenses, the ao r i st , and benedict ive . (P511 . 1 . 3 , 6 1 .
P fenfifii Iwwfana wei rr L fi fi u Pfi a m fl mi g m fl m ,
I A . L WTFQ , 2 .M t, F . Hfifl ffl , P . F .m , B JFfi'
? II Pt .
lin: II Pass . f’mfi , Caus . mm , D es . gqfifir, Int .W .
1 20 .
‘
g dri , to o bser ve, (K )P. fgjzfir n Pfi qi , I A .W , F . stint}, P . F . ai r, 11 Pass . Fgfi ,
Caus .m ,D es . feafifi (t)332, It is chiefly used with the pr epo siti o n
33 1 to r egar d, to co nsider .
D iv C lass (D ivdd i , I V C lass).
I . Par asmaipada V erbs .
1 2 1 . fe'
i div, to play, (fag)P . «23 11 , F . i firwfa, P. Fwi fam B . aim
-
( n
Pt W o r 53 ° 442, Ger 31511 6 43 1 , 1) o r afarm u Caus . gm , D es .
r gfl fl fi Int 311m .
II . 2) ll Pt . IF“ ll Caus .W , A o r .m o r mm , D es . f=lT-tffi'
flffl Or
Final‘
53 is changed to ft 1 1 0) in the special tenses o f Tud ver bs, l ikewise be fo re the‘l o f the passive and benedictive (Pan . v1 1 . 4, A fterwar ds ft again becomesfi l l. acco rdingto Pan. v1 . 4 , 77.
M 111 2
'
268 D IV CLA SS , PARA SMA IPA D A VERBS .
W o r II A .m F . affi xfit o r 316w B . i nfi rm11 Pt .fi t It Caus .m i rth 462, D es . fafl ftfiffi o r ffivfiflf
’fl 337, II .
1 24. sh so , to sh arpen .
Verbs ending in ‘Efi 0 dr o p i ‘h o
‘
befo r e the 1!ya o f the D iv class (P511 . vu . 3, e . g .
“
f f chho , t o cut,f l s o , to finish
, f l do , t o cut .
R u t-
fr, I .m , u Pam n zg), I A W o r II A
Pass .W , C .aus m , D es .w ,Int .m .
1 25 . If? so , to finish .
w fir q mfi‘ I A N , H A W ,
-a
392) 11 Pt . that, Ger .
°m'
q 11 Pass . th e Caus . m itt, D es .
m ,Int .W .
1 26 . am vyadh, t o str ike .
P.M (see N o . 1 05) ll Pf. 3 . Fa rm 9.m , I A . nm ,
1 27. qq trip , to del igh t .
A n ti t r o r “ t i er HEW , 4-HFJF‘W 0 1”
W ,
I M G337, I . 3) o r m (see N o . 38) o r II A .W ’
‘
F . affiwfa o r méif‘
fl o r atmfi , P. F . affim, wfir o r am, E m u Pa ils : 11
Pass . 71am, Caus .m , A o r . W m o r mm, D es . faqwfit o r W ,
Int .mm .
1 28. g‘
gmuh, to be fo o l ish .
P. gafii uPf. 1 .W , 2 .wi th o r gain o r gi fts , II A . sum 367,M M,
F m o r n’rfgwfir, P . F . firm o r i ts
“
! 1 29)o r lfifzm n Pt . gu t: o r ( a: II
Pass . {a}, Caus .M , D es .W ,W o rW , Int . 1IWW , fi f th
o r m .
Final“
fl , changed to R ,and lengthened befo r e 1
TThe S arasvati gives besides the seco nd ao r ist the o ptional fo rms o f the fir st ao rist
M m 1 1321111 3 337, W TfQ) o r “Tm 360) A cco r ding to Pan . 1 1 1 . 1, 55
the fo rms o f th e fir st ao ri st ar e al l owed in the Atmanepada o nly; but later gram
mar ians fr equently admit fo rms as o ptional wh ich ar e o ppo sed to the gr ammatical system
o f Panini . S ometimes th e evasio n o f th e str ict rules o f Panini may be explained by theadmissio n
'
o f differ ent r o o ts , as, fo r instance, in N o . 1 30 , wh ere th e fir st ao rist Parasmaipada
i f“ , given in the Sarasvati , wh ich is wr ong in the D iv class, m ight be referr ed to the
Kr i class.
CHUR CLA ss, PA RA SMA IPA D A VERBS ONLY.
Char C lass X C lass).
Par asmaipada Verbs only.
136 fi gchur , to steal .
N o Intensive
1 37. fa chi , to gath er ,
Th e ch anges wh ich r o o ts undergo as causatives, take l ikewise place if the
same r o o ts ar e tr eated as Chur verbs . Hence acco r ding to 463 , II . 6 ,
fa, as a Chu r verb , may fo rm P. sw fe o r am , the vowel , h o wever ,
r emaining sh o r t becau se, as a Chu r verb, f"
? is said to beM Q 462, no te)I A W O rm , B . W l? ( o r w e.
N o te— S ever al Chur verbs are marked asM , i . e . as no t length ening their vowel , some
o f which wer e mentio ned in 462 , amo ng the causatives . S uch ar e “ t o know, to make
known “ to pound “I;to po und ; 1131, if it means to feed W to l ive.
1 38. fl krit, to praise .
R afi-
fwfe 462, 2) Il I A fi sfi qee o r M Q 377)
S u C lass (S eddi , V Cla ss).
I . Parasmaipada and A tmanepada V erbs.
1 39. g m , to di stil ,
P . fi fe, I . 2 . fig n Prim ,A tm . g
i
g-ar, I A .M G
th e S ar asvat i al lows al so (but against Pan. V I I . 2, Atm .m ;
t he S tir . all ows al so “ Fa? (but see Pan. V I I . 2 , F . lfifl rfe, P. F . firm,
B .m u Pass . Rafi ,A O L W , Cau s . smufir, A o r . 111m , D es . W i
fe, Int .
N ote— The3 '
o f 5 may be dr o pt befo r e terminations beginning with"
ao r i t, and no tc
r equir ing Guna ; but th is is no t the case if fl is pr eceded by a co nso nant . Th is explains thedo uble fo rmsW . and ga s,w : andW 2, andW ,W andm ; and
Atm . gas-
g M W , 5311? o r 1373125W o rW ,m m”
: cr ew . The
same rule appl ies to the Tan verbs .
140 . fa chi , to co ll ect , (M )P. fi fe ll Pf . 3 . fa émo r W , 2 . fafiwo r faint o r , acco r ding to B har advfija
335 , fas rfw o r faafuw, 9 . fag : o r fag s Atm . Fi fi o r fai r (Pfinw n .
3 , I A . fi nite, Atm . 3 13113 , F .M , P. F.
inn, B . a?“ ll
,Cau s.
‘511111f o r 463, II . 6 , and N o . D es .w(Pan . v1 1 . 3 , Int .W .
14 1 . (a;sl r i, to cover ,P . fi fe n Pf.m , Atm . ?fi ft , I A .
sam , A tm . wa ft-r (no t
su cu ss, PA B A SMA IPA D A vnnss . 27 1
if m i? ) 0” “ I“ 33 2. 5 . a rule wh ich applies to the A tmanepada o nly).F .m 332, P . F . tai l , B . wi re, A tm .W o r m (6332 , 5) 11Pass . E lli , Caus .m ,
D es . feafi fif, Int .
“
Erma .
142 .5!vr z
’
, to ch o o se,P .M II Pf. 1 . M OE), 2 . “ fa l l“, 3 . W , 4 . W , 5 . W , 6 . m ,
7, age, 8.1ra, I A .
“
am 33 2, A tm .m o r F erd ? 340) o r
we 337, II . F . aftwfe o r afiwfe. P . F f af’tm o r af ter, B . farm, A tm .
a‘f’cfifie (no t
‘
erfi tflv, Pan. v1 1 . 2 , 39) II Pass . farafi, A o r . waf t , Caus . !nmfe
D es .w , M o r gaff e, Int.w .
II . Par asmaipada V erbs .
143 . fg h i , to go , to gr ow.
P . n-fife II Pf. farm: (Pan . V I I . 3 , I A .w , F .m , P. F . Q1",B . gin
-re n Caus . gm ,
A o r . W m (r ea m . 3, D es . W afer, Int .
1 44. m éak, to be able, (mg )I A .m , F .m fe, P. F . qrse n Pew u
Pass sfi fi (mi W e it can be do ne), Cau s m fl ffl , A o r .W ’ D es .
m ,Int .m .
145 . ér u,to h ear .
This verb is by native gr ammar ians classed with the B hfi verbs, th o ugh as ir regular . It
substitutes STa‘r i fo r W s’
r u in th e Special tenses .
m , A o r .W o rM ( D es .W (Pan . 1 . Int ffiqpfi.
1 46 . m ay) , to o btain, (mg)
w m,A o rm nmfir P m u Pt snw 11 Pas s W ,
C aus . ,am fir
III . A tmanepada V erbs.
272 TA N CLA SS , PA RA SMA IPA D A A N D ATMA N EPA D A VERBS .
.mmvi, 6m , 7.mmf‘
e, 8.mew, 9 . ;mmr o r 1 . ,m-Fsrfq
73m ,P. .F w r o rm‘
sm ,F .W o rm-“
51m , B .W o rm“
Pt . we . ll Pass .75151177, D es . WNW ,
Int .WTan C lass (Tanvdd i , VI I I C lass).
A l l verbs belonging t o this class ar e Parasmaipada and
A tmanepada V erbs .
1 48.
“
ire tan, to str etch,
-e,
I . ll Pf. 3 .were , 9 . eat, I A . m ete o r 313 1 31 6 Atm . 3 .W o r
m zw efear: o r m m, F . efewfe , P. F. efe er, B . em , Atm . :fi
t il? 1! Pt .
‘
eez, Ger . em o r eff-Tm II Pass enfi'
o r ewe Caus. em fe,
A o r . W e,D es . firefevfe o r feei e, Int . fiflwfi.
N o te — Verbs o f th e Tan class may raise their penul timate sh o rt vowel by Guna;wto go , m iffe o rW . W 33m
“
!“
511 filfiT, see . 1 1 . 1 1 , 3 .
1 50 . fig kshz’
n, to kill .
E ffenfife o r m ll I A .W ’ Atm.W m W .
1 5 1 . we;saw,to o btain, (W ’)
P. fi fe ll Pf. ame. Atm . in}, I A .m (Ci), Atm .W o r m (P511.
1 1 . 4. 79 ; v1 . 4. 42)1 5 2. q kri , to do , (m .)
i i kf z’ befo r e weak terminatio ns becomes 3K Icar , but befo r e str o ng terminat ions kur .
Befo re i v and Em, and the Rg o f the O ptative, the V ikarana. "i n is r ejected, but ther adical 3
“
u is no t lengthened .
P. L aiflfe . 2 . wfife, 3 . wfife, 5 .
“
gm , 6 . greet, 7. Qui z,
9. fi fe, L L W I EI, mm , 3 .m , 4 . 5 .W ,6 .W , 7.W ,
8.w , 9.W ,0 . L fi , 9. fi t, I . L aw ful , 2 . “ a 4 . m .
6 m ., 7w , 8-eras, I A .
4 m , 5 .m ,
1 . f'
awm, a ffi rm,1
7.w 8.
9 M V
' A tmanepada : 63 3-318,
8W a gufi fl I fl ew. e w e s“
see W ’ s wfiw 6
8W , gi afi fi‘
, 2 . 3m , 4 .
5 .m , 6 .m , 7 3 11 3 1113, 8. 5 5 557, e fi i f II Pf. 2 .
“
GTE
mi CLASS. PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERB S.
1 57 . “ gr aft, to take.
This r o ot takes Samprasfirana in th e special tenses and befo re o ther weakening terminations .
(Pan. v1 . 1 ,
IHM Q W ), 1&1t N Pf } m fih z W
5 W 6 3 83 133 9 7 8
II . Par asmaipada V erbs .
1 58.m fg/d, to gr owweak .
Th is r o o t takes S amprasarana in th e special tenses and befo re o th er weakening terminations .
(S ee N o .
P. firmfif, Lwfir-mr, 0 m , LN 11 Pf m. f’ifi ifi, a fafi imo rm
3 M , A ffirm ,I ii -m a P M ,
R m "Pt . sfiw: (amt: as
par ti ciple would be wr ong, see Pan. V I I I . 2, 44 ; but it o ccur s in the sense
o f o ld (Am . Ko sh a,ed . Lo isel . p . and in th e Vedic S anskr it ; see Kuhn,
Beitrage, vo l . v1 . p . Ger .m ,0m II Caus .m ,
D es .m ,
Int . W .
159.
“mjfid, to know.
Thi s verb substitutesmj ci in the special tenses . (Pfin. V I I . 3,
P .W ,L aw , 0 .W m, L ana
-(g nPf .wad, I A N , Em ,
P.F. 3m , Em or 211ml 11 Pt .m : u,Pass -
gm},mam Gaus m ffl fi),
(see. 462, II . A o r .m , D es .m , Int.m i .
1 60 . fl bandh , to bind .
Rm , O.M 1111 , L N ll Pf . L W , mfi fifl l o r o r
W ,I A . 1 . fl fl
'lfl i, 2 .W 3, 3 .m , 4 .m , 5 .m , 6 .W EI, 7.m ,
8.W 3’, 9. M 75 3, F . fimfil , P. F . W ,
B .m ll Pt . $3 7, Ger .W H Pass.
Q ua, A o r .m ,D es . fwfiwfir, Int .W , W .
III . A tmanepada V erbs.
. 3 cm, to cher ish ,
Pwfi l m o w l m w f fi m m o r m o r w ,
Fwfl f‘tfi o r aflfi
Pass . fafi , Caus .m fir D es . fiafi lfi o r farmlfi ,Int .W , fi ffi &c .
Contracted forms, o f the D 88. and Int ., and f lag}.
A D CLA S S,PA RA SMA IPAD A vnass. 275
A d Class (A dddi, I I Class).
I . Parasmaipada V erbs .
1 62. l iq ad,to eat .
P. L “ , mafia, 4 m , 5mm , 6 .1mm, 7. 1smz, am , ga ffer,
I. n a l (Pan. vn . 3 , 3 .m , 4 .m , 5 .W , 6 . “ I f,
8.m m , ( 1m ,
7.W , 8. W , 9. ll Pf. 1 .wn, : o r subs ti tutingml], 1 .m (a),4 m , 6 . 3mm, mm suww mga II A .
1 .W , 2 .m m, 3 'W ’ F . unfit , P. F. m ,R m n Pt . “ 1 , Ger .
W , W (P513. 1 1 . 4, 36) ll Pass .wfi ,Cana vmgrf
’fl, D es .
1 63 . “1 1934, to eat .
“
1 64. mmd, to measure .
P.wrfir, I . 3m , 9.
6mm. or my , O m , 1 . 1e n Pf. ma, I A .W ,
F .mmfil, P . F . mm, B .M II Pt. farm,Ger . film,
WIN ll Pass . lfi'fi ,A o r .
m , Caus .m afia, A o r .m , D es .m , Int .m , m fil or Hfi f‘fl.
1 65 . In yd , to go .
PJITfil , 1. 3m , 9 m or $32, (1 1111171 , I .1113 Il Pfimfi, I A N ,
F . m , P. F. mm, B . M ii Pt. 11111: II Pass . 1113, Caus . 111m , A o r .
m , D 88. M y Int .m1 66 . an khyd, to proclaim .
P. arrffi, I .m , 0 .m ,I . 3 113 u Pf. Hu i , II A .m ,
F .W ,
P. F .m , Rm orM u Pt .m : u Pass . u n i , A enm fi ,C aus .
m , A o r .m ,D es . fi lm , Int .W .
1 67. mvaé,to desire .
This i'o o t takes Samprasfirana before the strong terminations of the special tenses, and in theweakening forms general ly.
g.,Wfil 61 3m, ” swim s ui t ,
9 am 0 mWE inserts fl before terminations consisting of one consonant .
1' When ft i s added M ediately to the final consonant of a root, it is changed to fii
(Pan. v1 . 4 , 32 1 , note I .
II In the tenses where W 18 deficient, “ is used instead .
1TThis 18 formed from“ to eat, a redupli cated form ofW (Pap. I I 4, 36
N D 2
,276 A D CLA S S, PARA SMA IPA D A VERB S .
8. w , a sst;u Pf. 3 . 3mm, F . am , P. a m ,
B .mm"Pass . arm-FT, C ana m uf
‘
a, D es .
‘
fawfsmfir, Int .margin},m .
1 68. a ban,to kill .
This verb dr o ps its final i n befo re th e str o ng term inat io ns o f th e special tenses, and in theweakening fo rms generally, if th e terminations begin with any co nso nants except nasalso r semivowel s (Pan . V I . 4, B efo r e str o ng terminatio ns beginning with vowels
,
fi han becomesRg l m(Pan. V I I . 3 , In the ao r ist and benedict ive E”( vad/z is substituted . The desiderative, intensive, and th e ao r ist passive ar e der ived fr om 1ri ghan,
the causative fr om fi ghat .
P . L gfw, 2 . i ts , 4 m , 61 m, g. i f=a, I .
,
x .
m , 2 w a 3 m a 4 m a am , Tm , Q M “
,
0 'm ,I . L m y 2 i f? (Pam V I 4, 3 4 W 9 5 ° {n
o
} 6 m7.
“
fi lm, 8. 33 , n Pf. L ama (paa w . 3, 2 . surf-11 1 o r win,
3 . 5mm, 4 . aft er, 5 m a 6 .m : , 7. 3mm 9.w , I A .W ,
“
F .
m , P. F. B .m ll Pt . gm,Ger . gm,
°
q 449) II Pass . ( fl ,
A o r . wwfa o r waft : Cau s .m , A O LW ,D es .W afer, Int.
firm? o r W (Pan. V I I . 4, 30 , var t ., h e kills), fi fir.
1 69. gy u, to mix .
Verbs o f th is clas s ending in 3‘
u take, in the special tenses,Vriddhi instead o f Guna befo re
weak term inatio ns beginning with co nso nants . (Pan . V I I . 3 , 89.
Pu x rfi’
f’q fl
-‘5 3m3 7o -W a 8 m aw O ’mI r w fam gfz, fi a w m m amwm mm w am g m nw s
W , 9 . I A .W ,F . 11
'Fémfii , P. F . affirm,B .m u Pt . gm 11 Pass .
Elfin A o r . W 155, Caus . t 1m ,D es .W o r fmfi qfa, Int .
"thig h, m
1 70 .
“
6 m ,to sh o ut .
The verbs 3a
m, E m,E];s tu may take {5 befo r e a l l terminatio ns o f the special tensesbeginning with consonants . (Pan . V I I . 3 ,
P xwfifn o r tfi fwfl fifq o r t a‘rfa
5 .m o r al-em ,
E m ,R W II Pt mz n Pass g fi , Caus t TW fiT D es.
No te— The Sarasvati givesm , fiwfa, and i f“ ; but see 332, 4 . It l ik
extends the use o f i to ato praise.
I 7I . 3 i , ,
to go .
P. L uf‘
n, 2 . after, 31 th ,.4 fi rs t, I .
278 A D CLA SS,PA RA SMA IPA D A VERB s.
3 18W ,11;-q : o r W at (Pan. I I I . I , I I 3) n Pass.W ,
Caus. afi afi ,
1 75 . aavd ch , to speak .
2 am, 5 . am , o r
fiat, I . L W , 2 .m , 3 .m , 4 .mam, 5 m , 6 .W , 7. m ,
9 .m *, 0 .m , I . I . 4 . W , 5 . T5 , 6 . 33 5, 7-m
s.var as? “ n Pas.w a g. asgz, II A . F .m , P. E m ,
B .
e
m ll Pt .“
sat: ll Pass . a'
afi ,A o r . mafia , Caus . araafir, A o r . mafia“,
swf’aamfi Int . W
1 76 . m ud w armest )
The verbs S a f a ri , “ swap ,v as, W an,W j aksh take 3 i befo re the terminatio ns
o f the Special tenses beginning with co nso nants, except Ry (Pan. V I I . 2 , B efo re
weak t erminatio ns consisting o f One co nsonant, i t is inserted 3, o r,
acco rding to others,“8 a (Para. V I I . 3 ,
P 1 fl fzffl , 2 . was . 4 m , 9 Fifi ,1 I -Wfi'
é, am o r “flat,
g mfia‘iao rw , 4 .mafia, 9.met-
“
t , O . ( at, I . I . fls -‘
I, 2 .
‘
Gfizfig, 3 .
"5623 ,
t “ :6 m » Tad
-m, S-W ’ 2 5733 ll Pf ‘ Fag, I A °m 01'
W ,F. fifizwfin, P. F. flfam, B .m 11 Pt . u Pass. Kai , A o r .mi tflz,
Caus .mar, A o r .W , o r gem ,Int . 85 88.
1 77. “ j et /tab, to eat, to laugh
Sevenverbs,W j aksh, 31111j dgr i to wake,W dar idr d, to be po o r ,W ehakd'
s, to sh ine,
“ 643 , to rule,m didhi, toto shine, aa’
tvevi , to obtain, are called W abhyasta
( redupl icated). They take Wfi“ati and mg atu in the 3r d per s . plur . present and
imperative, and “
3 2ulz instead o fM an in the 3rd per s . plur . imperfect
P. 3 . afiafa, 9 am, L am ar w , 0 am , I . 33am o r m ,
s wag : 32 1 1) u Pf. am ,I a n “ , F . afawfir.
1 78. a111j dgri , to wake. (Pan. V I . I , 1 92, accent .)
g. ,mfi
I . I .m , 2 .m ag .mam.”
am , am ; 0 . arm , I . L armt rfiu, ga nja, 4 mm ,
amid, 7.W , 8.W , 9. 3 1m i!
I I I . I , 9 . m 2, I A .m (see pr eface, p. ix ), F . m ftwfir, P. F .
awri’tm, am n Pt .mutt er: u Pass . amfi , A cn aawrft , Causa tm fi ,
D es.m . N o Intensive.
The 3r d pers . plur . present of Effl do es no t o ccur (S iddh .-Kaum .vo l . I I . p . 1 20) acco rd
ing to o ther s the wh o le plural is wanting ; acco rding to some no 3rd pers . plur . is fo rmed
fr omW .
IIW to eat, fr omW ;W to laugh , fr om a .
AD GLA SS , Am m rwx vanes . 279
1 79. ( Fry dar idr d, to be po o r (Pan. V I . 1 , 192, accent .)InW dar idr d the final W d is replaced by{I In the special tenses befo re str o ng termi
nations beginning with a co nso nant (Pan. v1 . 4 , B efo re stro ng terminations
beginning with vowels theW d is l o st (Pan. V I . 4 , I
MW 3 afiaTfi 4-W , 9 o §m m l sm6 .m , 9.m wo ww l wxm fm “m e sm 4mw
s W M W M fi-m W 9 M |~ Pfi afifi wr m(S iddh .
-Kaum . V o l . I I .. .p I A .waft r mzfipfiafiiddh-Kaum . vo l . I I .
F.W V? (P513. v1 . 4. 1 14, P F W (no tW )
180 . “ Me, to command, (m .) (Pan. V I . 1 ,
mm is changed to “ ( i s befo re weakening terminatio ns beginning with conso nants,
and in th e seco nd ao r ist . (Pan. V I . 4,
P . n snfia , 2 . 3mm, am , “ha s am ,I . L ama, a m o rm ,
3 .m 4 .W , 6 .W , 7.m , 8.m , 9. “W , 0 .
W W 4 HW , 5 $173 6 fi rth mm .
II A wmfsma F .M ,B .m ll Pt . &m u
Pass . fawn, Caus .m ,D es .W , Int . first“ .
II . Atmanepada Ver bs .
1 81 . a st chaksh, to speak, (m .)P. L afi, 2 . am, g. ab, aw , 5 . aw, sa w}, 7. Hu i , 8. afi, 91 a},
O waa‘iw l asi q aas}
Th e o ther fo rms are suppli ed fr om N T o r am,the Red . Perf . opti onal ly,
1 82 . to rul e.
ro o t i smtakes {6 befo re the zud pers . sing . present and imperative (Pan. V I I . z,
k id and “ j am do the same, and likewise inser t i i before the and pars . plur .
present, [imperfect ,] and imperative (Panwn . 2 , The commentato rs, h owever ,
extend the latter rule to gate”
. S ee no tes to Pan . V I I . 2 , 78.
P. h fi , 2 .W , 3 . i}, 8. £13183, I . 3 . Q9 , 8m o r ( l i l flfl ,I . L ifi,
mm , 3 . ifi , 8. §f5ni i o r {p si II Film , I A .afiw.
1 83 . m (is,to sit .
"280 A D CLA SS
,PA RA SMA IPA D A AND ATMA N EPA D A VERB S .
(55337. 1 . E mma o r M , R af-me o r m 11 Pt . age (Pan. V 1 1 1 . 2,
45) ll Pass . 1118, A o r . mafia, A o r . may“, D a g-
i ai (Pan.
V I I I . 3 , Int . $1533.
1 85 . sfi éi’
,to l ie down
,t o sleep, (m.)
The verb Sfis‘i takes Guna in th e special tenses (Pan. V 1 1 . 4 , and inserts in th e 3rd
per s . plur . pr esent , imper fect, and imperative .
V I I- .I 6) 1 1 W .
2 m a s m , 4 flm 5 . .m 6wawmi
7 a i rflf3 8w aw m 0 m l x fi n fia s fim m éwsmwfi6 . 5mm ,
M . ,
-am F . gram} , B .m u
Pt . mfim: ll Pass . mm? (Pan. V 1 1 . 4, A o r . mafia, Caus .m , D es.
1 86 . g i , to go , (Pan. V I . 1 , IS6 , accent .)Th is verb is always u sed with
’fl fil adhi , in the sense o f r eading . (S iddh .-Kaum .vo l . 1 1 . p . I
P.m ,I . 6 mm (Sar . 1 1 . 5 , 9 .
“5 13W ,0 . W W ,
I . I .
M , 2 . 4 .W , gm , 6 .W W , 7.W , 8.W ,
9.muh ai ll Pf . mfaafi (Pan . 1 1 . 4, I A . 3 . 3 1139 , 6 . mam ;9 .13 5515111, o r
3 .W e (S iddh .-Kaum . vo l . 1 1 . 6 . W W , 9.W ,
F .mfii'ufi ,
o r mwrfi‘ma, P. F .mi n", B . mantis ll Pt . mm : H Pass .mtfifi ,
A o r . mwmfii o r mwfia, Cau s . mumzafit, A o r .m o r m ,D es .
warm o r m .
III . Par asmaipada and A tmanepada V er bs .
1 87. 1‘ga dvish , to h ate .
Pa ol g'fws 2- céfq 3 3 3 fg g 4 on o 9i9 n ffl, Im m fl wfl i
'
qA Wm m
5 . f3'é,
2m , A o r . mfgfgaa,D es . q
‘
g'
alfiv, Int .W , 32119.
1 88. g'
i duh , to m ilk.
P . L EIFR, 2 .m , 4 . 33 2, 5 . gm , 6 . 573 2, 7. 8. gm, 9 .
I . 1 . ma’ri , 2 .m , 3 .W ’ 4 . mg , O .m ,
I . 1 .m , 2 . gfia, 3 .
5 . 31mi, a gmi , 3 31
-gm, a ga r, n Pfi gfiz, I A W M .
F .m .
1 89. q stu, to praise, (gai .
P. 1 . fi fn o r wai fa (see N o . 2 . fi ffl o r fi a’rfa, 3 fi fi chr ta
'
a'
fia 4 .
W 3 9W ,I . o r aa a
’i z, 3 .mm
m a g m a O WW
E U CLA SS,ATMA N EPA D A VERB S .
1 94. i t hr f, to be ashamed . (Pan. V I . 1,1 92, accent .)
Iwwfafi O f’i rfim L ffl
’gg ll
mm , I A WM F M WP F i-m,
B .m 11 Pt .m : o r 3171. (Pan. y I I I . 2 , 56) ll Pass . ( hm,C aus .M ,
A o r .W , D es .W ,Int .W .
1 95 . to fill , to guard .
Thi s Verb, and o th er s in which final $1 74 is pr eceded by a labial,changes th e vowel into
R wyexcept wher e the vowel r equir es Guna o r Vr iddhi . (Pan. V 1 1 . 1 ,
P. I .w , 2 . fiN fé, 3 .w , 43$81 33, 5 0W , 6 W 3
. 7 W , 8°W ,
9. firgt f‘
w, I . r .
"
fl fiwi' , mm (o r W 2, S AL ), 3 .W (o rM ), 4 .W ,
2 . filfi , 3 .W E, mm , 5 .WI
, 8.W , 9. li t II Pf . 1 .
m 6), 2 .1mm, 3 .
t rim”
, 4 .W , 5 .m g: o r “ 3 2, 6 .m : o r m 2, 7.m ,
9.was : o r fig: (Pfin . V 1 1 . 4, 1 1 , I A .W ,F .M (I), P. F .
t lf’
fi rr o rm ,B . 1 511 "Pt . (P511 . V I I I . 2, wi n, andW : ar e r efer r ed
to {g 442, Ger . fi r,°
I fi ll Pass . fir}, C aus . urcqfir, A o r .m ,D es .
W o r fawf'cwffi Int .W , Wfi .
S ever al o ptional fo rm s are der ived fr om ano ther r o o t 3 ,with sh o rt
“
a .
Thus, P. 3 .W , 6 .mm, 9 . fwfit, I . gi afimz, 6 .w , 93am ,0 . film It
I A .Wm ,B .M il Pass . fmfi (ii Int .w
1 96 . {I hd, to leave, Cam .)Redupl icated verbs ending in ”15 1 4 (except the 3 97mverbs, see 392 substitute i f fo r “S T6
befo r e str ong terminations beg inning with co nso nants (Pan . V I . 4 , I I The verb EI hd,
h owever , may al so substituteKi (Pai n . V I . 4,
P. w e,2 . was , 3 . am , 4 .maze). 5 . am : 6 . 7. « in:
(f), 8 (i), 9m ,I . 1 0W , 2 .W , 3 mm, 4 ~W 9 °W 3,
O m (Par) . V I . 4, I . L R TFH, 2 . “ If? (f) o r m fg (Pan . v1 . 4,
4 . W , si fifi ' mafia-id), 7.m ,nPf. 1 . R I,
az.a t1 o r 313m, 3 . “I, 4 . 3 fga, 6 .w t, 7.W , 8. mg, I A .
W ,F .W ,
P. F. {wn, B .m n Pt . git-m,
Ger . far-n (Pan . V II . 4 ,
°m ll Pass . {h i Caus .m fw, A o r .W m ,D es .m ,
Int .W .
1 97. w r iwto go
P' s vrffi. 6 m t (M N ) 6 . 31mi O W ,
I AWW 9 W § 364) F M P F afiT B mII . Atmanepada Verbs.
1 98. HTmd, to measur e, (m .)
P. 1 . fifi , 2 . fmea, 3 .m , 4 .W , 5 . firm-a, 6 . fm‘
fi, 7. sma—“g , s.
HU CLA SS , PARA SMA IPA D A A N D ATMAN EPA D A vanes . 283
9. fi 'fi‘
,I . 1 . vfi fi , 2 .M , 3 . W e, 4 .m , 5 .m ,
6 . 1m ,
mew , 8.Wfi ¢fité , 9m ,0 . fmflw, I . 2 . mm ,
5 . film , 6 . fimwi, 7. 6mm? 8. finfizé , 9m ll Pf . 1 . «i , 2 .M ,
5 . smi , 6 . smi , 7 M , 8. “feta, 9. nfifi ,I A . 1 . WW , 2 .m , 3 .m ,
4 .m , 5 . mm , 6 .m , 7. am , 8. m ust, 9. mm ,F . maxi ,
P. F. mm, B . Rafi! n Pt . fim ,Ger . film,
°m (no t Rh , Pan. vx. 4, 69) u
Pass . tfi'
tfit, A o r . W fi ,Caus . elm ,
D es . fim i , Int .W .
III . Par asmaipada and A tmanepada Ver bs .
9. fi efiT, A tm . 1 . fi e , 6 . 3!fiw, gm ; A tm .
3 . Wfi ijfl‘
, 6 .W W , 9. wh en, 0 . fi g“ ,A tm . ? lnafiw, I 1 . firwnfin, 2 . fi 'fit ,
3 . fi e“
? ll Pf. 1 .1mm(a), aw , 3 .
“mm , 4 . fi g? 334 ; Parn vn . 2 , 1 3) o r
m , 1 A .W ,Atmw fi , F . wfcuzfa, P. F.m
‘
n, B . fem,11m m n
Pt . ea: ll Pass . fin } , Caus . m fir, D es . 315173 , o r fi af’mfi , if it fo ll ows the
B hfi class (Pan. vr r . 2, Int.w ,m .
200 . at dd, to give , (m .)The 3 ghu verbs 392 dr o p WTd befo r e str ong terminations , wh en o ther redupl icated
verbs (see N o . 196) change “31 6 to i t. (Pan. v1 . 4, 1 1 2 ,
P. 1 .W , 2 .W fi‘, 3 . 3m , 4 . £3 2, 5 .m , 6 . ( i t, 7.m , 8.m , 9.W ,
Atm.
x i i}, 3 . ea“
, 4 . afi , 51 3113, 6 . «Ti , 7. “Q , 9. afi ,1 . LW ,
23 13312, 4 .m , 5 . 55mi , 6 . 1 1mi, 7.m , 8.m , 9.W 238 Atm
2 W , 3 m 4 am em f 6 m m? w e r e sma-
é 9 mA tm.W ,
8m 9 m ,A tm r a? a va swm ws i sm am
n Pf. I . §a, 2 zfzwo r m , 51 23 5
7.W , 9.agz, Atm . L EE", 2 . ( Fi fi, 4. 3fizfi ,
7. 3fzfli‘ , 8. 35133, 9° €f€Q II A . r .W ,Atm . wfizfi (see p. F.M FR,
°fi,P. F.m ,
B .Emir, Atm . {rifle 11 Pt . 33 : Ger . aw ,
°
§w u Pass .
Q‘hfil, A o r .W ,
Caus.Wm ,A o r .W ,
D es .m ,Int .W : W fih
20 1 . m dhd,to place, (m .)
This verb is conjugated like at . It sh oul d be r emembered, however , thatthe aspiration o f the final "
4, if lo st, mu st be th r own fo rward o n the ini tial q;
h ence 2md per s . dual Pr es . W 2&c . 1 1 8,no te). The Pt . is fan, Ger .
WW .
0 o 2
RUDH CLA SS , PARA SMAIPAD A A N D ATMA N EPA D A vanes .
20 2 . fi g my, to cleanse, (m .)
The verbs fai nt] , h i m] , t o separate, and fil i m’
sh, to embrace, take Guna in their
r edupl icat ive syl labl e . (Pan . v11 . 4 ,
Redupl icated verbs (abhyasta, having a sh o rt m edial vowel do no t take Guna befo re
weak terminat ions beginning with vowel s in the Special tenses . (Pan . V I ] . 3 ,
L l ama . fi fiw’
s fi fiI u l fifamfafl a fafivw afis "m afia ,
I A WW M II A"
s h ag R am ,P. F . m ,
Caus . gm fir, A o r .W ag,D es . firfiwfi ,
Int . g fi afi , afififi.
Rudh C lass (Rudhcid i , V I I C lass).
I . Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Ver bs.
203 . gg r udh,to shut o ut
, (m .)P surfs I Hang " Pf r s
'fivm sfl fw s t int.
7 s sfw, 9. a rm o r n A .m , A tm . am ,P. F . 93 1,
B . sung, A tm . W e ll Pt . ( at, Ger . W ’°
gw n Pass . Rafi, A o r . wfifil ,
Caus . fivqfi , D es . Em fi, Int . fiswfi, flfifi .
II. Par asmaipada V er bs .
éish, to distingu ish , (m.)P I W a z film 9 3 mFga 4 fW 9 5 m a 6 m a 7 fW 9 8 m9
9 filéfifa I 1 . FW 9 2 WWW 9 3W 9 4m 9 5 Wma 6m 9 7-qmw
O . trim , 2 . fi t} (o r W ), 3 . fi r-1g u Pf.
fitting II A . ms g, F . fiarfir, P. F . firm, 3 1°
51n N Pt . first 11 Pass . fslvfi ,
C aus.m , D es .W rath, Int . 53W , fi fe .
205 . fig M7523,to str ike, (fi fth )
P. fiaf’a , I . I .m , L EW ! o rm , 5 .m ,
6 W , 7.wfg’
m, 8m , 9.m , ( l fi'
m , I . 1 . fiamfa, a ffifil , 3m ll
Pf. fafi’
a, I A . s tem, F . fi fsmfir, P. F . Fg’
f‘
m , B . fi lm-
g 11 Pt . fiftm: u
Pass . fi’
w} , C aus . fi'
mxfir, A o r . e fi fi'
eg, D es . fi féfi qfi , Int . fifimfi‘
, fififi l‘.
206 . fig bkafij , to br eak, (HER)H am m m r fim
P. E m , B . wan-( n Pt . mg : n Pass . m o r fi sfif‘
a oe aCaus .m fi , D es . fi e ‘
qfir, Int .W , “ fi t
207. fi g anj , to ano int,
P l an t’s , L ang , 0 . 5mm, L ang u_Pf.W ,
I A m , F .
o r shaft B . W W II Pt . m , Ger . fife?" o r aim o r W (Pan. v02151; II Pas s
A P P E N D I X I I .
O n the A ccent in S anskr it.
I . A lth ough in Sanskr it the accent is marked in wo rks bel onging to the Vedic perio do nly, yet its impo rtance as giving a clue to many difficult po ints o f gr ammar is now so
gener ally acknowledged that even an elementary grammar wo uld seem imperfect with o ut atleast the gener al o utlines o f th e system o f S anskrit accentuat ion . I determ ined therefo re
in th is new editio n o f my grammar to mark th e accent in all cases wher e it seemed t o be
practically useful , but in o r der no t to perplex the beg inner with the marks o f accent,I have
added them in the transliterated wo r ds o nly, so that a student may still learn his grammar
and h is paradigm s in D evanagar i , unco ncerned about the accents, until th e accents th em;
selves attract h is no tice, and enable h im at a glance to see cause and effect in grammatical
o perat ions wh ich o therwise wo uld r emain unintelligible. Thus if we l o ok at trdyalt, tree,but tr ibln
’
it, tr ibus, and tri ti'
ya, tert ius ; at émi , I go , but imdfi, we go ; at bddhdmi , I know,
but tadrfmi, I str ike ; at vdktum,to speak, but uktdlz, spoken, we see at once how the po siti on
o f the accent, either o n the radical syllable o r o n th e terminati o n, influences the str engthening
o r weakening o f the base, and how th is strengthening and weakening rested o riginally on a
rational and intell igible principle.
2 . The accent is called in S anskr it S cam ,i . e . to ne, and acco rding to the descr iption
o f native grammar ians ther e can be no doubt th at it was really mus ical . It meant the
actual r ising and fal ling o f th e vo ice, pr o duced by the tensio n, the r elaxatio n, and the wideo pening o f the vo cal ch o r ds ; it was a musical mo dulation peculiar t o each wo r d, and it
co rr espo nded to what we call th e singing o r the canti lena o f the speaker , which , th o ugh inmo dern languages mo st perceptible in wh o le sentences, may al so be clear ly perceived inthe utterance o f single wo rds .
but Mdrg/
Whatever the accent became in later times, its very name o f pr o sodic, accentus, i . e. by
song, sh ows that in Gr eek and Latin, t o o , it was o rig inally musical , that tono s meant pitch ,o xys, h igh pitch , barys, l ow pitch , and that per isgoo
‘
meno s, drawn r o und, did not r efer o riginal ly to the sign o f the cir cumflex
,but to the vo ice being drawn up and down in pr onouncing
a Ci r cumflex ed syllable.
3 . Fo r grammatical purpo ses we have to distinguish in S anskr it two accents o nly, the
ada'
tta and the svar i ta. Th e uddtta is pr onounced by raising the vo ice, th e svar i ta by a
combined raising and fal ling o f the vo ice. A ll vowel s wh ich have neith er o f these accents
ar e cal led anuddtta,i . e . with out ada
‘
tta, th o ugh they might with equal justice be called
asvar i ta, with o ut the svar i ta. The anuddtta,immediately pr eceding an uddtta o r scur ita
vowel , is sometimes called anuddttatar a o r sannatar a* . (Pan. I . 2, 29
B o pp, fo l lowing Pr o fesso r Ro th (N ir . p . LVI I I), call s this accent sannatatar a, as if fr omsaunata
,depr essed ; it is, h owever , der ived fr om sanna, th e part iciple o f sad, to sink .
O N THE A CCENT m SA N SKB I'I‘. 287
In transl iterated wo rds I mark the uddtta by the acute, the o r iginal war i ta by the
cir cumflex .
Every syl lable witho ut either the mark o f uddtta o r scur i ta has to be co ns idered as
grammatically unaccented ; and an unaccented syllable befo re an uddt ta o r o r iginal svan’
ta,
as ph o netically anuddttatar a . If the anuddtta must be marked in trans literated wo rds, it
can be marked by the gr avz'
s . Thus in te’
&var dkanta, they grew,te
’
has the uddtta, a the
anuddtta. If the two wo rds co alesce into te’var dhanta, then e takes the svar i ta, t!
’
var dhanl a .
S imilar ly, sm chf+ iva become sruchzva tr i+dmbakam become trydmbakam.
4 . In S anskr it the accents ar e indicated in the fo l lowing way
The uddtta i s never indicated at all , but o nly th e so ar i ta, (whether o r iginal o r dependent ,and the anuddttatar a (sannatar a), 1. e . the anuddtta immediately preceding an uddtta
o r scur i ta syl lable. The sign o f the svar i ta is L,that o f the anuddttatar a is
Whenever we find a syllable marked by the sign o f the anuddttatar a, we know that
the next syl lable, if left witho ut any mark, is uddtta ; if marked by it is so ar i ta .
Hencew : is agnt’
lz,“
ti-“
WI is kanyd'
.
A mono syllabic wo rd, if uddtta, has no mark at al l . Ex .111 ydlz, 3 nu
’
.
A mo no syllabic wo rd, if anuddtta, is marked by Ex .
“
q : s ub, a : null .
A mo no syllabic wo rd, if svar i ta, is marked by Ex . é : smi,/1.
5 . A s a general rule every wo r d has but o ne syllable either uddtta o r secr i ta, the
r est o f th e syllables being anuddtta . A ny syllable may have the accent . B ut if an uddtra
syl lable is fo l l owed by an anuddtta syllable, its anuddtta is changed into what is call ed the
dependent svar i ta . Ex .‘Rfifl
'
fii agm’
nd . HereM ag , o r iginal ly anuddtta, is pr o no uncedand marked as anudcittatar a; m
’
is uddtta, and is therefo r e with o ut any mark ; 3 1 mi ,
o r iginally anuddtta, becomes svar i ta, and is marked acco rdingly. In transl iteratio n this
dependent se cr i ta need no t be marked , no r th e anuddttatar a . B o th may be t reated as
anudci tta, i . e . with o ut gr ammatical accent , wh ile th eir exact pr onunciatio n in S anskr it , to bedescr ibed h er eafter , is o f impo rtance to Vedic scho lar s o nly.
6 . If awo r d standing by itself o r at th e head o f a sentence begins with several . anuddt ta
syllables, they have all to be marked by the sign o f anuda‘
ttatar a . Ex .W 6pnuvdnalz
m bridayyiiyd.
7. B y observing th ese simple rul es , no do ubt can r emain as to the grammatical accent
o f any wo rd in S anskr it . The fo l l owing is a l ist o f the pr incipal classes o f accented wo rdsin Sanskr it :
I . A wo rd co nsist ing o f o ne syl lable wh ich has the uddtta, is called uddtta . Ex .112ya
’
b,
anu’
,55 h im.
2 . A wo rd wh ich has the ada‘
tta o n th e last syllable, is cal led anto ddtta . Ex . arfi'
a: agnt'
li ,
afam j ani ttf.
3 . A wo r d wh ich has th e adatta o n the fir st syl lable, is cal led ddyuddtta . Ex . i f (ndralz,
i nd hdtd.
4 . A wo rd wh ich has the uddtta o n the middle syllable, is called madhyodd‘
tta . Ex .
agnz’
nti,s ifinfit: agnz
’
bhifi.
5 . A wo rd co nsisting o f o ne syllable wh ich has the o r iginal svar i ta, is cal led svar ita .
Ex . 3'
a s, a“: was.
6 . A wo rd which has the o r iginal svar i ta o n the last syllable, is cal led antasvar i ta .
Ex . WWIkanya .
288. O N THE A CCENT IN SANSKRIT.
7. A wo rd wh ich has the o r iginal secr i ta o n th e middle syllable, is cal led madkyasvar i ta.
Ex . again! 1191919994794.
8. A wo r d wh ich has the o r iginal scur i’
ta o n the fir st
,
syllable, is called ddis'var i ta.
Ex . d i ll} svarnar e.
9 . A wo r d with out uddtta o r svar i ta, is cal led sarvdnuda‘
tta. Ex . 3 : call , w nah .
1 0 . A wo r d with two adatta syllables, 1s called dviruddtta W . br z’
haspdtilz. Here the
fir st syl lable i s ada‘
tta, and 18 ther efo re no t marked at all . The seco nd syllable 1s
anuddtta, and acco r ding to rule wo uld become scur i ta . B ut as the next syllable 1s
uddtta again, the anuddtta becomes anudci ttatar a, and is marked acco rdingly. The
th ir d syl lable is nddtta, and th e last, o r iginal ly anuddtta, becomes scur i
'
ta.
nW ? mitrd'
vdrunan, the fir st syl lable is anuddtta, but becomes anuddttatar a, because
an uddtta fo l lows . The seco nd syl labl e is ada'
tta,so is th e th ir d
,and h enceneither
o f them has any mark . The fo ur th syllable, being anuddtta, becomes secr i ta,
because it fo ll ows an uddtta. The last syllable is anuddtta and, as no thing fo llows,
is left with o ut a mark .
1 1 . A wo rd with th r ee uddtta syllables , is cal led tr i ruddtta {w z’
ndr dbyz’
haspcfti .
§ 8. If wo rds come to geth er in a sentence, the same rules apply to,
them as to single
wo r ds . Thus if a wo rd ending in uddtta is fo l l owed by a wo r d beginning with an annddtta
syl lable, th e anuddtta syllable is pr ono unced as svar i ta.
‘
Thus 11: + 3, i . e . 9411 + chh,
become ms'
ya’
s’
chii , wher e the mark o f the dependent svar i ta on”d cha sh ows that 1! ya
has the uddtta.
If a wo r d ending in an anuda‘
tta is fo l l owed by a wo r d beginning with an nddtta o r
svam'
ta,th e anuddtta becomes anuddttatar a . . Ex . Wm ciianayat + fi ta
’
m become
m afianayat h im.
If a wo rd ending in a scur i'
ta,which r eplaces an o r iginal anudd tta, is fo ll owed by ano ther
wo r d having the uddtta o n the fir st syllable, th e general rul e r equ ires the svar i ta, being
o r iginal ly an anudcitta, to become anuddttatam , so that we have to wr ite W THU/def cha tcit.Her e we see that ydli has the nddtta, because o th erwise, at the beginning o f a sentence
,
it wo uld have to be marked with anuddttatar a . A s“
a cha has th e anuddttatar a, we see that
it was o r ig inal ly anuddtta, and became anuddttatar a, because the next syllableWi ta’
t has th e
nddtta, wh ich need no t be marked .
If instead o f“Mt, which has th e uddtta,we putfit fig/£171,wh ich has th e scur ita,we sh oul d
have to write W EI!‘
ya’
s‘
cka hydlz, th e sign o f th e svar i ta o n i t sh owing first , that
fit Ilyalacanno t be uddtta, fo r in that case it wo ul d have no mark,and wo uld r equ ir e scar i ta
on th e next fo ll owing syll able ; and seco ndly, that it canno t be annda‘
tta, fo r in that case it
could no t be pr eceded by an anuddttatar a .
If an o r ig inal scur i ta fo l l ows after a final uddtta, it r etains th e sign o f the se cr ita, but it
is then impo ssible to say wh ether that sign marks the o r ig inal o r the dependent scur i ta.
Ex . WEN T“
5 dtmd’
+kva (B v. 1 . 1 64 , O nly, if an uddtta fo l l owed after“
a kva, its svar i ta
wo uld r emain (see wh ile th e dependent svar i ta would become anuddttatar a.
If awo rd such as fi g ” . arunayugbhih, having th e uddtta o n yzig, stands by itself, it
must have the anuddttatar a sign, no t o nly under 111 na, wh ich immediately precedes theuddtta syl lable, but l ikewise under 551a and m . B ut if pr eceded byw : agm
’
n, wh ich
has uddtta o n the last , the fir st syl lable takes the svar i ta, th e seco nd r equ ires no mark at al l ,
and the third keeps its anuddttatar a mark ;W : agm’
r amnayzigbhilz.
290 on THE A CCENT IN SANSKRIT; 1 1
nv’
i’
ndr a. W -i— fg -‘I-m : m “
dB-T evd+hi+asya= ev4 kyusya (RV . I . 8, 8)
A l so , “i tnadi , plur .W nadyak, but gen. sing . W . nadyd'
le, because 1n the fo rmer
th e terminatio n is o r iginal ly anudcitta, 111 the latter uddtta .
‘
c . If an uddtta e o r 0 co al esces with an (el ided) anuddtta a, it takes svar i ta (Prat .
Ex . R“33 753? té+avar dhanta= té
" ’
var dlzanta .
A cco r ding to Mandfikeya al l uddtta vowel s co alescing with ano ther anudd’
tta vowel ,
become svar i ta. This is al so the case in certain B rahmanas ; see Kielh o rn, B hash ika
sutra, I . 5 .
Th e accents pr o duced by the Co alescence o f vowel s have the fo llowing technical names ,
taken fr om th e name o f th e S andhi that gave r ise to them
1 . Pr aélishya, th e accent o f two vowel s united into o ne (samdvem,ekibhd
'
va).
2 . A bhz’
nihi ta, the accent o f two vowels o f wh ich the second is the el ided a.
3 . Kshaz’
pr a, the accent o f two vowel s o f wh ich the fir st has been changed into a semivowel .
4 . Tair ovyafij ana, th e so ar ita, r eplacing an anuddtta, if separated by co nsonants fr om the
pr eceding udd'
tta . Ex .m agnfm i le.
5 . Vaivg‘
z'
tta (o r pa‘
davr itta), th e svar i ta, r eplacing an anuddtta, if separated by an h iatus
fr om the pr eceding ada‘
tta (Prat . Ex .1!£3 yd indm
6 . Jcitya, the scur i ta in th e bo dy o f a wo rd, also called ni tya, inh erent . It is always
pr eceded by either 31 o r and po ints to a per io d in the h isto ry o f S anskr it in wh ich
th ese semivowel s r etained someth ing o f their vowel natur e . It may, in fact , be treated
as medial ks/zaip r a and it is impo rtant that where th e pecul iar pr o nunciat ion o f the
differ ent svar i tas is descr ibed, that o f the j dtya and the kshaipr a is said to be identical
(vej . Prat . 1 .
1 1 . B y applying these r ules we can with perfect certainty disco ver which syllable in
each wo r d has the grammatical accent , whether udcftta o r so ar i ta . Unfo rtunately many
wo r ds l o se th eir accent in a sentence, part icular ly the verb wh ich , in a direct sentence, is
co nsidered as a mer e enclitic o f th e no un t o which it bel ongs . O nly in r elative and
conditio nal sentences,o r when a verb beg ins a sentence, and under some o ther r estr ict ions
which ar e fully descr ibed by native gr ammar ians, do es the verb r etain its independent accent .Vo catives al so l o se th eir accent, except at the beginning o f a sentence, when they have the
accent o n the fir st syllable W ith these except io ns, h owever , every student , by fo l lowing
the rul es her e given, will be able to determine what is the r eal grammatical accent o f any
B esides th e tair ovyafij ana and th e vaivr itta, wh ich we sh o uld cal l the dependentsvar i ta
, o ther subdivisio ns ar e mentio ned by some auth o rities . Thus if compo und wo rdsar e divided (in the Padapatha) by th e avagr aha, the tai r ovyanj ana is cal led tair oo ir dma .
Ex .Tfisfi 96
’.patau If a wo r d 1s divided 111 th e Padapéth a, th e fir st hal f ending 111 a
scur i ta pr eceded by an uddtta,and the seco nd half beginning with an uddtta
,the svar i ta is
cal led td‘
tkdbhd'
vya. Ex . fi és'
flflfib Her e ta is uddtta, mi is scur i ta,th en fo l lows the
avagr aka o r pause o f divisio n, and after that na, wh ich is again uddtta . Her e a kind o f
kampa takes place, and th e svar ita is marked acco r dingly.,Tho ugh the name tdthdbhdvya
is no t mentio ned in the fir st Pratisakhya, the peculiar accent wh ich it is meant fo r is fully
descr ibed in Sutra 2 1 2 . In the commentary o n the V aj . Prat . ( 1 20) it would perhaps bebetter to wr ite asamhitdvat instead o f svasaihhi tdvat; W eber , Ind . S tud . vo l . W . p . 1 37.
‘
I' S ee B hashika-sutra, ed . Kielho rn, II. 1 - 3 1 ;Wh itney, in B eitr
'
aige zur vergleichenden
S prachfo r schung , vo l . 1 . p . 187.
O N THE A CCENT 1N SAN SKmT. 291
wo rd o ccur r ing in the hymns o f the Rig-veda. The system o f marking the uddt ta and
svar i ta in the S'atapatha
-B rfihmana is slight ly different , as may be seen from Pro fesso r
Weber’
s intr o ducto ry remarks, and particular ly fr om D r . Kielho rn’
s learned notes on the
B hfish ika-sutras .
1 2 . Q uite different fr om the determ inatio n o f the grammat ical accent is the questio nh ow the accents sh o uld be pr o no unced o r into ned in a sentence, and particular ly in the
hymns and B rfihmanas o f the pr incipal Vedas . Th is questio n co ncerns the student o f the
Veda o nly, and differ ent auth o r it ies differ o n th is po int . The fo ll owing sho rt remarks must
be sufficient . A cco rding to the Rig-veda-Prfitis
'
fikhya ( 187 the uddtta is high , the
anuddtta l ow; o f the svar i ta o ne po rti o n is h igher than uddtta, the rest l ike uddtta , exceptif an uddtta o r svar i ta fo l lows, in which case the vo ice s inks down to the anuddtta pitch .
Th is sinking down is cal led kampa, shaking . A l l anuddtta syl lables , fo llowing after scur i ta
(whether o r iginal o r dependent)ar e pr o no uncedwith uddtta pitch except the last ,whichis fo llowed again by either uddtta o r scur i ta, and takes the l ow pitch o f anuddtta This
pr o nunciatio n o f anuddtta syllables with uddt ta pitch is cal led the Pr achaya accent
W e have therefo re o nly thr ee kinds o f pitch , (no special anuddttatar a pitch being reco gnizedin the Prfitis
'
fikhya,)wh ich in their relative po sitio n may be represented by
Thus inm d’
lfi} mdddyasva svc'
i'
rzzar e, HI 7nd is anuda'
tta, ada is uddtta, 15ya is svar i ta,
a sva 1s anuddtta, é
'
fisvii'
r is svar i ta,uh par e, bo th anuddtta, but pr o no unced like uddt ta .
In W : ddabdhapr amatir vdsishghalz, i t a is ada'
tta, dab is svar ita,
W dhapr ama ar e anuda‘
tta, but pr onounced like uddtta, fi!ti is anuddtta, a va is udd tta,
M insk is scur i ta, 8 : {hair is anuddtta, but pr onounced as uddtta .
O ther S'
akhas vary in the pr o nunciatio n o f th e accents, as may be seen fr om their respectivePratis
'
Akhyas . Much co nfusio n has been caused bymixing up these different systems,and,
in particular , by trying to r econcile th e rul es o f the Rig-veda-Prfitis
'
fikhya with the rul es
o f Panini . A cco r ding to Panini ( 1 . 2 , 29 seq .) th e uddtta is h igh , the anuddtta low, but the
so ar i ta is half h igh and half l ow,and the anuddttas fo ll owing after scur i ta (o r iginal o r
dependent) are pr onounced mono tono usly while the last o f them,immediately
Lo ng after th is was written I saw D r . Haug’
s descr ipti on.
o f the accents in the
Z eitschr ift der D . M . G. vo l . x vn . p . 799. He g ives the interval s much smaller , so that if
th e anuddtta is c, the uddtta wo uld be d, and the so ar i ta woul d r ise to e. This is no do ubt
r ight , and it will be easy to transcr ibe my own no tation acco rd ingly. I o nly retain it because
it is clear er t o th e eye . What is very impo rtant , as confirm ing my view, is D r . Haug’s
r emark that in listening to the r ecitat io n o f the Pandits h e co uld not per ceive any differ ence
between the ada‘
tta and the anudcittas if pr o no unced with prachaya svar a .
s
292 ON THE A CCEN T IN SANSKRIT.
preceding a new ada'
tta o r scur i ta, is l ower than anuddtta, and hence cal led sannatar a o r , by
the commentato r s, anuddttatar a . Th is system, to o , th ough differ ent fr om th e fo rmer, gives
us only three kinds o f musical pitch , wh ich may be appr o ximately repr esented by
cmud dttam ,a/nuddtta, udc
‘
ztta, saun'
ta, ekas‘ruti .
Ekafruti is described as with out any definite pitch (tr aisvarydpavdda), arid might therefo r ehe intended fo r mere mono tonous r eci tative*.
It is commonly used as synonymous with pr ackita e. g . uddttamayam pr achi tam
eka§ rutiti paryd'
yali , V aj. Prat . IV . 1 38.
294
fi g kr oshgu, jackal , 236 .
fl i t khafij , lame, .1 63 .
m gar iyas, h eavier , 206 .
furgir , vo ice, 1 64 .
331 91117, guardian, 1 57.”
Q'
gguh, co ver ing, 1 74 .
7h go , o x , 2 18.
M go r aksh, cowherd, 1 74.
m g ra‘
mazzt’
, leader o f a vill age, 22 1 .
m chaka'
s, Splendid, 1 72 .
W chakd’
sat,sh ining, 184 .
m ohikir s, desir o us o f act ing, 1 72 .
m ckitr alikk, painter , 1 56 .
m j aganvas , having gone, 205 .
m j agmivas, having go ne, 205 .
m j aghanvas, having killed, 205 .
W j aghnivas, having kill ed, 205 .
an j ard, o ld age, 1 66 .
W j alakr’l, m . f . a buyer o f water , 22 1 .
W j alamuch, cl oud, 1 58.
W j d’
gr at, waking, 1 84 .
mtaksh,par ing, 1 74 .
m takshan, carpenter , 191 .
Fifi! tati, so many, 23 1 .
fifil tantr i, f . lute, 225 .
“fl tar i , f . bo at, 225 .
fil’fi'
fl ti ryach, t o rtuous, 181 .
m turdsdk, Indra, 1 75 .
fi fl tvach, skin, 1 58.
mtvish, splendour , 1 74 .
“dew, to o th , 2 1 4 .
W daJat, givi ng, 1 84 .
Efil dadhi , curds, 234 .
m dadhg‘ish, h o ld, 1 74 .
danta, to o th , 2 14 .
W dar idr at,po o r , 184.
d man, r o pe, fem ., 1 79, 193 .
IN D E X O F N O UN S .
W i ng/aah, l ow,1 81 .
“P0739“, m .,tI’Lpaizgii , fem . lame
,
VFWpati, l o rd, 233 .
m . path ,
m 2da’
r cih, wife, 1 49.
M didhaksh, desir ous o f burning, 1 74 .
fai div and g dya, sky, 2 13 .
Faras , sh owing , 1 74.
“ dis‘, co untry, 1 74 .
gi duh, milking, 1 74.
m duhz'
tg‘ i,daughter , 235 .
T‘
vfl dfl nbhd, thunderbo lt, 22 1 .
w dfis’
, seeing , 1 74 .
Eh devej , wo r sh ipper , 1 62 .
M do shan,arm, 2 1 4 .
“ do s, arm ,1 72 , 2 14.
g dyu and“div, sky, 2 1 3 .
{ff dyo , sky, 2 19 .
g druh, hating , 1 74 .
m dvdr , do o r , 1 64 .
m dviddmni, having two r opes, 194 .
mars h,hating, 1 74 .
W dhanin, r ich , 203 .
W dha‘
tri , n. pr ovidence, 235 .
‘fi dhi , m . f . th inking, 220 .
i ii dhi, f .‘
intellect, 2 24 .
W dhivafl’
,wife o f a fisherman, 193 .
W dhvas, falling, 1 73 .
W naptri , grandson, 235 .
W h arf,destr oying, 1 74 .
“ new, no se, 2 14.
Hi nah, binding, 1 74.
m miman, name,191 .
m na’
s ikd,no se, 2 1 4 .
m nia is as, having led, 205 .
fi t nirj ar a, ageless, 1 67.
I N D E X o r N O UN S . 295
figpad, fo o t, 214.
W papi , m. f . pr o tecto r , 222 .
“UFO par amani , m . f . best leader , 22 1 .
W par ivr dj , mendicant, 1 62 .
M pamadhvas, leaf-shedding, 1 73 .
1l'fi‘
fl parvan, jo int , 19 1 .
Wpdndu, m . f . n. pale, 230 .
°W§ -pad, fo o t, 207.
“13 pada, fo o t, 2 14.
M piadagr as, lump-eater , 1 70 .
fil'qpi tri, father , 235 .
M fipaksh, désir o us o f matur ing , 1 74.
m pipaghis, wish ing to r ead, 1 71 .
“713195111, m . n . a tree and its fruit, 230 .
1fi'
fl'
vtpivan, fat, fem.film pivar i , 194 .
sni punarbhii , t e-bo rn, 22 1 .
“Pm", man, (paal s), 2 1 2 .
fi pur , town, 1 64 .
M pum dawas, Indra, 1 68.
M pur oddé, an o ffer ing, 1 76 .
E MS /tan,name o f a deity, 20 1 .
fl pri t, army, 2 1 4 .
army, 2 1 4.
deer , 1 85 .
h pechivas , having co oked, 205 .
W epr aja'
pati, l o rd o f creatures, 233 .
m p r atidivan, spo rt ing, 192 .
“ pr atyach, western, 1 81 .
IN ? p rudki, m . f . th inking eminently, 22 1 .
m pr adhi , fem . , 223 .
W pr as'
dm,quieting, 1 78.
“ pr i ck, eastern, 1 80 .
m prdchh, asking, 1 60, 1 74 .
H‘
l’
flpr dfich, wo r sh ipping, 1 59.
afabadi , dark fo rtnight , 1 49.
W bahura‘
j an, having many kings, 194 .
g m bahus‘r eyasi , auspicio us, 227.
fl'
fi bahii rj , very str o ng , 1 6 1 .
“ batik, knowing, 1 57.
W hy-Mat
, gr eat, 185 .
m br ahman, creato r , 192 .
t avat,Yo ur Hono ur
,188.
M bhishaj , physician, 16 1 .
i ii bht, f . fear , 224 .
i bba, being , 2 2 1 .
i bba, f . ear th, 2 24 .
{Q bhar , atmo sphere, 149.
W bhrw, r o asting, 1 62 .
“ bhraj , sh ining, 1 62 .
m bhrdtri , br o ther , 235 .
i bhrfl, f . br ow, 2 24 .
W maghavan, Indra, 200 .
fi ni al ), diving, 1 6 1 .
(WK-mat, 1 87.
flfil mati , tho ught , 230 .
W m thin, churning
-stick,195 .
“W madhulih, bee, 1 74 .
”Ft -man, 19 1 .
W mahat, great, 186 .
tTl'
fl mtifizs , meat, 2 14 .
FIG marksa, meat, 2 1 4 .
HT?!mdtfi ,mo th er , 235 .
“ mas,mo nth
,2 14 .
K muh,co nfo unding , 1 74 .
fi fl mflr dhan,head, 19 1 .
fi mrii , cleaning , 1 62 .
figmyidu, m . f . n. so ft, 230 .
W yakan, l iver , 2 1 4 .
m yakrit , l iver , 2 14 .
fi yaj , sacr ificing, 1 62 .
W yaj van, sacrificer , 192 .
“
Hf?!yati , as many, 23 1 .
w yayi , f . r o ad, 222 .
W yuvan, yo ung, 199.
{Wyfishmpea-so up, 2 1 4 .
N yzishan, pea-so up, 2 14 .
( Tar iff, shining, 1 62 .
W r afjan, king, 19 1 .
“
( Fifi rfij fit’
, queen, 193 .
“ r uck,light , 1 58.
296 I N D E X O F N O U N S .
“ r aj , disease, 1 6 1 .
W r urudvas, crying, 204 .
“ rush, anger , 1 74 .
m i , wealth , 2 1 7.
Rafi lakshmi , f . go ddess o f pr o sper ity, 225,Fig laghu, m . f . n. l ight , 230 . s
‘vetavas
,209.
Q M, m . f . cutt ing, 220 .
W i m py ,mer chant, 1 6 1 .
°EI'
FL-vat, 1 87.
H‘Lvadhzi , f . W ife, 225 .
°El'
c'
t -van, 191 .
Hil l : var shdlz, r ainy seaso n,1 49.
aFan;fvczr slnibini , fr o g , 2 2 1 .
° ‘
El'
q was, part . per fect , 204 .
“ mick, speech , 1 58.
W W vdtapr ami, antel o pe, 222 .
m vd'
r,water , 1 64 .
alfil o dr i , water , 230 .
°EIT§ mai ls,car rying, 208.
fm vidvas, knowing, 205 .
i pdé , a river , 1 74 .
i p rush, dr o p o f water , 1 74 .
faunavibhrdj , r esplendent , 1 62 .
i vaksk, desir ous o f saying, 1 74 .
W e iviksh,wish ing to enter , 1 74 .
M ew,enter ing, 1 74 .
femur msvapd, all -pr eserving , 239.
W o zwarq’
j, univer sal monar ch , 1 62 .
fam viévasg’
fi, cr eato r , 1 62 .
fi nish,o r dur e, 1 74 .
W eishvach, al l-pervading , 1 81 .
W eri kshalfl, tree-h ewer , 222 .
wvfl s‘ch,cutting, 1 59 .
W s‘akan, o rdur e, 2 1 4.
m éakri t, o r dur e, 2 1 4 .
W s’
aizkhadkmd’
, sh el l-blower , 239.
W s‘dsat, commanding , 1 84 .
ws’
ucl n'
,m . f . 11 . br ight, 230 .
w s’
uddkadhi , thinking pur e th ings, 22 1 .
w s‘udd/zadki
,a pur e th inker
,22 1 .
m aus‘ruvas, having h ear d, 205 .
w gushkz, 222 .
We? f . happiness, 224
”
Q T-( scan, do g, 199.
fir st;§vetavdh andW e
M safiwat, year , 1 49.
nfim sakthz'
, thigh ,234.
EFF sakhi, fr iend, 232 .
W saj us , fr iend, 1 72 .
M sadhryach, accompanying, 181 .
W samyack, righ t, 1 81 .
W samr dj , sovereign, 1 62 .
W sar cas‘ak, omnipo tent, 1 55 .
“Tasdnu, r idge, 2 14 .
mfiwsdmi,hal f, 1 49.
fawn: sikatdlz, sand, 1 49.
W sukhi , wishing fo r pleasure, 222 .
W sugazz, r eady r eckoner,I 54 .
gm suchakshus, having go o d eyes, 1 65 .
m yo tis, well -lighted, 1 65 .
W suti , wish ing fo r a son, 222 .
M amas,well -so unding , 1 70 .
W sudhi’
,m . f . having a go o d mind, 226 .
“
gmsapis, wel l -walking, 1 70 .
“ subkrfl, m . f . having go o d br ows, 226 .
M inimum s, well -minded, 1 65 .
W sus‘r i , well -far ing , 22 1 .
W susakhi , a go o d fr iend, 232 .
W mhifizs, wel l -str iking, 1 72 .
w suhm'
d, fr iendly, I 57.
fi srzj , cr eating , 1 62 .
{firm somapa’
, S oma dr inker , 239.
W str i , woman, 2 28.
FEEsnih,l o ving , 1 74 .
If, snu, r idge, 2 14 .
i i i snub, spueing, 1 74.
“ 8191 55, to uching, 1 74.
Hi sr aj , a gar land, 1 6 1 .
B Esr as,fall ing, 1 73 .
298 I N D EX O F V ERB S .
i f Icfl , to scatter , 1 1 3 .
fi km‘
t, to praise, 1 38.
3511kr am, t o stride, 30 , 29.
"
i i kr i , t o buy, 1 53 .
fl klam, to tire, 29, 30 , 1 30 .
to kil l, 1 49 .
mksham, t o bear , 1 30 . tztikshate), 75 , 63 .
fa kshz’
, t o wane, t o diminish , 24 .
M kship , to kil l , 1 50 .
Kg Iekud, t o eat,8.
137-( khan, t o dig , 95 .
flag ki nd , t o vex ,1 07.
W Tkkyé , to pr o claim, 1 66 .
”Qgad, to Speak, 9 .
“ yam, to go , 33 , 3 1 .
TIT96, to go , 83 .
al gup ,to pr o tect , 26 , 63 .
{lgga la, to h ide, 97, 29.
fl gai , to sing , 44 .
Hi gr ab, to take, 1 57, 1 05 .
755 g lai, t o dr o o p, 43 .
‘
gghu-class ,46 , 47, 200 .
mghra‘
, to smel l, 54 .
m cka/ca’
s, t o sh ine, 1 77.
to speak, 181 .
“ chap ,to po und
,1 37.
”
5 11cham, to eat, 29.
fl ckah,t o po und
,1 37.
fa chi , to co l lect , 1 37, 1 40 .
fanchi t, t o th ink, 2 .
a char, to steal , 1 36 .
m ohya t, to spr inkle, 3 .
chho , to cut,1 24 .
W j aksh, t o eat , 1 77, 1 76 .
afl j an, to spring up, 1 32 .
W j dgri , to wake, 1 78, 1 77.
fa j i, t o excel , 36 .
i j fi , t o gr ow o ld, 1 23 , 1 56 .
3 1 j fiap , to know,t o make known
,
mj fici , t o know,1 59.
anjya'
, to gr ow weak, 1 58, 36, 105 .
fl jvar , to suffer, 92 .
m\taksh, to h ew, 37.
HQ tan, to stretch , 1 48.
fl tap, to burn, 28.
HQ tam, to languish , 1 30 .
fai n] , to fo rbear , (watu, to gr ow,
1 70 .
R tad, to strike, 1 04 .
fl tfip ,to del ight, 1 27, 38.
K tri h, to kil l, 208.
72tri , to cr o ss, 6 1 .
“ tr ap, to be ashamed, 74 .
HQ h as, to tremble, 30 .
a? tr ay, to cut, 30 .
HQ tvar , to hur ry, 92 .
indame, to bite, 62 , 73 .
HQ dad, to give, 70 .
mdam, to tame, 1 30 .
aft? dar idr d, to be po o r , 1 79, 1 77.
(zdab, to burn, 42 .
31 dd, to give, 58.
QTdd, t o g ive, 200 .
main,was diddn’
zsati , to straighten, 63 .
fi’
fl div, to play, 1 2 1 .
if? di , to decay, 1 54.
KM didki'
, to sh ine, 1 77.
g duh, to mi lk, 188.
g dri , to observe, 1 20 .
W df‘ifif, to see, 48, 38.
dfl ,to tear
,1 56 .
de, to pr o tect , 85 .
3 dai , t o cleanse, 46 :
2dai, to pr o tect , 85 .
ado , to cut , 1 24 .
mdyut, to sh ine,86 .
fag dvz'
sh, to hate, 1 87.
“HTdka
‘
, to place , 20 1 .
‘
{data to shake, 1 56 .
lt‘Td htip , to warm ,
27.
IN D E X O F V E RB S . 299
Q dhe, to dr ink, 47.
an dhmd, to bl ow, 55 . search. 63.
W na‘
d, to hum, 1 1 .
“ mam, to bow, 32 .
“ nae”
, to per ish , 1 29, 1 1 7.”
fignah, to bind, 135 .
M niksk, to kiss, 1 5 .
“ my, to cleanse, 202 .
fig nind, to blame,1 4 .
a uri t, to dance, 1 22 .
to t raffic,26 .
“ pan, to praise, 76 .
Wtpat, to fal l , 64 .
“pad, to go , 1 33 .
in:pan, to pr aise, 26 , 76 .
W pas‘ya, to see
, 48.
WTpd, to dr ink, 53 .
“ phi, to fo rm, 1 07.
apzi , to pur ify, 1 56 .
Epri, to fill , 195 , 1 56 .
W pr ackh, to ask, 1 1 5 , 105 .
1i lTpsci , to eat , 1 63 .
”
E172phal , to bur st , 34 .
wbadh,M i b’
i’
bhatsate, to l o athe, 63 .
fl bandh, to bind, 1 60 .
a badh, to per ceive, 1 34 .
1 6112, to speak, 190 .
h bhafij , to break, 206 .
1fi'
bhi , to fear , 193 .
51 61122, to be, 1 .
q bhri , to carry, 199.
fi bhr ajj , to fry, 1 05 .
afl bhr am, to r o am, 30 , 130 .
m bkrds‘,to shine
, 30 .
” buds, to sh ine, 30 .
313 may}, t o sink , 1 1 7.
fig“
mad, to r ejo ice, 1 30 .
W manth,t o shake, to churn, 5 .
fl i mav, to bind, 92 .
W 7nd, to measur e, 1 64 .
311 md, to measure, 198 .
mm ,min?!mtmdfiual e, toffl mi
, to thr ow, 154 .
fifl,’ mid, to be wet, 13 1 .
fagmih, to spr inkle, 4 1 .
fitmi , to kill, 1 54 .
3? much, to lo o sen, 1 0 7.
K muh, t o be fo o lish , 1 28.
51mgr i , to die, 1 1 9.
fi mpij , to clean,1 74 .
HTmnd, to study, 57.
gi mruch, to go ,19 .
W yaj , to sacr ifice, 99.
H ymn, to sto p, 3 1 , 58.
Wi g/am, to feed, 1 37.
1“yd, to go , 1 65 .
3 ya, to mix , 1 69.
t i r afij , to t inge, 62 .
( i: r ad, to trace, 1 0 .
( 31r am,to spo rt , 9 1 .
t ri m};to sh ine, 94 .
E r u, t o go , to kill , 84 .
‘
6 r a, t o sh o ut, 1 70 .
Kg r ad, t o,
cry, 1 76 .
FRr udh, to shut out, 203 .
“ r ush, to kill , 39.
anlash, to desire, 30 .
M ap, to paint, 1 09, 1 0 7.
m lzq), to break, 1 07.
Q hi,to cut , 1 56 .
a vach, to speak, 1 75 .
“ vaj , to go , 2 1 .
“
fig vad, to Speak, 66 .
“ mp, to sow, to weave, 1 00 .
“m y, to go , 1 05 .
W val, to l ive, 1 37.
“ vas, to des ire, 1 67, 1 05 .
“ vas, t o dwell , 65 .
“
Eli vah, to car ry, 1 0 1 , 93 .
fiTQ vi chh, to go , 26 .
Q q z
300
“ my, t o separate, 202 .
fagvid, to find,108, 1 07.
fi gvid, to know,1 72 .
fi flvish, to embr ace,20 2 .
at vi , seem y .
I N D EX O F V E R B s
avr i , to ch o o se, 1 42 ; Parasmaipada .
3 vr i , to ch er ish , 1 6 1 ; Atmanepada.
fl vg’ i t, t o be, 87.
fi vm’
dh,t o gr ow, 87.
i vfi , t o ch o o se, 1 56 .
3 ve, to weave, 1 0 2 .
first vevi‘
, to obtain, 1 77.
W‘i vyach, to surr o und
,1 05 .
“I? vyath, t o fear , to suffer pain, 90 .
to pier ce, 1 26 , 1 05 .
fl vr aj , to go , 2 2 .
e as’
ch, to cut,1 1 2
,1 05 .
W .s’ak, t o be abl e
,1 44 .
mg sad, to wither , 5 1 .
w5am, to cease, 1 30 .
m ain, sfisris faess'
dmsati , to sharpen, 63 .
“ sets,to command, 180 , 1 77.
“ fi sh, to distingu ish , 204 .
Efi .s‘i , t o l ie down, 1 85 .
wsir idh, to hurt , 87.
Eh so , to sharpen,1 24 .
“ swa t, to flow, 4 .
m achya t, to flow, 4 .
t o t ir e, 1 30 .
$3!s’
r i, t o go , to serve, 98.
‘a
'm, to hear ,, 1 45 .
W'
q avas, to br eathe, 1 76 .
fig 350i
, t o swel l,67.
a? shtyai , t o so und, 45 .
M shthiv, to Spit, 35, 29 .
W shvashk, to go , 71 .
fifl sah’
j , t o stick, 62 , 73 .
“
HQ sad, to per ish , 52 .
sidh, to
“ sun,to obtain, 1 5 1 .
Hi sah, to bear , 93 .
“ s ick, to spr inkle, 1 07.
fiN\sidh,
‘
t o go , andmmand, 7.
fili siv, to serve, 82 .
g su,t o dist il , 1 39 .
1 3a, to bear , to bring bfo rth , 1 84 .
“
q sri , t o go , 50 .
“ any; t o let o ff , 1 1 6 , 38, 48.
Ifi so , t o finish , 1 25 , 1 24 .
a? skand, to appr o ach , 60 .
“ shambh, to suppo rt,1 55 .
q ska, 1 55 .
$51“
shambh, to h o ld , 1 55 .
“ stambh, to suppo rt , 1 55 .
11 stu, to prai se, 1 89.
q stu, to pr aise, 1 70 .
“ stumbh, t o st0p, 1 55 .
stri , to cover , 1 4 1 .
ELstri , to co ver , 1 56 .
a s tyai , t o so und, 45 .
WT“hat, to stand, 56 .
“ spr is, to to uch , 1 1 4 .
E l? syand, to spr inkle, to dr o p , 88, 87.
mer it}, to go , t o dry, 92 .
5 33 svah’
j , t o embrace, 73, 62 .
“ svap ,to sl eep, 1 76 .
fi han,to kill , 1 68.
{Thd, to leave, 196 .
fi’ hi
,to go , to gr ow, 1 43 .
whims, to kill , 205 .
"
5 ha , t o sacr ifice, 192 .
fi hur chh, to be cr o oked, 20 .
g hrz’
,to take , 96 .
E? hr i , to be ashamed,194 .
5‘
ham, t o bend, 59 .
hve,t o call
,1 03 .
Related Documents
